The following downloads are uncontrolled copies used with permission of BRE... All rights reserved. Please visit

The following downloads are uncontrolled copies used with permission of BRE Global.
All rights reserved. Please visit www.breeam.org for more information
Tel: +44 (0)191 490 1547
Fax: +44 (0)191 477 5371
Email: northernsales@thorneandderrick.co.uk
Website: www.heattracing.co.uk
www.thorneanderrick.co.uk
Scheme Document
SD 5051
BREEAM Education 2008
Uncontrolled copy if printed.
Valid on day of printing only.
SD 5051
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Issue:4.1
25/05/2012
Pages 391
BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE Group) is an independent third party approvals body offering
certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international market.
And we aim to achieve this by:
•
Researching and writing standards
•
Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability
•
Developing world leading environmental assessment methods
•
Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators
•
Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and
events
•
Developing and delivering training
BRE Global’s product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world
renowned testing laboratories.
BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world leading brands including:
LPCB for approval of fire and security products and services
BREEAM the world’s leading environmental assessment method for buildings, sets the standard for
best practice in sustainable design and has become the de-facto measure of a building’s
environmental performance.
BRE Global is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity
which owns the BRE Group.
BRE Global Limited
Bucknalls Lane
Watford
Hertfordshire
WD25 9XX
T +44 (0)1923 664100
F +44 (0)1923 664910
E enquiries@breglobal.com
www.breglobal.com
www.greenbooklive.com
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
2
Contents
BREEAM Education 2008
Contents
Terms and conditions for accessing the BREEAM Scheme Documents......................................... 5
1.0 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 8
1.1 What is BREEAM?.................................................................................................................................... 8
1.2 Governance and Quality Standards ........................................................................................................... 9
1.3 BREEAM Credibility............................................................................................................................... 11
1.4 The BREEAM Scheme Document ............................................................................................................ 12
2.0 Scope .......................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1 Stages of assessment ............................................................................................................................... 18
2.2 Type of projects that can be assessed using BREEAM.............................................................................. 19
2.3 Type of buildings that can be assessed using this BREEAM scheme ......................................................... 23
3.0 Scoring and Rating ..................................................................................................................... 27
3.1 Rating benchmarks ................................................................................................................................. 28
3.2 Environmental section weightings ........................................................................................................... 28
3.3 Minimum standards ................................................................................................................................ 29
3.4 BREEAM credits for innovation .............................................................................................................. 31
3.5 Eligibility Criteria for Innovation Credits................................................................................................ 34
3.6 How to calculate a building’s rating ....................................................................................................... 35
3.7 BREEAM Outstanding Rating ................................................................................................................. 37
4.0 Management ............................................................................................................................... 38
5.0 Health and Wellbeing ................................................................................................................. 74
6.0 Energy ....................................................................................................................................... 116
7.0 Transport .................................................................................................................................. 170
8.0 Water ......................................................................................................................................... 194
9.0 Materials.................................................................................................................................... 211
10.0 Waste ...................................................................................................................................... 243
11.0 Land Use and Ecology ........................................................................................................... 259
12.0 Pollution .................................................................................................................................. 285
13.0 Innovation ............................................................................................................................... 316
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Contents
3
14.0 Technical Checklists .............................................................................................................. 321
14.1 Technical Checklist A1: Man 2 Considerate Constructors..................................................................... 321
14.2 Technical Checklist A2: Man 2 Considerate Constructors..................................................................... 322
14.3 Technical Checklist A3: Man 3 Construction Site Impacts .................................................................... 332
14.4 Technical Checklist A4: LE3 Land of Low Ecological Value ................................................................. 339
14.5 Technical Checklist A5: Mat 5 Responsible Sourcing of Materials ........................................................ 340
14.6 Technical Checklist A6: Guidance for relating ecologist’s report to BREEAM ...................................... 347
15.0 Schedule of Changes to the Scheme Document ................................................................... 363
16.0 Additional Sources of Information ......................................................................................... 376
17.0 References .............................................................................................................................. 385
List of Tables
Table 1 Summary of BREEAM categories and main issues ................................................................ 13
Table 2 BREEAM 2008 rating benchmarks ......................................................................................... 28
Table 3 BREEAM 2008 environmental weightings .............................................................................. 28
Table 4 Minimum BREEAM standards ................................................................................................ 29
Table 5 BREEAM issues with exemplary level criteria. ........................................................................ 31
Table 6 Example BREEAM score and rating calculation ..................................................................... 36
Table 7 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights .......................................... 77
Table 8 VOC criteria by product type .................................................................................................. 94
Table 9 CO2 index benchmarks and BREEAM credits....................................................................... 116
Table 10 Size of plant for which separate metering would be required .............................................. 124
Table 11 Best Practice Energy Practices in Laboratories .................................................................. 161
Table 12 Best Practice Specific Fan Power....................................................................................... 162
Table 13 AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits ................................................................................. 170
Table 14 Default hours of operation for a typical day......................................................................... 174
Table 15 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria ................................................................... 230
Table 16 EMS Criteria ...................................................................................................................... 232
Table 17 Green Guide rating points/element ..................................................................................... 237
Table 18 EMS criteria for insulation products .................................................................................... 238
Table 19 Construction waste groups ................................................................................................. 247
Table 20 General Landscape Types ................................................................................................. 270
Table 21 Vegetation Plot Types ........................................................................................................ 270
Table 22 Number of plant species by plot for different landscape types ............................................. 271
Table 23 Refrigerant GWP ............................................................................................................... 287
Table 24 Definition of flood zones by country .................................................................................... 305
Table 25 BREEAM issues with exemplary level criteria ..................................................................... 316
Table 26 Standard road transport fuel conversion factors.................................................................. 337
Table 27 Standard road transport fuel conversion factors.................................................................. 337
Table 28 Standard Road Transport Fuel Conversion Factors ........................................................... 338
Table 29 Freight road mileage conversion factors ............................................................................. 338
Table 30 Checklist of criteria for Tiers 1-4 ......................................................................................... 340
Table 31 Diagram of how the required EMS relates to the process and extraction phases................. 344
Table 32 Features of a top tier (1) comparable certification scheme: Standard setting....................... 345
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
4
BREEAM Education 2008
Changes to this BREEAM Scheme Document
A list of changes between this issue of the Scheme Document and previous issues is published in
section 15 of this document.
Issue
number
1.0
Date of issue
24/6/2008
2.0
14/08/2008
3.0
31/07/2009
4.0
01/05/2010
4.1
25/05/2012
Note: The scope of BREEAM Education 2008 was expanded in July 2009 to allow for the assessment of Higher Education
Building types. This resulted in the addition of new BREEAM issues and requirements (from issue 3.0 of this scheme onwards)
specific to this type of building/development. As a result of this additional development to this BREEAM scheme, some of the
assessment issues and criteria for higher education building types are different to the criteria set for schools, sixth form and
further education colleges. Several of these differences are due to the specific function and operational requirement/use of a
higher education building, whilst other difference are purely a result of the development and addition of BREEAM for higher
education building types occurring post-BREEAM 2008 update and release. The BREEAM 2008 assessment criteria for schools,
sixth form and further education colleges have not been changed as a result of the development and inclusion of BREEAM for
higher education buildings in to the BREEAM Education scheme. This is to ensure that the 2008 version of BREEAM Education
for these types of education establishments remains consistent for all projects registered and certified under BREEAM 2008.
.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Terms and Conditions for accessing BREEAM Manuals
5
Terms and conditions for accessing the BREEAM
Scheme Documents
By accessing or using this website (www.breeam.org), you agree to these terms and conditions of use.
Data Protection Act 1998
The Data Protection Act defines the legal responsibilities of data users such as ourselves. The Act
governs the collection, storage, use and transfer of personal data, for example, name, address, email,
age, etc.
Accuracy, Use and Feedback
We are committed to respecting the privacy of users entering this site and we recognise the importance
of the responsible use of information collected on this site. We will do our best to maintain the accuracy
of the personal information you supply to us. You have the right to access and correct your personal
information at any time and if you wish to do so please contact us at breeam@bre.co.uk. We will not
sell or rent your personally identifiable information to anyone. On our website we may provide space for
your comments and/or provide a short survey for you to complete. This is used only to help us refine
the content and relevance of our website. It is not re-used or re-applied for any other purpose.
Cookies
We may track your visit to our site by giving you a cookie when you enter. Cookies are pieces of
information sent to your browser on a web server and stored on your computer’s hard drive for record
keeping purposes. We use Cookies to make visiting our site easier. Cookies allow us to save
passwords for you so that you will not have to re-enter them the next time you visit. Cookies cannot be
used to obtain other information from your hard disk. The Cookie is used to collect statistical information
and
is
not
used
to
identify
individuals.
Most browsers are initially set up to accept Cookies. If you prefer you can reset your browser either to
notify
you
when
you
have
received
a
Cookie
or
to
refuse
to
accept
Cookies.
It is important to note that if you choose not to accept Cookies, or you set your browser not to accept
Cookies, you may not be able to use certain features on our site.
Aggregate Data
In general, our service automatically gathers certain usage information about the numbers and
frequency of visitors to our website. We only use such data as aggregate. This collected data helps us
to determine how much our customers use parts of the site, so we can improve our site for your use.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
6
Terms and Conditions for accessing BREEAM Manuals
BREEAM Education 2008
IP Address
We may collect and track traffic by IP address. An IP address is a number assigned to your computer
when you use your browser on internet. We log this information, but this information is never linked to
any personally identifying information. It is used to audit the number of visitors coming to our website.
Privacy Policy Changes
If we decide to change our Privacy Policy, we will post those changes here so that you will always know
what information we gather, how we might use that information and whether we will disclose it to
anyone.
Disclaimer
BRE does not accept any responsibility for any loss or damage including, without limitation, indirect or
consequential loss or damage, or any loss or damages whatsoever arising from use or loss of use of,
data or profits arising out of or in connection with the use of BRE websites. BRE does not guarantee
that
access
to
and
use
of
BRE
websites
will
be
uninterrupted
or
error-free.
Mention of third party products, services, companies and websites on any BRE website is for
informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. BRE’s
websites hold a wide range of links to related websites from a variety of related organisations,
companies and services. While every effort is made to check the content and accuracy of the websites
we link to, BRE takes no responsibility for information contained on websites maintained by other
organisations or for action taken as a result of information contained on websites maintained by other
organisations.
Copyright
The information and images contained on our websites are the property of BRE unless explicitly stated
to the contrary. They are protected by copyright laws. Material may be downloaded free of charge or
printed without requiring specific permission but remains the intellectual property, technical know how
and copyrighted material of BRE. Such material is not to be used in a derogatory manner, in a
misleading context or for commercial purposes. If the material is being issued to others, the source
including the web address and copyright status must be acknowledged. We may require you to register
your details before downloading certain information or documents.
Trade Marks
BRE, BREEAM, EcoHomes, Smartwaste, SmartLIFE, Envest, the Green Guide, and Insight are all
registered trade marks owned by BRE and may not be used without BRE’s written permission.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Terms and Conditions for accessing BREEAM Manuals
7
Governing Law
These terms and conditions shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of
England and Wales. Any dispute arising under these terms and conditions shall be subject to the
exclusive
jurisdiction
of
the
courts
of
England
and
Wales.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
8
Introduction
BREEAM Education 2008
1.0 Introduction
1.1 What is BREEAM?
BREEAM (Building Research Establishment’s Environmental Assessment Method) is the world’s
leading and most widely used environmental assessment method for buildings, with over 115,000
buildings certified and nearly 700,000 registered. It sets the standard for best practice in sustainable
design and has become the de facto measure used to describe a building’s environmental
performance. Credits are awarded in ten categories according to performance. These credits are then
added together to produce a single overall score on a scale of Pass, Good, Very Good, Excellent and
Outstanding. The operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Sustainability Board,
representing a wide cross-section of construction industry stakeholders.
Aims of BREEAM:
•
To mitigate the impacts of buildings on the environment
•
To enable buildings to be recognised according to their environmental benefits
•
To provide a credible, environmental label for buildings
•
To stimulate demand for sustainable buildings
Objectives of BREEAM:
•
To provide market recognition to low environmental impact buildings
•
To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in buildings
•
To set criteria and standards surpassing those required by regulations and challenge the
market to provide innovative solutions that minimise the environmental impact of buildings
•
To raise the awareness of owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits of
buildings with a reduced impact on the environment
•
To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate environmental objectives
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Introduction
9
1.2 Governance and Quality Standards
The BRE Global “Sustainability Board” oversees BRE Global’s guides, publications, standards and
certification schemes in the area of sustainability and the environment.
Current standards and schemes include BREEAM, Environmental Profiles, Responsible Sourcing and
ISO 14001. One of the main responsibilities of this Board is to ensure that standards, scheme
documents and the way BRE Global operates meet the needs of stakeholders. The Board meets
three times a year to review these issues.
The Sustainability Board reports to the BRE Global Governing Body, which has an independent
overview of all BRE Global's schemes and activities. Specific responsibilities of the Sustainability
Board and other Boards include:
•
advising on the need for new standards, certification schemes and publications, including
updates to existing ones
•
advising BRE Global on relevant legislation and technical matters
•
promoting certification
•
advising on issues that may affect the reputation and integrity of BRE Global
•
approving certification schemes, standards, publications or approvals and reviewing outputs
from Expert Groups and Working Groups
•
ensuring a balanced participation with no single interest predominating
•
providing comments and guidance, where appropriate, on methods of assessment and testing,
to review the progress of assessments and advise on content of certificates, prior to
publication; and
•
reviewing and advising on complaints and appeals as requested.
The Board represents a wide cross section of stakeholders from the construction industry including
designers, developers, end users, financiers, insurers and regulators. The first independent chairman
elected by the members is Bill Gething. Bill is one of the most respected figures in sustainable
architecture and is the RIBA President's Sustainability Advisor, Chair of the Institute's Sustainable
Futures Committee and a partner of Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
10
Introduction
BREEAM Education 2008
ISO 9001
BRE Global has ISO 9001 certification for its BREEAM Buildings schemes and also for the
assessment and certification of construction materials under the BREEAM LCA (Life Cycle Analysis)
environmental profiles. The certification for the BREEAM schemes covers the operations relating to
assessor training, licensing, quality management, and record keeping.
UKAS Accreditation
Assessors qualified to deliver the BREEAM buildings schemes are also covered under a UKAS
accredited competent persons scheme. In addition, the operations relating to the certification of the
BREEAM buildings versions and the environmental profiles are also covered under UKAS accredited
product certification schemes.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Introduction
11
1.3 BREEAM Credibility
Technical Credibility
BREEAM is tried and tested, both in terms of its robust technical standards and its commercial
delivery, and expert advice (based on scientific evidence) continues to inform almost every issue in
BREEAM.
In the UK there are over 115,000 buildings certified and over 700,000 homes and buildings currently
registered for assessment. BREEAM can be used to assess any building type anywhere in the world.
Robust Technical Standards
BREEAM has always used objective criteria to recognise good environmental performance:
•
Issues for assessment are agreed to be significant, and offer worthwhile reductions in
environmental impact
•
Issues must be assessable at the relevant stage in the building’s life
•
Performance levels are based on scientific evidence wherever possible
•
Performance levels must exceed demands of law and regulations and encourage innovation
•
Improvements encouraged by BREEAM are achievable and cost effective
Where specific targets cannot be set using hard science or research, sensible practical measures are
recommended to minimise environmental impact or enhance the environment of the building and its
users.
Commercial Credibility
Assessments are undertaken by organisations and individuals trained and licensed by BRE Global
(Assessors). This ensures:
•
Competition in the market for assessment services
•
Engagement with the whole of the industry
•
Assessors work to the same quality standards (monitored by BRE Global)
BRE Global has gained UKAS (United Kingdom Accreditation Service) accreditation for all its
BREEAM schemes. This means that its management of BREEAM is monitored and overseen by
UKAS.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
12
Introduction
BREEAM Education 2008
1.4 The BREEAM Scheme Document
The following BREEAM Scheme Documents i.e. Assessor manuals are available for free download
from the BREEAM website:
•
BREEAM Courts
•
BREEAM Education
•
BREEAM Industrial
•
BREEAM Healthcare
•
BREEAM Offices
•
BREEAM Retail
•
BREEAM Prisons
•
BREEAM Multi-residential
•
BREEAM Data Centres
What is in the BREEAM Scheme Documents?
•
A definition of the scope of the BREEAM scheme
•
Full information on the technical standards and criteria of the scheme (summarised below)
•
Rating & scoring information
•
Technical checklists
Using the BREEAM Scheme Documents
The BREEAM Scheme Documents are technical guidance documents which have been created to
aid accredited and licensed BREEAM Assessors in carrying out BREEAM assessments. Please note
that a scheme document and the information detailed therein have been designed for, and to be used
by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors.
This document must be used by non assessors for reference only (in accordance with the Terms and
Conditions of use).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Introduction
13
Understanding the BREEAM Scheme Documents
This
BREEAM
scheme
covers
ten
categories
of
sustainability
•
Management
•
Materials
•
Health & Wellbeing
•
Waste
•
Energy
•
Land Use and Ecology
•
Transport
•
Pollution
•
Water
•
Innovation
including:
Each category is detailed in this Scheme Document and consists of a number of issues (summarised
below). Each issue seeks to mitigate the impact of a new or refurbished building on the environment
by defining a performance target and assessment criteria that must be met to confirm the target has
been achieved. Where a performance target has been achieved the number of available BREEAM
credits can be awarded.
Table 1 Summary of BREEAM categories and main issues
Management
Waste
•
•
•
Commissioning
Construction site impacts
Security
Health and Wellbeing
•
•
•
•
•
Daylight
Occupant thermal comfort
Acoustics
Indoor air and water quality
Lighting
Energy
•
•
•
•
Public transport network connectivity
Pedestrian and Cyclist facilities
Access to amenities
Travel plans and information
Water
•
•
•
Construction waste
Recycled aggregates
Recycling facilities
Pollution
•
•
•
•
•
Refrigerant use and leakage
Flood risk
NOx emissions
Watercourse pollution
External light and noise pollution
Land Use and Ecology
CO2 emissions
Low or zero carbon technologies
Energy sub metering
Energy efficient building systems
Transport
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Site selection
Protection of ecological features
Mitigation/enhancement of ecological value
Materials
•
•
•
•
Embodied life cycle impact of materials
Materials re-use
Responsible sourcing
Robustness
Innovation
Water consumption
Leak detection
Water re-use and recycling
•
•
•
Exemplary performance levels
Use of BREEAM Accredited Professionals
New technologies and building processes
The performance targets go beyond the minimum standard needed to satisfy Building Regulation or
other legislation. The targets represent good or best practice in the field of sustainable design and
procurement.
The majority of BREEAM issues are tradable, meaning that a design team/client can pick and choose
which to comply with in order to build their BREEAM performance score. Several BREEAM issues do
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
14
Introduction
BREEAM Education 2008
have minimum standards meaning that, to achieve a particular BREEAM rating, a defined number of
credits for that issue must be achieved (BREEAM’s minimum standards are outlined in section 3.0
Scoring and Rating).
Each BREEAM issue is structured as follows:
•
Issue Information: Issue ID, issue title, number of credits available for meeting the performance
target and whether the issue forms part of BREEAM’s minimum standards.
•
Aim: Broadly outlines the objective of the issue i.e. the impact it intends to mitigate
•
Assessment Criteria: outlines the building performance target/benchmark and its criteria. Some
issue have Exemplary Level Criteria. Where a building demonstrates that it meets Exemplary
Level Criteria an Innovation Credit can be awarded (refer to section 13 Innovation for more detail)
•
Schedule of Evidence Required: outlines typical examples of the type of information that must
be collected from the design team/client by the BREEAM assessor so they can assess if the
building complies with the issue criteria.
•
Additional Information: details relevant definitions of BREEAM terminology and contains
information to support the assessment and compliance of the building.
The following pages contain an example BREEAM issue.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Introduction
15
Example of a BREEAM Issue
Please note: this BREEAM issue has been edited for the purpose of demonstration.
Information box appears at
the top of each BREEAM
issue. Each issue has a
unique ID and title.
The
Aim
describes
the
objective of the
issue and the
impact that the
Assessment
Criteria seeks to
mitigate.
Some BREEAM issues
have Exemplary Level
Criteria. If the assessed
building complies with
the Exemplary Level
Criteria an additional
BREEAM credit can be
awarded for Innovation.
See
section
13
Innovation for further
detail.
This box indicates the total number of
BREEAM credits available. These
credits can be awarded if the
assessed building complies with the
assessment criteria.
This box states whether or not minimum
standards apply to the BREEAM issue.
Section 3.3 of the guidance details the
specific minimum standards for each relevant
BREEAM issue. For example, one of the two
available credits for the Man 2 issue must be
achieved to obtain an Excellent BREEAM
rating.
The Assessment Criteria
details the requirements
that the assessed building
must
demonstrate
compliance with for the
available BREEAM credits
to be awarded.
Occasionally publications
and other standards will be
referred to within the
Assessment
Criteria
followed by a reference
number. Full references to
these publications are
provided in section 17 of
this document.
Each
BREEAM
issue
contains a Compliance
Notes table. This table
provides
additional
guidance on the application
and interpretation of the
Assessment Criteria.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
16
Introduction
The Schedule of Evidence Required
table describes the types of
information that must be provided to
the BREEAM assessor as evidence
of
the
assessed
building’s
compliance with the Assessment
Criteria.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
The Schedule of Evidence table is split in to two
sections. The first details the type(s) of evidence
required at the interim design stage of assessment.
The second describes the type(s) of evidence
required at the final post construction stage of
assessment. The numbers in the table correspond
to the numbered assessment criteria in the above
sections.
The Additional Information section contains
definitions of terms used in the
Assessment Criteria and Compliance
Notes section. This section will also contain
further information relevant to the issue
e.g. assessment guidance and relevant
websites
BREEAM Education 2008
Scope
17
2.0 Scope
This section of the guidance outlines the scope of this non-domestic BREEAM scheme and the type of
buildings that it can be applied to. The following information is provided in this section:
•
The BREEAM assessment and certification stages
•
Type of building projects that can be assessed using BREEAM
•
Type of buildings that can be assessed using this BREEAM scheme
Non-domestic BREEAM schemes can be used to assess the environmental impacts of a building in
accordance with this scope document in England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland. Assessments
using UK BREEAM schemes can also be carried out in the Republic of Ireland, but it must be
recognised that BREEAM is tailored to the UK’s construction sector. No concessions are made in the
schemes where the Republic of Ireland building standards and design and procurement practices differ
from those in the UK.
Where the building requiring assessment does not fall within the scope of this non-domestic BREEAM
scheme or one of the other BREEAM schemes (domestic or non-domestic) or Code for Sustainable
Homes, it can be assessed using the BREEAM Bespoke scheme.
Where the building requiring assessment is outside of the UK it can be assessed using the BREEAM
International scheme; this includes buildings in the Republic of Ireland where it is not appropriate to use
a UK scheme. BREEAM International can be used to assess a single development or BRE Global can
assist in creating a BREEAM scheme for a country or region.
Further information on the BREEAM Bespoke and BREEAM International schemes is available at
www.breeam.org or via the BREEAM helpdesk breeam@bre.co.uk
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
18
Scope
BREEAM Education 2008
2.1 Stages of assessment
This BREEAM scheme can be used to assess the environmental impacts arising as a result of an
individual building development (including external site areas) at the following stages:
1. Design Stage (DS) - leading to an Interim BREEAM Certificate
2. Post-Construction Stage (PCS) – leading to a Final BREEAM Certificate
Design Stage
The DS assessment and subsequent interim BREEAM Certification represents the performance of the
building at the design stage of assessment, typically prior to the beginning of operations on site.
Certification at this stage does not, therefore, represent the building’s final ‘as built’ BREEAM
performance.
To complete an assessment at this stage the design must be advanced to the point where the relevant
information is available to enable the BREEAM assessor to demonstrate, in a robust manner, the
building’s performance against the reporting and evidential criteria of the technical guidance. The
interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified at the scheme design or detailed
design stages.
Post-Construction Stage
The PCS assessment and subsequent BREEAM Certification represents the final ‘as built’ performance
and BREEAM Rating. A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical completion of
the building works.
There are two approaches to assessment at the post-construction stage:
1. A post-construction review of an interim design-stage assessment
2. A post-construction assessment
A post-construction review serves to confirm the interim BREEAM rating achieved at the design stage
in accordance with the reporting and evidential criteria of the technical guidance. Where a formal
interim DS assessment has not been carried out and a BREEAM assessment and rating is required, a
full PCS assessment can be conducted.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scope
19
2.2 Type of projects that can be assessed using BREEAM
A BREEAM assessment can be carried out at the above stages for the following types of building
project:
•
New Construction
•
Major refurbishment to existing buildings
•
New construction to an existing building i.e. an extension of existing building
•
A combination of new construction and major refurbishment to an existing building
•
New construction or major refurbishment, which forms part of a larger mixed use building
•
Existing building fit-out
New construction
Construction that results in a new stand alone structure, or extension to an existing structure, which will
come into operation/use for the first time upon completion of the works.
Major refurbishments to existing buildings
Construction that results in the fundamental remodelling or adaptation of existing elements of the
building envelope, structure and renewal of key building services. And where, on completion of the
works, such remodelling / renewal will materially impact on the performance of the building.
The term elements include:
a. Structural/building envelope elements including walls (including glazing), roofs (including
rooflights) and floors.
b. Building services elements including lighting (artificial and daylighting), heating, mechanical
ventilation/cooling plant and ductwork, water/drainage systems.
For the purposes of this definition works to both A and B above must be taking place for the project to
be classed as a major refurbishment. Where only individual elements of the structural/building
envelope element (e.g. windows or doors), or individual services elements (e.g. a boiler, heating
system or lighting installation) are being replaced, remodelled or upgraded, then, the project should not
be classed a major refurbishment (see minor refurbishment guidance below).
It should be noted that all major refurbishment projects will reuse the majority of the buildings existing
supporting sub and superstructure and it is likely that in many cases the building façade will be retained,
albeit with some remediation or renovation.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
20
Scope
BREEAM Education 2008
Minor refurbishment, remodelling or redecoration
This BREEAM Scheme and the requirements it sets are predominantly designed to assess the
environmental impacts of buildings arising as a result of new and major refurbishment construction
works (as defined above). The requirements are therefore tailored according to the opportunities
available to influence a buildings environmental performance when major construction work is
undertaken. Unless otherwise stated, this scheme is not intended for the assessment of existing
buildings undergoing minor remodelling or redecoration works. Existing building fit out works can be
assessed within a number of sector schemes including Offices, Retail, Industrial, Education, Healthcare
and Bespoke schemes (see Building fit-out below).
If there is uncertainty over the appropriateness of applying BREEAM to existing building works that do
not meet BREEAM’s definition of major refurbishment, advice can be sought from and the decision
informed by a BREEAM Accredited Professional or BREEAM Assessor.
New build extensions to existing buildings
BREEAM can be used to assess new build extensions to existing buildings and, where the existing
building is undergoing major refurbishment, the new build extension and existing building.
When assessing only a new-build extension to an existing building, in some BREEAM issues it is
necessary to consider services/facilities within the existing building, where such services/facilities will
be integral to the new extension or used by the occupants of the new extension. Assessment guidance
is provided in the Compliance Notes table within the specific BREEAM issue for such instances, where
relevant.
Building Fit-out
BREEAM can be used to assess a fit out of an existing building. An assessment can be carried out on
the first fit-out of the shell of a new building/unit or subsequent re-fit of an existing building/unit. A
building fit-out can be certified at the interim stage, based on the fit-out design and specification and/or
post fit-out based on an assessment of the actual finished, fitted-out unit/building.
The methodology for a fit-out assessment includes issues core to the BREEAM assessment and rating
of a building. This includes the assessment of building-related impacts that may not be affected by the
scope of the fit-out works. This approach serves to highlight the intrinsic environmental performance of
the existing building/unit and recognise the opportunity that a fit-out presents to improve the
environmental performance of an existing building.
In the technical guidance the assessment criteria for a building fit-out, for the most part, is the same as
that for a new build/major refurbishment assessment. In some BREEAM issues there is building ‘fit out
only assessment’ criteria, including; Construction Site Impacts, Materials Specification, Responsible
Sourcing and Construction Site Waste Management; and some issues contain fit out only compliance
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scope
21
notes and guidance. Furthermore, some BREEAM issues are not applicable to fit-out only
assessments, including; Land Use and Ecology, re-use of facades and structure, recycled aggregates
and Flood Risk.
Fit Out related BREEAM issues – The following lists the typical BREEAM issues which are either
specific to, or contain criteria that rely on or influenced by a fit out of a building. Please note that there
may be other issues that are relevant in certain circumstance.
Man 1 – Commissioning
Ene 2 – Sub-metering of substantial energy
Man 4 – Building User Guide
uses
Hea 1 - Daylighting
Ene 3 – Sub-metering of high energy load and
Hea 2 – View Out
tenancy areas
Hea 3 – Glare Control
Ene 4 – External Lighting
Hea 4 – High Frequency Lighting
Tra 8 – Deliveries and Manoeuvring
Hea 5 – Internal and External Lighting Levels
Wat 1 – Water Consumption
Hea 6 – Lighting Zones & Controls
Wat 4 – Sanitary Supply Shut Off
Hea 9 – Volatile Organic Compounds
Wat 5 – Water Recycling
Hea 10 – Thermal Comfort
Mat 6 - Insulation
Hea 11 – Thermal Zoning
Wst 4 – Compactor Baler
Hea 12 – Microbial Contamination
Pol 1 – Refrigerant GWP – Building Services
Hea 13 – Acoustic Performance
Pol 2 – Preventing Refrigerant Leaks
Hea 14 – Office Space (Industrial & Retail
Pol 3 – Refrigerant GWP – Cold Storage
schemes)
Pol 4 – NOx emissions from heating source
Ene 1 – Reduction of CO2 emissions
Pol 7 – Reduction of night time light pollution
Pol 8 – Noise attenuation
Similar buildings (or units) on the same site
It is possible to assess a number of separate but similar buildings, or individual units within a larger
building development, within one BREEAM assessor’s report. This is subject to the following conditions:
1. The buildings/units must all be on the same site
2. The buildings/units must be of the same building type e.g. an office, with the same building
functions/spaces and fitted out to a similar specification and therefore assessed using the same
BREEAM issues
3. Each BREEAM issue must be assessed, and its credits awarded, based on the worst
performing building/unit
4. The assessment and assessors report produces a single BREEAM rating covering all
buildings/units assessed
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
22
Scope
BREEAM Education 2008
For the above scenario, a single BREEAM certificate will be issued listing all the buildings/units covered
by the single BREEAM assessor’s report.
Where required, a duplicate of the certificate can be produced for the purposes of display in each
individual building/unit. Duplicates of certificates are not chargeable provided they are requested by the
BREEAM assessor along with the initial certification request to BRE Global.
Alternatively, a certificate can be produced specific to each individual building/unit. In such cases an
additional charge will be made for each individual certificate requested.
In either case the certification criteria must be confirmed by the assessor on the Certificate Request
Form submitted with their formal assessment report to BRE Global.
If one or more building/unit performs markedly better than another on the same site and the client
wishes to recognise this, a separate BREEAM assessment and therefore certificate is required.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scope
23
2.3 Type of buildings that can be assessed using this BREEAM
scheme
BREEAM Education can be used to assess the following types of education buildings:
1. Pre-School, including;
•
Nursery schools1
•
Children’s centres2
2. Schools, including;
•
Primary schools
•
Secondary schools (including those containing sixth form colleges)
•
All age-range schools (including education/teaching buildings at boarding schools)
•
Academies
•
Non-acute Special Educational Needs (SEN) schools
3. Sixth Form Colleges
4. Further and Higher Education/Vocational Colleges and Institutions, including;
•
Teaching facility
•
Learning Resource Centre
•
Laboratory / Workshop
•
Student Union
•
Or a mixture of the above types.
1
Nursery school/education means full-time or part-time education suitable for children who have not attained compulsory school
age (whether provided at schools or elsewhere), i.e. facilities/buildings for the teaching of children who are between the ages of
two or three to five years old. If the building’s sole purpose is to provide full/part day care facilities for children 2yrs old or younger
i.e. a crèche, its assessment using the BREEAM Education scheme is unlikely to be appropriate.
2
Children’s centres are multi-agency service hubs where young children and their families can receive early education, full day
childcare, parental support and child and family health services, such as access to health visitors and health screening. Children’s
centres will often be allied to a local primary school, on or adjacent to the school site.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
24
Scope
BREEAM Education 2008
The building functions/areas listed below are covered by the scope of BREEAM Education where they
form a part of one of the above building types:
General educational specific areas
•
Classrooms and seminar rooms
•
Music rooms
•
Open plan teaching areas
•
Audio visual
•
Lecture theatres
•
SEN Rooms
•
Libraries
•
Assembly Halls
•
Teaching laboratories
•
Student break out areas
•
Private study areas/rooms
•
I.T. suites
•
Play rooms
•
Home economics/teaching kitchens
•
Workshops
•
Drama studios
•
‘Independent living’ workshops/classrooms,
Further and Higher Education specific areas
•
General teaching and research laboratories
e.g.
(part of a H.E or F.E institution), including;
for
physical disabilities, support for learning
o
Microbiological / clinical labs
difficulties
o
In vivo labs
•
Recreational
o
Cleanrooms
•
Retail unit, e.g. bookshop, convenience
•
Large-scale
visual
arts
store
studios,
e.g.
sculpture/photography/film/drama
Multi-media recording studios and editing
studios
Trade-based
workshops,
e.g.
salons,
bricklaying, carpentry etc.
•
support
Wet and dry labs
Desk-based visual arts studios
•
provision,
o
•
•
childcare
Engineering/design based teaching and
research workshops/studios
Office/staff areas
•
Cellular or open plan offices
•
Meeting rooms
•
Staff rooms
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scope
25
Other associated functions/areas
•
Interview/counselling/medical rooms
swimming pool etc.
•
Crèche areas
•
Conference rooms
•
Restrooms, WCs and changing facilities
•
Reception and waiting areas
•
Storage and waste management areas
•
Food preparation and servery
•
I.T. server room / data centre
•
Dining areas and common rooms
•
Ancillary areas e.g. plant room, circulation
•
Sports
Facilities,
e.g.
gymnasium,
space
The above list is not exhaustive, but serves to indicate the type of spaces covered by the scope of this
BREEAM scheme. Where a proposed building contains a small additional function/area that is not listed
above, the building can still be assessed using this scheme. If the assessor has reason to believe that
this scheme is not appropriate given the small additional function/area type, BRE Global can be
contacted for advice.
Unless otherwise indicated, BREEAM Education cannot be used to assess any of the above
functions/areas as standalone developments which are not part of an educational establishment. Such
buildings can be assessed using one of the other standard BREEAM schemes or, where appropriate,
the BREEAM Bespoke scheme.
All age range schools and academies
All age range schools and academies should normally be assessed using the guidance/criteria
applicable to secondary schools. In some cases, for these types of education establishments, it may be
more appropriate to use the assessment criteria for further education colleges or primary schools. For
example, where an all age range school or academy will contain functional/operational areas more akin
to those outlined above for further and higher education buildings or where the needs of the
accommodation and occupiers are similar to those of primary or early years pupils. Based on the
information received about the proposed building, the Assessor should determine the most appropriate
BREEAM Education guidance/criteria to assess the building against. Where in doubt the Assessor
should contact BRE Global for guidance
Acute SEN schools
Acute Special Educational Needs (SEN) refers to children with severe disabilities/learning difficulties
that prevent them from interpreting their surroundings without feeling anxious or distressed. These
children can become easily distracted and/or over-stimulated. This group of pupils mainly include
children with a behavioural, emotional or social development disability (Behaviour, Emotional and
Social Difficulty (BEDS)) and children with communication and interaction disability (Autistic Spectrum
Disorder (ASD)).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
26
Scoring and Weighting
BREEAM Education 2008
Assessors carrying out assessments on schools for pupils with such needs will need to carefully
consider all the BREEAM issues that might be affected by the need to provide special facilities for such
building users, e.g. View Out, Cyclist Facilities, etc. and decide whether the BREEAM Bespoke scheme
would be more appropriate for such assessments.
For more information on SEN please refer to Building Bulletin 102 Designing for Pupils with Special
Educational Needs and Disabilities, published by the Department for Children Schools and Families
(available from www.teachernet.gov.uk)
Boarding schools, Pupils’ residential accommodation and student halls of residence
Residential accommodation cannot be assessed using BREEAM Education. The BREEAM Multiresidential scheme can be used to BREEAM assess and certify these building types.
Building does not fit the scope of BREEAM Education
Building types not covered by the scope of BREEAM Education and/or other standard BREEAM
scheme can be assessed using the BREEAM Bespoke scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scoring and Rating
27
3.0 Scoring and Rating
This section of the BREEAM Scheme Document explains how an assessed building’s certified
BREEAM rating is calculated.
There are a number of elements that determine the BREEAM rating; these are as follows:
•
BREEAM rating benchmarks
•
BREEAM environmental weightings
•
Minimum BREEAM standards
•
BREEAM credits for Innovation
Each of these elements is described in the sections on the following pages; this is followed by guidance
and an example describing how a BREEAM rating is calculated.
In addition, there is a section describing the conditions that must be met in order to award an assessed
building a ‘BREEAM Outstanding’ rating, the highest achievable BREEAM rating.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
28
Scoring and Rating
BREEAM Education 2008
3.1 Rating benchmarks
The rating benchmarks for the 2008 version of BREEAM are outlined in table 2 below for new buildings,
major refurbishments and, where applicable to the BREEAM scheme (refer to scope document), fit-out
projects:
Table 2 BREEAM 2008 rating benchmarks
BREEAM Rating
% score
UNCLASSIFIED
<30
PASS
≥30
GOOD
≥45
V GOOD
≥55
EXCELLENT
≥70
OUTSTANDING*
≥85
* Please note: there are additional criteria for achieving a BREEAM Outstanding rating. Please refer to
the guidance below.
3.2 Environmental section weightings
Table 3 below outlines the environmental weightings for the nine BREEAM sections for the type of
building projects that BREEAM Buildings can be used to assess (refer to scope of the scheme
document):
Table 3 BREEAM 2008 environmental weightings
Weighting (%)
Management
12
Building fit-out only
(where applicable to
scheme)
13
Health & Wellbeing
15
17
Energy
19
21
Transport
8
9
Water
6
7
Materials
12.5
14
Waste
7.5
8
Land Use & Ecology
10
N/A
Pollution
10
11
Innovation
10
10
BREEAM Section
New builds, extensions &
major refurbishments
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scoring and Rating
29
3.3 Minimum standards
To achieve a BREEAM rating, the minimum percentage score must be achieved (as outlined in table 2
above) and the minimum standards (i.e. number of credits achieved) applicable to that rating level
(below) complied with.
Table 4 Minimum BREEAM standards
PASS
GOOD
VERY GOOD
EXCELLENT
OUTSTANDING
BREEAM Rating /
Minimum number of
credits
Man 1 - Commissioning
1
1
1
1
2
Man 2 - Considerate Constructors
-
-
-
1
2
Man 4 - Building user guide
-
-
-
1
1
Man 9 - Publication of building information (BREEAM Education only)
-
-
-
-
1
Man 10 - Development as a learning resource (BREEAM Education only)
-
-
-
-
1
Hea 4 - High frequency lighting
1
1
1
1
1
Hea 12 - Microbial contamination
1
1
1
1
1
Ene 1 - Reduction of CO2 emissions
-
-
-
6
10
Ene 2 - Sub-metering of substantial energy uses
-
-
1
1
1
Ene 5 - Low or zero carbon technologies
-
-
-
1
1
Wat 1 - Water consumption
-
1
1
1
2
Wat 2 - Water meter
-
1
1
1
1
Wst 3 - Storage of recyclable waste
-
-
-
1
1
LE 4 - Mitigating ecological impact
-
-
1
1
1
BREEAM issue
BREEAM’s minimum standards and minor refurbishment or fit out projects
BREEAM’s minimum standards applicable to the PASS, GOOD and VERY GOOD rating levels may be
exempt for smaller scale refurbishment or fit out (where applicable to scheme) projects where the
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
30
Scoring and Rating
BREEAM Education 2008
design/project team confirms the following to the BREEAM Assessor (who in turn will determine which
of BREEAM’s minimum standards apply3):
•
That the project meets BREEAM’s refurbishment/fit-out definition (see note 4 below)
•
The proposed scope of works and budget
•
That the scope of the works excludes the area/function to which the minimum standard(s)
relate(see note 5 below)
•
The approximate cost of complying with a particular minimum standard and therefore it’s
potential for feasibly complying given the projects scope/budget
•
The environmental impact, if any, of ensuring the existing system/building will comply, when
such works fall outside of the projects initial scope. For example; for issue Hea 4, having to
replace/upgrade an existing but functioning lighting system that does not require replacement.
•
The design team demonstrates what feasible measures, if any, they can and will take to meet
the aim of the BREEAM issue, if not the criteria.
It should be noted that the relevant BREEAM assessment issues, for which there are minimum
standards, are still applicable to all refurbishment and fit out projects and must still be assessed for
compliance. The above exemption simply means that, if the credit for one of the issues is not feasibly
achievable given the scope of the project, it will not prevent the building from achieving a PASS, GOOD
or VERY GOOD rating.
The above exemption cannot be applied to those refurbishment or fit out projects seeking to achieve an
Excellent or Outstanding rating i.e. to achieve the higher rating levels the project must comply with the
minimum standards applicable to that rating level (as defined in the table above).
3
The BREEAM Assessor will in turn need to identify the relevant issues to BRE Global, who will then provide an amended
Assessment Tool for the specific project.
4
Where the project is part new-build-part-refurbishment this policy can apply to the refurbishment element, provided it complies
with the above. However, the new build element of the building must meet the relevant minimum standards.
5
If for example the scope of the refurbishment work includes replacing sanitary fittings, then it would not be appropriate to
exempt the project from the minimum standards for BREEAM issue Wat 1 Water Consumption, likewise for other BREEAM
issues with minimum standards. Where feasible the project must comply with all, or the relevant minimum standards. The
BREEAM Assessor will determine, based on the evidence provided to them by the project/design team, those minimum standards
which can justifiably be exempt. Any exemption must be verifiable, in accordance with the above guidance and will be subject to
BRE Global’s BREEAM Quality Assurance procedures.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scoring and Rating
31
3.4 BREEAM credits for innovation
Innovation credits provide additional recognition for a building that innovates in the field of sustainable
performance, above and beyond the level that is currently recognised and rewarded within standard
BREEAM issues. Innovation credits therefore enable clients and design teams to boost their building’s
BREEAM performance and in addition, help support the market for new innovative technologies and
practices.
An additional 1% score can be added to a building’s final BREEAM score for each Innovation credit
achieved. The maximum number of Innovation credits that can be awarded for any one building
assessed is 10; therefore the maximum available score achieved for ‘innovation’ is 10%. Innovation
credits can be awarded regardless of the final BREEAM rating i.e. they are awardable at any BREEAM
rating level.
There are three different ways in which a building can achieve an Innovation credit (all of which are
summarised below and detailed in section 13 Innovation). The first is by meeting exemplary
performance criteria for an existing BREEAM issue (table 5 outlines the BREEAM issues with
exemplary performance criteria).
Table 5 BREEAM issues with exemplary level criteria.
Man 2 - Considerate Constructors
Hea 1 - Daylighting
Hea 14 - Office Space (BREEAM Retail & Industrial Schemes only)
Ene 1 - Reduction of CO2 emissions
Ene 5 - Low or Zero Carbon Technologies
Wat 2 - Water Meter
Mat 1 - Materials Specification
Mat 5 - Responsible Sourcing of Materials
Wst 1 - Construction Site Waste Management
The second route is where the client/design team sets a specific BREEAM performance
targets/objectives and appoints a BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) throughout the key project
work stages to help deliver a building that meets the performance objectives and target BREEAM
rating.
The final and third route is where an application is made to BRE Global by the BREEAM Assessor to
have a particular building feature, system or process recognised as ‘innovative’. If the application is
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
32
Scoring and Rating
BREEAM Education 2008
successful an Innovation credit can be awarded. The flow chart and eligibility criteria below outline the
decision-making process to be used when applying for an Innovation credit (see also section 13
Innovation for further detail on the application and judging process). An additional fee is charged for
each innovation credit application received.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scoring and Rating
33
BREEAM Innovation credit: application flow chart
Identify innovative feature
or process not covered by
existing BREEAM criteria
Does innovation comply
with the eligibility
criteria?
No
Is there a
BREEAM credit
which already
includes the issue?
Yes
No
Feature or
process is not
relevant, so
an innovation
credit will not
be awarded
Yes
Does it exceed the
standard credit
criteria?
Submit a completed
innovation credit
application form
No
Yes
Does it meet the
criteria of the
Exemplary
Performance level?
Application will be
reviewed by a judging
panel.
No
Yes
Yes
Does the credit
application meet the
criteria of the judging
panel?
No
Has additional
evidence or
information been
requested?
No
An exemplary
performance
credit can be
awarded in
the innovation
section
No Innovation
credit will be
available
Yes
Innovation credit can be
awarded
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
34
Scoring and Rating
BREEAM Education 2008
3.5 Eligibility Criteria for Innovation Credits
The following criteria will be used to evaluate the eligibility of claims for proposed Innovation credit
status:
1. Does the feature, system or process aim to reduce the building’s impact on one of the following
overarching environmental/social issues?
•
Mineral Resource Depletion
•
Waste Disposal
•
Fossil Fuel Depletion
•
Water Use
•
Acidification
•
Deforestation
•
Climate Change
•
Urban Sprawl
•
Nuclear Waste
•
Reduction of Biodiversity
•
Stratospheric Ozone Depletion
•
Noise and Nuisance
•
Eco-toxicity
•
Loss of Heritage
•
Eutrophication
•
Indoor comfort
•
Human Toxicity
•
Health and Safety
•
Photochemical
•
Access and Inclusion
Ozone
Creation
(Summer Smog)
2. Can the impact of the feature, system or process be assessed objectively using clearly defined
criteria?
3. Can the sustainability benefits of the feature, system or process be demonstrated?
4. Have a draft aim, assessment criteria and information required to demonstrate compliance been
developed (in accordance with the Innovation credit application form)?
A BREEAM assessor can obtain the Innovation credit application form from the BREEAM Office at BRE
Global or via the Assessor’s Extranet. The form details the eligibility criteria listed above and the fee
payable for each submitted application for an Innovation credit.
Innovation credits cannot be awarded until written approval is received from the BREEAM Office.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scoring and Rating
35
3.6 How to calculate a building’s rating
A BREEAM assessor must determine the BREEAM rating using the BREEAM Assessor’s Spreadsheet
Tool and associated calculators. An indication of performance against the BREEAM scheme can also
be determined using a BREEAM Pre-Assessment Estimator. The Pre-Assessment Estimators are
available from the BREEAM website for each scheme.
The process of determining a BREEAM rating is outlined below and in table 6:
1. For each BREEAM section the number of credits awarded must be determined by a BREEAM
assessor in accordance with BREEAM’s assessment criteria (detailed in the technical sections of
the Scheme Document).
2. The percentage of the credits achieved is calculated for each BREEAM section.
3. The percentage of credits achieved is then multiplied by the corresponding BREEAM section
weighting (see note below). This gives the section score.
4. The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM score. The BREEAM
score is compared to the benchmarks in table 2 and, provided all minimum standards have been
met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved.
5. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM score for each Innovation credit achieved (up
to a maximum of 10%).
Note: Where applicable to the BREEAM scheme (see Scope of the BREEAM Scheme), Fit-Out only
assessments do not assess the BREEAM issues under the Land Use & Ecology section. The section
weighting for Land Use and Ecology is re-distributed amongst the remaining eight sections. The redistribution is determined based on the relative weighting of the remaining sections, so for example, the
Energy section receives a greater proportion of the Land Use and Ecology weighting than the Water
section. See Table 3 above for details of the respective section weighting.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
36
Scoring and Rating
BREEAM Education 2008
BREEAM Section
Credits Achieved
Credits Available
% of Credits Achieved
Section Weighting
Section score
Table 6 Example BREEAM score and rating calculation
Management
7
10
70%
0.12
8.40%
Health & Wellbeing
11
14
79%
0.15
11.79
%
Energy
10
21
48%
0.19
9.05%
Transport
5
10
50%
0.08
4.00%
Water
4
6
67%
0.06
4.00%
Materials
6
12
50%
0.125
6.25%
Waste
3
7
43%
0.075
3.21%
Land Use & Ecology
4
10
40%
0.10
4.00%
Pollution
5
12
42%
0.10
4.17%
Innovation
1
10
10%
0.10
1%
Final BREEAM score
BREEAM Rating
Minimum Standards for BREEAM ‘Very Good’ rating
55.87%
VERY GOOD
Achieved?
Man 1 - Commissioning
P
Hea 4 - High frequency lighting
P
Hea 12 - Microbial contamination
P
Ene 2 Sub-metering of substantial energy uses
P
Wat 1 - Water consumption
P
Wat 2 - Water meter
P
LE 4 - Mitigating ecological impact
P
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Scoring and Rating
37
3.7 BREEAM Outstanding Rating
The following conditions must be met in order to certify a building at the Outstanding BREEAM rating
level:
1. The building must achieve a final BREEAM Score ≥85%
2. The minimum performance standards (table 4) for the Outstanding rating level must have been met
3. Provision of material for the production and publication of a case study (refer to guidance below) on
the Outstanding rated building.
In addition to the above, the ‘BREEAM Outstanding’ building is required to obtain a BREEAM In Use
Certification of Performance within the first three years of the building’s operation and use (with regular
reviews in accordance with that scheme) in order to maintain the rating. Where the building is not
certified against BREEAM In Use during this period, the Outstanding rating will be downgraded to an
Excellent BREEAM rating after the expiry of the three years from issue of the Final BREEAM 2008
(Post Construction) certificate.
Production of case study
One of the most important aspects of the Outstanding BREEAM rating will be that projects receiving
this rating will act as exemplars for the industry. It is therefore a very important aspect of the new rating
that a good-quality case study is produced that design teams can refer to.
The design team and client will be asked via the certificate request form to agree to provide relevant
building/project information to allow BRE Global to produce a case study. This information will be
required with the formal post construction stage BREEAM assessor’s report for the assessed building.
Subject to approval from the design team/client, BRE Global will publish the case study on either the
BREEAM website, Green Book live website and other BRE/BREEAM-related publications (as
appropriate).
Where information is not provided for the production of a case study, the building will be certified to a
BREEAM Excellent rating level.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
38
Man 1 Commissioning
BREEAM Education 2008
4.0 Management
Issue ID
Man 1
Issue Title
Commissioning
No. of credits
available
2
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage an appropriate level of building services commissioning that is carried out
in a co-ordinated and comprehensive manner, thus ensuring optimum performance under actual
occupancy conditions.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit
1. An appropriate project team member(s) is appointed to monitor and programme precommissioning, commissioning and, where necessary, re-commissioning on behalf of the client.
2. Commissioning to be carried out in line with current Building Regulations and BSRIA1 and CIBSE2
guidelines, where applicable.
3. The main contractor accounts for the commissioning programme, responsibilities and criteria within
the main programme of works.
4. A specialist commissioning manager is appointed (by either client or contractor) for complex
systems such as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Air conditioning
Mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex passive ventilation
Building management systems (BMS)
Renewable energy sources
Microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards
Cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant
The specialist commissioning manager must have been appointed during the design stage and the
scope of their responsibility includes:
•
•
•
•
Design input: commissionability design reviews
Commissioning management input to construction programming
Commissioning management input during installation stages
Management of commissioning, performance testing and handover/post handover stages.
5. Where BMS specified, the following commissioning procedures must be carried out:
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 1 Commissioning
39
a. Commissioning of air and water systems is carried out when all control devices are
installed, wired and functional
b. In addition to air and water flow results, commissioning results include physical
measurements of room temperatures, off coil temperatures and other key parameters as
appropriate
c. The BMS/controls installation should be running in auto with satisfactory internal conditions
prior to handover
d. All BMS schematics and graphics (if BMS is present) are fully installed and functional to
user interface before handover
e. The occupier will be fully trained in the operation of the system.
6. Where specified, all built-in cold storage and chilled rooms are commissioned in accordance with
the criteria for refrigeration equipment as set out in the Carbon Trust publication GPG347
Installation and commissioning of refrigeration systems3.
7. All cold storage and chilled rooms over 20m2 meet the criteria of Section 9.1 of the Cold Store Code
of Practice, Part 14.
8. Where specified, fume cupboards and microbiological safety cabinets are installed and
commissioned in accordance with the following standards:
a. Fume cupboards in accordance with BS EN 14175-25and DD CEN/TS 14175-56
b. Microbiological safety cabinets in accordance with BS EN 12469 (2000)7.
c. The commissioning principles set by the HEEPI Labs21 programme Commissioning theme
section8.
Second credit
1. The first credit has been achieved.
2. The above appointment(s) include the following seasonal commissioning responsibilities over a
minimum 12 month period, once the building becomes occupied:
Complex Systems – Specialist commissioning manager
a. Testing of all building services under full load conditions, i.e. heating equipment in midwinter, cooling/ventilation equipment in mid-summer, and under part load conditions
(spring/autumn)
b. Where applicable, testing should also be carried out during periods of extreme (high or low)
occupancy
c. Interviews with building occupants (where they are affected by the complex services) to
identify problems or concerns regarding the effectiveness of the systems
d. Re-commissioning of systems (following any work needed to serve revised loads), and
incorporating any revisions in operating procedures into the O&M manuals.
Where specialist building services systems such as fume cupboards, microbiological safety
cabinets and a cold storage system are present then the assessor must ensure that these
systems are included in the specialist commissioning agent’s responsibilities.
Simple Systems (naturally ventilated) – External Consultant/Facilities Manager
a. Review thermal comfort, ventilation, and lighting, at three, six and nine month intervals after
initial occupation, either by measurement or occupant feedback.
b. Take all reasonable steps to re-commission systems following the review and incorporate
any relevant revisions in operating procedures into the O&M manuals.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
40
Man 1 Commissioning
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
Fit Out only
BREEAM Education 2008
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
The criteria at this stage of assessment are the same as those identified at
the design stage, subject to the following;
1. The criteria apply to the existing services, to encourage recommissioning of those services following additional installation works,
and to any new systems specified or integrated into the services strategy
as part of the fit-out works.
2. Where the existing services have been commissioned or recommissioned within the three years prior to the assessment, and
therefore further commissioning or re-commissioning would be of little
benefit, then this credit can be awarded by default. This is provided that
the scope of the current fit-out works does not result in any of the
following:
a. Changing of layout which could enhance or reduce daylight,
ventilation and zone controls such as partitioning, relocation of
HVAC units etc;
b. Changing perimeter services;
c. Changes to zoned areas for HVAC equipment;
d. Specification of additional or replacement plant/controls that affect
HVAC or DHW systems.
Commissioning
monitor (simple
systems)
The commissioning monitor can be a person from within the contractor or
sub-contractor organisation, provided they are not involved in the general
installation works.
Specialist
commissioning
manager
Naturally
ventilated
buildings
The commissioning manager for complex systems must be a specialist
contractor rather than a general sub-contractor.
Where the building is largely naturally ventilated, using simple cross-flow
ventilation relying solely on openable windows and/or trickle vents (except in
areas where mechanical ventilation is legally required), the appointment of a
specialist commissioning agent is not required to award this credit. If a BMS
system is employed, however, to control the natural ventilation and/or if
renewable energy sources are utilised in the development, the requirement
for a specialist commissioning agent remains.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 1 Commissioning
41
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
First Credit
1&4
A copy of a letter or commissioning
responsibilities schedule confirming the
appointment of [or commitment to appoint]:
• Design team member(s) as
commissioning monitor and scope of
their commissioning role.
• Specialist commissioning manager and
scope of their commissioning role.
Commissioning records/reports confirming:
• Monitoring actions carried out by the
nominated design team member.
• Specialist commissioning manager’s
actions/role.
2
A copy of the specification clause stating:
• The standards and codes of practice to
which commissioning procedures are to
comply with.
Commissioning records/reports confirming:
• Commissioning procedures executed in
compliance with relevant standards.
3
A copy of the specification clause
confirming:
• The managing contractor’s
responsibilities with respect to this
requirement.
A copy of the main contract programme
highlighting;
• Commissioning, performance testing
and handover period.
OR
5
A copy of a commissioning schedule
highlighting:
• Managing contractor’s commissioning
responsibilities.
A copy of the specification
clause/commissioning schedule confirming:
• The stages of the BMS/Controls
commissioning procedures.
Commissioning records/reports confirming
that;
• BMS/controls commissioning activities
were carried out in compliance with the
commissioning schedule/specification
clause.
6&7
A copy of the specification clause requiring:
• The standards and codes of practice to
which commissioning procedures are to
comply with.
Commissioning records/reports confirming:
• Commissioning procedures executed in
compliance with relevant standards.
8
A copy of the specification clause stating:
• The standards and codes of practice to
which commissioning procedures are to
comply with.
• .
Commissioning records/reports confirming:
• Commissioning procedures executed in
compliance with relevant standards.
Second Credit
1
Evidence (as outlined above) confirming
compliance with the first credit.
Evidence (as outlined above) confirming
compliance with the first credit.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
42
Man 1 Commissioning
2
As evidence criteria for 1 & 3 of the first
credit. This evidence must confirm the
scope of seasonal commissioning
responsibilities/tasks (as required).
BREEAM Education 2008
A copy of the seasonal commissioning
schedule/programme.
OR
A copy of the letter of appointment of
commissioning specialist and scope of their
responsibilities.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Man 2
Issue Title
Considerate Constructors
Man 2 Considerate Constructors
No. of credits
available
2
43
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage construction sites which are managed in an environmentally and socially
considerate and accountable manner.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The main contractor has complied with and achieved formal certification under the Considerate
Constructors Scheme(CCS), credits awarded as follows: (see Checklist A1)
a. One credit where the contractor achieved a CCS Code of Considerate Practice score
between 24 and 31.5.
b. Two credits where the contractor achieved a CCS Code of Considerate Practice score
between 32 and 35.5.
OR
2. The main contractor has complied with an alternative, independently assessed scheme
(equivalent to CCS), credits awarded as follows: (see Checklist A2)
a. One credit where the site has been independently assessed using the alternative scheme,
AND the alternative scheme addresses all the mandatory items plus 50% of the optional
items in Checklist A2.
b. Two credits where the site is to be independently assessed using the alternative scheme
AND the alternative scheme addresses all the mandatory items plus 80% of the optional
items in Checklist A2.
Exemplary level criteria
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM
issue:
1.
The main contractor has complied with and achieved a certified CCS Code of Considerate Practice
score of 36 or more.
OR
2.
The main contractor has complied in full with the alternative, independently assessed scheme, and
the alternative scheme addresses all the mandatory and optional items in Checklist A2.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
44
Man 2 Considerate Constructors
BREEAM Education 2008
Extensions to
existing
buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Fit Out Only
The criteria at this stage of assessment are the same as those identified at the
design stage.
Considerate
Constructors
score
No credits can be awarded for the Considerate Constructors Scheme where
any of the section scores within the scheme are less than 3, as this represents
non compliance with the CCS Code of Considerate Practice.
Site monitored by
CCS more than
once
Often a site will be visited by the CCS Monitor more than once. The CCS
Certificate will be awarded based on the results of the Monitor’s final visit. At
the final stage of the BREEAM assessment the number of BREEAM credits
awarded should therefore be based on the final visit and the subsequent
Monitor’s report and certified CCS score.
At the interim design stage of assessment, where the contractor is not yet
appointed, the client must either include within the specification, or commit to
including, a requirement for the appointed contractor to comply with one of the
above criteria. The assessor must use this information to complete the
appropriate checklist.
Where the project is using an alternative scheme to the CCS, it is the
alternative scheme and its assessment criteria that are assessed against
Checklist A2, NOT the project or its contractor.
Contractor not
yet appointed
Alternative
scheme
Site clearance
The scope of this issue applies to the main contractor and their scope of
works. If the scope of the main contractor’s works includes demolition and site
clearance then this stage of work falls within the scope of the credit criteria.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1
Design Stage
A copy of the relevant section of the main
contract specification confirming:
• A requirement to comply with the CCS
• The minimum score to be achieved in
each CCS section.
Post Construction Stage
A copy of the Considerate Constructors
Scheme certificate of compliance.
The Considerate Constructors Monitors
report highlighting the total score and the sub
scores in each section.
OR
A formal letter from the client/developer
confirming:
• The main contract will include a clause
requiring CCS certification
• The scope of the main contractor’s works
• A completed copy of checklist A1.
2
A copy of the assessment criteria for the
alternative scheme that allows the assessor
to complete checklist A2.
AND
A formal letter from the client/developer
confirming:
• The main contract will include a clause
requiring compliance with the alternative
scheme
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
A copy of the compliance report (and any
certification) for the alternative scheme.
BREEAM Education 2008
•
•
Man 2 Considerate Constructors
45
The procedure, and individual/
organisation responsible for third party
assessment of site compliance.
The scope of the main contractor’s works
Exemplary Credit
1-2
A formal letter from the main contractor
confirming their commitment to:
• Gaining CCS or equivalent certification
• A minimum score of ≥36 or equivalent.
Evidence as outlined above for req.1.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Considerate Constructors Scheme is a UK certification scheme that encourages the considerate
management of construction sites. The scheme is operated by the Construction Confederation and
points are awarded in increments of 0.5 over the following eight sections:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Considerate
Environmentally Aware
Site Cleanliness
Good Neighbour
Respectful
Safe
Responsible
Accountable
To achieve certification under this scheme a score of at least 24 is required.
www.considerateconstructorsscheme.org.uk
Alternative local or national schemes: Where the client/contractor has not used the Considerate
Constructors Scheme (CCS) but has made a firm commitment to adopt an alternative independently
assessed scheme covering the key issues in Checklist A2, the credits can still be achieved. The
purpose of Checklist A2 is to enable the assessor to check whether an alternative, independently
assessed scheme complies with the BREEAM assessment criteria. It is not in itself an equivalent
construction site management scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
46
Man 3 Construction Site Impacts
Issue ID
Man 3
Issue Title
Construction Site Impacts
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits available
4 (new builds/refurbs)
3 (Fit-out only)
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage construction sites managed in an environmentally sound manner in terms
of resource use, energy consumption and pollution.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. One credit where evidence provided demonstrates that 2 or more of items a-g (listed below) are
achieved. OR
Two credits where evidence provided demonstrates that 4 or more of items a-g (listed below) are
achieved. OR
Three credits where evidence provided demonstrates that 6 or more of items a-g (listed below)
achieved:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Monitor, report and set targets for CO2 or energy arising from site activities
Monitor, report and set targets for CO2 or energy arising from transport to and from site
Monitor, report and set targets for water consumption arising from site activities
Implement best practice policies in respect of air (dust) pollution arising from the site
Implement best practice policies in respect of water (ground and surface) pollution occurring on
the site
f. Main contractor has an environmental materials policy, used for sourcing of construction
materials to be utilised on site
g. Main contractor operates an Environmental Management System.
The Assessment Criteria for items a-g are detailed in the relevant section of Checklist A3.
2. One credit where evidence provided demonstrates that at least 80% of site timber is responsibly
sourced and 100% is legally sourced.
Fit Out only assessments
1. One credit where evidence provided demonstrates that the fit-out contractor adopts best practice
policies in respect of air (dust) pollution arising from the site.
2. One credit where evidence provided demonstrates that the fit-out contractor has an environmental
materials policy, used for sourcing of construction materials to be utilised on site.
3. One credit where evidence provided demonstrates that the fit-out contractor operates an
Environmental Management System.
The Assessment Criteria for each of the above items are detailed in the relevant section of Checklist
A3.
Compliance Notes
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
Fit Out Only
Site timber
Site clearance
Man 3 Construction Site Impacts
47
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Follow the criteria outlined above for fit out only assessments.
The fourth credit (for responsibly sourced site timber) is not dependent on any
of the first three credits being achieved. For the purpose of assessing this
issue, site timber is considered to be timber used to facilitate construction,
including formwork, site hoardings and other temporary site timber used for the
purpose of facilitating construction. It does not cover structural timber and
timber used for fit-out items (this is addressed in BREEAM issue Mat 5).
The scope of this issue applies to the main contractor and their scope of
works. If the scope of the main contractor’s works includes demolition and site
clearance then this stage of work falls within the scope of the assessment
criteria.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
All
A copy of the relevant section from the main
contract specification confirming:
• Contractor’s obligations in respect to
each item on the checklist
• Site timber will be sourced from suppliers
capable of providing certification to the
level required for the particular tier
claimed (see Table 15 Responsible
Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria of
BREEAM issue MAT 5)
• All timber will come from a ‘legal source’
and is not on the CITES list*.
Site records demonstrating monitoring and
recording of the following (where relevant):
• Site energy/CO2 consumption
• Site deliveries
• Site water consumption
OR
A letter from the main contractor confirming:
• Procedures for pollution management
and mitigation were implemented
• Name/job title of individual responsible
for monitoring and managing
construction site impacts throughout the
project.
Where the main contract specification is not
yet available, a formal letter from the
client/developer including:
• Completed checklist A3 identifying which
items will form part of the main
contractor’s obligations.
• The policy for sourcing site timber for the
project.
• Confirmation that the above will be
implemented in compliance with
BREEAM’s criteria.
* Or in the case of Appendix III of the
CITES list, it has not been sourced from the
country seeking to protect this species as
listed in Appendix III.
Post Construction Stage
Project targets set for water and energy
consumption.
Copies of the documented procedures used
on site for working to best practice pollution
management guidelines.
A copy of the certification document or Chain
of Custody (CoC) certificate(s) for the site
timber.
Where any non-certified timber is used,
written confirmation from the supplier(s)
confirming that:
• All timber comes from a legal source.
• All timber species and sources used in
the development are not listed on any of
the CITES appendices for endangered or
threatened species (Appendix I, II, or
III*).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
48
Man 3 Construction Site Impacts
BREEAM Education 2008
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
CITES (Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species)9 Appendices I and II of the CITES
list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list illustrates
species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is on
Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the
country(s) seeking to protect this species.
Chain of Custody: This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the
evidence/path for products from forests to consumers. Wood must be tracked from the certified forest to
the finished product. All the steps, from transporting wood from the forest to a sawmill, until it reaches
the customer, must maintain adequate inventory control systems that allow for separation and
identification of the certified product. Chain-of-custody certification ensures that a facility has
procedures in place to track wood from certified forests and avoid confusing it with non certified wood.
Chain-of-custody is established and audited according to relevant forest certification systems rules.
Pollution
BRE10 publishes guidance on construction site dust management, and the Environment Agency11
publishes guidance on water pollution control measures. There are significant statutory criteria in this
area under environmental health legislation and the Environmental Protection Act. The Environment
Agency and local Environmental Health Officers police these.
Energy
Energy Management on site has been a key focus for the Construction Confederation12, and they have
published specific guidance to help achieve this. Monitoring and reporting at site level are the key
factors in raising awareness of the impacts of energy consumption. Whilst total energy is frequently
monitored, this information is predominantly used to feedback into the tendering process and is seldom
used to seek improvements on the site in question.
Targets
Targets are requested in the BREEAM criteria to promote the process of setting, monitoring and
achieving targets. BREEAM does not set targets, as these are very project specific. For guidance on
setting targets, refer to Constructing Excellence’ Construction Industry KPI and Benchmarking
(www.constructingexcellence.org.uk/zones/kpizone/default.jsp); this series of documents guides the
reader through setting targets for their own projects.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Man 4
Man 4 Building User Guide
Issue Title
Building User Guide
No. of credits
available
49
Minimum
standards
Up to 2
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage the provision of guidance for the non technical building user so they can
understand and operate the building efficiently.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit (all educational building types)
1. A Building User Guide that contains the information described under the ‘User Guide Contents’
heading (see additional guidance) has been developed.
2. The guide is relevant to the non-technical building user and appropriate to the stakeholder(s) that
will occupy the building.
Second credit (Higher educational laboratory building type or function only)
1. A Laboratory User Guide that contains the information described under the ‘User Guide Contents’
heading (see additional guidance) has been developed.
2. The guidance is relevant to the laboratory users that will occupy and use the facilities.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
The criteria at this stage of assessment are the same as those identified at the
design stage. Where there is an existing Building User Guide this must be
updated in line with the scope of the fit-out work that will be undertaken and
comply with the BREEAM criteria. The guide must be developed/updated by,
or in collaboration with, the fit-out project team/contractor. Where there is not
an existing Building User Guide this must be prepared to cover all aspects of
the building, including aspects included in the shell construction/systems (if
relevant).
Operation and
Maintenance
manual
The presence of a building O&M manual does not meet this requirement. The
latter provides the detailed specialist information required by technical
Facilities Managers (FMs) and maintenance staff/contractors. The guide can
be contained in the Operation & Maintenance (O&M) manual, but must be an
extractable or ‘stand alone’ section.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
50
Man 4 Building User Guide
Buildings without
laboratories
BREEAM Education 2008
If the building does not have laboratory space or is not a laboratory building
then the second credit does not need to be assessed. The assessor’s
spreadsheet tool will filter this credit from the assessment.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1&2
Design Stage
A copy of the specification clause confirming:
• Requirement to develop a Building User
Guide
• Scope of the Guide’s contents.
OR
Post Construction Stage
A copy of the Building User Guide.
Written confirmation from the design team
that the guide has been distributed to the
building’s owner, tenant(s) or fit out
contractor (for completion), as appropriate.
A formal letter from the client/developer
confirming:
• That the design team will be required to
develop a Building User Guide.
• The contents of the Guide will be
developed in compliance with the
BREEAM criteria.
Additional Information
User Guide Contents
The list below indicates the type of information that should be included to meet the needs of the
Facilities Management (FM) Team/Building Manager and the general users (staff and if applicable to
scheme/building, residents).
1. Building Services Information
a. General Users/Residents - Information on heating, cooling and ventilation in the building and
how these can be adjusted, e.g. thermostat location and use, implications of covering heating
outlets with files, bags etc., and use of lifts and security systems.
b. FM – As above, plus a non-technical summary of the operation and maintenance of the building
systems (including BMS if installed) and an overview of controls.
2. Emergency Information
a. General Users/Residents - Include information on the location of fire exits, muster points, alarm
systems and fire fighting systems.
b. FM - As above, plus details of location and nature of emergency and firefighting systems,
nearest emergency services, location of first aid equipment.
3. Energy & Environmental Strategy
This should give owners and occupiers information on energy-efficient features and strategies
relating to the building, and also provide an overview of the reasons for their use, e.g. economic
and environmental savings. Information could include:
a. General Users/Residents – Information on the operation of innovative features such as
automatic blinds, lighting systems etc., and guidance on the impacts of strategies covering
window opening and the use of blinds, lighting and heating controls
b. FM - As above, plus information on airtightness and solar gain (e.g. the impact of leaving
windows/doors open in an air conditioned office, or use of blinds in winter with respect to solar
gain); energy targets and benchmarks for the building type, information on monitoring such as
the metering and sub-metering strategy, and how to read, record and present meter readings.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 4 Building User Guide
51
4. Water Use
a. General Users/Residents – details of water saving features and their use and benefits, e.g.
aerating taps, low flush toilets, leak detection, metering etc.
b. FM – As above, plus details of main components (including controls) and operation.
Recommendations for system maintenance and its importance, e.g. risk of legionella.
5. Transport Facilities
a. General Users/Residents – details of car-parking and cycling provision; local public transport
information, maps and timetables; information on alternative methods of transport to the
workplace, e.g. car sharing schemes; local ‘green’ transport facilities.
b. FM - As above, plus information on conditions of access, maintenance and appropriate use of
car parking and cycling facilities, e.g. number of spaces provided.
Higher Education Institutes only
The above information in point 5 does not need to be included in the user’s guide if there is a
separate dedicated travel information space, accessible to the staff, and in compliance with
BREEAM issue Tra 7. However, the guide must reference the travel information space, the
information provided and its location.
6. Materials & Waste Policy
a. General User – Information on the location of recyclable materials storage areas and how to
use them appropriately.
b. FM – As above, plus information on recycling, including recyclable building/office/fit out
components, waste storage and disposal criteria; examples of Waste Management Strategies
and any cleaning/maintenance criteria for particular materials and finishes.
7. Re-fit/Re-arrangement Considerations
a. General Users/Residents – an explanation of the impact of re-positioning of furniture, i.e. may
cover grilles/outlets, implications of layout change, e.g. installation of screens, higher density
occupation etc.
b. FM - As above, plus environmental recommendations for consideration in any refit. Relevant
issues covered in BREEAM should be highlighted, e.g. the use of natural ventilation, use of
Green Guide ‘A’ rated materials, reuse of other materials etc., the potential impact of increasing
occupancy and any provision made in the original design to accommodate future changes.
8. Reporting Provision
a. General Users/Residents – Contact details of FM/manager, maintenance team, and/or help
desk facility; and details of any building user group if relevant.
b. FM – As above, plus contact details of suppliers/installers of equipment and services and their
areas of responsibility for reporting any subsequent problems.
9. Training
Details of the proposed content and suggested suppliers of any training and/or demonstrations in
the use of the building’s services, features and facilities that will be needed. This could include:
a. General Users/Residents - Training in the use of any innovative/energy saving features.
b. FM – As above, plus training in emergency procedures and setting up, adjusting, and fine
tuning, the systems in the building.
10. Links & References
This should include links to other information including websites, publications and organisations. In
particular, the Carbon Trust programme should be referenced and links provided to its website and
good practice guidance.
11. General
Where further technical detail may be required by the FM Team or manager there should be
references to the appropriate sections in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
52
Man 4 Building User Guide
BREEAM Education 2008
Laboratory specific building user guide contents (where applicable)
Energy and Health and Safety staff should be involved in the development of this guide to ensure
relevant results.
1. Training:
Include details of proposed content of any training and/or demonstrations in the use of the
laboratory facilities and equipment as needed.
a. General user - this could include COSHH and Home Office Regulations (where relevant),
training in the use of any innovative/energy saving features and specialist equipment,
emergency procedures;
b. FM - as above plus training in setting up, adjusting, and fine tuning the systems in the
laboratory areas.
2. Safety and Emergency procedures:
This should include:
a. Safe handling of hazardous materials and substances;
b. Security procedures for the laboratory operation;
c. Any procedure for evacuation, disinfection, decontamination as appropriate in case of
emergency;
a. Emergency telephone numbers.
3. Energy and environmental strategy:
This section should give users information on energy-efficient features and strategies related to the
laboratory, and also provide an overview of the reasons for their use, e.g. economic and
environmental savings. Information could include:
a. Information on the energy efficient operation of fume cupboards and microbiological safety
cabinets (where present), including considerations on the impact of overloading fume
cupboards and leaving fume cupboards’ sashes open when not needed.
b. Good housekeeping and management planning to ensure that any equipment operation is
minimised, that time clock functions are utilised and that equipment is not left on unnecessarily.
c. Checking that the equipment has been tested and/or inspected via equipment log.
d. Minimisation of use of artificial lighting and temperature controls, and switching off of
equipment, lights, PCs etc.
e. Minimisation of use of water.
4. Materials and Waste
This should include:
a. List of potential hazardous materials and waste and risks associated (COSHH);
b. Safe waste segregation and disposal instructions;
c. Potential for reuse/recycling any non-hazardous waste.
5. Checklist of safety and best practice daily procedures to be completed prior to leaving the
laboratory area
6. Links, references and useful contact numbers
Building Log Book
The Building Regulations Part L requires the provision of a ‘Building Log-Book’ to the owner and/or
occupier of the building. In addition on completion, the Construction Design and Management
Regulations require the Health and Safety file to be passed onto the building user.
BREEAM requires an additional ‘Building User Guide’ that contains the necessary details about the
everyday operation of the development in a form that is easy for the intended users to understand.
Without the provision of adequate information and guidance it is likely that the building will be used
inappropriately leading to the dissatisfaction of occupants and wasted resources. For example: Some
ventilation and/or lighting systems can be impaired by inappropriate positioning of partitions, office
furniture etc. so causing inefficiencies, a lack of comfort and poor performance.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 4 Building User Guide
53
The aim of this issue is to ensure that design features are used efficiently and that changes to office
space are managed in the most appropriate manner. For example, the design team of a speculative,
open plan office, are likely to have considered the need for meeting or cellular space, and may have
provided additional riser or duct space to assist future use. The design of the building may require
additional or expanded systems to be installed if occupant levels rise above those designed for. This
information should be passed on to the personnel making management decisions, so that they are
aware of the implications of such decisions on the management of the building.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
54
Man 5 Site Investigation
Issue ID
Man 5
Issue Title
Site Investigation
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage detailed site investigation to ensure the building accounts for site
conditions and any remedial action required is taken.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The site has been investigated to determine local conditions that will affect the design and
specification of the proposed development.
2. The following areas are covered in the investigation:
a. Ground and ground water conditions assessed in accordance with BS5930 Code of
Practice for Site Investigations13
b. Establishing the engineering properties of the soil and aggressiveness of the ground water
in accordance with BS1377:1990 - Parts 1-9 Methods of test for soils for civil engineering
purposes14
c. If the site investigation indicates the site may be contaminated, further investigations are
carried out in accordance with BS 10175:2001 Investigation of potentially contaminated
sites15.
3. The relevant bodies (see Compliance Notes) have been consulted and confirm the absence of the
following:
a. Buildings of local architectural or historical interest referred to in a local authority
development plan
b. Buildings within areas of outstanding natural beauty and national parks
c. Scheduled ancient monuments buildings in historic parks and gardens
d. Buildings within the curtilage of scheduled ancient monuments
e. Buildings or sites with distinguishing local architectural characteristics
f. Sites of archaeological interest
4. Where the building/site is identified as one of the above types appropriate measures have been
taken to protect any areas/features of value and all relevant bodies have been consulted and have
agreed the design adopted.
5. The site investigation has been carried out at, or prior to, RIBA Stage C concept design, or
equivalent.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 5 Site Investigation
Refurbishment
For refurbishment projects that do not include ground works or additional
structural load, the ground investigation detailed in requirement 2 is not
required. All other credit criteria remain applicable. For refurbishment projects
that do include ground works or additional structural load, advice should be
sought from BRE on whether requirement 2 is applicable.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Relevant Bodies
The relevant bodies, depending on the UK region, will typically include: the
Local Authority, English Heritage, Historic Scotland, Natural England, Scottish
Natural Heritage, Environment and Heritage Service (NI) or appropriate
agency department of the Assembly Government (Wales).
55
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1,2&5
3
4
Design Stage
A copy of the site investigation report.
A copy of correspondence with/from the
Relevant Body.
A marked-up site plan identifying:
• Proposed development
• Sensitive buildings/sites in proximity
• Location and scope of protection
measures.
Post Construction Stage
The evidence required at this stage of
assessment is the same as that identified at
the design stage.
AND
Formal written confirmation from the design
team that measures identified at the design
stage to protect features/buildings were
implemented.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
56
Man 6 Consultation
Issue ID
Man 6
Issue Title
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Consultation
2
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To involve the relevant stakeholders (including building users, business, residents and local
government) in the design process in order to provide buildings fit for purpose and to increase local
“ownership”.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit
1. During the preparation of the brief (equivalent to stage B) the following was undertaken:
a. Members of the local community and appropriate stakeholders identified with whom the
design team consulted
b. Knowledge and experience collated from the existing buildings of the same type (if
relevant) to identify existing partnerships and networks. If the building is a new
development in an existing community or for a community still under construction, a
representative consultation group should be identified from similar buildings of the same
type in the same authority/area
c. A consultation plan was prepared and included a timescale and methods of consultation,
clearly identifying at which points consultees can usefully contribute and how they will be
kept informed about progress on the project.
2. The consultation included at least the following issues:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Functionality, building quality and local impact (including aesthetics)
Building user satisfaction/productivity
Management and operational implications
Maintenance resources/burdens
Good and bad examples of buildings of the same type.
Local traffic/transport impact.
Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the community/appropriate
stakeholders
3. Feedback has been given to the consultation group regarding suggestions made, and this feedback
covered:
a. What was proposed during the consultation exercise
b. How each of these proposals were considered
c. The outcome, e.g. implementation of suggestions or description of why options have not
been deemed feasible.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 6 Consultation
57
Where higher educational laboratory building type or function is present:
4. A stakeholder engagement workshop has been undertaken at RIBA stage B or equivalent with the
scope of determining the client’s broad requirements with concern to laboratory facilities. The
workshop must have been attended by the following (as a minimum):
a. Internal staff (including senior representatives from estates, academic users, and laboratory
managers/technicians)
b. Design team, including the mechanical engineer
c. Project manager.
5. A design team meeting has been undertaken at RIBA stage C or equivalent with a focus on
appropriate sizing, optimisation and integration of laboratory equipment and systems. As a result,
the design has been developed by using a risk assessment approach and, where possible, it was
supported by the use of 3D modelling for pipework and duct planning. The workshop must have
been attended by the following (as a minimum):
a. Internal staff (including a representative from the maintenance function)
b. Design team, including representatives from the architects and all significant building
services contractors
c. Project manager.
6. The results of the above activities have been summarised in a design intent document, which has
been approved by all parties involved and formed the basis of subsequent quality control.
Second credit
1. The first credit is achieved.
2. The consultation process used an independent method carried out by a third party, such as DQI,
DQM or School Works (see Additional Information section).
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable to fit-out-only assessments.
Relevant Bodies
Appropriate
stakeholders –
Pre-school,
Schools & sixth
form colleges
The relevant bodies, depending on the UK region, will typically include: the
Local Authority, English Heritage, Historic Scotland, Environment and Heritage
Service (NI) or appropriate agency department of the Assembly Government
(Wales).
Includes the following (as appropriate to the school building type):
• Local residents and volunteer group(s)
• Ex pupils/students group(s)
• Teachers/lecturers (representative groups)
• Local businesses
• Design team members and main contractor
• Community groups (for example based on religion, leisure or culture)
• Local Authority and/or local education service providers.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
58
Man 6 Consultation
Appropriate
stakeholders –
Further and
Higher Education
buildings
BREEAM Education 2008
Where the assessment concerns a new building or a refurbishment within an
existing campus i.e. an infill development, it is sufficient to consult with relevant
stakeholders, including the following (as appropriate):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Students and staff groups and unions
Alumni associations
Director of estate
Researchers
Teachers/lecturers (representative groups)
Departmental and institutional senior management
Design team members and main contractor
Local Authority and/or local education service providers
Health and Safety representative
Where the assessment concerns a whole campus, members of the local
community must also be identified and consulted with. These would typically
include:
• Local residents and volunteer groups
• Local businesses
• Community groups (for example based on religion, leisure or culture)
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
First Credit
1
A list of the stakeholders consulted.
2
A consultation plan setting out the process
and the scope of the consultation.
Evidence as outlined at the design stage of
assessment.
Copies of agendas and minutes of meetings
with the stakeholders demonstrating:
• The consultation plan in action
• The stage in plan of works that
consultation occurred.
3, 4
&5
6
Copies of documentation demonstrating
consultation feedback, including (where
relevant):
• Newsletters, posters, circulars etc.
• Agenda and minutes from meetings.
A copy of the design intent document.
Second Credit
1
Evidence (as outlined above) confirming
compliance with the first credit.
2
Name of the Construction Industry Council
(CIC) approved registered DQI facilitator or
School Works/DQM facilitator.
Copies of the assessment results from the
DQI tool for each stage of the project where
DQI used.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Copies of the assessment results from the
Ready for Occupation version of the DQI tool.
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 6 Consultation
59
Second Credit
1
As above.
As above.
2
Marked-up design plans and/or copy of the
relevant sections of the specification
documents illustrating:
• The influence of the consultation
process on the final design
• Measures taken to protect features of
historic value.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Existence/installation of identified features
on marked-up design plan or in
specification.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Functionality: The way in which the building is designed to be useful and is split into use, access and
space.
Build quality: The engineering and construction performance of a building.
Impact: The building’s ability to create a sense of place, and have a positive effect on the local
community and environment. This includes character and innovation, form and materials, internal
environment and urban and social integration.
Consultation guidance and methodologies
There is a great deal of guidance available on community consultation, and many specialist
organisations offer such services. Much of it is focussed on community planning, but is adaptable.
Examples of guidance and methodologies in the public domain are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The National Charrette Institute is a non-profit educational institution that help communities achieve
healthy transformation through collaborative planning processes that harnesses the talents and
energies of all interested parties to create and support a buildable plan. www.charretteinstitute.org
Planning for Real is a participative planning initiative. www.nifonline.org.uk
For a guide to neighbourhood renewal and various resources see: www.renewal.net
The Design Quality Indicator is a method to assess the design quality of buildings. www.dqi.org.uk
The Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment has various publications to provide
guidance on design, and a section on education on design for young people. www.cabe.org.uk
School Works is a schools design initiative which has developed a participatory process, it forms a
part of the British Council for School Environments (BCSE) www.bcse.uk.net
16
Developed by BRE in 2002, the Design Quality Method (DQM) is used by UK auditing authorities
(Audit Commission; NAO; NIAO: and Audit Scotland) to assess the design quality and value-formoney of educational and health buildings.
Learning through Landscapes can help with the design of spaces around schools. www.ltl.org.uk
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
60
Man 7 Shared Facilities
Issue ID
Man 7
Issue Title
Shared facilities
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
2
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage flexible buildings designed to cater for shared use with the local
community.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Primary and secondary schools, sixth form and further education colleges and higher education
First credit
1. At least one credit has been achieved under Man 6 Consultation.
2. The design team confirms that:
a. Potential users of the shared facilities (such as operators of clubs and community groups)
have been consulted and their criteria have informed the brief.
b. They met formally to consider feedback according to the consultation plan
c. A document was produced describing the facilities to be shared and how access to them
will be arranged
d. This document has been communicated to all consultees.
Second credit
1. The first credit is achieved.
2. Shared facilities are provided in a separate and secured zone that can be accessed by members of
the public/community without gaining uncontrolled access to other parts of the building.
3. Instructions and guidance on access and use of shared facilities has been developed and handed
over to the building occupants (this can be included in the building user guide where such a guide is
provided).
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Fit Out
This issue is not applicable to a fit out only assessment.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Existing shared
facilities
Type of shared
facilities
Pre-schools
Man 7 Shared Facilities
61
Where existing shared facilities are present on site that comply with the above
Assessment Criteria (including the involvement of users and community in the
consultation stage), the credits can be awarded. These facilities could be
within an existing building, that does not form part of the assessment, provided
the building is accessible to all relevant stakeholders.
No criteria have been set in this respect as the types of space will vary
according to the building size, type, and use and consultation feedback.
Typical facilities may however include:
• Sports facilities
• Meeting and conference rooms
• Drama and theatre space
This issue does not apply to the assessment of pre-school developments i.e.
nursery school and children centres.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
As outlined under issue Man 6 Consultation.
As outlined under issue Man 6 Consultation.
2
Agenda & minutes from design team
meeting.
There is no additional evidence required at
the post construction stage of assessment.
First Credit
A copy of the document, and its distribution
list, outlining the strategy for shared facilities.
Second Credit
2
A marked-up design plan highlighting:
• The facilities that will be shared
• Access and security zones for and
around the shared facilities.
3
A copy of the document containing the
instructions and guidance on access and use
of shared facilities.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Existence of shared facilities.
• Access and security arrangements for
the facilities.
A copy of the document containing the
instructions and guidance on access and use
of shared facilities.
OR
A formal letter from the design team
confirming that such a document will be
written and handed over to the building
occupants.
Additional Information
Relevant Definitions:
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
62
Man 8 Security
Issue ID
Man 8
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue Title
Security
No. of credits
available
Minimum
standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the implementation of effective design measures that will reduce the
opportunity for and fear of crime on the new development.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The design team has consulted with and sought the advice of the local police Architectural Liaison
Officer (ALO) or Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA) on designing out the opportunity for
crime, in accordance with the principles and guidance of Secured by Design17.
2. Consultation with the ALO/CPDA occurred during or prior to the concept design stage (RIBA stage
C) or equivalent.
3. The final design embodies the recommendations of the ALO/CPDA and is built to conform to the
principles and guidance of Secured by Design.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
This issue is not assessed for a fit-out only assessment.
SBD Award
An actual Secured by Design Award/certificate is not required, though this
does provide a means of demonstrating compliance at the post construction
stage of assessment.
Schools
In addition to the SBD Schools guidance, Managing School Facilities, Guide 4
- Improving Security in Schools18 offers guidance on how to improve the
security of school premises.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 8 Security
63
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
Correspondence from or a copy of the
report/feedback from the ALO/CPDA
confirming:
• Scope of their advice/involvement
• The stage of design in which their advice
was sought
• Summary of their recommendations
No additional evidence required to that
outlined for the design stage of assessment.
3
A marked-up copy of the site/design plan(s)
highlighting examples of:
• The development conforming to
ALO/CPDA recommendations and SBD
principles and guidance.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence providing examples
of:
• The site/development conforming to key
ALO/CPDA recommendations.
OR
OR
If the timing of assessment does not permit
the above, a copy of the specification clause
confirming:
The development will conform to ALO/CPDA
recommendations and SBD principles and
guidance.
Correspondence from the ALO/CPDA
confirming:
• The as-built development or design
complies with their recommendations.
OR
A copy of the development’s ‘Secured by
Design’ certificate.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions:
Secured by Design (SBD): A police initiative that seeks to encourage the construction industry to
adopt crime prevention measures in the design of developments, to assist in reducing the opportunity
for and fear of crime.
Secured by Design is owned by the Association of Chief Police Officers (ACPO) and has the support of
the Home Office Crime Reduction & Community Safety Group and the Planning Section of the
Department for Communities and Local Government.
The Association of Chief Police Officers for England Wales and Northern Ireland (ACPO) and the
Association of Chief Police Officers for Scotland (ACPOS) represent the police forces of the United
Kingdom and both organisations endorse and support the Secured by Design programme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
64
Man 9 Publication of Building Information
Issue ID
Man 9
Issue Title
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Publication of building information
1
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage the publication of information related to the aspects of the design and
procurement process’ which reduce the overall environmental impact of the building.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The information listed below is publicised as a case study through one of the following means:
a. Developer’s own website, publicly available literature or press release
b. Industry/sector or Government/Local Authority sponsored website or information portals.
c. Relevant public sector, organisation or institutional website or literature.
2.
The following project related information is publicised in the case study:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.
A basic description of the project
and building
BREEAM Rating and score
The key innovative and low-impact
design features of the building
Basic Building Cost - £/m2
Services Costs - £/m2
External Works - £/m2
Gross floor area - m2
Total area of site – hectares
Function areas and their size (m2)
Area of circulation (m2)
Area of storage (m2)
% area of grounds to be used by
community (where relevant)
% area of buildings to be used by
community (where relevant)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Predicted electricity consumption kWh/m2
Predicted fossil fuel consumption kWh/m2
Predicted renewable energy
generation - kWh/m2
Predicted water use m3/person/year
% predicted water use to be
provided by rainwater or greywater
The steps taken during the
construction process to reduce
environmental impacts, i.e.
innovative construction
management techniques
A list of any social or economically
sustainable measures
achieved/piloted.
At least two of the following must be met:
•
•
•
•
•
The first credit of Man 6 Consultation has been achieved
Site visits have been arranged for future building users
Building users and/or other stakeholders have been given the opportunity to attend design
team meetings
Building users and/or other stakeholders are given regular presentations on progress of
design/construction
Online and updated information on the progress of the design and construction of the
project.
Compliance Notes
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Buildings for
which this credit
is not applicable
Shell Only
Fit Out Only
Man 9 Publication of Building Information
65
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Higher Educational buildings of a sensitive or secure nature or where
confidential and sensitive information are handled or for which confidentiality
agreements have been signed may be exempt from the assessment of this
issue. In this case, the assessor must provide a statement in their report
justifying why this assessment issue is exempt.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of shell-only buildings.
Issue not applicable to Fit-out only assessments.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
1&2
A formal letter from the developer or design
team confirming:
• A case study for the development will be
prepared.
• The information to be included in the
case study.
• The medium for case study publication.
As appropriate:
• Evidence as required for issue M6.
• A marked-up programme showing dates
of site visits.
• A marked-up programme showing dates
of design team meetings attended by
building users/stakeholders.
• The programme for presentations that
have been or will be given.
• A brief description of the subject of each
presentation or copy of the presentation.
• The web address for publicly accessing
information on the design and
construction process.
3
Post Construction Stage
A copy of the published case study.
As appropriate:
• Evidence as required for issue M6.
• A formal letter from the design team or
main contractor confirming date(s) of site
visits and design team meetings
attended by building users/stakeholders.
• A copy of the presentation.
• Assessor check of website to ensure
project information is valid and up to
date.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
66
Man 10 Development as a Learning Resource
Issue ID
Man 10
Issue Title
Development as a learning resource
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of the building and site as a learning resource for demonstrating
environmental awareness.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. At least one credit has been achieved under Man 6 Consultation.
2. For pre-schools, schools and sixth from colleges the building and landscape, or for further and
higher education colleges the building and/or landscape is (based on the consultation process):
a. Designed, or includes features or installations that demonstrate to future building users a
local and/or global environmental impact of building development or operation, and how the
building and/or landscape mitigates such impacts.
2. Due to the subjective nature of the issue and circumstances of the individual project strict
Assessment Criteria have not been set. The items outlined below are suggestions that can be used
to determine whether the building and/or landscape meet the BREEAM criteria.
Building
1. Use of demonstration projects such as:
a. A working renewable energy source such as PV’s or wind turbines with a description of the
technology and live data on energy generated and subsequent CO2 emissions prevented.
b. Alternative heating sources such as wood fuel, solar thermal, geothermal with a description
of the technology, live data on energy generated and subsequent CO2 emissions
prevented.
c. Rainwater collection systems with live readings, a basic description of how the technology
works and its environmental benefit.
2. Utilisation of the building fabric or structure; for example a cutaway wall section that shows building
insulation use within the fabric, with internal and external temperature readings to demonstrate its
function. Alternatively, innovative use of a low-impact building material(s) or technology, such as
building products made from recycled materials, e.g. roof tiles made from recycled tyres.
3. A permanent display section with:
a. Information on the building’s design, construction and strategies to reduce its environmental
impact
b. General information on the environmental impact of the building as whole
c. Low-impact building solutions and materials that can be specified in modern design and
construction to mitigate such impacts.
4. Where energy or water meters with a pulsed output have been provided, the data can be displayed
with a description of the system being monitored.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 10 Development as a Learning Resource
67
5. The demonstration/information for the building is presented in a part of the building that has regular
user access: for example assembly halls, group or resource spaces.
Landscaping
6. The landscaping/site demonstrates either of the following:
a. Space within or adjacent to the site boundary or in the local area/region has been set aside,
to allow creation and management of a natural habitat or wetland
OR
b. Space within or adjacent to the site boundary or in the local area/region has been set aside
to allow creation and management of an area for organic planting and/or animal husbandry.
c. The landscaping/site space(s) are clearly marked and designated on a site plan and
provide an adequately sized area for achievement of the aim.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Shell Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of shell-only buildings.
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit-out-only assessments.
Buildings for
which this credit
is not applicable
Higher educational buildings of a sensitive or secure nature or where
confidential and sensitive information are handled or for which confidentiality
agreements have been signed may be exempt from the assessment of this
issue. In this case, the assessor must provide a statement in their report
justifying why this assessment issue is exempt.
Higher educational buildings where no visitors or students are admitted (e.g.
research only buildings) may be exempt from the assessment of this issue. In
this case, the assessor must provide a statement in their report justifying why
this assessment issue is exempt.
Site selection for
schools
Building Bulletin 7119 (section 4) outlines information on site selection and
appraisal issues to consider when designating such a space.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1
2
Design Stage
Evidence as outlined under issue Man 6
Consultation.
Marked-up design plan demonstrating:
• The proposed/specified demonstration
feature/installation.
Post Construction Stage
As outlined under issue Man 6 Consultation.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Installation and existence of the
demonstration feature
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
68
Man 10 Development as a Learning Resource
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Man 11
Man 11 Ease of Maintenance
Issue Title
Ease of maintenance
No. of credits
available
1
69
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of a building and building services that can be easily
maintained during their lifecycle.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The items identified for each of the key procurement stages in the checklist ‘design guide to
maintainable buildings’, outlined in Appendix 2 A1 of CIBSE guide to ownership, operation and
maintenance of building services20, have been addressed.
2. A critical appraisal has been completed at the feasibility stage of building procurement, covering the
maintenance implications for different design options. This appraisal must comply with the
following:
a. Service life planning in accordance with ISO 15686 Buildings and constructed assets Service life planning Part 121
3. A maintenance strategy has been developed from the critical appraisal and formulated at the
design stage. The maintenance strategy must cover the extent to which maintenance can be
designed out and how support systems can be built into the specification to facilitate efficient and
cost-effective operation and maintenance.
The strategy must include an indication on how all major plant and equipment is to be removed and
replaced within the design life of the building, including the access openings, lifting arrangement
and route to and from the plant room at a delivery point.
4. Where there is a management plan for the landscaping (for example, as defined in BREEAM issue
LUE 6 Long term impact on biodiversity), this has been included in the maintenance strategy.
5. Storage space has been provided for cleaning and general maintenance equipment in line with
22
23
Building Bulletin’s 98 / 99 , as appropriate. This must be evenly distributed throughout the
site/building and as a minimum, storage space is provided on each floor of the building.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
Fit Out only
Extensions to
existing
buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
This issue is not assessed in a fit-out only assessment.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
70
Man 11 Ease of Maintenance
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
A formal letter from the design team with:
• Confirmation of use and compliance with
the CIBSE checklist at the feasibility,
outline proposal, system design and
detailed design stages
• A signed, dated and completed copy of
the checklist for the relevant stages.
• Indicative examples of how items on the
checklist were addressed at each stage
of design for the building.
A formal letter from the design team or main
contractor with:
• Confirmation of use and compliance with
the CIBSE checklist at the Production
information, tender, pre-construction,
construction and commissioning stages.
• A signed, dated and completed copy of
the checklist for the relevant stages.
• Indicative examples of how items on the
checklist were addressed at each stage
for the building.
2
A copy of the feasibility stage appraisal for
the design options.
No additional evidence required to that
outlined for the design stage of assessment.
A formal letter from the design team
confirming:
• Compliance of the appraisal with the
relevant standard(s).
A copy of the maintenance strategy
(including the landscaping plan if
appropriate).
A copy of the maintenance strategy
(including the landscaping plan if
appropriate).
3&4
OR
A formal letter from the design team
confirming that:
• A compliant maintenance strategy will be
developed.
• This will include the landscape
maintenance plan, if relevant.
5
Marked-up drawings showing locations and
sizes of the storage space.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The location and sizes of the cleaners’
storage space.
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Man 12
Issue Title
Life cycle costing
Man 12 Life Cycle Costing
No. of credits
available
2
71
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the development of a Life Cycle Cost (LCC) analysis model for the project
to improve design, specification and through-life maintenance and operation.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit
1. A Life Cycle Cost (LCC) analysis has been carried out based on the proposals developed during
RIBA Work Stages C/D (concept design/design development), or equivalent.
2. The Life Cycle Costs analysis, based on the concept design/design development proposals, covers
the following stages:
a. Construction
b. Operation - includes, as a minimum, utilities
c. Maintenance - includes, as a minimum, planned maintenance, replacements and repairs,
cleaning, management costs
d. End of life.
3. The LCC analysis uses a study period of 25 or 30 (as applicable) AND 60 years, shown in real and
discounted cash flow terms.
4. The analysis demonstrates that at least two of the following issues have been analysed at a
strategic and system level (as per figure 6, Different levels of analysis at different stages of the life
cycle, ISO 15686-521), comparing alternative options:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Structure
Envelope
Services
Finishes
The chosen solution is the one that best meets the performance criteria for the built asset.
5. The option(s) with the lowest discounted LCC over the period is preferred, assuming that their
selection results in at least one of the following:
a. The lowest building energy consumption over the operational life span of the building
(compared to other options/alternatives analysed)
b. A reduction in maintenance requirement/frequency
c. Prolonged replacement intervals of services infrastructure/systems or building fabric
d. Dismantling and recycling or reuse of building components.
6. The model was updated during RIBA Work Stages D/E (design development/technical design) or
equivalent.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
72
Man 12 Life Cycle Costing
BREEAM Education 2008
Second credit
1. The first credit is achieved.
2. The results of the study have been implemented in the specification, design and final construction
of the assessed building.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for fit-out-only assessments
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
First Credit
1-4
A copy of the feasibility stage LCC analysis.
No additional evidence required to that
outlined for the design stage of assessment.
The details of the cost consultant who has
completed the analysis.
5
A formal letter from the design team or cost
consultant confirming:
• The preferred option.
No additional evidence required to that
outlined for the design stage of assessment.
6
An updated copy of the LCC analysis for the
detailed and final design.
An updated copy of the LCC analysis for the
final design.
OR
A formal letter from the design team
confirming:
• The LCC analysis will be updated to
reflect the detailed and final design
proposals.
• Any proposed change(s) made to the
specification will be on the basis that
they will minimise life cycle costs and
impacts.
Second Credit
2
A formal letter from the design team
confirming:
• The option(s) with the lowest discounted
life cycle costs have been, or will be,
implemented in the design and
specification.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Assessor’s building/site inspection
confirming:
• The completed building reflects the
preferred option identified in the LCC
analysis.
BREEAM Education 2008
Man 12 Life Cycle Costing
73
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Life Cycle Cost analysis: A procurement evaluation technique which determines the total cost of
acquisition, operation, maintenance and disposal of the building.
The assessor should note that BREEAM places fixed criteria on the time at which the Life Cycle Cost
feasibility study should be carried out in order that maximum benefit from undertaking this is achieved.
The strategic level analysis (looking at issues such as location and external environment, maintainability
and internal environment, etc.) and system level analysis (looking at issues such as foundations, solid
or framed wall and floors, types of energy, ventilation, water capacity, communications etc.) should be
carried out early in the design process to influence the fundamental decisions taken regarding the
building without having an adverse affect on either cost or design programme. It is however important
that this is revisited as the design develops to ensure that an optimal solution is retained throughout the
procurement process.
Real and discounted cost: ISO 1568621 defines real cost as the cost expressed as a value at the base
date, including estimated changes in price due to forecast changes in efficiency and technology, but
excluding general price inflation or deflation. Discounted cost is the resulting cost when the real cost is
discounted by the real discount rate, or when the nominal cost is discounted by the nominal discount
rate. ISO15686 defines nominal cost as the expected price that will be paid when a cost is due to be
paid, including estimated changes in price due to, for example, forecast change in efficiency, inflation or
deflation and technology.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
74
Hea 1 Daylighting
BREEAM Education 2008
5.0 Health and Wellbeing
Issue ID
Issue Title
Hea 1
Daylighting
No. of credits
available
1 or 2
(dependant on
building type)
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To give building users sufficient access to daylight.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit – All education building types
1. At least 80% of floor area in occupied spaces for pre-school, schools and further education
colleges and 60% of floor area in occupied spaces for higher education buildings is adequately
daylit as follows:
a. An average daylight factor of 2% or more.
PLUS either (b) OR (c AND d) below
b. A uniformity ratio of at least 0.4 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.8% (spaces
with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum
point daylight factor of at least 1.4%).
OR
c.
A view of sky from desk height (0.7m) is achieved.
AND
d. The room depth criterion d/w +d/HW < 2/(1-RB) is satisfied.
Where:
d = room depth
w = room width
HW = window head height from floor level
RB = average reflectance of surfaces in the rear half of the room.
Note: Table 7 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights (see
Additional Information) gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and
window head heights of sidelit rooms
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 1 Daylighting
75
Second credit – Higher Education buildings only
1. At least 80% of floor area in occupied areas of higher education buildings is adequately daylit (as
defined above).
Exemplary level criteria
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM
issue.
1. At least 80% of the floor area (for the building spaces/room identified above in the standard criteria)
has an average daylight factor of 3% in multi-storey buildings and 4% in single-storey buildings.
2. The criteria outlined above concerning uniformity ratio, view of sky or room depth criterion are met.
Where demonstrating compliance via uniformity ratio or point daylight factor the following minimum
criteria apply:
a. Multi-storey: A uniformity ratio of at least 0.4 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least
1.2%; (spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least
0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 2.1%).
b. Single storey: a minimum point daylight factor of at least 1.6%; (spaces with glazed roofs,
such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight
factor of at least 2.8%).
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing buildings
The criteria of this issue apply only to the scope of the assessed building. If
this scope includes the existing building as well as the new building then the
relevant areas within the existing building must be assessed against the
criteria of this BREEAM issue. If the assessment covers only the new building,
then the areas in the existing building do not need to be assessed.
Fit Out only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only projects.
Percentage
assessed area
of
Where the compliance requirement specifies that 80% of office or other
occupied space floor area must be adequately daylit, it refers to 80% of the
total floor area of all the rooms that must be assessed i.e. the compliant area.
If for example a development has 6 rooms that must be assessed, each 150m2
(total area 900m2) then 720m2 must comply with the criteria; this is equal to 4.8
rooms. The number of rooms that must comply must always be rounded up;
therefore in this example, five rooms must have an average daylight factor of
2% or more (plus meet the other criteria) to achieve the credit.
View of sky
requirement
To comply with the view of sky criteria at least 80% of the room that complies
with the average daylight factor requirement must meet the view out
requirement; i.e. it is permissible for up to 20% of the room not to meet the
view of sky requirement and still achieve a compliant room.
Uniformity with
rooflights
The room depth criteria cannot be used where the lighting strategy relies on
rooflights. In such areas either appropriate software should be used to
calculate the uniformity ratio or, in the case of a regular array of rooflights
across the whole of the space, ‘Figure 2.36’ (p37) within CIBSE Lighting Guide
LG10 can be used to determine the uniformity ratio.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
76
Hea 1 Daylighting
Excluded areas
Laboratories
Two-side lit
rooms
Borrowed light
BREEAM Education 2008
Media, arts production, SEN sensory spaces, x-ray rooms and other areas
requiring strictly controlled acoustic or lighting conditions can be omitted from
the assessment criteria. Sports hall exercise spaces should be included within
the daylight calculations.
In general, the assessor should use their professional judgement to establish
which areas need to be exempted from the assessment of this issue. Any
exclusion will need to be fully justified in the certification report.
Laboratory areas must be included within the definition of occupied areas
unless the type of research that will be carried out requires strictly controlled
environmental conditions, such as the exclusion of natural light at all times.
For rooms lit by windows on two opposite sides, the maximum room depth that
can be satisfactorily daylit is twice the limiting room depth (d) (measured from
window wall to window wall; CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10. The reflectance of
the imaginary internal wall should be taken as 1.
For areas where borrowed light is used, calculations or results from
appropriate lighting design software must be provided to demonstrate that
such areas meet the BREEAM criteria (if contributing to the percentage of
compliant area). Examples of borrowed light include: light shelves, clerestory
glazing, sun pipes or internal translucent/transparent partitions (such as those
using frosted glass).
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
All
Design plans for each floor in the building
with each room/area appropriately labelled
for use.
Daylight calculations for the building ‘as built’
confirming compliance with all criteria.
OR
AND
Daylight calculations confirming:
• Building areas assessed
• The daylighting variables/criterion
measured
• Average daylight factor for each area
• Compliance with room depth criterion,
uniformity ratio, view of sky (if required)
• The daylight provision is in compliance
with the relevant standards.
Assessor’s site inspection report or ‘as-built’
drawings confirming:
• The window sizes and room layout and
dimensions are as per design-stage
daylighting compliant room
• A letter from the design team or main
contractor confirming that window
specification, size and/or room layout
have not changed since the design stage
assessment.
Where there have been changes, revised
calculations are required to demonstrate
compliance for the relevant areas/rooms.
OR
Results from on-site measurements* that
have been carried out.
*These must be in accordance with
24
methodology detailed in BRE IP 23/93 .
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 1 Daylighting
77
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Occupied space: A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30
minutes or more by a building user (see also excluded areas in the compliance notes).
Point daylight factor: A point daylight factor is the ratio between the illuminance (from daylight) at a
specific point on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the illuminance
received on an outdoor unobstructed horizontal plane. This is based on an assumed overcast sky,
approximated by the ‘CIE (Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage) overcast sky’.
Average daylight factor: The average daylight factor is the average indoor illuminance (from daylight)
on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the simultaneous outdoor
illuminance on a horizontal plane under an unobstructed CIE Standard Overcast Sky.
Illuminance: The amount of light falling on a surface per unit area, measured in lux.
Uniformity: The uniformity is the ratio between the minimum illuminance (from daylight) on the working
plane within a room (or minimum daylight factor) and the average illuminance (from daylight) on the
same working plan (or average daylight factor).
View of sky / no-sky line: Areas of the working plane have a view of sky when they receive direct light
from the sky, i.e. when the sky can be seen from working plane height. The no-sky line divides those
areas of the working plane, which can receive direct skylight, from those that cannot.
Working plane: CIBSE LG10 defines the working plane as the horizontal, vertical or inclined plane in
which a visual task lies. The working plane is normally taken as 0.7 m above the floor for offices and
0.85 m for industry.
Computer simulation: Software tools that can be used to model more complex room geometries for
daylighting.
The table below gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head
heights of sidelit rooms:
Table 7 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights
Reflectance (RB)
Room Width (m)
0.4
0.5
0.6
3.0
10.0
3.0
10.0
3.0
10.0
2.5
4.5
6.7
5.4
8.0
6.8
10.0
3.0
5.0
7.7
6.0
9.2
7.5
11.5
3.5
5.4
8.6
6.5
10.4
8.1
13.0
Window Head
Height (m)
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
78
Hea 2 View Out
Issue ID
Hea 2
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue Title
View Out
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To allow occupants to refocus their eyes from close work and enjoy an external view, thus reducing the
risk of eyestrain and breaking the monotony of the indoor environment.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The relevant building areas are within 7m distance of a wall with a window or permanent opening
providing an adequate view out, where the window/opening is ≥20% of the total inside wall area
(refer to Compliance Notes for a definition of relevant building areas and adequate view out).
Where the room depth is greater than 7m, compliance is only possible where the percentage of
window/opening is the same as or greater than the values in table 1.0 of BS 820625
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
Fit Out
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
The criteria at this stage of assessment are the same as those identified at the
design stage.
Adequate view
out
The view out should ideally be through an external window providing a view of
a landscape or buildings (rather than just the sky) at seated eye level (1.2 –
1.3m) in the relevant building areas. A view in to an internal courtyard or atrium
will comply provided the distance from the opening to the back wall of the
courtyard/atrium is at least 10m (therefore allowing enough distance for the
eyes to refocus). The view cannot be an internal view across the room, as this
is likely to become obstructed by partitions, filing cabinets etc.
High level
windows
Roof lights and high level windows that do not provide an adequate view out
do not meet the criteria for this BREEAM issue.
Relevant building
areas
Where the term ‘relevant building areas’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue it
refers to any areas of the building where there are, or will be,
workstations/benches or desks for building users.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Excluded areas
Hea 2 View Out
79
Workstations in the following spaces can be omitted from the assessment of
this issue:
• Media, arts production and SEN sensory spaces where activities requiring
the exclusion or limitation of natural light is a functional requirement of the
space.
• Nurseries (children’s desks only)
• Conference rooms / lecture theatres
• Laboratory areas where research/testing activities require permanent
exclusion of daylight.
• Sports halls/facilities (exercise spaces only)
• Acute SEN (mild SEN rooms must meet the issue criteria)
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
All
Design plan and elevation showing:
• All relevant building areas and room
depths
• Actual or notional workstations/desk
layout
• Window/open areas
Site plan showing:
• Building location and
external obstructions.
Post Construction Stage
proximity
to
Assessor’s site inspection report
photographic evidence confirming:
• All relevant building areas comply.
and
OR
As built drawings or a formal letter form the
design team confirming:
• No changes have occurred since design
stage, therefore design stage evidence
demonstrates compliance post
construction.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Occupied space: refer to BREEAM issue Hea 1.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
80
Hea 3 Glare Control
Issue ID
Hea 3
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue Title
Glare Control
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce problems associated with glare in occupied areas through the provision of adequate controls.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. An occupant-controlled shading system on all windows, glazed doors and rooflights in all relevant
building areas.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the
criteria extend to the relevant building areas and occupied spaces of the existing
building. If only the new extension is being assessed then the criteria apply to
the relevant areas of the new building.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to fit
out-only assessments.
Relevant
building areas
Where the term ‘relevant building areas’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue it
refers to any areas of the building where there are, or will be,
workstations/benches, desks and/or close work will be undertaken or visual aids
used.
The following spaces are omitted from the assessment of this issue:
• Media and arts production spaces
• Sports facilities (exercise spaces only)
For workshops, to avoid unduly high maintenance due to dust/dirt, compliance
can be also be demonstrated in such areas by designing out glare through
measures such as Brise-soleil, low eaves, bioclimatic design or blinds integral to
the window.
In pre-schools and schools, where childcare and acute SEN spaces are included
within the scope of the development, occupant control need be provided only for
the teacher in these spaces.
Excluded areas
Workshops
Nurseries /
Acute SEN
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 3 Glare Control
81
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
Marked-up copy of the design plan(s)
confirming:
• A description of the function of each of
the building spaces.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Installation of compliant glare control
system.
A copy of the relevant specification clause(s),
window schedule or design plan confirming:
• Type of shading system(s) and control to
be installed.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Occupied space: A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30
minutes or more by a building user and, with respect to this issue, where it would be desirable to limit
the potential for glare or provided a system of glare control.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
82
Hea 4 High Frequency Lighting
Issue ID
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Issue Title
Hea 4
High frequency lighting
1
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To reduce the risk of health problems related to the flicker of fluorescent lighting.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. All fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps are fitted with high frequency ballasts.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the
existing
criteria extend to the existing building. If only the new extension is being
buildings
assessed then the criteria apply to the new building only.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to fit
out-only assessments.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
1
A copy of the specification clause or room
data sheets confirming:
• A compliant lighting strategy.
Post Construction Stage
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Installation of high frequency ballasts.
OR
As-built drawings/specification confirming:
• No changes have occurred since
design stage assessment.
• Where changes have occurred, a
compliant lighting strategy is installed.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Occupied space: refer to BREEAM issue Hea 1.
High frequency ballast: High frequency ballasts increase the frequency of the power coming from the
grid (50Hz) to a frequency optimising the performance of fluorescent lamps, typically around 30kHz.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 4 High Frequency Lighting
83
There are several advantages to running fluorescent lamps at higher frequencies. At 30kHz, the
frequency of re-ignition of a fluorescent lamp is too quick to be detected by the human eye, therefore
reducing visible flicker that some fluorescent lamps running on mains frequency fail to do. Additionally,
30kHz being above the audible range of the human ear, the buzzing noise coming out of low quality
main frequency ballasts is avoided. Finally, the luminous efficacy of fluorescent lamps increases with
frequency; it can be optimised by up to 10% when they are running at 30kHz compared to those
operating at 50Hz.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
84
Hea 5 Internal and External Lighting Levels
Issue ID
Hea 5
Issue Title
Internal and external lighting levels
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To ensure lighting has been designed in line with best practice for visual performance and comfort.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Illuminance (lux) levels in all internal areas of the building are specified in accordance with the
CIBSE Code for Lighting 200626.
Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges
In addition to the above requirement, internal illuminance levels in classrooms must be specified in
accordance with Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design for Schools’27.
2. For areas where computer screens are regularly used, the lighting design complies with CIBSE
Lighting Guide 728 sections 3.3, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8 and 4.9. This gives recommendations highlighting:
a. Limits to the luminance of the luminaires, to avoid screen reflections. (Manufacturers’ data
for the luminaires should be sought to confirm this).
b. For up-lighting, the recommendations refer to the luminance of the lit ceiling rather than the
luminaire; a design team calculation is usually required to demonstrate this.
c. Recommendations for direct lighting, ceiling illuminance, and average wall illuminance.
3. Illuminance levels for lighting in all external areas within the construction zone are specified in
accordance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 6, ‘The outdoor environment’29.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the
existing
criteria extend to the existing building. If only the new extension is being
buildings
assessed then the criteria apply to the areas of the new building only.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to fit
out-only assessments.
No external
areas
Where no external light fittings are specified, the criteria relating to external
lighting do not apply and the credit can be awarded on the basis of compliance
with the internal lighting criteria.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 5 Internal and External Lighting Levels
85
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
All
EITHER
A copy of the specification or relevant room
schedules confirming:
• The internal/external maintained
illuminance levels AND/OR
• The standards that the illuminance levels
are specified to.
A formal written declaration from the design
team or main contractor confirming:
• Light fittings have been installed in
compliance with the lighting
specification.
• No changes have occurred in the lighting
specification used to demonstrate design
stage compliance.
OR
A formal written declaration of conformity
from the relevant member of the design team
confirming:
• The maintained illuminance levels for
each internal/external space are in
compliance with the relevant Standard.
Where changes have occurred, a further
declaration is required confirming that the
revised lighting specification is in compliance
with the BREEAM criteria.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Occupied space: Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 1.
Construction zone: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site
which is being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building, and the external site areas that fall within
the scope of the new works.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
86
Hea 6 Lighting Zones and Controls
Issue ID
Hea 6
Issue Title
Lighting zones and controls
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To ensure occupants have easy and accessible control over lighting within each relevant building area.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges
1. Lighting is zoned to allow separate occupant control of the following areas (where applicable):
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Teaching space/demonstration area
Whiteboard/display screen
In office areas, zones of no more than four workplaces.
Workstations adjacent to windows/atria and other building areas separately zoned and
controlled.
Manual lighting controls should be easily accessible for the teacher whilst teaching and on
entering/leaving the teaching space.
Further and Higher Education colleges only
1. Zoning of lighting control allows for varying occupancy and/or uses within each space, appropriate
to the usage of that space. In particular, lighting is zoned to allow separate occupant control as
follows:
a. Office and circulation spaces
b. In office areas: zones of no more than four workplaces
c. Workstations adjacent to windows/atria and other building areas separately zoned and
controlled
d. Seminar and lecture rooms: zoned for presentation and audience areas
e. Library spaces: separate zoning of stacks, reading and counter areas
f. Auditoria: zoning of seating areas, circulation space and lectern area
g. Dining, restaurant, café areas: separate zoning of servery and seating/dining areas
h. Retail: separate zoning of display and counter areas
i. Bar areas: separate zoning of bar and seating areas.
For rooms/spaces not listed above, the assessor can exercise an element of judgement when
determining whether what is specified is appropriate for the space given its end use and the aim
and criteria of this BREEAM issue.
2. Areas used for teaching, seminar or lecture purposes (not listed above) have lighting controls
provided in accordance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 530. The controls specified will depend on the
size and use of the space but a typical auditorium or lecture theatre with stepped seating and a
formal lectern/demonstration/performance area would typically be expected to have lighting controls
as follows:
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 6 Lighting Zones and Controls
87
a. Full normal lighting (to allow for entry/exit, cleaning etc.)
b. Audience area lighting reduced to a low level and demonstration area lighting off; for the
purpose of line slide projection, but allowing enough light for the audience to take notes
c. All lighting off; for the projection of tone slides, colour slides, and for the purposes of visual
demonstrations/performances.
d. Separate localised lectern lighting.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new building extensions to existing buildings.
Extensions to
existing buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only projects.
Occupancy /
workstation
layout unknown
Where occupancy/workstation layout is not known, lighting control can be
zoned on the basis of 40m2 grids i.e. an assumption of 1 person/workspace
per 10m2.
Small spaces
Where the building consists entirely of small rooms/spaces (less than 40m2)
which do not require any subdivision of lighting zones/control or meet the
criteria by default, then this credit may be awarded.
Excluded areas
The following areas/spaces are omitted from the assessment of this issue:
• Media and arts production spaces
• Sports facilities (exercise spaces only)
Nurseries / acute
SEN
Where child care and/or acute SEN spaces are included within the scope of
the assessment, lighting controls should be provided for the teacher/member
of staff, i.e. it is not a necessity for the controls to be accessible to the children.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
All
Design plans for each floor of the building
highlighting:
• Space arrangement and room type
Assessor’s site inspection report, or as-built
drawings/specification confirming:
• No changes have occurred since design
stage; therefore, design stage evidence
can be used to demonstrate compliance
at post construction stage.
• Where changes have occurred since
design stage, the amended features still
comply with the design stage criteria.
AND
Specification or design plans confirming:
• Lighting zones
• Location and scope of user-controls.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
88
Hea 6 Lighting Zones and Controls
BREEAM Education 2008
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Separate Occupant Control: Light switches/controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can
be accessed and operated by the individual(s) occupying that area/zone. Such controls will be located
within, or within the vicinity of, the zone/area they control.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Hea 7
Hea 7 Potential for Natural Ventilation
Issue Title
Potential for Natural Ventilation
No. of credits
available
1
89
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage adequate cross flow of air in naturally ventilated buildings and flexibility in
air-conditioned/mechanically ventilated buildings for future conversion to a natural ventilation strategy.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Occupied spaces of the building are designed to be capable of providing fresh air entirely via a
natural ventilation strategy, demonstrated via EITHER of the following:
a. The openable window area in each occupied space is equivalent to 5% of the gross internal
floor area of that room/floor plate. For room/floor plates between 7m-15m depth, the
openable window area is on opposite sides and evenly distributed across the area to
promote adequate cross-ventilation. OR
b. The optimal location and size of openable area required to achieve the appropriate
ventilation rate using a natural ventilation strategy has been determined using the
ClassVent tool or other appropriate ventilation design tools i.e. types recommended by
CIBSE AM1031.
For a strategy which does not rely on openable windows, or which has occupied spaces with a plan
depth greater than 15m, the design must demonstrate (by calculation in accordance with
requirement 1b above) that the ventilation strategy can provide adequate cross flow of air to
maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates.
2. The strategy is capable of providing at least two levels of user-control on the supply of fresh air to
the occupied space with higher rates of ventilation achievable to remove short-term odours and/or
prevent summertime overheating.
This would typically be demonstrated by providing a large enough area of manually opening
windows or powered window actuators. Any opening mechanisms must be easily accessible and
provide adequate user-control over air flow rates to avoid draughts.
3. The natural ventilation strategy is capable of providing adequate levels of draught-free fresh air to
meet the need for good indoor air quality throughout the year, sufficient for the occupancy load and
the internal pollution loads of the space (as defined by BB10132).
4. For mechanically ventilated buildings/spaces, all mechanical actuators are silent in operation, can
be overridden by the building user and are fully modulating rather than the open/closed type.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
90
Hea 7 Potential for Natural Ventilation
BREEAM Education 2008
Extensions to
existing buildings
Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the
criteria extend to the existing building. If only the new extension is being
assessed then the criteria apply to the areas of the new building only.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only projects.
Mechanically
ventilated/cooled
buildings
The aim of this BREEAM issue is to ensure that a building is capable of
providing fresh air using a natural ventilation strategy. As a result, buildings
that employ a mechanically ventilated/cooled strategy are still able to achieve
the credit, provided they can demonstrate compliance with the above criteria
(for future adaptability).
Openable window
area
The openable window area is defined as the geometric free ventilation area
created when a ventilation opening, e.g. window, is open to its normal
operational fully designed extent (i.e. this excludes open areas created when
reversible windows are opened for cleaning etc). It is not the glazed area of a
façade or the glazed area of the part of the window that is openable (unless it
opens fully).
Occupied spaces requiring local exhaust ventilation e.g. labs, workshops, food
technology rooms must still demonstrate that they meet the criteria for
potential for natural ventilation.
Spaces requiring
local exhaust
ventilation
Excluded
occupied spaces
The following building areas can be excluded from the definition of occupied
spaces:
• Swimming pools
• Catering and small staff kitchens
• Washrooms/changing areas
• Laboratory or other area where strictly controlled environmental conditions
are a functional requirement of the space.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-2
Design plans and elevations, specification or
calculations confirming:
• Ventilation strategy in each occupied
space
• The depth of the room
• Gross internal floor area of each
occupied space
• The type of window/ventilator and total
openable area *
• The location of openings
• The type and degree of user-control.
Assessor’s site inspection report and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The ventilation openings and controls
are installed in accordance with
compliant design stage evidence. *
AND (where relevant)
A copy of the results from the appropriate
software modelling tool demonstrating
compliance.
*Manufacturers’/suppliers’ literature may also
be used as evidence.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
A formal letter from the design team or main
contractor confirming:
• No changes have occurred since design
stage.
Where changes have occurred since design
stage, ‘as-built’ drawings, specification and
calculations (as outlined under design stage
evidence) that re-confirms compliance.
* A random spot check of a selection of
occupied spaces is sufficient. The assessor
is not required to check each opening in all
spaces/rooms.
BREEAM Education 2008
3&4
A copy of the relevant clause of the
specification confirming:
• The natural ventilation strategy
minimises ingress of pollutants in
accordance with Building Bulletin 101
(section 3.0). AND (if relevant)
• The type and controls for the mechanical
actuators.
Hea 7 Potential for Natural Ventilation
91
As outlined above.
OR
A formal letter from the design team
confirming the above bullet points.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Occupied space: refer to BREEAM issue Hea 1.
ClassVent: ClassVent is a customised spreadsheet design tool that provides a means of sizing
ventilation openings for a natural ventilation strategy for school classrooms. The tool was developed by
the Department for Children, Families and Schools (formerly DfES). The tool can be downloaded from
http://www.teachernet.gov.uk/docbank/index.cfm?id=9955
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
92
Hea 8 Indoor Air Quality
Issue ID
Hea 8
Issue Title
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Indoor Air Quality
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce the risk to health associated with poor indoor air quality.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Air-conditioned and mixed-mode buildings: Where the building’s air intakes and exhausts are
over 10m apart to minimise recirculation AND intakes are over 20m from sources of external
pollution.
2. Naturally-ventilated buildings: Where openable windows/ventilators are over 10m from sources
of external pollution.
3. In addition to the specific BREEAM criteria above, the building has been designed to provide fresh
air and minimise internal pollutants (and ingress of external polluted air into the building) in
accordance with the criteria of Building Bulleting 101Ventilation of School Buildings32.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the
existing
assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to fit
out-only projects.
Measuring the
The distance requirement does not necessarily mean the plan distance, but the
distance
three dimensional distance around and over objects; e.g. on plan the air intakes
may be less than 20m from a source of external pollution, but the intake may be
on the roof of a 10 storey building and therefore over 20m from the source of
pollution.
Sources of
This includes the following:
external
• Highways and the main access roads on the assessed site.
pollution
• Car parks and delivery/vehicle waiting bays
• Other building exhausts, including from building services plant
industrial/agricultural processes
Excluded
Service and access roads with restricted and infrequent access (for example
sources
roads used only for waste collection) are unlikely to represent a significant
source of external pollution. These roads can therefore be excluded from the
criteria of this issue. This does not include vehicle pick-up/drop-off or waiting
bays.
Filters
It must be noted that filters fitted on the air supply are not considered by
BREEAM to provide adequate protection from sources of external pollution. As
such the distance criteria cannot be relaxed where filters are specified.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 8 Indoor Air Quality
93
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
A marked-up proposed site plan highlighting:
• Locations of intakes, extracts, openable
windows, ventilators
• Any existing or proposed sources of
external pollution.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and as
built drawings confirming:
• Locations of intakes, extracts, openable
windows, ventilators
• Proximity of any sources of external
pollution to the above.
3
Design team calculations and/or
performance specification criteria confirming:
• The fresh air rate set for each space
• That the fresh air rate can be met using
the chosen strategy
• The relevant standard(s) to which the
design is in accordance with.
For a naturally ventilated building, a formal
letter of declaration from the design team or
main contractor confirming the building has
been built in accordance with a design
compliant with the BREEAM criteria.
For a mechanically ventilated building, the
commissioning
manager’s
performance
testing report confirming:
• The required fresh air rates are
achieved.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
94
Hea 9 Volatile Organic Compounds
Issue ID
Hea 9
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Issue Title
Volatile Organic Compounds
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the specification of internal finishes
and fittings with low emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The following products (where specified) have been tested against and meet the relevant standards
outlined in the table below for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions:
Table 8 VOC criteria by product type
Product
Wood Panels
• Particleboard,
• Fibreboard including MDF,
• OSB,
• Cement-bonded particleboard
• Plywood
• Solid wood panel and acoustic
board
Timber Structures
• Glued laminated timber
Wood flooring
• e.g. parquet flooring
European Standard
BS EN 13986:200433
Emission level required
Formaldehyde E1 (Testing req 1
– see below)
Verify that regulated wood
preservatives are absent and of
the minimum content.
BS EN 14080:200534
Formaldehyde E1 (Testing req 1)
BS EN 14342:200535
Formaldehyde E1(Testing req 1)
Verify that regulated wood
preservatives are absent and of
the minimum content.
Formaldehyde E1(Testing req 1)
Verify
that
regulated
preservatives are absent and of
the minimum content.
36
Resilient, textile and laminated Floor
coverings
• Vinyl/linoleum
• Cork and rubber
• Carpet
• Laminated wood flooring
Suspended ceiling tiles
BS EN 14041:2004
Flooring adhesives
BS EN 139991:200738
Wall-coverings
• Finished wallpapers
• Wall vinyl’s and plastic wallcoverings
• Wallpapers for subsequent
decoration.
• Heavy duty wall-coverings
• Textile wall-coverings
BS EN 233:1999
BS EN 234:198940
41
BS EN 259:2001
BS EN 266:199242
BS EN 13964:200437
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
39
Formaldehyde E1 (Testing req 1)
No asbestos.
Verify that carcinogenic or
sensitising volatile substances are
absent (Testing req. 2-4).
Formaldehyde (testing req. 5) and
Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM)
(testing req. 5) release should be
low and within the BS EN
standard for the material.
Verify that the migration of heavy
metals(5)
and
other
toxic
substances are within the BS EN
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 9 Volatile Organic Compounds
Adhesive for hanging flexible wallcoverings
BS 3046:198143
Decorative paints and varnishes
BS EN 13300:200144
referred to the criteria
of Decorative Paint
Directive
2004/42/CE45
95
standard for the material.
No harmful substances and
preservatives used should be of
minimum toxicity.
VOC (organic solvent) content
(testing req. 6), requirement for
Phase 2.
Fungal and algal resistant.
Testing requirement:
1. BS EN 717-1:200446
2. BS EN 13999-2:2007 - Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)47
3. BS EN 13999-3:2007 - Volatile aldehydes48
4. BS EN 13999-4:2007 - Volatile diisocyanates49
5. BS EN 12149:199750
6. BS EN ISO 11890-2:200651
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Fit Out only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
shell-only assessments.
Products with no
Formaldehyde
containing
materials
For some floor coverings and wood based panels, the requirement for
formaldehyde testing (referred to in the above criteria) does not apply to “floor
coverings to which no formaldehyde-containing materials were added during
production or post-production processing”36, or in the case of EN 13986:2002,
wood-based panels.
Furnishings
As such, if a product manufacturer confirms that they have made a declaration
of Formaldehyde class E1 without testing (in writing or via a company product
fact sheet/literature) then the product in question meets the BREEAM
requirement relevant to Formaldehyde testing. A declaration of E1 without
testing is effectively confirmation from the manufacturer that formaldehyde
emissions comply with the emission level requirements of the relevant
standard(s) Therefore, evidence confirming the actual emission level(s) via
testing will not be required by the Assessor to demonstrate compliance with
that particular requirement.
The scope of this BREEAM issue does not extend to furnishings e.g.
desks/shelving, it focuses on the key internal finishes and fittings integral to the
building.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
96
Hea 9 Volatile Organic Compounds
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
A copy of the relevant specification clause
confirming:
• The VOC content of the relevant
specified product types will comply with
the standards specified above.
For each relevant product, a formal letter
from or copies of the manufacturer’s
literature confirming:
• The standard(s) against which the
product is tested
• The VOC emissions achieved
• The VOC emissions meet the required
level.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
Volatile Organic Compounds
VOCs are emitted by a wide array of products numbering in the thousands. Examples include: paints
and lacquers, paint strippers, cleaning supplies, pesticides, building materials and furnishings, glues
and adhesives, Urea-formaldehyde foam insulation (UFFI), pressed wood products (hardwood plywood
wall panelling, particleboard, fibreboard) and furniture made with these pressed wood products.
‘No’ or ‘low’ VOC paints are available from most standard mainstream paint manufacturers. There ‘ecofriendly’ paints are made from organic plant sources and also powdered milk-based products. The
emissions of VOCs from paints and varnishes are regulated by the Directive 2004/42/CE, implemented
in the UK by the Volatile Organic Compounds in Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle Refinishing Products
Regulation 2005. Products containing high organic solvent content should also be avoided (EU VOC
Solvent Directive 1999/13/EC).
Exposure risk assessment of any possible release of chemicals from manufactured products and their
possible impact on health and the environment generally, is an important requirement of European
regulations. The possible impact of a building product on indoor air quality is included in the European
Construction Products Directive, 89/106/EEC. The amended Directive, 93/68/EEC provided the criteria
for CE Marking of products.
Products to be fitted in buildings should not contain any substances regulated by the Dangerous
Substances Directive 2004/42/CE, which could cause harm to people by inhalation or contact. Materials
containing heavy metals (e.g. antimony, barium, cadmium, lead and mercury) and other toxic elements
(e.g. arsenic, chromium and selenium) or regulated biocides (e.g. pentachlorophenol) should be
avoided.
Various labelling schemes identify products that have been tested and shown to be low emitting and
these have been summarised in BRE Digest 46452.
Dangerous substances are defined in the Dangerous Substances Directive (67/548/EEC)
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Hea 10
Hea 10 Thermal Comfort
Issue Title
Thermal Comfort
No. of credits
available
1
97
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To ensure, with the use of design tools, that appropriate thermal comfort levels are achieved.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Thermal modelling has been carried out using software selected and applied in accordance with
CIBSE AM11 Building Energy and Environmental Modelling53.
Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges
2. The modelling demonstrates that the building design and services strategy provides internal
summer temperatures significantly better than the recommendations of Building Bulletin 10132 e.g.
there are fewer than 60 hours a year where temperatures rise above 28°C.
3. The software used to carry out the simulation at the detailed design stage provides full dynamic
thermal analysis. For more basic school buildings where an AM11 full dynamic model is not suitable
then compliance with this issue can be determined using ClassCool.
Further and Higher Education Colleges
2. The modelling demonstrates that the building design and services strategy can deliver thermal
comfort levels in occupied spaces in accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide A
Environmental Design54; in particular that internal winter and summer temperature ranges will be in
line with the recommended comfort criteria in table 1.5 of the Guide.
3. The software used to carry out the simulation at the detailed design stage must provide full dynamic
thermal analysis. For smaller and more basic building designs an alternative less complex means of
analysis may be appropriate (such methodologies must still be selected and applied in accordance
with CIBSE AM11).
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing buildings
Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the
criteria extend to all occupied spaces of the new and existing building. If only
the new extension is being assessed then the criteria apply to the occupied
areas of the new building.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of fit out-only projects.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
98
Hea 10 Thermal Comfort
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&3
A copy of the relevant specification clause
confirming:
• The criteria for thermal comfort analysis.
Formal written confirmation from the design
team confirming:
• No changes have occurred since design
stage thermal comfort assessment was
carried out, therefore design stage
evidence demonstrates compliance at
the post construction stage.
OR
2
Correspondence (e.g. letter, email or
meeting minutes) from the design team
confirming:
• The name of the thermal comfort
modelling software used.
• The software has been selected and
applied in accordance with CIBSE AM11.
A copy of the results from the modelling
demonstrating the internal temperatures in
compliance with the relevant standards.
Where changes have occurred, an updated
copy of the results from the modelling
demonstrating the internal temperatures in
compliance with the relevant standards.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
ClassCool: A tool developed by the Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF, formerly
DfES) which provides a simplified method of assessing the extent of classroom overheating. ClassCool
may not be appropriate for other spaces, such as libraries and halls, and other means of assessing
overheating will be required www.teachernet.gov.uk/iaq.
Occupied space: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue an occupied space is a room or space within
the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user. The
definition excludes the following:
a. Atria/concourses
b. Entrance halls/reception areas
c. Ancillary space e.g. circulation areas, storerooms and plantrooms
Thermal Dynamic Analysis: Thermal comfort analysis tools can be subdivided into a number of
methods of increasing complexity. The most complex of these and the one that provides greatest
confidence in results is the full dynamic model. This type of model enables annual heating/cooling
loads, overheating risks and control strategies to be assessed.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Hea 11
Hea 11 Thermal Zoning
Issue Title
Thermal Zoning
No. of credits
available
1
99
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the provision of user controls which allow independent adjustment of
heating/cooling systems within the building.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The heating/cooling system is designed to allow occupant control of zoned areas within all occupied
spaces in the building.
2. The zoning allows separate occupant control (within the occupied space) of each perimeter area
(i.e. within 7m of each external wall) and the central zone (i.e. over 7m from the external walls).
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the
criteria extend to the occupied spaces of the existing building. If only the new
existing
buildings
extension is being assessed then the criteria apply to the relevant spaces of the
new building.
Fit Out only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to fit
out-only projects.
Long lag
systems
Where long-lag systems are specified, the criteria can be met where they are
designed to service the base load only and a responsive secondary heating
system and controls are provided, zoned in compliance with the above criteria.
Distance
requirement
The distance requirement is approximate; however, the assessor must use
sound judgement considering fully the aims of this issue, before accepting
solutions that do not strictly meet the above criteria.
Controls for wet
heating systems
Adequate TRVs (thermostatic radiator valves) placed in zones around the
building perimeter, and the provision of local occupant controls to internal areas,
such as fan coil units, would satisfy the criteria for this BREEAM issue.
In pre-schools and schools occupant controls are intended to be for staff use
only, not pupils.
Occupant
controls
Excluded areas
The following spaces are omitted from the assessment of this BREEAM issue:
• Media, arts production and SEN sensory spaces
• Main halls and sports facilities (exercise spaces only)
Schedule of Evidence Required
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
100
Hea 11 Thermal Zoning
BREEAM Education 2008
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
A copy of the relevant clauses of
specification and/or marked-up M&E
drawings confirming:
• Scope of the heating/cooling system
• The type of user controls for the above
systems
• The scope of the controls i.e. control
zone.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Installation of user controls in each
occupied space.*
*For large buildings it would not be
expected that the assessor check every
individual occupied space, but a random
selection
of
spaces
that
confirm
compliance.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Long-lag systems: These low temperature systems use the thermal mass of the building to provide a
consistent supply of heat to the space during the occupied period. As the mass of the building is used
to regulate and supply the heat, the temperature in the space lags behind any change required by the
occupants via the systems controls. An example of a long-lag system is under-floor heating.
Separate Occupant Control: Heating/cooling controls for a particular area/zone of the building that
can be accessed and operated by the individual(s) occupying that area/zone. Such controls will be
located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone/area they control.
Occupied space: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue an occupied space is a room or space within
the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user. The
definition excludes areas where building users would not expect, or be expected, to control temperature
in the space, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Atria/association space
Entrance halls/reception areas
Circulation areas
Storerooms
Special Educational Needs (SEN): The Government's Department for Children, Families and Schools
(DCFS) defines children with SEN as having “learning difficulties or disabilities which make it harder for
them to learn or access education than most other children of the same age”. Some schools have
facilities dedicated to the education of children with special educational needs.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Hea 12
Hea 12 Microbial Contamination
Issue Title
Microbial Contamination
No. of credits
available
1
101
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To ensure the building services are designed to reduce the risk of legionellosis in operation.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. All water systems in the building are designed in compliance with the measures outlined in the
Health and Safety Executive’s “Legionnaires' disease - The control of legionella bacteria in water
systems”. Approved Code of Practice and guidance, 200055.
2. Where no humidification is specified or only steam humidification is provided.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
Fit Out Only
CIBSE TM13
Assessor’s
responsibility
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
If the extended and existing building share the same water systems, then
these systems must be assessed against the criteria regardless of whether the
existing building forms a part of the assessment or not. If the extension is
served by independent systems, only these need be assessed against the
Assessment Criteria. If it is the intention that building users of the extended
building will use water systems in the existing building, then it must be
confirmed that the existing systems comply with the criteria.
Any and all existing and new water systems in the fitted-out building/unit must
comply with the BREEAM criteria. In some instances responsibility for water
systems may lie with a landlord and not the tenant; in such cases confirmation
will be required from the landlord, or their representative, confirming that the
water system comply with ACoP.
Design teams may refer to CIBSE TM13 Minimising the risk of Legionnaires
56
disease, 2002 in demonstrating that the design meets the criteria of ACoP.
The BREEAM assessor is not required to confirm that the design is compliant
with the relevant standard; this is the responsibility of the design team. The
assessor is simply required to record, for the purposes of validation, whether
or not the design team confirms compliance.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
102
Hea 12 Microbial Contamination
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1&2
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
A copy of the relevant specification clause(s)
confirming:
• All types of water system in the building
and on the assessed site.
• The standards to which all water
systems in the building will be designed.
For all water systems in the building, a formal
letter of declaration from the design team,
main contractor or installer of the relevant
systems confirming:
• The design and installed systems comply
with the HSE’s ACoP.
• If relevant, any existing water systems
comply with the HSE’s ACoP.
Where design responsibility is to be passed
on to the contractor/installer, a copy of the
relevant specification clause(s) stating:
• The criteria on the contractor/installer
with regards to minimising the risk of
Legionnaires disease from the specified
water systems.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Water systems: For the purpose of this issue, this refers to:
• Cooling towers
• Evaporative condenser
• Domestic hot and cold water systems
• Other plant and systems containing water which is likely to exceed 20°C and which may release a
spray or aerosol during operation or when being maintained, for example:
o humidifiers and air washers
o spa baths and pools
o car/bus washes
o wet scrubbers
o Indoor fountains and water features.
Legionnaires disease: The HSE describes Legionnaires disease as a type of pneumonia caused by
the bacterium Legionella pneumophilia. People catch Legionnaires' disease by inhaling small droplets
of water suspended in the air, which contain the bacteria.
Humidification Units
Humidification options fall into two broad groups; the first group relies on a heated air stream
evaporating water vapour either from a pond or stream of water. This includes so-called ‘trickle-down’
systems. These are dependent on sterilisation technologies such as UV, ultrasonic etc, to ensure that
the water vapour is not contaminated. Whilst these systems are effective when working properly, any
partial failure will allow untreated water into a warmed air stream. Where this occurs, the health-related
consequences are likely to be significant.
The second group relies on failsafe systems that minimise risk if the plant fails. The only option in this
group is steam humidification. This process sterilises the water vapour and ensures that untreated
water cannot enter the air stream when no steam is being produced.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Hea 13
Issue Title
Acoustic Performance
Hea 13 Acoustic Performance
No. of credits
available
2 or 3
(dependant on
building type)
103
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To ensure the acoustic performance of the building meets the appropriate standards for its purpose.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges only
First credit
1. The building meets the acoustic performance standards required by Building Bulletin 9357.
2. Pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a suitably qualified acoustician as described in
BB93 to ensure that all relevant spaces (as built) achieve the required performance standards. Any
remedial works required in spaces that do not meet the standards (as identified via testing) are
completed prior to handover and occupation.
Schools and sixth form colleges only
Second credit
3. New build only: For music accommodation (or multi-purpose halls in primary schools with no music
accommodation) airborne sound insulation values are at least 5dB higher, and impact sound
insulation values that are at least 5dB lower, than the performance standards required by BB 93.
Refurbishments: All relevant spaces achieve reverberation times compliant with table 1.5 of BB93.
4. Pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a suitably qualified acoustician as described in
BB93 to ensure that all relevant spaces (as built) achieve the required performance standards. Any
remedial works required in spaces that do not meet the standards (as identified via testing) are
completed prior to handover and occupation.
Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges only
Third credit (or second credit for Pre-school building types)
5. For roofs with a mass per unit area less than 150kg/m2 (lightweight roofs) or heavyweight roofs
(>150kg/m2) with glazing/rooflights:
a. Calculations (see compliance note) or measurements demonstrate that the reverberant
sound pressure level in the relevant rooms are not more than 20dBLAeq, 30min above the
indoor ambient noise level for the equivalent type of room given in Table 1.1 of Building
Bulletin 93.
For heavy weight roofs with a mass per unit area greater than 150kg/m2 (including those with
sedum planting) that do not have any glazing/rooflights, calculations are not required.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
104
Hea 13 Acoustic Performance
BREEAM Education 2008
Further and Higher Education Colleges only
First credit
1. Indoor ambient noise levels in all non-teaching unoccupied spaces, i.e. spaces/rooms not covered
in BB93, comply with the good practice levels of BS8233:1999, Tables 5 & 659. Typical, appropriate
noise levels are given below, although the following list is not intended to be exhaustive:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
≤40 dB LAeq,T General spaces (staffrooms, restrooms)
≤40dB LAeq,T in single occupancy offices
40-50dB LAeq,T in multiple occupancy offices
≤50 dB LAeq,T in catering kitchens
40-55dB LAeq,T in restaurant areas
≤45 dB LAeq,T in informal café/canteen areas
≤55 dB LAeq,T in manual workshops
≤ 35 dB LAeq,T consulting/treatment rooms
≤ 30 dB LAeq,T in sound recording studios
40-45dB LAeq,T in bars
In addition to the above, any rooms/spaces used for medical purposes i.e. treatment, should be
designed to meet airborne and impact sound insulation criteria in accordance with Health Technical
Memorandum 08-0158.
2. All rooms/spaces used as teaching or lecture areas (including laboratory areas where present)
achieve the Indoor ambient noise level criteria for secondary schools in Section 1 of Building
Bulletin 9357.
3. The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied spaces complies
with section 7.6.3.1 of BS823359, as follows:
a. Dw + LAeq,T > 75
• Dw is the weighted sound level difference between the two spaces
• LAeq,T is the design (or measured) indoor ambient noise level in the space adjacent to
the acoustically sensitive room.
The source and receive room sound pressure levels from which Dw is derived must be measured in
accordance with BS EN ISO 140-4:1998 and the guidance in Annex B of Approved Document E.
Measurements must be based on finished but unfurnished rooms, accounting for any carpets and
acoustically absorbent ceilings specified.
3.
Pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a suitably qualified acoustician to ensure that all
relevant spaces (as built) achieve the performance standards required, and any required remedial
works in spaces that do not meet the standards are completed prior to handover and occupation.
Second credit
5. All areas used for teaching, training and educational purposes (such as classrooms, seminar rooms
and lecture theatres) achieve reverberation times compliant with table 1.5 of BB93.
6. Pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a suitably qualified acoustician to ensure that all
relevant spaces (as built) achieve the performance standards required, and any required remedial
works in spaces that do not meet the standards are completed prior to handover and occupation.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Calculations of
rain noise in
schools
Schools
credit –
noise
third
rain
BB93 relaxation
of requirements
for schools in
Northern Ireland
Acoustically
sensitive areas
Unoccupied
spaces
Awarding
credits
Measurement
procedures
Privacy
Reverberation
times
Hea 13 Acoustic Performance
105
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
assessments of extensions to existing buildings.
For the purpose of assessing the third credit in pre-schools, schools and sixth
form colleges, the reverberant sound pressure level should be calculated using
laboratory test data from measurements conducted in accordance with BS EN
ISO 140-1860 ‘Heavy’ rain noise excitation.
The rain noise requirement is applicable to both roofing and rooflights. Parts of
the building where a heavyweight roof is specified can be excluded from the
assessment, e.g. sedum roof or some concrete roofs, where it is known that
‘heavy’ rain noise will not lead to indoor ambient noise levels exceeding the
above requirements.
The Department for Education Northern Ireland (DENI) issued a note to
designers in November 2006 detailing relaxations in compliance with BB93. The
relaxations were made to facilitate the particular design requirements for new
schools in Northern Ireland (as recommended in the various DENI Building
Handbooks). Subsequently, where an assessed school in Northern Ireland has
cited the note and applied the relaxation of BB93 requirements, they are not
prevented from achieving the available BREEAM credits provided, in all other
respects, the building complies with BB93 (and the above BREEAM
requirements).
Where the term ‘acoustically sensitive rooms’ is referenced in this BREEAM
issue, it refers to the following types of space/rooms (where specified) where
privacy, and therefore appropriate sound insulation levels, are deemed
important:
• Cellular offices, meeting/interview rooms
• Any other room/space the design team or client deems to be acoustically
sensitive.
Where the term ‘unoccupied space’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue, it refers
to the nature of the space for the purpose of carrying acoustic calculations or
measurements i.e. such measurements must be carried when the space is
unoccupied and therefore devoid of sources of noise. Care should be taken to
avoid confusing this term with the definition “occupied space” (see relevant
definitions) as they have two different meanings within the context of this
BREEAM issue.
Each available credit can be awarded independently of the other available
credits for this issue e.g. the second credit can be awarded without achieving the
first credit.
For the assessment of pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges the
measurement procedures outlined in BB93 should be followed. For assessments
of further and higher education buildings, the procedures outlined in BB93 can
be followed if/where appropriate. Alternatively, the measurement procedures in
the Additional Guidance section (below) can be followed. Where the acoustician
has felt it necessary to deviate from these procedures, they must give justifiable
reasons why they have done so.
Where ranges of noise levels are specified where privacy is not deemed by the
final occupier to be an issue, it is acceptable to disregard the lower limit of the
range and consider the noise levels to be lower or equal to the upper limit of the
range.
Where the reverberation times stated above or in the referenced documents are
not appropriate for the type of space/building assessed, the acoustician must
confirm why this is the case. In addition the acoustician must set alternative
appropriate reverberation times and provide these to demonstrate compliance.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
106
Hea 13 Acoustic Performance
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges
1,3,5
A copy of the design plan for each level of
the building with each room/area clearly
labelled.
A copy of the specification clause
confirming:
• The building will comply, and where
relevant exceed the performance
standards required by BB93.
OR
A copy of the acousticians calculations
confirming:
• The specific performances standards
achieved for each relevant room/area
• The standards comply, and where
relevant exceed the levels required by
BB93.
2&4
A copy of the specification clause or a
formal letter from the project team
confirming:
• A
programme of
pre-completion
acoustic testing by a suitably qualified
acoustician will be commissioned.
• Where rooms/areas do not comply with
the
required
levels,
appropriate
remedial works will be actioned and
completed.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Copies of acoustic field test report/results
confirming:
• The required performance levels have
been achieved for each tested room/area
of the completed building.
• Where
relevant,
any
remedial
work/actions required to meet the
performance standards.
Evidence, such as a formal letter from the
acoustician or their test report confirming that
they meet BREEAM’s definition of a suitably
qualified acoustician.
A letter from the design team or main
contractor confirming:
• Any and all required remedial works have
been carried out in accordance with the
acoustician’s recommendations.
As outlined above.
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 13 Acoustic Performance
107
Further and Higher Education
1-3
4&6
5
A copy of the design plan for each level of
the building with each room/area clearly
labelled.
A copy of the specification clause or
acousticians calculations confirming:
• Indoor ambient noise levels in each
relevant room/area
• Sound insulation levels between each
acoustically
sensitive
room
and
adjacent occupied areas.
• The
standards
to
which
calculations/measurements
have
complied, or are required to comply
with.
A copy of the specification clause or a
formal letter from the project team
confirming:
• A
programme of
pre-completion
acoustic testing by a suitably qualified
acoustician will be commissioned.
• Where rooms/areas do not comply with
the
required
levels,
appropriate
remedial works will be actioned and
completed.
A copy of the specification clause or
acousticians calculations confirming:
• The reverberation times in areas used
for speech.
• The
standards
to
which
calculations/measurements
have
complied, or are required to comply
with.
Copies of acoustic field test report/results
confirming:
• The required performance levels have
been achieved for each room/area of the
completed building.
• Where
relevant,
any
remedial
work/actions required to meet the
performance standards.
Evidence, such as a formal letter from the
acoustician or their test report confirming that
they meet BREEAM’s definition of a suitably
qualified acoustician.
A letter from the design team or main
contractor confirming:
• Any and all required remedial works have
been carried out in accordance with the
acoustician’s recommendations.
As outlined above.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Suitably qualified acoustician: Those organisations or individuals having UKAS accreditation or
accredited by a European equivalent of UKAS. The definition includes organisations or individuals
registered to schemes that are UKAS accredited, or equivalent, to ensure consistency and technical
competence in sound testing. At the time of writing the Association of Noise Consultants (ANC)
Registration Scheme is in the process of obtaining UKAS accreditation and can be deemed to comply
with this requirement until advised otherwise.
Single occupancy offices: cellular office space designed to accommodate one or two desk
spaces/workstations (typically no greater than 10m2).
Multiple occupancy offices: Office space that is not cellular in nature i.e. it is open-planned, and
designed to accommodate more than two desk spaces/workstations.
Occupied space: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue an occupied space is a room or space within
the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user (see also
description of ‘unoccupied space’ in the Compliance Notes table above).
Measurement/calculation procedures - Further & Higher Education buildings only
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
108
Hea 13 Acoustic Performance
BREEAM Education 2008
The measurement procedures defined in BB93 can be followed for further or higher education buildings
if/where appropriate. Alternatively, the following procedures can be followed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Noise from both internal sources (e.g. mechanical ventilation systems, plant noise) and external
sources (e.g. traffic noise transmitted via the building façade) should be included, and, where
windows are openable as part of the ventilation strategy, these should be assumed to be open for
the purposes of calculations and open for measurements.
Noise from occupants and office equipment (e.g. computers) should not be included in the
measurements.
Measurements should be made in at least four rooms in which noise levels can be expected to be
greatest either because they are on the noisiest façade or because they are on a naturally
ventilated façade.
Where different ventilation strategies are used, measurements should be conducted in rooms
utilising each strategy. Otherwise, measurements should be made in rooms on the noisiest façade.
T in LAeq,T is taken as the duration of the normal working day (typically 8 hours between 09.00 and
17.00).
Measurements need not be made over a period of 8 hours if a shorter measurement period can be
used. In this case, measurements should be made when external noise levels are representative of
normal conditions throughout the day.
Measurement periods less than 30 minutes may give representative values for indoor ambient
noise levels and may be utilized where this is the case. However measurement periods shorter than
5 minutes should not be used.
Measurements should be taken in a minimum of 3 locations in rooms at a height of 1.2 m above the
floor level and at least 1 m away from any surface.
Where relevant, measurement of airborne sound insulation between teaching spaces should be
conducted between one in four pairs of adjacent rooms (or teaching spaces).
Where relevant, measurement of impact sound pressure level should be conducted in one in four
teaching spaces (separated from rooms above).
For music rooms it may be possible to aid compliance with the above requirements by positioning and
orientating such rooms away from more noise-sensitive areas such as libraries and classrooms.
The above is intended as guidance for undertaking acoustic measurements to demonstrate compliance
with the performance requirements in BREEAM. If the acoustician has felt it necessary to deviate from
the above procedures, they should provide a justifiable reason for doing so and confirm that the
alternative procedures are adequate for demonstrating that the building meets the acoustic
performance requirements.
NR curves
Noise assessments based on NR curves are often used by building services consultants to predict
internal noise levels due to mechanical ventilation systems. However, the BREEAM requirement uses
the indoor ambient noise level, LAeq,T which includes external noise transmitted via the façade as well as
internal noise such as that from mechanical ventilation systems. In the absence of strong low frequency
noise, LAeq,T can be estimated from the NR value using the following formula: LAeq,T ≈ NR + 6 dB.
Therefore, if the NR value is known, but not the sound pressure levels in the individual frequency
bands, an estimate for the indoor ambient noise level LAeq,T can still be determined from the NR value
for the building services noise. The LAeq,T for the external noise transmitted via the façade must then be
combined with the LAeq,T for the building services.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Hea 14
Issue Title
Office Space
Hea 14 Office Space
No. of credits
available
N/A
109
Minimum
standards
No
Issue not assessed under this scheme
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
110
Hea 15 Outdoor Space
Issue ID
Hea 15
Issue Title
Outdoor Space
Issue not assessed under this scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
N/A
Minimum
standards
No
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Hea 16
Hea 16 Drinking Water
Issue Title
Drinking Water
No. of credits
available
1
111
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To provide appropriate and available supplies of free, fresh, chilled drinking water to building occupants
throughout the day.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Pre-schools, schools, sixth form and Further Education building types only
1. Chilled, mains-fed point of use water coolers are provided in locations that are safe, convenient and
accessible to all building users throughout the day.
2. One compliant point of use water cooler is provided for every 200 building users, subject to a
minimum of two water coolers being provided for any building with over 200 building users.
3. All coolers must be attached to both the wall and the floor to prevent vandalism, and contain
security covers to protect all water and electrical connections.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
Fit Out only
Building users
Safe, convenient
and accessible
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Where compliant water coolers are provided in an existing building, and the
users of the new building have access to these facilities, such facilities can be
used to demonstrate compliance against the criteria for this BREEAM issue. In
such instances however, the users of the existing building must be factored in
to the calculation for determining the compliant number of coolers that need to
be provided.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Where the term ‘building users’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue, it refers to
pupils or students and staff i.e. teachers, lecturers, and support and
administration staff.
Suitable locations for water dispensers include open areas and areas under
surveillance, such as:
• Dining/assembly halls
• Classrooms/common rooms
• Wide corridors
• Indoor social areas
• Changing rooms, gymnasia
• Admin areas.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
112
Hea 16 Drinking Water
Non compliant
water dispensers
BREEAM Education 2008
The following types of water dispensers do not comply with the criteria of this
BREEAM issue:
•
•
•
Water fountains as they are difficult to keep in a hygienic condition, do not
encourage children to consume adequate fluid intake and are typically not
chilled
Ordinary taps fed from the mains supply; these are rarely chilled or
bespoke for water dispensation
Bottled water from vending machines or over the counter.
The credit cannot be awarded where dispensers are located in toilet areas.
Higher Education
building types
This BREEAM issue is not applicable in the assessment of higher education
buildings.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-3
Marked-up drawings showing:
• Location, number and type of compliant
water coolers.
Assessor’s building/site inspection report and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Locations and number of the mains-fed
water coolers.
Project brief or correspondence from the
design team confirming:
• The actual/predicted number of building
users.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Point of Use Water Cooler: watercoolers that are plumbed directly into the mains water supply and
drainage. The advantage of water coolers is twofold: their appearance is modern and appealing to
users and most offer both chilled and ambient temperature water.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Hea 17
Hea 17 Specification of Laboratory Fume Cupboards
Issue Title
Specification of Laboratory Fume
Cupboards
No. of credits
available
1
113
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To ensure that laboratory fume cupboards and safety cabinets are designed and specified in
accordance with best practice guidance.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Where specified/installed, fume cupboards are manufactured and installed in accordance with the
following:
a. Schools and sixth form colleges: Building Bulletin 88 (in addition to the British Standards
below, where relevant).
i. BS EN 14175-25: Fume Cupboards, Safety and Performance Requirements
ii. For Recirculatory filtration fume cupboards: BS 798961
b. Further Education colleges: In accordance with the above British standards, or for fume
cupboards in labs for subjects up to and including A’ Level, compliance with Building
Bulletin 88 would also be acceptable.
c. Higher Education: In accordance with the above British standards.
2. Where specified/installed, the discharged velocity from the extract fan stack from a ducted fume
cupboard must be ≥10m/s as recommended by BS EN 14175-2.
3. Where specified/installed, microbiological safety cabinets are manufactured and installed in
accordance with BS EN 124697.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the
existing
assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to fit
out-only assessments.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
114
Hea 17 Specification of Laboratory Fume Cupboards
Requirement 1
for schools and
sixth form
Discharge
velocity
Building
contains no
fume cupboards
or safety
cabinets
BREEAM Education 2008
For fume cupboards specified/installed for up to and including A’ Level subjects,
confirmation of the specification and installation in accordance with Building
Bulletin 88 will be acceptable for BREEAM compliance. BS7989 and parts of
BS14175 may be relevant to some installations; in such cases the
person/organisation responsible for producing/installing the lab equipment
should be able to confirm if they are relevant given the type of fume cupboard
installation.
BS EN 14175 Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume cupboard
extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure
that the discharge will not be trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack.
Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but
higher rates may cause noise problems.
Please note that this issue will not be assessed where laboratory space, fume
cupboards or safety cabinets are absent from the assessed building. In such
instances the BREEAM assessor’s spreadsheet tool will filter this issue from the
list of applicable credits.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-3
A copy of the relevant clause(s) from the
specification confirming:
• The standards to which fume cupboards
and
safety
cabinets
must
be
manufactured and installed
• The fume cupboards’ discharge velocity
from extract.
Correspondence from the design team
(where it was not confirmed at the design
stage) confirming:
• The
make
and
model
of
cupboards/cabinets that have been
installed.
OR
A copy of the relevant clause(s) from the
specification confirming:
• Make and model of cupboard/cabinets to
be installed
AND
• Manufacturers’/suppliers’
literature
confirming compliance with the criteria.
OR
A formal letter from the design team
confirming:
• The specified fume cupboards and
safety cabinets will be manufactured and
installed in compliance with the relevant
standards.
• The required fume cupboard discharge
velocity from the extract.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
AND
A copy of the manufacturers’/suppliers’
literature or a letter from these parties
confirming:
• Their
cupboards/cabinets
are
manufactured
and
installed
in
accordance with the relevant standards.
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 17 Specification of Laboratory Fume Cupboards
115
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Fume cupboard/safety cabinet: A piece of scientific equipment designed to limit a person's exposure
to hazardous fumes or biological material. Air is drawn through the enclosure of the cupboard
conducting the contaminated air away from the experimental area and those using the equipment.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
116
Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
BREEAM Education 2008
6.0 Energy
Issue ID
Ene 1
Issue Title
Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
No. of credits
available
15
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage buildings that are designed to minimise the CO2 emissions associated
with their operational energy consumption.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The number of credits achieved is determined by comparing the building’s CO2 index (EPC Rating),
taken from the Energy Performance Certificate (EPC), with the table of benchmarks below:
Table 9 CO2 index benchmarks and BREEAM credits
CO2 Index (EPC Rating)
BREEAM Credits
New Build
Refurbishment
1
63
100
2
53
87
3
47
74
4
45
61
5
43
50
6
40
47
7
37
44
8
31
41
9
28
36
10
25
31
11
23
28
12
20
25
13
18
22
14
10
18
15
0
15
Exemplar credit 1
<0
≤0
True zero carbon building
Exemplar credit 2
For buildings that are part new-build part refurbishment refer to Compliance Notes.
2. The CO2 index for the assessed building must be entered in to the relevant box of the Ene 1
Reduction of CO2 emissions calculator.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
117
3. The building has been modelled using a method compliant with the National Calculation Method
(NCM) and an Energy Rating and certificate produced using Approved software by an Accredited
Energy Assessor.
Historic Buildings only
In addition to the above an additional 2 credits may be awarded (up to a maximum of 15) for carrying
out the following:
1. A specialist study has been undertaken by a heritage conservation specialist, who is a full Member
of the Institute of Historic Building Conservation, to investigate the implications of improving building
fabric performance whilst minimising the potential negative impacts on both the historic character of
the building and the condition of the building fabric.
2. The report makes recommendations for potential improvements to the building fabric in accordance
with the guidance given in English Heritage’s Balancing the needs for energy conservation with
those of building conservation: an Interim Guidance Note on the application of Part L62 and, as a
minimum, covers the following issues:
a. Each element of the following building elements (as a minimum) must be considered and
recommendations for improvements made:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Roof
External/Sheltered walls
Ground floor
Upper floors
Windows and external doors
Junctions between building elements such as between roof and walls.
Junctions between different parts of the building such as between different ages or
methods of construction.
Where significant improvement cannot be made to an element then the report should state
the reason, setting out in detail the conservation and/or building performance issues that
have resulted in this recommendation.
b. The potential for improvements in ventilation, air tightness and moisture control within the
building, ensuring that these are considered in balance with that of the welfare of the
historic building fabric. In general, tighter building fabric can be balanced with controlled
ventilation improvements (passive and mechanical) and the benefits and disadvantages
must be set out together with the recommendations.
3. The study must have been carried out at or prior to concept design stage (equivalent to RIBA stage
C or earlier).
4. The building design has implemented and accounted for the study’s recommended improvements
and, in particular, demonstrates:
•
•
The design strategy chosen is that which has the greatest impact in terms of potential
improvements in energy use, whilst minimising the detrimental impacts on the historic
building fabric.
That any improvements made to the thermal insulation of the building have been specified
’63
in accordance with the recommendations of ‘Thermal Insulation: avoiding risks’ .
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
118
Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
BREEAM Education 2008
Exemplary level criteria
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM
issue:
1. One additional innovation credit can be awarded where evidence provided demonstrates the
building is designed to be a carbon neutral building as defined by the NCM (i.e. in terms of building
services energy demand), as follows:
a. A new building achieves a CO2 index less than zero on the benchmark scale.
b. A refurbished building achieves a CO2 index equal to or less than zero on the benchmark
scale.
2. Two additional innovation credits can be awarded where evidence provided demonstrates the
building is designed to be a True zero carbon building (in terms of building services and operational
energy demand).
Compliance Notes
New Build
New buildings should compare their Energy Rating to the New Build
benchmark scale.
Refurbishment
Existing buildings that have undergone or are undergoing major refurbishment
should compare their Energy Rating to the Refurbishment benchmark scale.
This separate scale aims to better recognise and encourage the energyefficient refurbishment of existing buildings which results in a significant
reduction in the energy demand for that building.
Extensions to
Where an existing building is being extended (and only the new extension is
existing
being assessed) and that extension uses existing building services plant, the
buildings
energy modelling and CO2 Index must be based on the building fabric of the
new extension and any existing, common, building services plant and new
building services plant installed that will service the new extension.
The energy modelling does not have to consider the existing building
fabric where this will not form part of the scope of the BREEAM assessment.
Nor does it have to consider existing building services where they are not
supplying services (heating, cooling and/or ventilation) to the new extension
being BREEAM assessed.
Part new-build
extension part
refurbishment
For assessments of buildings that are a mixture of new build and existing
building refurbishment a weighted benchmark scale is used.
The weighted benchmark scale is determined using the area (m2) for new build
and area (m2) for refurbishment and the two benchmark scales in Table 9 CO2
index benchmarks and BREEAM credits for new build and refurbishment. If
there is a higher proportion of new build to refurbishment then the weighted
scale will be biased towards the benchmark scale for new buildings and viceversa if there is a higher proportion of refurbished element. As the benchmarks
are influenced by the split in areas between the new build element and major
refurbished element of the assessed building, the benchmarks will change if
the new build/refurbishment area totals change.
To determine the weighted benchmark scale and number of credits achieved,
2
2
the assessor must enter the area (m ) for new build and area (m ) for
refurbishment in to the relevant box of the Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 emissions
calculator.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
119
Fit Out Only
An Energy Performance Certificate is not legally required for buildings
undergoing an internal refit. For the purposes of BREEAM, however, a
building’s/unit’s CO2 index is required and therefore the process of determining
an Energy Rating must be undertaken by an accredited assessor to award any
BREEAM credits at this stage of assessment.
First Fit Out
If the Fit-Out Only assessment is a first fit-out of a new building designed after
6th April 2008 to the 2006 Part L Building Regulations then the new-build
benchmark scale must be used to determine the number of credits awarded.
Refit
If the Fit Out-only assessment is a refit of an existing building then the
refurbishment benchmark scale must be used to determine the number of
credits awarded.
Where included as part of the project and therefore assessed under this
BREEAM issue, the installation of low or zero carbon technologies can be
used to off-set the assessed building’s CO2 emissions. The LZC technology
can be installed on-site, near-site where a private wire arrangement is in place
(see relevant definitions) or off-site via accredited external renewables (see
compliance note below).
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue accredited external renewables are
renewable energy schemes located off-site, but within the UK, which:
Renewable and
low carbon
Installations
Accredited
external
renewables
•
•
•
Are accredited renewables (as defined by the Energy Act 2004). These will
be Renewable Energy Guarantee of Origin (REGO) certified
Create new installed generation capacity, designed to meet the loads of
the building (i.e. not just units of carbon)
Are additional to capacity already required under the Renewables
Obligation
At the time of writing, BRE Global are not aware of a mechanism for
accrediting off-site renewables and therefore any renewable energy schemes
that meet the above definition; though some ESCOs may achieve these
criteria.
Energy exported
to the grid
Any electricity from an onsite LZC energy source that is exported to the grid
may be included in the calculations as if it were used within the building.
EPC certificates,
BREEAM &
building
use/tenancy
arrangement
The legislative criteria for an Energy Performance Certificate vary according to
building size, use, services and tenancy arrangement. In some instances an
EPC will be required for the whole building, in others an EPC will be required
for each individual unit or tenanted area within a building. The scope of a
BREEAM assessment typically covers the whole building, regardless of
whether that building consists of a number of units to be sub let. Where an
EPC is required for each unit, for the purposes of determining the number of
BREEAM credits, the CO2 index is the total of the area-weighted average of
the CO2 index of each individual unit. Where the development contains
conditioned common and/or landlord spaces, the area of these spaces, unless
otherwise accounted for, should be divided and attributed amongst the
separate units. The proportion of common area attributed to each unit must be
equivalent to the ratio of each unit’s area as a proportion of the total area of all
units.
All units, heating systems and common areas within the assessed building
must be accounted for in the assessment of Ene 1. For further information on
the EPC criteria, refer to guidance on the Communities and Local Government
Website (see references section).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
120
Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
EPC in Scotland
BREEAM Education 2008
The approach adopted in Scotland for determining an Energy Rating differs
from that used in England, Wales and Northern Ireland. Scotland bases its
EPC rating on actual CO2 emissions, regardless of building type, whereas an
EPC certificate for the other UK countries uses a CO2 Index. Whilst both
approaches have their merit, for the purpose of comparing BREEAM-assessed
buildings on a ‘level playing field’ a decision has been taken to adopt one
approach – the CO2 Index.
Using the approved software, buildings located in Scotland can easily
determine their CO2 Index by changing the ‘Building Regulations & EPBD
parameters’ in the ‘Project details’ tab of the NCM-compliant approved
software from ‘EPC Scotland’ to ‘EPC England’ or ‘EPC Wales’ or ‘EPC
Northern Ireland’.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-3
A copy of the EPC output from the
approved software for the assessed building
at the design stage.
A copy of the final registered Energy
Performance Certificate from the approved
software for the constructed building*.
The Accredited Energy Assessor’s name
and accreditation number (this information
will be on the EPC).
For buildings assessed in Scotland, a copy of
the EPC Output from the approved software
demonstrating the building’s CO2 Index.
The accredited energy assessor’s name and
accreditation number.
*The final rating must account for any
changes
to
the
specification
during
construction; and the measured air leakage
rate, ductwork leakage and fan performances
(as required by Building Regulations).
Historic buildings only
1-3
A copy of the
specialist’s report.
heritage
conservation
The evidence required at this stage of
assessment does not differ from that outlined
at the design stage of assessment.
A letter from the specialist confirming the
qualifications, experience and IHBC status.
4
Marked-up drawings or a specification
document demonstrating:
• Implementation of the study’s
recommendations63
• Compliance with ‘Thermal Insulation:
avoiding risks’.
‘As built’ drawings and specification
demonstrating:
• Implementation of the study’s
recommendations
• Compliance with ‘Thermal Insulation:
avoiding risks’.
OR
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence demonstrating:
• Examples of the recommendations of the
study having been manifested in the
actual complete building (as highlighted
by the design team during the building
inspection).
Where a formal letter from the design team
confirming the above will be implemented.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
121
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Accredited energy assessor: An individual trained and qualified to use approved software and
produce EPC ratings for non-domestic buildings who are members of an accredited scheme. A register
of non-domestic accredited energy assessors can be found here: https://www.ndepcregister.com/
For a full list of approved accreditation schemes for Non-dwelling Energy Assessment’s visit
www.communities.gov.uk
Approved Software: Software approved by Communities and Local Government to produce Energy
Performance Certificates (EPC) for non-domestic buildings and check compliance with building
regulations.
Carbon neutral building: Where net carbon dioxide emissions resulting from energy consumed in the
operation of the space heating/cooling, hot-water systems, ventilation and internal lighting is zero or
better.
The calculation of CO2 emissions can take account of contributions from on-site, near-site and
accredited external renewable/low carbon installations. Off-site renewables that are not accredited
cannot be used to meet this definition.
CO2 Index: The energy performance of a building (for England, Wales and N.I.) is shown on the EPC
as a Carbon Dioxide (CO2) based index. It is this index that is used to determine where the building falls
on the A+ to G rating scale and the number of BREEAM credits that can be awarded.
Dynamic Simulation Model (DSM): A software tool that models energy inputs and outputs for different
types of building over time. In certain situations, SBEM will not be sophisticated enough to provide an
accurate assessment of a building’s energy efficiency. In these cases Government-approved
proprietary dynamic simulation models may be used. Communities and Local Government provide such
approval.
Historic buildings - For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, historic buildings are defined
as:
a. Listed buildings
b. Existing buildings situated in conservation areas (where the existing building itself has
conservation status and contributes to the status of the conservation area)
c. Existing buildings which are of architectural and historical interest and which are referred to
as a material consideration in a local authority’s development plan
d. Existing buildings of architectural and historic interest within national parks, areas of
outstanding natural beauty, and world heritage sites.
Institute of Historic Building Conservation (IHBC): The Institute of Historic Building Conservation
(IHBC) is the professional institute which represents conservation professionals in the public and
private sectors in the United Kingdom and Ireland. The IHBC exists to establish the highest standards
of conservation practice to support the effective protection and enhancement of the historic
environment. Full Membership of the IHBC is open to all whose principal skill, expertise, training and
employment is in providing specialist advice for the conservation of the historic environment. Full
Members are normally expected to demonstrate skills and experience under all of the IHBC's eight
Areas of Competence.
Energy Performance Certificate: A certificate that confirms the energy rating of the building from A to
G, where A is the most efficient and G is the least efficient. The better the rating, the more energyefficient the building is, and the lower the fuel bills are likely to be. The energy performance of the
building is shown as a Carbon Dioxide (CO2) based index. EPCs are generated using approved
software by accredited energy assessors.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
122
Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
BREEAM Education 2008
Non-Domestic Energy Performance Certificate Register: A register of accredited energy assessors
and Energy Performance Certificates. Using the certificate reference number the validity of the EPC
rating for a constructed building can be confirmed.
Near-site LZC: renewable energy generated near to the site that is provided for all or part of the
community, including the assessed building, e.g. decentralised energy generation linked to a
community heat network or renewable connected via private wire.
On-site LZC: renewable energy generated on the site of the assessed development.
Private wire arrangement: Where used in the context of BREEAM for low or zero carbon technology
installations, a private wire arrangement is where any electricity generated on or in the vicinity of the
site is fed directly to the building being assessed, by dedicated power supplies. If electricity is
generated which is surplus to the instantaneous demand of the building this electricity may be fed back
to the National Grid. The carbon benefit associated with any electricity fed into the grid in this manner
can only be allocated against an individual installation or building. In cases where a building is supplied
by a communal installation, no carbon benefit can be allocated to buildings which are not connected to
the communal installation.
Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM): SBEM is a computer program that provides an analysis of
a building’s energy consumption. The SBEM tool is designed to cover buildings that are not dwellings. It
has been adopted by government as part of the UK national methodology for calculation of the energy
performance of buildings. For more information visit: www.ncm.bre.co.uk/.
True zero carbon building: Where net carbon dioxide emissions resulting from energy consumed in
the operation of the space heating/cooling, hot-water systems, ventilation, internal lighting AND process
related energy consumption is zero or better.
The calculation of CO2 emissions can take account of contributions from on-site, near-site and
accredited external renewable/low carbon installations. Off-site renewables that are not accredited
cannot be used to meet this definition.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Ene 2
Ene 2 Sub-metering of substantial Energy Uses
Issue Title
Sub-metering of Substantial Energy Uses
No. of credits
available
1
123
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of inuse energy consumption.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Separate accessible energy sub-meters, labelled with the end energy consuming use, are provided
for the following systems (where present):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Space Heating
Domestic Hot Water
Humidification
Cooling
Fans (major)
Lighting
Small Power (lighting and small power can be on the same sub-meter where supplies are
taken at each floor/department).
h. Other major energy-consuming items where appropriate (see Compliance Notes).
2. All energy sub-meters have a pulsed output to enable future connection to a Building Management
System (BMS) for the monitoring of energy consumption.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building
existing
services plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and
buildings
existing building, the criteria for energy metering cover the entire building.
Fit Out Only
Where the assessment stakeholder is a tenant within a landlordowned/operated development with central plant provision, then the central
plant must be assessed against the criteria of this issue. This is in addition to
the provision of sub-metering of any other substantial uses within the tenant’s
space that are independent of other tenant units and common areas.
Lighting & small
power
Due to traditional distribution methods, it can be difficult to cost-effectively
separate lighting and small power. It is acceptable, within a single floor, for
lighting and small power to be combined for metering purposes, provided that
sub-metering is provided for each floor plate.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
124
Ene 2 Sub metering of Substantial Energy Uses
Other major
energyconsuming items
Modular boiler
systems
Accessible
meters
BREEAM Education 2008
Other major energy-consuming items, depending on the building type, might
include, for example, plant used for swimming or hydrotherapy pools, kitchen
plant, cold storage plant, laboratory plant, sterile services equipment,
transportation systems (e.g. lifts & escalators) drama studios and theatres with
large lighting rigs. See also CIBSE TM39: Building Energy Metering64
Where the building uses a modular system and the rated input power of the
lead boiler is less than the figure in Table 10 Size of plant for which separate
metering would be required(Additional Information), but greater than 10kW
(see Additional Information), sub-metering of the lead boiler is still required to
comply with the criteria of this issue.
The energy meters must be located in an area of the building that allows for
easy access to facilitate regular monitoring and readings by the buildings staff
and facilities manager. Typically this will be the plant room, main distribution
room or control room (where BMS is installed).
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
All
Specification document or technical
drawings confirming:
• Energy-consuming systems and their
rated outputs
• Metering arrangements for each
system, type and location of meter
specified.
• If applicable, scope of BMS and its
energy-monitoring capability.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Location and labelling/function of the
individual sub-meters or BMS.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
BMS: Building (energy) Management System is a central computer controlling, monitoring and
optimising building services and systems such as heating, air-conditioning, lighting and security.
Common areas: Developments that have several tenant units, particularly large retail developments,
may also share common facilities and access that is not owned or controlled by any one individual
tenant, but used by all. Common areas are typically managed and maintained by the development’s
owner, i.e. landlord or their managing agent. Examples of common areas include an atrium, external
areas e.g. parking, stairwells and main entrance foyers/reception.
65
Table 10 Size of plant for which separate metering would be required
Plant Item
Rated input
power (kW)
Boiler installation comprising one or more boilers or CHP plant
feeding a common distribution circuit
50
Chiller installations comprising one or more chiller units
feeding a common distribution circuit
20
Electric humidifiers
10
Motor control centres providing power to fans and pumps
10
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Final electrical distribution boards
Ene 2 Sub-metering of substantial Energy Uses
125
50
Detailed guidance on how to develop an appropriate metering strategy for the energy criteria of a new
building is available in CIBSE TM39 Building Energy Metering64 and General Information Leaflet 65:
Metering energy use in new non-domestic buildings66.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
126
Ene 3 Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas
Issue ID
Ene 3
Issue Title
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Sub-metering of High Energy Load and
Tenancy Areas
Minimum
standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of inuse energy consumption by tenant or end user.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Secondary schools, sixth form and further and higher education colleges only
1. Provision of accessible sub-meters covering the energy supply to all tenanted, or in the case of
single occupancy buildings, relevant function areas or departments within the building/unit.
2. The meters are labelled with the end energy consuming use.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
Fit Out-Only assessments.
Schools
This issue is applicable to secondary schools. It is not applicable to pre-school
and primary school buildings/developments.
Relevant
This list is not exclusive and where other high-energy consuming
function areas / areas/departments exist these should also be metered:
departments
• Kitchens (excluding small staff kitchens and food technology rooms)
• Computer suites
• Workshops
• Lecture halls
• Conference rooms
• Drama studio
• Swimming pool
• Sports hall
• Process areas
• Laboratories
• High containment suites within laboratories
• Controlled environment chambers
• Animal accommodation areas
• Data centres
• I.T work and study rooms, including I.T equipped library space and any
2
space with provision of more than 1 PC terminal per 5m
Individual sub-metering of standard classrooms/seminar rooms is not required.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Accessible
meters
Ene 3 Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas
127
Refer to the Compliance Notes in BREEAM issue Ene 2 for a description.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
Marked-up drawings and site plan detailing:
• Building areas by department/function
and/or tenancy
• Location of meters.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Location and function of the individual
sub-meters or BMS.
Specification document or technical
drawings confirming:
• Metering arrangements for each
department/function and/or tenancy
area
• Type of meter specified.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
BMS: Refer to definitions in BREEAM issue Ene 2.
Energy supply: All types of energy supplied to a building area (department / tenancy / unit) within the
boundary of the assessed development; including electricity, gas, heat or other form of energy/fuel
which is consumed as a result of the use of and operations within each relevant area.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
128
Ene 4 External Lighting
Issue ID
Ene 4
Issue Title
External Lighting
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of energy-efficient light fittings for external areas of the
development.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance (where provided):
1. All external light fittings for the building, access ways and pathways have a luminous efficacy of at
least 50 lamp lumens/circuit Watt when the lamp has a colour rendering index (Ra) greater than or
equal to 60. OR 60 lamp Lumens / circuit Watt when the lamp has a colour rendering index (Ra)
less than 60.
2. All external light fittings to car parking areas, associated roads and floodlighting has a luminous
efficacy of at least 70 lamp lumens/circuit Watt when the lamp has a colour rendering index (Ra)
greater than or equal to 60. OR 80 lamp Lumens / circuit Watts when the lamp has a colour
rendering index (Ra) less than 60.
3. All external light fittings for signs and uplighting have a luminous efficacy of at least 60 lamp
lumens/circuit Watt when the lamp wattage is greater than or equal to 25W. OR 50 lamp
lumens/circuit Watt when the lamp wattage is less than 25W.
4. External light fittings are controlled through a time switch, or daylight sensor, to prevent operation
during daylight hours. Daylight sensor override on a manually switched lighting circuit is acceptable.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Single building
assessments on
larger
developments/
campuses
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Refer to the guidance below for single building assessments on large existing
developments/campuses.
Where the building being assessed forms part of larger development (or is an
extension to an existing building) containing common areas and other
buildings, the scope of the external lighting criteria apply only to external new
and existing lighting within the construction zone of the assessed building.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
No external
lighting specified
Where the building is designed to operate without external lighting, including
external lighting on the building, signs and at entrances, the credit can be
awarded.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Low energy
innovative light
fittings
Decorative and
floodlighting
Ene 4 External Lighting
129
Any fitting that consumes less than 5W complies with the criteria provided
each individual fitting is a direct replacement for an alternative, individual
BREEAM-compliant fitting and provides an equivalent amount of light for the
necessary task. The assessor must ensure that several low watt fittings are not
being specified in place of one higher watt but overall more energy-efficient
fitting. This compliance note is to allow for the specification of innovative low
energy light sources, such as LEDs.
Decorative lighting and floodlighting must not be exempt from the assessment
criteria although temporary lighting such as theatrical, stage or local display
installations, where specified, may be excluded.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-4
Marked-up site plan and building elevations
showing:
• Location and purpose of all external
lighting fittings.
As
design
stage,
documentation.
Lighting specification or lighting designer’s
calculations confirming:
• Lamp lumens/circuit watt for each type
of fitting as well as the colour rendering
index Ra (where appropriate)
• External lighting control strategy..
Assessor’s building/site inspection
photographic evidence confirming:
• External lighting controls.
but
‘as
built’
AND
and
Manufacturers’ literature confirming:
• Technical spec for the installed external
light fittings.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Colour rendering index (Ra): A measure, between 0 and 100, of the ability of a lamp to reproduce the
colour of objects in comparison to their aspect under a natural or reference source of light. An
incandescent source has a Ra of 100 and a low pressure sodium source a Ra of 0 (see below for
further information on colour rendering).
Construction zone: For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is
being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building and its external site areas i.e. the scope of the
new works.
Daylight Sensors: A type of sensor that detects daylight and switches lighting on at dusk and off at
dawn.
Luminous efficacy in lamp Lumens per circuit Watt: The ratio between the luminous flux produced
by a lamp (in Lumens) and the total power consumed by both the lamp and its associated control gear
(in Watts).
Time switch: A switch with an inbuilt clock which will allow lighting to be switched on and off at
programmed times.
Colour Rendering
At night time, the sensitivity of the eye is shifted towards the blue region of the visual spectrum. As a
result, lamps with poor colour rendering index, such as some sodium lamps that emit
light between the yellow and red region of the visual spectrum, require more luminous output to light an
object with the same level of brightness than a source with better colour rendering index. Sources with
a poor colour rendering index also make the differentiation of coloured objects more difficult for
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
130
Ene 4 External Lighting
BREEAM Education 2008
individuals.
In BS 5489-1:200367 Code of practice for the design of road lighting - Part 1: Lighting of roads and
public amenity areas, this is acknowledged by allowing a relaxation of the lighting levels (illuminance
levels) required when the source specified has a colour rendering index Ra greater than or equal to 60.
The colour rendering index requirement means compliance with this issue using sources of light with a
poor colour rendering index is harder to achieve than those with an index greater than or equal to 60.
Other benefits of using sources with an index greater than 60 include an increased feeling of safety for
individuals, making recognition of spaces and other individuals easier. In areas where CCTV is used,
the colour rendering index of lighting sources is critical; an Ra value of at least 80 is recommended (but
not required by BREEAM).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Issue Title
Ene 5
Low or Zero Carbon Technologies
Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies
No. of credits
available
3
131
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To reduce carbon emissions and atmospheric pollution by encouraging local energy generation from
renewable sources to supply a significant proportion of the energy demand.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit
1. A feasibility study has been carried out by an energy specialist (see Compliance Notes) to establish
the most appropriate local (on-site or near-site) LZC energy source for the building/development.
This study covers as a minimum:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Energy generated from LZC energy source per year
Payback
Land use
Local planning criteria
Noise
Feasibility of exporting heat/electricity from the system
Life cycle cost/lifecycle impact of the potential specification in terms of carbon emissions
Any available grants
All technologies appropriate to the site and energy demand of the development.
Reasons for excluding other technologies.
2. A local LZC energy technology has been specified for the building/development in line with the
recommendations of the above feasibility study.
3. The feasibility study has been carried out at RIBA stage C (concept design) or equivalent
procurement stage.
OR
4. The organisation that occupies the building has in place a contract with an energy supplier to
provide electricity for the assessed building/development from a 100% renewable energy source.
This supply must be delivered by an accredited external renewable source. The contract must be
valid for a minimum of 3 years from the date the assessed building becomes occupied.
Second credit
1. The first credit for a feasibility study must be achieved.
2. A local LZC energy technology has been installed in line with the recommendations of the above
feasibility study and this method of supply results in a 10% reduction in the building’s CO2
emissions.
3. Figures used for calculations of the percentage carbon reduction provided by LZC technology are
based on the output from approved energy modelling software.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
132
Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies
BREEAM Education 2008
Third credit
1. The first credit for a feasibility study must be achieved.
2. A local LZC energy technology has been installed in line with the recommendations of the above
feasibility study and this method of supply results in a 15% reduction in the building’s CO2
emissions.
3. Figures used for calculations of the percentage carbon reduction provided by LZC technology are
based on the output from approved energy modelling software.
Exemplary level criteria
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM
issue.
1. The first credit for a feasibility study must be achieved.
2. A local LZC energy technology has been installed in line with the recommendations of the above
feasibility study and this method of supply results in a 20% reduction in the building’s CO2
emissions.
3. Figures used for calculations of the percentage carbon production provided by LZC technology are
based on the output from approved energy modelling software.
Buildings complying with the exemplary level criteria would therefore achieve four credits for this issue.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
Existing installed LZC technologies can be used to assess compliance with
this BREEAM issue. In circumstances where the percentage total building
energy demand requirement is met by such existing systems, the credit(s) can
be awarded without the need for a feasibility study.
Feasibility study
When undertaking a feasibility study at a later stage than outline proposals, an
additional element will need to be included in the report to highlight the local
LZC energy sources which have been discounted due to the constraints
placed on the project by the late consideration, and the reason for their
omission. If the feasibility study discounts all local LZC as unfeasible due to
the late stage in the project that the study was commissioned, then the credit
for the feasibility study must be withheld.
If the feasibility was commissioned at the outline proposals stage or earlier and
in the unlikely event the study concludes that the specification of any local LZC
technology is unfeasible, the first credit can still be awarded. Subsequent
credits for installing LZC technology that meets a percentage of building
energy demand will not be achievable.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
List of
recognised LZC
technologies
Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies
133
Technologies recognised by the Department for Business Enterprise and
Regulatory Reform (BERR) Low Carbon Buildings Programme (LCBP) may be
considered as part of a low or zero carbon emissions solution. The following
list details the technologies recognised by the BERR, LCBP at the time of
going to print:
Solar
• Solar hot water
• Photovoltaics
Water
• Small scale hydro power
• Tidal power
• Wave power
Wind
• Wind turbines
Biomass
• Biomass single room heaters/stoves
• Biomass boilers
• Biomass community heating schemes
Combined Heat and Power (CHP) for use with the following fuels:
• Biomass
• Natural gas
• Sewerage gas and other biogases
CHP systems must meet the threshold criteria for good quality CHP as set by
DEFRA’s CHPQA programme68
Community heating, including utilising waste heat from processes such as
large scale power generation where the majority of heating comes from waste
heat (see also Compliance Notes below).
Heat Pumps
• Ground source heat pumps
• Water source heat pumps
• Geothermal heating systems
• Air source heat pumps
For heat pumps to comply, the heat source (ground or water) must be from a
renewable source, for example soil, outside air, ground water, or a river.
Other
• Fuel cells using hydrogen generated from any of the above ’renewable’
sources
The list above is not a definitive list of technologies compliant with BREEAM,
but a list of those technologies that may be considered to comply. If the
assessor has a justified reason to doubt the low or zero carbon
credentials/feasibility of the above technologies, where specified for a
development they are assessing, they can justifiably withhold the available
BREEAM credits.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
134
Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies
BREEAM Education 2008
LZC technology
not listed
Other systems may be acceptable as part of a LZC strategy under this issue
but are not inherently considered as LZC technologies. Acceptability will be
dependent on the nature of the system proposed. The BREEAM Assessor
must confirm acceptability with BRE if in doubt.
Waste heat from
a building
related
operational
process
Waste heat from a process that takes place within the assessed building (or on
the assessed site), for the purpose of this BREEAM issue, can be considered
as ‘Low carbon’. This is on the condition that the generation of the heat from
the process is integral to the assessed building.
Waste
incineration
Waste heat from an incineration plant can only be considered as a low carbon
for the purpose of this BREEAM issue under the following circumstances:
1. All other LZC technologies have been considered and discounted in the
feasibility study. And either
2. The Local Authority or region in which the incineration plant is located is
demonstrably meeting its annual waste reuse/recycling targets and waste
management policies. Or
3. A near- or onsite facility connected to the building, via a private wire
arrangement, which demonstrably removes re-usable and recyclable
waste material prior to incineration.
Given the current uncertainty over their impact on biodiversity, global food
production and green house gas savings, plus the ease of inter-changeability
between fossil fuels, BREEAM does not recognise or reward building systems
fuelled by first generation biofuels manufactured from feedstock’s e.g. biofuels
manufactured from sugars, seeds, grain, animal fats etc. BREEAM will
recognise systems using second generation biofuels (see relevant definitions)
or biofuels manufactured from biodegradable waste materials e.g. biogas, or
locally and sustainably sourced solid biofuels e.g. woodchip, wood pellets.
Biofuels
Community and
off-site schemes
Export to the
grid
More than one
technology
Building
assessed part of
a larger
development
LZC technology
already
available on site
Calculation of
the CO2
emissions
saved
‘Local’ does not have to mean on-site and community schemes (near site) can
be used as means of demonstrating compliance. As this BREEAM issue seeks
to encourage the installation of on-site and near-site LZC technologies,
accredited external renewables (accept where stated to achieve one credit)
cannot be used to demonstrate compliance with the criteria of this BREEAM
issue.
Any electricity from an onsite LZC energy source that is exported to the grid
may be included in the calculations as if it were used within the building.
The percentage can be made up from more than one of the above
technologies.
Where the building under assessment forms part of a larger development and
either a new or existing LZC installation is provided for the whole site, then the
amount of LZC energy generation counted for in this issue, and subsequent
CO2 emissions saved, should be proportional to the building’s energy demand
compared to the total energy demand for the site (see also note below on
existing LZC technology).
For developments where there is an existing LZC energy source that can
supply a compliant percentage of energy to the assessed building, a feasibility
study will still have to be carried out to demonstrate that the existing
technology is the most appropriate for the assessed building/development. The
study should seek to identify any other options to supply a higher proportion of
the building's energy demand in addition to that supplied by the existing
source.
When calculating the energy contribution and CO2 emissions saved from the
LZC installation the following rules should be applied:
• The net yield of the LZC installation(s) must be used (i.e. subtract any CO2
related to the energy used by the LZC technology itself such as pumps,
inverters, controllers, etc).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies
•
Process-related
energy
135
The percentage CO2 savings should be calculated using the following
assumptions:
o Renewable heat energy is displacing gas where the location for
the building would practically have access to a gas connection.
Where there is no access to a gas connection assume oil is being
displaced.*
o Renewable electrical energy is displacing grid electricity at the
national CO2 conversion rate.
* The design team is required to provide the assessor with sufficient
justification that gas is not available.
For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, energy and subsequent
CO2 emissions from process-related activities can be excluded from the total
when calculating the percentage reduction in CO2 emissions. For example
energy required for cold storage, catering facilities and laundry equipment can
be excluded. Display lighting energy demand, where specified, must not be
excluded.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
First Credit
1&3
A copy of the feasibility study report.
Letter from the energy specialist confirming:
• Compliance with the definition of an
energy specialist
• The timing of the feasibility report within
the plan of works.
2
Assessor’s building/site inspection (or “as
built” drawings) and photographic evidence
confirming:
• Installation of LZC technology.
Marked-up design plan or specification
confirming:
• Proposed installation of LZC energy
technology.
Manufacturer’s technical data and details or
calculations stating the carbon savings as a
result of the installed LZC technology.
4
Where an offsite supply is being used as a
method
of
compliance,
supplier’s
documentation confirming:
• Name and details of supplier
• Details of the source of supply.
As design stage evidence.
A copy of the contract or other formal
documentation confirming the length of
contract to supply 100% renewable energy.
Second, Third & Exemplary Level Credit
1
Evidence (as outlined above) confirming
compliance with the first credit.
2&3
A copy of the report produced by the
approved energy modelling software
illustrating;
Evidence (as outlined above) confirming
compliance with the first credit.
Where there have been changes to the
proposed design or LZC technology
specification, a copy of the ‘as built’ report
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
136
Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies
•
•
•
The name of the approved software
used to carry out the modelling
Confirmation of the expertise and
experience of the individual carrying out
the modelling
Total CO2 emissions for the assessed
building
(without
LZC
energy
technology).
BREEAM Education 2008
produced by the Building Regulationscompliant energy model confirming the
same data as outlined at the design stage.
AND
Calculations/outputs from the manufacturer,
supplier, engineer or approved software
confirming:
• Total carbon savings as a result of the
installed LZC technology.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Accredited External Renewables: Please refer to the Compliance Notes in BREEAM issue Ene 1.
Approved Energy Modelling Software: Please refer to the relevant definitions in BREEAM issue Ene
1.
Energy Specialist: An individual who has acquired substantial expertise or a recognised qualification
for undertaking assessments, designs and installations of low or zero carbon solutions in the
commercial buildings sector; and is not professionally connected to a single low or zero carbon
technology or manufacturer.
First and second generation biofuels: first generation biofuels are biofuels made from sugar, starch,
vegetable oil, or animal fats using conventional technology. Second generation biofuels are biofuels
from lignocellulosic biomass feedstock using advanced technical processes69 Common first generation
biofuels include vegetable oil, biodiesel and bioalchols.
Feasibility credit objective: The objective of the feasibility study is to make sure that LZC energy
technologies installed on a particular site are the most appropriate for this site and ensure maximum
reduction of pollutants to the atmosphere. Therefore, no credit can be awarded if a feasibility study has
not been undertaken.
Life Cycle Costs: the total cost of a building or its parts throughout its life, including the costs of
planning, design, acquisition, operations, maintenance and disposal, less any residual value, in terms of
carbon emissions.
Life cycle impact: this is the requirement to look at the carbon balance of each technology over its
whole life. Encouraging people to not just the savings or emissions over its operational life but also the
savings or emissions over the whole life of the technology (from ‘cradle to grave’), therefore reflecting
the fact that different technologies have different life spans.
Near-site LZC: Please refer to the relevant definitions in BREEAM issue Ene 1.
On-site renewable: Please refer to the relevant definitions in BREEAM issue Ene 1.
Private wire arrangement: Please refer to the relevant definitions in BREEAM issue Ene 1.
Payback period: the period of time needed for a financial return on an investment to equal the sum of
the original investment.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Ene 6
Ene 6 Building fabric performance and avoidance of air infiltration
Issue Title
Building fabric performance and avoidance
of air infiltration
No. of credits
available
137
Minimum
standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures taken to minimise heat loss and air infiltration through the
building fabric.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Higher Education building types only
Design measures
Where all of the measures below have been specified/installed to minimise heat loss and air infiltration
through the building fabric from treated/conditioned spaces:
1. Installation of personnel door(s) between internal and external areas within proximity of any
adjacent openings for goods delivery access; AND a draught lobby between office areas (where
present) and the external building access.
2. Delivery loading/unloading areas and operational and/or storage areas are partitioned (see also
compliance note on relevancy of design measures).
3. Where present all goods/personnel access, vents in the roof and backdraught dampers on extract
fans are draught sealed.
4. Loading/unloading bay doors insulated to 0.6 W/m2K.
5. Plastic strip curtains are specified between internal delivery areas and other internal warehouse
storage or operational areas (where there is no other draught sealing or doors). The strip curtains
should have a partial overlap.
6. Either of the following are specified on the external goods doors/vehicle delivery bays:
a. Plastic strip curtains (with a partial overlap)
b. Air curtains (not door heaters) covering the entire width of the opening
c. Pneumatic dock seals mounted on all vehicle delivery bays.
7. Rapid rise loading/unloading bay doors with at least 1.0 m/sec closing speed or less than 5 secs
closing time between fully opened and fully closed are specified/installed.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
138
Ene 6 Building fabric performance and avoidance of air infiltration
BREEAM Education 2008
As built performance measures
8. In addition to the above and Building Regulations requirement for air tightness testing, a
comprehensive thermographic inspection of the building fabric (once construction is complete) has
been or will be undertaken to confirm the following:
a. Continuity of insulation in accordance with the construction drawings
b. Avoidance of excessive thermal bridging
c. No air leakage paths through the fabric (except through intentional openings)
9. The inspection has been, or will be, carried out in accordance with BS EN 13187 Qualitative
detection of thermal irregularities in building envelopes. Infrared method70 and CIBSE TM23:2000
Testing Buildings for Air Leakage71.
10. Any defects identified via the inspection are rectified and the building re-inspected to confirm it
complies with the criteria of point 8.
11. Plus, where integral cold storage facilities are present, these have been tested and commissioned
in accordance with the cold storage criteria of BREEAM issue Man 1.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Scope of the
thermographic
survey
The thermographic survey must ensure that all exterior walls to treated areas
and all walls separating treated and untreated spaces will be tested.
Where some
design measures
are not relevant
If some of the design measures are not relevant, e.g. partitioning between
delivery and storage areas may not be practical because of operational
reasons or the building/unit is too small; the assessor may omit them from the
assessment. In such instances the design team must provide the assessor
with an adequate statement of justification as to why this is the case. The
assessor must use their discretion in determining the validity of the case and
reference any justification and design team statement in the formal BREEAM
report.
No heated or air
conditioned
areas
Where the scope of the building specification covers fitted-out elements and
the building is designed to be untreated then the requirement to comply with
the ‘as built’ performance measures can be omitted. The design measures are
still applicable for future-proofing i.e. in the event that the building at some
point has heating and/or air conditioning plant installed.
Scope of the
issue
This issue is applicable only for assessments of buildings that have a
warehouse storage/operational area and/or dedicated vehicle delivery
bays/access. Where this is not the case the issue will be filtered from the list of
applicable issues by the BREEAM assessor’s spreadsheet tool. Where the
issue is applicable, the ‘as built’ performance measures i.e. the requirement for
a thermographic survey applies to the whole building, not just the
warehouse/delivery area (to ensure completeness of the measures).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Schools and
further education
buildings
Synergy with Ene
1
Ene 6 Building fabric performance and avoidance of air infiltration
139
This issue is not assessed for pre-schools, schools, sixth form and further
educational buildings.
It should be recognised that whilst there is only one credit available for this
BREEAM issue, the benefit of installing the above measures will also be
recognised in BREEAM issue Ene 1, Reduction of CO2 emissions. This
BREEAM issue is provided in addition to Ene 1 to recognise and encourage
specific measures taken to reduce air infiltration to and heat loss from the
internal storage, warehousing and delivery areas of the building.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-7
A copy of the relevant clauses of the
specification or proposed design plan
confirming:
• Each
of
the relevant
measures
incorporated into the design.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic
evidence
confirming
compliance.
8-10
A copy of the specification clause(s)
confirming:
• A requirement to commission a
thermographic study
• The standards/method to which the
survey will be carried out
• A requirement to rectify any defects and
re-inspect to confirm performance.
A copy of the survey report or certificate
confirming either:
• No consequential defects in construction
details or continuity of insulation. OR
• All consequential defects remedied
following re-inspection.
Evidence as outlined under BREEAM issue
Man 1 for the relevant requirement.
Evidence as outlined under BREEAM issue
M1 for the relevant requirement.
11
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Thermographic inspection: A method of producing images of a building using thermal radiation. The
images help to identify areas of the building fabric with a higher (or lower in the case of internal fabric)
than expected surface temperatures, thus indicating heat loss from, or air infiltration to, the building and
therefore highlighting construction defects.
Air curtain: A fan heater that directs a curtain of warm air downwards over an opening which prevents
the transfer of heat through the opening. Air curtains help to manage and minimise heat loss from the
building when it is necessary to open external doors or access a cold storage enclosure.
Air permeability: The Building Regulations Approved Document L2A defines air permeability as the
“physical property used to measure air tightness of the building fabric” (refer to the Approved Document
for a fuller definition).
Pneumatic dock seals: Also referred to as inflatable shelters, are structures that surround the top and
sides of a vehicle loading dock forming a seal between the building and delivery vehicle and therefore
minimising heat loss from the building.
Treated: A term to describe an area of the building that is heated and/or mechanically cooled by plant
integral to the building.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
140
Ene 6 Building fabric performance and avoidance of air infiltration
Issue ID
Issue Title
Ene 7
Cold Storage
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
3
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the installation of energy efficient cold storage systems, therefore
reducing operational CO2 emissions.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Higher Educational buildings only
First credit
1. The following components, where specified as part of the cold storage refrigeration plant/strategy,
are on the ECA Energy Technology Product List or an equivalent list:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Air cooled condensing units
Automatic air purgers
Cellar cooling equipment
Commercial service cabinets (cold food storage)
Curtains, Blinds, Sliding Doors and Covers for Refrigerated Display Cabinets
Evaporative condensers
Forced air pre-coolers
Liquid pressure amplification
Refrigerated display cabinets
Refrigeration compressors
Refrigeration system controls
Second credit
2. Where the cold storage refrigeration plant complies with the following minimum criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Variable speed drives are fitted to the compressors, pumps and fans
Strip curtains are installed on the cold storage opening(s)
Low powered/heat lighting is fitted e.g. fibre optics, LEDs
Defrost on demand controls for evaporators are installed
The installed refrigeration plant, controls and monitoring system has been specified in
accordance with the guidance outlined in the Food & Drink Industry Refrigeration Efficiency
Initiative Guide 2 Purchase of Efficient Refrigeration plant
The plant has been commissioned in compliance with the criteria for cold food storage
commissioning outlined in BREEAM Issue Man 1 Commissioning (this does not necessarily
require BREEAM Issue M1 to have been awarded).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Ene 7 Cold Storage
141
Third credit
3. Where the plant is capable of EITHER of the following free cooling/heating strategies:
•
•
Thermal storage during periods of low load to provide additional cooling during periods of
peak cooling load OR
Heat recovery of the waste heat to meet in part or full space heating and/or hot water
criteria for the assessed building or other local demand e.g. air curtain above the cold
storage enclosure entrance.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
The criteria apply to any new or existing refrigeration plant. If the existing
building contains refrigeration plant that will remain, then this plant must meet
the criteria in order to achieve the credit.
Extensions to
If the assessment comprises of a part new build-extension and part
existing
refurbishment and there is existing cold storage plant in the existing building
buildings
that also serves the new extension, then the compliance note above for
refurbishment applies.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Buildings with no
integral cold
storage
system(s)
Awarding the
credits
If the building does not contain cold storage system(s), this issue is not
applicable to the assessment. In such instances the BREEAM assessor’s
spreadsheet tool will filter this issue from the list of applicable credits.
Heat recovery or
thermal storage
unfeasible
Where the specification of thermal storage or heat recovery is unfeasible
because there will be no low load periods and/or there is no demand for
recovered heat, then the third credit can be awarded provided all the criteria of
the second credit are met. The design team must justify why there are no
feasible opportunities for heat recovery, free cooling or thermal storage.
Each of the three credits can be awarded independently of each other i.e. it is
not a requirement of the second credit that the first credit is achieved, likewise
for the third credit.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
A copy of the relevant clause of the
specification
requiring
the
specific
undertaking.
The evidence required at this stage is the
same as that outlined at the design stage.
OR
A letter from the manufacturer/supplier or
copies of their technical literature confirming
the specific components are on the ECA list
or compliant with ECA eligibility criteria.
OR
A print out of the ETPL listing the specific
products.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
142
Ene 6 Building fabric performance and avoidance of air infiltration
2a-e
&3
A copy of the relevant clause of the
specification confirming:
• Cold storage plant and enclosure criteria.
BREEAM Education 2008
The evidence required at this stage is the
same as that outlined at the design stage.
AND/OR
2f
A letter from the manufacturer/supplier or
copies of their technical literature confirming
compliance.
Evidence as outlined under BREEAM issue
Man 1 for the relevant requirement.
Evidence as outlined under BREEAM issue
Man 1 for the relevant requirement.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Defrost on demand controls for evaporators: A control system that automatically initiates a defrost
sequence when an appropriate amount control of ice has built up on the evaporator surface.
ECA Energy Technology Product List (ETPL): The EPTL list is part of the Governments Enhanced
Capital Allowance Scheme, a key part of the Government’s programme to manage climate change. The
Scheme provides a tax incentive to encourage investment in low carbon energy-saving equipment that
meets published energy-efficiency criteria. The Energy Technology List (ETL) details the criteria for
each type of technology, and lists those products in each category that meet them: www.eca.gov.uk.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Ene 8
Issue Title
Lifts
Ene 8 Lifts
No. of credits
available
143
Minimum
standards
2
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of energy-efficient transportation systems.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit
1. An analysis of transport demand and patterns for the building has been carried out by the design
team to determine the optimum number and size of lifts and counterbalancing ratio on the basis of
anticipated passenger demand.
2. The energy consumption for at least two types of lift or lift strategy ‘fit for purpose’ has been
estimated and the system with the lowest energy consumption specified.
Second credit
3. The first credit is achieved.
4. Of the following energy-efficient features, the three that offer the greatest potential energy saving
are specified:
a. The lifts operate in a stand-by mode during off-peak and idle periods. For example the
power side of the lift controller and other auxiliary equipment such as lift car lighting and
ventilation fan switch off when the lift is not in motion.
b. Where lift motors use a drive controller capable of variable-speed, variable-voltage,
variable-frequency control of the drive motor.
c. The lift has a regenerative unit so that energy generated by the lift (due to running up
empty and down full) is returned back to the grid or used elsewhere on site.
d. The lift car uses energy-efficient lighting and display lighting (>60 Lumens/watt or fittings
that consume less than 5W e.g. LEDS).
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
144
Ene 8 Lifts
Counter
balancing ratio
requirement
Exemptions
Building has no
lifts
BREEAM Education 2008
Lifts will have a specified maximum load and as such the counterbalancing
ratio will be set accordingly (generally the counterbalance ratio used is 50%).
Provided the type and number of lifts specified, and therefore maximum lift
load, is based on an appropriate analysis of transport/lift demand for the
building, then the counterbalancing ratio can be considered optimised for the
purposes of compliance with BREEAM, without necessarily requiring further
deviation of the ratio from that specified.
This BREEAM issue does not apply to buildings that are installing simple
platform/wheelchair lift or electronic ramps. If the lift forms an integral part of
the building i.e. there is a lift shaft, then it must be assessed.
Please note that this issue will not be assessed where a building contains no
lifts. In such instances the BREEAM assessor’s spreadsheet tool will filter this
issue from the list of applicable issues.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1-2
Design Stage
A copy of the relevant report or
documentation detailing the analysis
undertaken and findings/recommendations.
Post Construction Stage
The evidence required at this stage is the
same as that outlined at the design stage.
A copy of the lift specification.
3-4
A copy of the lift specification.
The evidence required at this stage is the
same as that outlined at the design stage.
OR
Formal
letter
from
the
lift
manufacturer/supplier confirming that the lift
to be installed on the project meets the
relevant criteria for the number of credits
sought.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Counterbalancing ratio: Lifts use a counterweight to balance the weight of the car plus a proportion of
the maximum weight of the passengers; this reduces the size of the drive motor required for the lift.
Lowering the counterbalancing ratio means a smaller motor and controlling drive unit are required, thus
saving energy.
ISO Draft standard CD25745-1 Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks – Part 1
Energy and conformance
It has been estimated that between 5-15% of a building’s total energy consumption can be attributed to
the operation of lifts and 58% of the energy consumption of lifts is attributable to stand-by mode.
A Working Group of an International Standards Organisation’s Technical Committee is developing a
draft standard for the Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walkways. This standard draft
standard outlines proposed procedures to be used when making energy measurements of lifts,
escalator and moving walkways.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Ene 9
Issue Title
Escalators and travelling walkways
Ene 9 Escalators and travelling walkways
No. of credits
available
N/A
145
Minimum
standards
No
Issue not assessed under this scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
146
Ene 10 Free Cooling
Issue ID
Ene 10
Issue Title
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Free Cooling
Minimum
standards
1
No
Aim
To reduce the dependency of the building on conventional mechanical refrigeration to provide adequate
thermal comfort conditions.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Where the building has ANY of the following free cooling strategies:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Night-time cooling (requires fabric to have a high thermal mass)
Ground coupled air cooling
Displacement ventilation
Ground water cooling
Surface water cooling
Evaporative cooling, direct or indirect
Desiccant dehumidification and evaporative cooling, using waste heat
Absorption cooling, using waste heat.
The building does not require any form of cooling (i.e. naturally ventilated)
2. The BREEAM issue Hea 10 Thermal Comfort has been achieved.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Information
Communication
Technology
(ICT)
classrooms
Requirement to
achieve Hea 10
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
It is possible for ICT classrooms to be designed to avoid the use of mechanical
cooling, as such they are not exempt from the requirements of this issue i.e. if
mechanical cooling is used to treat these spaces, it will not be possible to
achieve this BREEAM credit.
This requirement is set as a condition of awarding the available credits to
ensure that the cooling strategy implemented is fit for purpose i.e. it achieves
the required internal thermal comfort conditions.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Ene 10 Free Cooling
147
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
A written description from the building
services engineer summarising the ‘purpose
designed’ free cooling strategy.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The free cooling technology specified
has been installed.
A copy of the results from a dynamic
simulation
model
demonstrating
the
feasibility of the free cooling strategy.
2
Evidence as required for BREEAM issue
Hea 10 Thermal Comfort.
Evidence as required for BREEAM issue
Hea 10 Thermal Comfort.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Dynamic Simulation Model (DSM): Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 1 for a definition.
Free cooling: The ability of the building to provide cooling to the internal occupied areas without the
need to rely on energy consuming mechanical chillers.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
148
Ene 11 Energy efficient fume cupboards
Issue ID
Ene 11
Issue Title
Energy Efficient Fume Cupboards
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To ensure the energy-efficient design and operation of fume cupboards in laboratory areas.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
School, Sixth Form College and Further Education buildings only
1. Recirculatory filtered fume cupboards (as oppose to ducted fume cupboards) are specified as the
preferred option for the majority of applications (see compliance notes where ducted fume
cupboards are specified/required).
2. The specification of fume cupboards has been carried out in accordance with all relevant guidelines
and recommendations contained in;
a. Schools and sixth form: Building Bulletin 88 and if relevant:
i. BS798961: (for recirculatory fume cupboards)
ii. BS EN 14175-25 (for ducted fume cupboards, if applicable)
b. Further Education colleges: In accordance with the above British Standards, or for fume
cupboards in labs for subjects up to and including A’ Level, compliance with Building
Bulletin 88 would also be acceptable.
3. If ducted fume cupboards are specified, the fume cupboards have a face velocity of less than or
equal to 0.5 m/s (see compliance notes).
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the
existing
assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria specific to fit-out only assessments.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Requirement 2
for schools and
sixth form
Higher
Education
buildings
Filtered vs.
Ducted fume
cupboards
Ene 11 Energy efficient fume cupboards
149
For fume cupboards specified/installed for up to and including A’ Level subjects,
specification and installation in accordance with Building Bulletin 88 will be
acceptable for BREEAM compliance. BS7989 and parts of BS14175 may be
relevant to some installations, such as those that will use ducted fume
cupboards. In these cases the person/organisation responsible for
producing/installing the equipment should be able to confirm their relevance
given the type of fume cupboard installation.
The energy efficiency of fume cupboards in higher educational buildings is
assessed as part of BREEAM issue Ene 19. As such BREEAM issue Ene 11 is
not applicable to higher education type buildings.
The performance specifications for fume cupboards used in schools tend to be
lower than that required for universities, research institutes and industry. As a
result, typically, filtered fume cupboards i.e. those not requiring a ducted system
for extract, are the most energy efficient option for schools (up to and including A
Level subjects).
However, where the project requires ducted fume cupboards for the purpose of
meeting the brief, the credit can still be awarded. For example, where the nature
of the laboratory space and the type of experiments undertaken require, for
health and safety reasons, full extraction from the internal space. This is only
likely to be the case for a building undertaking lab based research that exceeds
A Level subject areas, i.e. commercial R&D labs and some further or higher
education functions/subjects.
Fume cupboard
face velocity
CIBSE Guide B272 recommends a face velocity of 0.5m/s in order to achieve
good containment but advises that adequate containment may be achievable at
lower face velocities. Due to safety considerations however, in some
circumstances meeting the requirement for a face velocity of 0.5 m/s may not be
feasible. Where this is not achievable, justification must be provided and the
lowest possible face velocity specified for the degree of containment required.
For schools, up to and including A Level chemistry, there is unlikely to be a
requirement for fume cupboards to exceed a face velocity of 0.5m/s, based on
the current curriculum demands.
Building has no
fume cupboards
Please note that this issue will not be assessed where a building contains no lab
space and fume cupboards. In such instances the BREEAM assessor’s
spreadsheet tool will filter this issue from the list of applicable Issues.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&3
A highlighted copy of the fume cupboard
specification or a formal letter from the
design team confirming:
• Type of fume cupboards to be installed
• Design & specification will be in
compliance with relevant standard(s).
• The fume cupboards face velocity
(where applicable).
The evidence required at this stage is the
same as that outlined at the design stage.
AND
Formal written confirmation from the design
team or relevant contractor that the fume
cupboards installed were those specified in
the compliant evidence.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
150
Ene 12 Swimming pool ventilation and heat loss
Issue ID
Issue Title
Ene 12
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Swimming pool ventilation and heat loss
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce unnecessary energy consumption of heating and ventilation plant for pool areas.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Where automatic or semi-automatic pool covers are fitted to ALL pools, including spa pools and
jacuzzi (if relevant) within the building.
2. The covers envelop the entire pool surface when fully extended.
3. Where the air temperature in the pool hall can be controlled so that it is 1˚C above the water
temperature.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
Fit Out Only
Building has no
pools
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Please note that this issue will not be assessed where a building contains no
pools. In such instances the BREEAM assessor’s spreadsheet tool will filter
this issue from the list of applicable issues.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1
Design Stage
Design drawing highlighting:
• All pools within the building.
A copy of the specification confirming:
• Requirement and type of pool covers to
be installed.
If available at the time of assessment,
manufacturer’s/supplier’s details/technical
documentation.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Post Construction Stage
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Installation of compliant covers on all
pools.
• Heating and ventilation control strategy
for the pool areas.
BREEAM Education 2008
2
Ene 12 Swimming pool ventilation and heat loss
151
A copy of the M&E specification confirming:
• Heating and ventilation control strategy
for the pool areas.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
152
Ene 12 Swimming pool ventilation and heat loss
Issue ID
Ene 13
Issue Title
Labelled Lighting Controls
Issue not assessed under this scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
N/A
Minimum
standards
No
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Ene 14
Issue Title
BMS
Ene 14 BMS
No. of credits
available
N/A
153
Minimum
standards
No
Issue not assessed under this scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
154
Ene 15 Provision of energy efficient equipment
Issue ID
Ene 15
Issue Title
Provision of energy efficient equipment
Issue not assessed under this scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
N/A
Minimum
standards
No
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Ene 16
Issue Title
CHP Community Energy
Ene 16 CHP Community Energy
No. of credits
available
N/A
155
Minimum
standards
No
Issue not assessed under this scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
156
Ene 17 Residential areas: energy consumption
Issue ID
Ene 17
Issue Title
Residential Areas: Energy Consumption
Issue not assessed under this scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
N/A
Minimum
standards
No
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Ene 18
Issue Title
Drying Space
Ene 18: Drying Space
No. of credits
available
N/A
157
Minimum
standards
No
Issue not assessed under this scheme.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
158
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
Issue ID
Ene 19
Issue Title
Energy Efficient Laboratories
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Up to 3 or 5
(dependent on
lab area)
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage buildings that are designed to minimise the CO2 emissions associated
with their operational energy consumption in laboratory areas.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Higher Education Buildings only
For buildings with laboratory function areas where the laboratory area accounts for at least 25%
of the total building floor area
Up to a total of 5 credits can be awarded as follows:
First credit
1. Laboratories with fume cupboards and/or other containment devices:
a. Achieve the credit available for BREEAM issue Hea 17 Specification of Laboratory Fume
Cupboards
b. Comply with item a) in Table 11 Best Practice Energy Practices in Laboratories
c. The measurement of volume flow rates in the exhaust duct (at the boundary of the
laboratory) take account of reductions in (inward) fume cupboard leakage
d. A reduction in air flow does not compromise the health and safety of the building
occupants.
Laboratories without fume cupboards or containment devices refer to the compliance note
below.
Up to four additional credits
2. Where fume cupboards and/or other containment devices are specified, the first credit is achieved.
3. Where the laboratory plant and systems are designed, specified and installed in compliance with
the items in Table 11 Best Practice Energy Practices in Laboratories (up to an additional four
credits for compliance with items b – l).
4. To achieve credit for an item, that chosen item must have a reasonably significant effect on the total
energy consumption of the laboratory i.e. 2% reduction or greater.
5. The energy efficient measures taken do not compromise the health and safety of the building
occupants.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
159
For buildings with laboratory function areas where the laboratory area accounts for at least 10%
of the total building floor area
Up to a total of 3 credits can be awarded as follows:
First credit
1. Where laboratories with fume cupboards and/or other containment devices comply with compliance
requirement 1 above (laboratories without fume cupboards or containment devices refer to the
compliance note below).
Additional credits
2. Where fume cupboards and/or other containment devices are specified, the first credit is achieved.
3. Where the laboratory plant and systems are designed, specified and installed in compliance with
the items in Table 11 Best Practice Energy Practices in Laboratories (up to an additional two credits
for compliance with items b – l).
4. The actions for any chosen item have a reasonably significant effect on the total energy
consumption of the laboratory i.e. 2% reduction or greater.
5. The measures taken do not compromise the health and safety of the building occupants.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Determining the
percentage of
laboratory area
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Laboratories are defined as highly serviced (temperature/ventilation/
humidity/containment controlled) spaces where physical/biological or chemical
processing and/or testing is carried out. Such areas will have an inherently
high energy requirement.
Therefore, for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, the definition of
laboratory areas excludes any laboratory support areas such as:
• Write up/offices
• Meeting rooms
• Storage
• Ancillary and other support areas with lower servicing requirements.
Teaching and other laboratories / workshops with a limited amount of fume
cupboards or other containment devices and/or no energy intensive process
equipment specified are excluded, unless the design team can provide
evidence that their consumption is at least 50% higher than a typical office due
to the laboratory process related activities. Benchmarks for general offices can
be found in Table 1 in CIBSE TM46 Energy Benchmarks73.
Typically, in buildings where 40% of the floor area is laboratory related, only
10% will actually constitute laboratory areas as per the BREEAM definition.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
160
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
Laboratories with
or without fume
cupboards
Awarding the
additional credits
Synergy with
BREEAM issue
Ene 1
Pre-Schools,
Schools and
Further
Education
buildings
BREEAM Education 2008
In laboratories with fume cupboards/containment devices the first credit must
be achieved in order to award any of the additional credits. Where a laboratory
has no fume cupboards and/or containment devices the maximum number of
credits available is as follows:
• Four credits for laboratory areas >25% of the total building area. OR
• Two credits for laboratory areas >10% and <25% of the total building area.
Determined through compliance with items b – l in the Table 11 Best Practice
Energy Practices in Laboratories
When awarding credits using the additional items listed in the table, please
note that only whole credits can be awarded. Therefore, for example, where
three and half credits are achieved this would need to be rounded down to
three credits.
This BREEAM issue has been developed to recognise improvements made to
laboratory areas/buildings, as part of the design and procurement of the
building, that currently are not recognised through the National Calculation
Methodology used to assess and award credits in Ene 1 Reduction of CO2
Emissions.
This BREEAM issue is not applicable to assessments of schools, sixth form
and further education colleges.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
Evidence as required for compliance with
BREEAM issue Hea 17.
Evidence as required in BREEAM issue
Hea17.
Specification clauses, modelling results or
manufacturers information confirming:
• Specified
fume
cupboard(s)
/
containment
device(s)
containment
performance and volume flow rate.
AND
3
Specification clauses and/or drawings and/or
modelling results demonstrating:
• Compliant technologies/energy reduction
measures.
‘As
built’
drawings/specification
and
assessors building/site inspection and
photographic evidence demonstrating:
• Installation
of
compliant
fume
cupboard(s) / containment device(s)
• Installation of the specified complaint
technologies/energy reduction
measures.
AND
4
Energy modelling results or calculations
demonstrating:
• Percentage reduction in predicted
energy
consumption
due
to
implementation of additional items in
Table 11 Best Practice Energy Practices
in Laboratories.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
A commissioning report demonstrating that
the design containment performance and
airflows have been achieved.
Evidence as outlined for the design stage of
assessment (updated if/where specification
has altered since design stage assessment).
BREEAM Education 2008
5
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
161
Confirmation in the form of a letter or email
from a relevant
design team member
confirming:
• That the energy efficiency measures
specified do not compromise the health
and safety of the building occupants.
Additional Information
Table 11 Best Practice Energy Practices in Laboratories
Item
Category
Item Description
Fume cupboard
reduced volume
flow rates
Credits1
An average design air flow rate in the fume
cupboards no greater than 0.16 m3/s per linear
metre of sash opening.
1
Fan power
Specification and achievement of best practice fan
power figures (as per Table 12 Best Practice
Specific Fan Power) for all air handling units,
laboratory extract systems, local extract
ventilation, containment area extracts (where
applicable) and fume cupboard extracts (where
applicable).
1
Fume cupboard
volume flow rates
(further reduction)
Grouping and/or
isolation of high
filtration/ventilation
activities
An average design air flow rate of <0.12 m3/s per
linear metre of sash opening.
½
Minimisation of room air change rates and overall
facility ventilation flows by grouping together or
isolating activities and equipment with high
filtration or ventilation requirements.
½
Heat recovery from exhaust air (where there is no
risk of cross-contamination) or via refrigerant or
water cooling systems.
½
e.
Energy recovery heat
Cooling recovery via exhaust air heat exchangers
(where there is no risk of cross-contamination) or
via refrigerant or water cooling systems.
½
f.
Energy recovery –
cooling
Grouping of
cooling loads
Grouping of cooling loads to enable supply
efficiencies and thermal transfer.
½
g.
Free cooling
Specification of free cooling coils in chillers or dry
air coolers related to laboratory-specific activities.
½
Load
responsiveness
Effective matching of supply with demand through
modularity, variable speed drives and pumps, and
other mechanisms.
½
Clean rooms
Specification of particle monitoring systems, linked
to airflow controls.
½
Diversity
Achievement of high levels of diversity in central
plant sizing and laboratory duct sizing, where
compatible with safety.
½
a.
Additional Items
b.
c.
d.
h.
i.
j.
k.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
162
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
l.
Room air changes
rates
BREEAM Education 2008
Reducing air change rates by matching ventilation
airflows to environmental needs and demands of
containment devices.
½
1.
Only whole credits can be awarded in BREEAM. Therefore to achieve credit for items c to l (above) the laboratory must
comply with at least two of the items.
Table 12 Best Practice Specific Fan Power
Laboratory system
Specific Fan
Power
[W/l/s]
General laboratory supply air AHUs with heating and cooling
1.5
General laboratory extract systems
1.2
Laboratory local extract ventilation – ducted
1.0
Containment area extract, without HEPA filtration
1.5
Containment area extract, with HEPA filtration
2.5
Fume cupboard extract
1.5
Relevant definitions
Laboratory Areas: A laboratory is a facility designed for collection, processing and/or testing of
specimens or procedures, some of which may be hazardous. In order to maintain controlled conditions
to enable experiments and comply with health and safety standards, typically laboratories:
•
•
•
Contain various exhaust and containment devices (such as fume cupboards and
microbiological safety cupboards)
Are heavily serviced to circulate air and to supply heating, cooling, humidity, and clean air
Often require 24-hour access and fail-safe redundant backup systems and uninterrupted power
supply or emergency power to enable irreplaceable experiments.
As a consequence laboratories can consume up to 4 times more energy than the typical office.
From www.labs21.org.uk:
Different types of laboratories have different requirements for HVAC, plug load equipment and access.
This can lead to enormous variations in energy and water requirements.
The main types of laboratories include:
Wet laboratories - where chemicals, drugs or other material or biological matter are tested and
analysed requiring water, direct ventilation and specialised piped utilities. Typically includes chemical
science laboratories. These laboratories require specially designed facilities.
Dry laboratories - contain dry stored materials, electronics, and/or large instruments with few piped
services. Typically includes engineering or analytical laboratories that may require accurate
temperature and humidity control, dust control, and clean power.
Microbiological/clinical laboratories - often involve working with infectious agents. Typically require
higher levels of primary containment and multiple secondary barriers including specialized ventilation
systems to ensure directional air flow, air treatment systems to decontaminate or remove agents from
exhaust air, controlled access zones, airlocks as laboratory entrances, or separate buildings or modules
to isolate the laboratory.
In vivo laboratories - these require highly controlled environments for the care and maintenance of
flora and fauna. The facilities are complex, and expensive to build and to operate. Tight environmental
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
163
control over the facility is required to avoid the introduction of contaminants or pathogens, and prevent
the possibility of infectious outbreaks, and avoid the transmission of odours.
Teaching laboratories - unique to academic institutes, they require space for teaching equipment,
storage space for student belongings and less instrumentation than research labs.
Cleanrooms - refers to a controlled environment (air quality, temperature and humidity) which prevent
contamination and the regulating of environmental conditions, to facilitate accurate research and
production needs. Typically used in UK universities for Nanotechnology, medical and pharmaceutical
research/studies and microelectronics applications.
Further information on the more complex items in Table 11 Best Practice Energy Practices in
Laboratories
Note: The notes below are provided as a means of explanation and advice concerning the items in the
above tables, they are not part of the assessment criteria.
Items a. and c. Volume flow rates for fume cupboards
BS EN 141756 defines a fume cupboard as a protective device to be ventilated by an induced flow of air
through an adjustable working opening.
Figure 1: Conventional vertical-sash fume cupboard
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
164
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
BREEAM Education 2008
The figure above demonstrates a traditional arrangement for a fume cupboard, this arrangement would
typically involve:
•
•
•
•
A constant volume configuration, that is, as the sash is lowered it uncovers a by-pass grille at
high level on the front face of the fume cupboard.
Flat, non-aerodynamic sides so that the internal width of fume cupboard workspace (‘W’) is very
close to the external dimension.
A normal sash opening height, to stop, (‘S’) of 0.5m.
A volume flow rate expressed to produce a face velocity (‘W’ x ‘S’) of 0.5ms-1.
It should also be noted that the exhaust airflow will increase further as a result of leakage into the fume
cupboard from routes other than the sash opening (good practice would have an objective of <5%,
although levels of >25% are not unknown in the UK). The overall airflow situation for a flat-sided,
vertical-sash fume covered can therefore be summarised as:
•
Exhaust Airflow ‘F’ = ‘W’ x ‘S’ x Face Velocity + Leakage
Applying the traditional norms and considering a 1.0m wide fume cupboard gives an exhaust airflow
demand per linear (internal) metre of :
•
Exhaust Airflow ‘F’ = 1.0m x 0.5m x 0.5ms-1 + Leakage
•
Exhaust Airflow ‘F’ = 0.25m3s-1 + Leakage
Reductions in exhaust air flows can be achieved.
A range of tried and tested options are available to reduce exhaust air flows below the traditional norm
of 0.25m3s-1. These include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reduced volume flow rates (translating into lower face velocities), being enabled/validated by
means of objective risk analysis.
Improved aerodynamics producing effective containment with lower volume flow rates/face
velocities.
Lower sash openings (reduced sash stop settings): for instance Scandinavian experience
supports 0.4m (rather than 0.5m) as producing advantages in ergonomics, safety, and energy
efficiency.
Reduced width of sash opening (per linear metre of internal space): examples can include the
use of aerodynamic entry ‘cheeks’ and horizontal/combination sashes.
Reduced leakage.
Variable air volume (VAV) extract with VAV supply tracking for make-up air with + 10%
accuracy.
The application of this metric must necessarily recognise a variety of factors associated with the
installation of fume cupboards in labs, including:
•
•
•
•
All flow rates should be measured at the cupboard exhaust to ensure that leakage is taken into
account.
Where there are multiple fume cupboard exhaust duct connections from the laboratory the total
shall be used in the calculation of the metric.
Where variable air volume (VAV) exhaust control systems are provided the average airflow rate
shall be used (‘F’ = 0.5[‘Fopen’+‘Fclosed’] where ‘Fopen’ is the situation with all fume cupboards
open and ‘Fclosed’ is the situation with all fume cupboards closed).
Where a laboratory exhaust system is arranged to have a night set-back condition (for example,
such as 100% system flow rate for 12 hours/day when a particular lab is likely to be occupied
and a reduction to 50% for 12 hours/day when the lab is unoccupied), then the time-weighted
average value for ‘F’ shall be calculated. This type of system is associated with situations in
which a 24 hour flow through the fume cupboard(s) is required for reasons of safety,
irrespective of the presence of users.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
•
•
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
165
The flow of CAV cupboards with two position operation should be calculated as the average of
the high and low flow rates.
For horizontal sash fume cupboards (with multiple, overlapping, horizontally-sliding sash panes)
the operating conditions (sashes open and closed) shall be as defined and set out in Part 3 of
BS EN 14175.
Although a variety of sizes and types of fume cupboard may be installed in a laboratory, the metric will
be unaffected since the total of the internal spaces will be used in the calculation. Examples of
situations justifying the award of the credit can be given, as below:
Example 1: Lab with 6 x 1.5m Constant Volume Fume Cupboards
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sash height (‘S’) set at 0.4m.
Aerodynamic ‘cheeks’ giving a sash opening of 1.2m (for ‘W’ = 1.5m).
Face velocity of 0.45ms-1.
Leakage of 5%.
Total exhaust volume ‘F’ = 6 x 0.4 x 1.2 x 0.45 x 1.05 = 1.3608m3s-1.
Total linear m (fume cupboard internal workspace) = 6 x 1.5 = 9.0m.
Exhaust volume/linear metre = 1.3608m3s-1/9.0 = 1.512m3s-1, and therefore qualifies for the
award of the first credit on the basis of being <0.16m3s-1.
Example 2: Lab with 10 x 1.4m Variable Volume Fume Cupboards
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sash height (‘S’) set at 0.5m.
Flat sides giving a sash opening of 1.4m (for ‘W’ = 1.4m).
Face velocity of 0.4ms-1.
Leakage of 5%.
Total VAV exhaust volume with sashes open ‘Fopen’ = 10 x 0.5 x 1.4 x 0.4 x 1.05 = 2.94m3s-1.
Total VAV exhaust volume with sashes closed (turndown of 4:1) ‘Fclosed’ = 0.25 x 2.94 =
0.735m3s-1.
Average (sashes open and closed) total VAV exhaust volume ‘F’ = 0.5 (2.94 + 0.735) =
1.8375m3s-1.
Total linear m (fume cupboard internal workspace) = 10 x 1.4 = 14.0m.
Exhaust volume/linear metre = 1.8375m3s-1/14.0 = 1.3125m3s-1, and therefore qualifies for the
award of the first credit on the basis of being <0.16m3s-1.
Item b. Fan Power
The figures in Table 12 Best Practice Specific Fan Power are based on best practice and experience at
the University of Cambridge. Fan power requirements can be reduced by a variety of means, including:
•
•
•
Use of variable speed drives.
Use of VAV fume cupboards and other containment devices with modular (or VAV) extract fans.
Low pressure drop design, which aims to reduce resistance within the ventilation system by
techniques such as low pressure drop air handling units, optimised sizing of ducts and
optimised layouts to reduce unnecessary bends and distortions (most easily enabled by use of
3D modelling software).
Item d. Grouping and/or isolation of high filtration/ventilation activities
The aim of this strategy is to avoid disproportionately high ventilation rates in all, or a significant
proportion, of a laboratory simply because it is required by a few activities or items of equipment.
Examples include:
•
Isolation of areas with higher standards (fewer particles per cubic metre of air) in clean rooms
so that the need for higher air flows is confined to a part of the room.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
166
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
•
BREEAM Education 2008
Specification of Individually Ventilated Cages (IVC) and isolators (where applicable) to provide
individual conditions where needed, to reduce the need for high air change rates for the entire
space, subject to agreement with the local Home Office inspector.
Items e. and f. Energy recovery
This should be by controllable methods (e.g. face & bypass) to avoid recovering unwanted heat that
leads to re-cooling or re-heating.
Item i. Load responsiveness
The aim of this strategy is to reduce the energy consumption of laboratory-specific equipment or
systems by avoiding plant operating at sub-optimal levels of load and/or creating wasted outputs
through a greater responsiveness to changes in demand. Examples of how this can be achieved
include:
•
•
•
Installation of modularised cooling or ventilation so that units can be switched off at periods of
low demand.
Specification of variable flow pumping systems in which the variable flow system is designed to
reduce energy consumption, not for other purposes (e.g. commissioning adjustments).
Demand controlled ventilation related to laboratory activities, e.g. through measurement of
pollutants (i.e. excluding conventional CO2-based occupancy sensing).
Note: Installation of VAV fume cupboards and/or use of variable speed drives are generally excluded
from this item as they are taken into account through items a., b. and c. However, the provision of
controls that allow face velocities to be adjusted to individual fume cupboards in large VAV fume
cupboard installations does qualify.
Item j. Particle monitoring systems in clean rooms
From an energy perspective, these systems are of benefit if they are used to reduce the air change
rates within clean rooms. Hence, evidence must be provided that this has been achieved through
linkages to air flow controls.
Item k. Diversity
Where large numbers of fume cupboards or similar containment devices are used, it is very unlikely that
all will be operating at maximum flow rates simultaneously. Hence, diversity factors can be applied to
central plant sizing and laboratory duct sizing. The levels achieved should be equivalent to, or better
than, recent Oxford University installations where a diversity of 70% has been applied to the laboratory,
and 50% to central plant. Note that the safety of any such diversity factors must be assessed in
accordance with BS EN 14175 and other relevant guidance.
l. Air change rates
In most new or refurbished laboratories, specified air change rates are not evidence-based but are
derived from ‘traditional’, empirically-derived, norms or long standing operational codes which have not
been updated. Achieving this credit requires a calculated and validated matching of ventilation airflows
to environmental needs and the demands of containment devices, which will require:
•
•
•
Identification of a documented reference case against which the achieved air change rates can be
compared, e.g. a similar facility, guidance materials, and a demonstration that a lower air change
rate has been achieved;
Calculation of the ventilation air flow necessary to ‘feed’ the various containment devices located
within the laboratory having given due regard to commissioning and operational tolerances, variable
volume system diversity, future flexibility, and control/pressure regime functional bands;
Calculation of the ventilation air flow necessary to satisfy other demands within the laboratory
including those of occupancy, equipment heat gain, lighting heat gain, and solar gains;
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
•
•
Ene 19 Energy Efficient Laboratories
167
Use of techniques such as mock-ups/full-size modelling and Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD)
to verify the effectiveness of the proposed design solutions (investigating issues including ‘spot’ air
change rates, spillage clearance performance, and air input system/containment device
interactions);
Assurance that the chosen air change rates do not jeopardise safety (which will normally involve
acceptance by relevant health and safety authorities, e.g. university safety officers, Home Office
inspectors).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
168
Ene 20 Energy Efficient I.T Solutions
Issue ID
Ene 20
Issue Title
Energy Efficient IT Solutions
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage efficient specification, design and use of data centres and IT-intensive
operating areas.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Higher Education Buildings only
Data centres
1. The data centre is designed in accordance with the ‘Best practices for the EU Code of Conduct on
Data Centres’74 principles with the data centre achieving at least the ‘Expected minimum practice’
level (as defined in the Code of Conduct).
2. Temperature set points are not less than 24oC, as measured at the inlet of the equipment in the
rack.
IT-intensive operating areas
3. The IT intensive operating area uses a natural ventilation and cooling strategy as standard, with
forced ventilation only to be used when the internal temperature exceeds 20oC and active cooling
only when the internal temperature exceeds 22oC.
4. There is a mechanism to achieve automatic power-down of equipment when not in use, including
overnight.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit out only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out only assessments.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Ene 20 Energy Efficient I.T Solutions
169
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-3
A copy of the contract/specification clauses
confirming:
• That the data Centre will achieve
‘Expected minimum practice’ level (as
defined in the Code of Conduct on Data
Centres).
• Ventilation/cooling strategy.
Written confirmation or demonstration that
the ‘Expected minimum practice’ has been
implemented.
AND
Copy of relevant section of commissioning
report confirming that design set points have
been achieved.
OR
4
Manufacturer’s details or specification
confirming the power-down strategy used.
‘As built’ plans or specification clauses
demonstrating compliant ventilation settings
for IT-intensive areas and/or data centres.
Written confirmation or demonstration of the
installation of the power-down method.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Data centre: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, the term ‘data centres’ includes all buildings,
facilities and rooms which contain enterprise servers, server communication equipment, cooling
equipment and power equipment, and may provide some form of data service (e.g. large scale mission
critical facilities all the way down to small server rooms located in office buildings).
I.T-intensive areas: These include computer areas where more than 1 PC per 5 m2 is provided, e.g.
training suites, design studios, libraries’ I.T areas and other areas with a high density of computing
devices.
Examples of methods that can be used to lower energy and heat within IT suites are specification of low
power PCs, sharing of PCs between several users, or ‘thin clients’ (a client computer or software which
uses a central server for processing information).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
170
Tra 1 Provision of public transport
BREEAM Education 2008
7.0 Transport
Issue ID
Tra 1
No. of credits
available
Issue Title
Provision of Public Transport
Minimum
standards
Up to 5
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage development in proximity to good public transport networks, thereby
helping to reduce transport-related emissions and traffic congestion.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The public transport Accessibility Index for the building is calculated and BREEAM credits awarded
in accordance with Table 13 AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits:
Table 13 AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits
BREEAM credits available by building type
Accessibility
Index
Pre-school / School
/ Sixth form
Further Education
College / Higher
Education type 1
Higher Education
type 2
≥2
1
1
1
≥4
2
2
2
≥8
3
3
3
≥10
3
3
4
≥12
3
4
5
≥18
3
5
5
Higher Education type 1: H.E buildings located on a campus where less than 25% of students live on
the campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance.
Higher Education type 2: H.E buildings located on a campus where 25% or more of the students live
on the campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Tra 1 Provision of public transport
171
The Accessibility Index is determined by entering the following information in to the BREEAM
assessor’s TRA 1 Provision of Public Transport calculator:
a. The distance (m) from the main building entrance to each compliant public transport node
(Note: Assessments of higher education buildings please refer to the compliance note below ‘campus or building
main entrance’ for additional guidance).
b. The public transport type serving the compliant node e.g. bus or rail.
c. The average number of services stopping per hour at each compliant node during the
standard operating hours of the building for a typical day (see compliance notes and Table
14 in the Additional Guidance section).
Schools only
2. Where there is a dedicated bus service to and from the school at the beginning and end of the
school day, one credit can be awarded regardless of the building’s public transport Accessibility
Index.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Higher
Education:
Campus’ or
building main
entrance
Where 80% or more of the buildings on the campus is within 1000m of the
campus’ main entrance, then the campus’ main entrance can be used as
the reference point for the assessment of distance to complaint public
transport node for this issue. The campus’ main entrance is that which is
accessed by the majority of the building’s staff, students and visitors.
A site may have more than one main entrance which between them account
for the majority of staff, students and visitors access the site. In such a case
either entrance can be used as the basis for the calculation.
Where less than 80% of the buildings on the campus are within 1000m of the
campus’ main entrance, the assessed building’s main entrance must be
used as the reference point for the assessment of distance to complaint public
transport node for this issue. This rule implies that for a large campus, when
distances are too great to be comfortably covered by walking, public transport
nodes would need to be located inside or on the periphery of the campus.
Where the building is not part of a campus or it is one of a number of scattered
buildings within an urban boundary which makes up the Higher Education
Institute, then the assessed buildings main entrance must be used as the
reference point for the assessment of this issue.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
172
Tra 1 Provision of public transport
Operating hours
BREEAM Education 2008
BREEAM seeks to define the building’s accessibility to the public transport
network for the period during which the majority of building users will travel to
and from the building. In most cases the normal operating hours of the building
can be used; however, some buildings will operate for 24 hours a day and on a
shift work basis. As a result, during what typically would be deemed unsociable
hours and therefore periods where a) there is little if any public transport
operating and b) the number of total building users travelling to the building
during this time is a minority; such periods are not required to be accounted for
in the assessment of this issue.
Where the assessed building operates on a 24-hour basis, or the operating
hours are unknown at the time of assessment, then refer to and use the table
of default operating hours, which can be found in the Additional Information
section of this issue.
Compliant public
transport node
Average number
of services
A compliant node includes any bus stop within 650m and any railway station
within 1000m of the assessed building’s main entrance, measured via a safe
pedestrian route (not ‘as the crow flies’). The service stopping at each node
must provide transport from, or onward travel to, either an urban centre, major
transport node or a community focal point e.g. doctor’s surgery, library, school
or village centre. Only local services should be assessed and any national
public transport services should be excluded from the analysis, unless such a
service can be said to provide a local commuter service. There is no limit on
the number of nodes that can be considered when calculating the AI, provided
they all meet the above criteria.
For the purpose of the calculation, the frequency of public transport is the
average number of services per hour. This is calculated by determining the
number of stopping services at the node during the operating hours, divided by
the number of hours within the operating period. For example: the average
number of services for an assessment of a building that operates between
8am - 7pm (11 hours) and is within proximity of a bus stop with 35 stopping
services during this period is 3 (equivalent to an average service frequency of
20 minutes).
Typical day
The typical day is that which represents the period when travel to and from the
building by staff/users and visitors will be at its highest during term/semester
time. For most buildings this should be taken as a mid-week day. In choosing a
typical day the assessor should check that the timetabled information for that
day is, within reason, representative of the public transport provision for the
entire operating week (excluding Sundays).
Multiple services
Services that operate from more than one node within proximity of the building,
i.e. two separate bus stops served by the same bus, must be considered only
once - at the node in closest proximity to the building. Different services at the
same node, however, should be considered as separate entities.
Bi-directional
routes
Routes will be bi-directional; however for the purpose of calculating the index,
consider only the direction with the highest frequency (in accordance with the
PTAL methodology).
Where a dedicated company bus service is provided for building users during,
or before or after, operating hours (as defined in above), the building entrance
can be substituted for the drop-off/pick-up destination point of this service and
therefore public transport accessibility measured from that point.
Dedicated
transport
services
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Phased
developments
Tra 1 Provision of public transport
173
In the case of a large phased development where new transport facilities will
be provided, but at a later stage than the building being assessed, the
assessment can consider such facilities provided that:
• A commitment to provide transport facilities has been made in the General
Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement. And the
shortest of the following periods - Either
• The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all
phases have been completed and are ready for occupation. Or
• The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build
time for the phase in which the assessed building forms a part, measured
from the completion date of that phase.
The most appropriate rule for the development in question must be used,
ensuring that the time building users have to wait before having use of the
transport facilities is as short as possible. Where the transport facilities will not
be available for use within a period of five years from occupation of the
building, they cannot be considered for determining compliance with the
BREEAM criteria.
Buildings in
Greater London
Buildings in Greater London should refer to the guidance in the Additional
Information section of this issue for details of demonstrating compliance via
other complementary means.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
A copy of the output from the Provision of
Public Transport calculator *.
The evidence required at this stage is the
same as that outlined at the design stage.
*Or via the alternative means for buildings
in Greater London (see Additional
Information).
Where relying on a calculation carried out at
the
design
stage
to
demonstrate
compliance post construction, if the period
between design and post construction stage
reporting is greater than 12 months, then
the AI must be re-calculated using up-todate public transport timetable information.
Scale map highlighting the location of the
building and all public transport nodes in
proximity of the building.
Timetables for each service at each public
transport node considered.
Schools only
2
A formal letter from the school with details
of the dedicated bus service(s).
The evidence required at this stage is the
same as that outlined at the design stage.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Accessibility Index: A measure that provides an indicator of the accessibility and density of the public
transport network at a point of interest (in the case of BREEAM, a building). The index is influenced by
the proximity and diversity of the public transport network and the level or frequency of service at the
accessible node.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
174
Tra 1 Provision of public transport
BREEAM Education 2008
Provision of Public Transport Calculator: A spreadsheet-based calculator used to determine the
Accessibility Index for the assessed building and the number of BREEAM credits achieved. BREEAM
calculators are provided in the BREEAM Assessor’s spreadsheet tool.
Main building entrance: The main building entrance is the entrance to the assessed building
accessed by the majority of the building’s staff and visitors, not the site entrance (unless the site
entrance is also the building entrance e.g. building with a boundary on a public highway).
AI Indicator of performance – comparison with previous version of BREEAM
For comparison with the criteria of previous versions of BREEAM, a building that has a single public
transport node 500m from its main building entrance with one service stopping every 15 minutes i.e. 4
services per hour on average, will score an AI of approximately 1.90. Alternatively, the same node with
one service every 15 minutes, but 300m from the building entrance will achieve an AI of 2.26. The
same node with two services stopping every 15 minutes will score an AI of 2.85. The greater the
number of compliant nodes, services and their proximity to the building, the higher the AI.
Table 14 Default hours of operation for a typical day
Building type
AM
PM
Office
8.00am - 7.00pm
Industrial
8.00am - 7.00pm
Pre-school, school, sixth
form college
7.30am -10.00am
3.00pm - 5.30pm
Further & Higher Education
8.00am - 7.00pm
Courts
8.00am - 7.00pm
Prison
Healthcare
7am - 8pm (encompassing visiting hours and the
typical daytime shift pattern)
7am - 8pm (encompassing visiting hours and the
typical daytime shift pattern)
Shopping centre
9.00am - 7.00pm
Supermarket
8.00am - 10.00pm
Bank/Service provider
8.00am - 6.00pm
Convenience store
7.00am - 10.00pm
DIY/retail park
8.00am - 8.00pm
Other retail
8.00am - 6.00pm
Multi-residential
8.00am - 7.00pm
Bespoke & other
8.00am - 7.00pm
Or use any of the above hours, as appropriate to the
building type.
24 hour use building
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
7am - 8pm
BREEAM Education 2008
Tra 1 Provision of public transport
175
Calculation methodology
The methodology for calculating the Accessibility Index uses Transport for London’s Public Transport
Accessibility Level (PTAL) method, itself based on a methodology developed in 1992 by the London
Borough of Hammersmith and Fulham. For a description of the PTAL methodology and how it works
refer to appendix B of Transport Assessment Best Practice; Guidance Document:
http://www.tfl.gov.uk/assets/downloads/corporate/TAGuidance_LQ.pdf
Buildings in Greater London
There is a public transport accessibility map for Greater London which can be used for determining the
Accessibility Index for assessed buildings, without necessarily having to complete a separate
calculation. This map can be found at: http://www.london.gov.uk/thelondonplan/maps-diagrams/map2a-03.jsp
The map shows the Public Transport Accessibility Levels throughout London (PTALs range from 1-6);
the PTAL is determined using the AI as follows:
PTAL
AI
1
0.00 – 5.00
2
5.01 – 10.00
3
10.01 – 15.00
4
15.01 – 20.00
5
20.01 – 25.00
6
25.01 +
As an example, if the building is located in an area of London that has a PTAL of 2 this could have an
AI at any point in the 5-10 range. As such, for the purpose of BREEAM, the lower AI of 5 must be
assumed and the credit awarded accordingly, or alternatively the specific AI for the assessed building
can be determined using the TRA 1 Provision of Public Transport calculator and, potentially, a higher
number of credits awarded.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
176
Tra 2 Proximity to amenities
Issue ID
Issue Title
Tra 2
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Proximity to amenities
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To encourage and reward a building that is located in proximity to local amenities, thereby reducing the
need for extended travel or multiple trips.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Pre-school, Schools, Sixth Form and Further Education buildings
1. Where the building is within 500m of the following amenities:
a. Grocery shop and/or food outlet
b. Post box
c. Cash machine
Higher Education buildings
1. Where the building is within 500m of at least five of the following amenities, or where at least five of
the following amenities are located within the same campus as the assessed building:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Grocery shop and/or food outlet
Post box
Cash machine
Leisure / sport centre
Library
Student union
Medical facility / GP surgery.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Food Outlet
This includes the following:
• Grocery shop
• Supermarket
• Sandwich shop
• On- or off-site cafeteria or staff canteen
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Tra 2 Proximity to amenities
177
Collective
amenities
One type of amenity may also exist within or a part of other types of amenities
e.g. grocery store in a petrol station, cash point or pharmacy in a supermarket
etc. It is not a requirement of the assessing this issue that each amenity is
‘stand alone’.
Accessible local
amenities
The distance must be measured via safe pedestrian routes e.g. pavements
and safe crossing points or, where provided, dedicated pedestrian crossing
points. The distance should not be measured in a straight line, ‘as the crow
flies’.
Amenities within
building
An amenity within the building, or in the case of further or higher education
buildings located on the same campus, complies with the assessment criteria.
Phased
developments
The guidance provided in BREEAM issue Tra 1, concerning phased
developments, also applies to this issue.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
Marked-up site plan or map highlighting:
• Location of assessed building
• Location and type of amenities
• The route to the amenities
• Plan/map scale
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The existence of the local amenities
• The route and distance to the
amenities.
Where the amenities do not currently exist,
but are due to be developed, a letter from
the client/developer confirming:
• The location and type of amenities to be
provided
• The timescale for development of the
amenities.
Evidence as outlined at the design stage of
assessment.
OR
As above where amenities developed, or
under development at the time of post
construction review/assessment.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
178
Tra 3 Cyclist facilities
Issue ID
Tra 3
Issue Title
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Cyclist Facilities
Minimum
standards
2
No
Aim
To encourage building users to cycle by ensuring adequate provision of cyclist facilities.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit – Primary schools
1. A minimum of five compliant cycle storage spaces have been provided for each form/class in any
one year group.
For example: where a primary school has been designed to accommodate 3 classes per year, a
total of 15 compliant cycle storage spaces are provided for the whole school.
First credit – Pre-school (staff only), Secondary schools, sixth form, Further and higher
education (staff and pupils/students)
1. The number of compliant cycle storage spaces provided is as follows:
a. 10% of building users up to 500 PLUS
b. 7% for building users in the range of 501 – 1000 PLUS
c. 5% for building users over 1000
See Compliance Notes for definition of building users.
Second credit – Pre-school, primary school and higher education (staff only) and secondary
schools, sixth form and further education (staff and pupils/students)
1. The first credit must be achieved.
2. At least two of the following compliant facilities must be provided for the building users:
a. Compliant showers
b. Compliant changing facilities and lockers for clothes
c. Compliant drying space for wet clothes
See Compliance Notes for definition of building users.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
Refer to the compliance note below on existing compliant facilities.
existing
buildings
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Tra 3 Cyclist facilities
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Building users
Where the term ‘building users’ is referenced, for the purpose of calculating the
compliant cycle storage facilities this refers to the typical number of staff and
estimated or actual number of pupils/students likely to be using the building
during a typical academic term-time/semester day. The following are
exceptions to this definition:
•
•
179
The first credit (cycle storage) for pre-school buildings, where building
users are defined as staff only.
The second credit (cycle changing facilities) for pre-schools, primary
schools and higher education, where building users are defined as staff
only.
For assessments of higher education buildings, where the term staff is used,
this includes PhD students and Post-Doctorates. Undergraduate, Diploma and
Masters attendees are considered to be students for the purpose of assessing
this BREEAM issue.
Compliant cycle
storage space
The requirement for provision of cyclist facilities based on staff and
student/pupil numbers also accounts for other community users who will use
the building, it is therefore not necessary to estimate and include within the
calculation the number of predicted community users.
Compliant cycle storage facilities are those that meet the following:
•
•
Vertical bike
racks
The space is covered overhead and protected from the rain
The covered area and the cycle racks are set in or fixed to a permanent
structure (building or hardstanding) and allow both the wheel and frame to
be locked securely (e.g. Sheffield type). Or racks are located in a locked
structure fixed to or part of a permanent structure with CCTV surveillance.
• There is a minimum distance of 1.0m between cycle racks, where the
racks allow for two-sided parking, and 0.8m for one-sided parking to
enable bikes to be easily stored and accessed.
• Racks positioned in a circular array are spaced in accordance with the
guidance in the New Metric Handbook75.
• There is a minimum distance from any obstruction e.g. wall (located either
to the side of the stand or in front of it) of 300mm for single-sided use and
900mm for double-sided use.
• Adequate lighting is provided in accordance with BS5489 Part 1 – Lighting
of roads and amenity areas76.
• The facilities are in a prominent site location that is viewable from
the building.
• The majority of the cycle racks are within 100m of a building entrance
(ideally within 50m). Or, in the case of further or higher education buildings
on a campus, where it is not feasible to meet the 100m requirement but
the assessor justifiably deems that the facilities are in an easily accessible
location (but still within the campus) for building users, the credit may still
be awarded.
Vertical racks, which allow direct access (without the need to get alongside the
locked bike) and permit one bike per vertical stack can comply with the criteria
(provided all other criteria are met). For this type of rack, the distance between
each rack can be less than 1.0m but not less than 600mm (the typical width of
a bike across the handlebars).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
180
Tra 3 Cyclist facilities
BREEAM Education 2008
Proprietary
cycle storage
systems
Where a proprietary (manufactured) bicycle storage system is specified
BREEAM allows an element of flexibility with respect to the requirements and
dimensions outlined in the compliance note above. The degree of flexibility is
at the discretion of the BREEAM Assessor, but the system must allow ease of
access for the user and each cycle to be removed independently of other
stored bikes, must protect the bikes from rain, and allow cyclists to lock at least
one wheel and the frame of their bikes adequately. If the assessor believes
that a system does not meet these basic objectives then they should not award
the credit. Where awarding the credit for a proprietary system that does not
meet the space/access/weatherproofing/security dimensions and requirements
(outlined above) the Assessor must fully justify their decision to award the
credit in these circumstances.
Non compliant
cycle racks
These types of cycle storage devices do not comply with BREEAM:
• Hooks and wall attachments
• Single wheel (butterfly) bike rack holders (these racks provide less security
and can cause damage to bike wheels).
Compliant
showers
In the case of a pre-school or primary school one shower must be provided for
every 10 staff (subject to a minimum of one shower). In secondary, sixth form
and further education buildings, one shower must be provided for every 10
cycle storage spaces. In the case of a higher education building, one shower
must be provided for every 10 staff cycle storage spaces. Both male and
female users catered for i.e. either separate showers within shared genderspecific facilities or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use.
The showers can be available for others to use in addition to staff.
Changing facilities and locker criteria;
• The assessor can use their judgement to determine whether the changing
area is appropriate given the number of cycle storage spaces/showers
provided. As guidance to aid the assessor, where a shower/changing
cubicle is provided there should be a minimum of one square metre of
changing space adjacent to the shower(s) with a bench seat and hooks for
hanging clothes. Where there is more than one shower provided there
should be a minimum of one square metre of changing space per shower,
subject to a minimum changing area of four square metres. Where there
are no showers specified, but there is a changing facility, there is a
minimum of one square metre of changing space for every 10 cycle
storage spaces, subject to a minimum of four square metres of changing
area with a bench seat and hooks for hanging clothes.
• The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces
provided.
• Lockers are either in or adjacent to compliant changing rooms. Where the
changing space is a cubicle the locker(s) must not be located within the
cubicle.
• Each locker is at least 900mm high by 300mm wide by 450mm deep, or a
locker with dimensions that provide an equivalent volume of storage
space.
• Both male and female users are catered for i.e. either gender specific,
shared facilities or single changing cubicles in mixed use areas.
• Toilet cubicles do not count as changing facilities.
The drying space (for wet clothes) must be a specially designed and
designated space with adequate heating/ventilation. A plant room is not a
compliant drying space.
Compliant
changing
facilities &
lockers
Compliant
drying space
Pre-school
and/or crèche
When assessing a pre-school or an education building that contains a crèche,
in line with the definition of building users (above), the children (and their
families) should not be included in the calculation of the number of required
compliant cycle spaces.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Existing
compliant
facilities
Minimum
number of
facilities
Tra 3 Cyclist facilities
181
For assessments of new infill buildings on an existing site, where there are
existing compliant facilities, such facilities can be assessed against the criteria
of this issue. The number of existing compliant facilities must be large enough
to cater for the building users of the assessed building, in addition to the users
from any existing buildings
Where more than the minimum number of compliant cycle spaces is provided,
it is not necessary to also provide more than the minimum number of
showers/lockers/changing facilities.
Pre-School, Schools & Sixth Form
Showers
(secondary
schools)
Less than 100
pupils
(secondary
schools)
Secondary
schools – cycle
facilities
The provision of showers for staff and pupils must be separate.
Primary Schools
- number of
classes
Where there are varying numbers of forms/classes per year, the calculation of
compliant cycle spaces must be based on the year with the greatest number of
classes/forms.
City centre
locations &
cycle space and
facilities
provision
City centre
locations &
showers
provision
In city centre locations the criteria for compliant cycle spaces can be reduced
by 50% where at least two of the available BREEAM credits for provision of
public transport (Tra 1) have been awarded.
Where there are less than 100 pupils, a minimum of 2 showers must be
provided for pupils with one male and one female shower (where applicable).
A minimum of one shower for staff should be provided in all cases.
In secondary schools, the cycle storage facilities must be located in a
prominent location which is overlooked by reception/school offices or the
staffroom.
As with compliant cycle spaces, the requirement for compliant showers in pre
and primary schools in city centre locations can also be reduced by 50%.
Note: The number of compliant showers in secondary schools and sixth form
colleges will reduce by default since the calculation is based on the number
of cycle storage spaces provided (which can be reduced by 50% for city centre
locations).
Rural locations
As with compliant cycle spaces, the requirement for compliant showers in pre
& showers
and primary schools can also be reduced by 50%. Note: The number of
provision in
compliant showers in other education building types will reduce by default
primary schools since the calculation is based on the number of cycle storage spaces provided.
Further & Higher Education colleges
City centre
Sites in city centre locations can reduce by 50% the criteria for compliant cycle
locations &
spaces where at least three of the available BREEAM credits for provision of
cycle space
public transport (Tra 1) have been awarded.
provision
Rural locations
Sites in rural locations can reduce by 50% the criteria for compliant cycle
& cycle space
spaces where the average building user commuting distances are likely to be
provision
greater than 10 miles. A rural location is one where the site is on land clearly
not within or on an urban boundary; this includes village locations and green
field sites.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
182
Tra 3 Cyclist facilities
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
First credit and Second credit
1
Site plan, design drawings and/or a copy of
the specification confirming:
• The location of the cycle storage
facilities
• The number of cycle spaces provided
• The type, dimensions and layout of
cycle racks
• The materials and construction
specified for the facility.
• The lighting for the facility is in
accordance with BS5489 Part 1.
• Building occupancy or, where relevant,
net lettable/floor area.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming the
installation of the compliant facilities.
Where the building is in a city centre
location, and the benchmarks reduced,
evidence as outlined under BREEAM credit
Tra 1 demonstrating the relevant number of
credits achieved.
2
Design drawings or a copy of the
specification confirming:
• Number of showers
• Changing room
• Secure locker locations, dimensions
and numbers
• Drying space
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming the
installation of the compliant facilities.
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Tra 4
Issue Title
Pedestrian and Cyclist Safety
Tra 4 Pedestrian and cyclist safety
No. of credits
available
1
183
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the provision of safe and secure pedestrian and cycle access routes on
the development.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Where external site areas form part of the assessed site and these areas contain vehicle access
roads, parking and/or pedestrian access to the building, adequate cycle lanes and pedestrian
pathways must be provided. If the building does not have any external areas and internal access is
directly from the public highway/footpath, then the credit(s) can be awarded on a default basis.
Cycle access criteria
2. The cycle lanes have been designed and constructed in accordance with the guidance in the
National Cycle Network Guidelines and Practical Details – issue 2, Sustrans77 and the relevant
parts of Appendix VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist78
3. The cycle lanes and pedestrian paths meet the following minimum width dimensions:
a. Where pedestrian and cycle routes are shared the minimum total width of the combined
path is 3.0m
b. Where the cycle lane is segregated from both the pedestrian route and carriageway the
minimum width of the cycle path is 2.0m and the minimum width of the pedestrian path is
1.5m
c. Where the cycle route forms a part of the carriageway, the minimum width of the lane is
1.5m
Minimum widths should not be regarded as the design target, where possible best practice as
79
detailed in the Sustrans guidelines and DfT guidance must be aimed for.
4. Cycle lanes provide direct access to any cycle storage facilities provided on the site, without the
need to deviate from the cycle path and, if relevant, connect to offsite cycle paths where these run
adjacent to the development’s boundary.
Pedestrian access criteria
5. Onsite footpaths connect to public footpaths off site, providing access to local transport nodes and
other offsite amenities (where present).
6. Where provided, drop-off areas are designed off the access road and provide direct access to
pedestrian pathways/areas, therefore avoiding the need for the pedestrian to cross vehicle access
routes.
7. Where dedicated pedestrian crossing of a vehicle access route is provided, the road is raised to the
pavement level (i.e. the pavement is not lowered to road level).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
184
Tra 4 Pedestrian and cyclist safety
BREEAM Education 2008
8. For larger developments with a high number of public users/visitors, pedestrian pathways must be
signposted to other local amenities off site, including public transport nodes.
Combined cyclists and pedestrian access criteria
9. Delivery areas are not accessed through parking areas and do not cross or share pedestrian and
cyclist routes and other outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public.
10. Lighting design of pedestrian pathways and cycle paths on site are in compliance with CIBSE
Lighting Guide 6 (LG6)29 and BS5489 Part 176.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
NCN Design and
Construction
checklist
The checklist can be downloaded from:
http://www.sustrans.org.uk/webfiles/guidelines/appendix.pdf
Covered parking
area
Where the assessed building has no external areas but does have a covered
parking facility and cyclists and/or pedestrians access the assessed building
via this area, then the criteria apply and this area must be assessed against
them.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1&
3-9
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
A scaled proposed site plan, specification
and/or design details highlighting all
necessary features and dimensions.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic
evidence
confirming
compliance.
AND/OR
2
A copy of the specification or scaled
proposed site plan confirming:
• Cycle routes have been or will be
designed in accordance with the best
practice guidance[1]
AND
•
A signed and dated copy of the NCN
Design and Construction Checklist from
the design/project team (or completed
by
the assessor
using design
information).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
‘As built’ site plan and design details.
A signed and dated post construction copy
of the NCN Design and Construction
Checklist from the design/project team (or
completed by the assessor during their site
visit).
BREEAM Education 2008
10
A copy of the specification, site plan and/or
manufacturer’s technical details. confirming:
• External lighting design strategy.
Tra 4 Pedestrian and cyclist safety
185
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming compliant
installation.
The assessor is not expected to check
every detail but that the lighting strategy is
broadly compliant with the design and
therefore relevant guidance, demonstrated
by checking compliance at their discretion
with select key issues.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
186
Tra 5 Travel plan
Issue ID
Issue Title
Tra 5
Travel Plan
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise the consideration given to accommodating a range of travel options for building users,
thereby encouraging the reduction of user reliance on forms of travel that have the highest
environmental impact.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. A travel plan has been developed as part of the feasibility and design stages which considers all
types of travel relevant to the building type and users.
2. The travel plan is structured to meet the needs of the particular site and takes into consideration the
findings of a site-specific transport survey and assessment that covers the following (as a
minimum):
a. Where relevant, existing travel patterns and opinions of existing building or site users
towards cycling and walking so that constraints and opportunities can be identified
b. Travel patterns and transport impact of future building users
c. Current local environment for walkers and cyclists (accounting for visitors who may be
accompanied by young children)
d. Disabled access (accounting for varying levels of disability and visual impairment)
e. Public transport links serving the site
f. Current facilities for cyclists
3. The travel plan includes a package of measures that have been used to steer the design of the
development in order to meet the travel plan objectives and minimise car-based travel patterns.
This is demonstrated via specific examples such as:
a. Providing parking priority spaces for car sharers
b. Providing dedicated and convenient cycle storage and changing facilities
c. Lighting, landscaping and shelter to make pedestrian and public transport waiting areas
pleasant
d. Negotiating improved bus services, i.e. altering bus routes or offering discounts
e. Restricting and/or charging for car parking
f. Criteria for lobby areas where information about public transport or car sharing can be
made available
g. Pedestrian and cycle friendly (for all types of user regardless of the level of mobility or
visual impairment) via the provision of cycle lanes, safe crossing points, direct routes,
appropriate tactile surfaces, well lit and signposted to other amenities, public transport
nodes and adjoining offsite pedestrian and cycle routes.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Fit Out Only
Tra 5 Travel plan
187
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Building users
Where the term building users is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to
staff, pupils/students, parents, community users and personnel who make
deliveries to the development.
Existing Travel
Plan
The credit can be awarded if the building being assessed is a refurbishment or
infill new build on an existing site that has an existing up-to-date travel plan
that is compliant with BREEAM and applicable to all building users (in the
existing and assessed buildings).
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1-3
Design Stage
The evidence required at this stage is the
same as that outlined at the design stage.
A copy of the Travel Plan.
A copy of the site-specific
survey/assessment.
3
Post Construction Stage
transport
A marked-up copy of the site plan
demonstrating
examples
of
design
measures, implemented in support the
travel plan’s findings.
Assessor’s building/site inspection
photographic evidence confirming:
• The installation of measures
support the travel plan.
and
that
OR
Where a detailed site plan is not available, a
formal letter from the client confirming that
measures will be implemented into the final
design in support the travel plan’s findings.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Travel Plan: A travel plan is a strategy for managing all travel and transport within an organisation,
principally to increase choice and reduce reliance on the car by seeking to improve access to a site or
development by sustainable modes of transport. A travel plan contains both physical and behavioural
measures to increase travel choices and reduce reliance on single-occupancy car travel.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
188
Tra 6 Maximum car parking capacity
Issue ID
Tra 6
Issue Title
Maximum Car Parking Capacity
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
2
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To encourage the use of alternative means of transport to the building other than the private car,
thereby helping to reduce transport related emissions and traffic congestion.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit - Higher Education buildings only
1. No more than one parking space is provided for every fifteen building users.
Second credit - Higher Education buildings only
1. No more than one parking space is provided for every twenty building users.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Fit Out Only
Pre-school,
schools, sixth
form and FE
colleges
Building users
Determining
number of
building users
Variable
occupancy
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
This issue is not applicable for the assessment of pre-schools, schools, sixth
form and further education colleges.
Where the term building users is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to
the number of staff and students who will access the building for work or study
during a typical academic term-time /semester day, ( as oppose to using fulltime equivalent figures).
If known actual building occupancy rate figures should be used. If this figure
cannot be confirmed use the default occupancy rate detailed above under the
Shell Only compliance note.
Where the number of building users is variable, provision of parking spaces
should be based on the maximum number of building users likely to be using
the building at any time during a typical day.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Tra 6 Maximum car parking capacity
189
Disabled, mother
& baby &
motorbike
spaces
Parking spaces for these building users can be excluded from the assessment
of this issue provided these spaces are dedicated for this use and they are
sized accordingly with the appropriate signage/markings.
Car share spaces
Car share spaces can be excluded from the assessment provided these
spaces are dedicated for this use with the appropriate signage and the future
building occupier confirms they have an enforceable car share policy. The
assessor must obtain a copy of the policy and related documentation. Where
there is no policy these spaces must be included within the calculation.
Parking shared
with other
buildings
Where the building being assessed forms part of a wider site development and
parking is not designated to specific buildings, then this credit must be
assessed on the provision of parking spaces for the whole development,
accounting for all existing and new users and parking spaces.
Where the numbers of users for the whole site cannot be confirmed, then the
parking spaces can be attributed to the assessed development on the basis of
the ratio of assessed building floor area to total building floor area of the whole
site. E.g. if the assessed building is 20% of the total building area for the site
then attribute 20% of the parking spaces to the building for the purpose of the
assessment.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
A site plan or copy of the specification
confirming:
• Number and type of parking spaces
provided for the building.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Number and type of parking spaces
provided for the building.
Relevant documentation or correspondence
from the design team or client confirming
the number of building users.
Evidence as outlined at the design stage.
OR
A physical check by the assessor of the
relevant number of building users (if
practical).
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
190
Tra 7 Travel information point
Issue ID
Tra 7
Issue Title
Travel Information Point
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To ensure the building has the capacity to provide users with up-to-date information on local public
transport routes and timetables.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Higher Education building only
1. There is a dedicated space for the provision of local public transport and taxi information.
2. There are no specific size criteria as the information could be presented using a wall-mounted
lockable noticeboard or electronically. However, the following apply;
a. The space is secure and tamper-proof
b. A power point and network access point is provided within the space to facilitate future
installation and connection of an electronic ‘real-time’ system or internet access point.
c. The space is located in a part of the building that is accessible to all building users, ideally
in a main reception or lobby area, with adequate signage at its point of use and throughout
appropriate areas of the development indicating its purpose and location/existence.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Schools, sixth
form and further
education
colleges
Building users
Location of
‘Travel
Information
Point’
This issue is not applicable for the assessment of pre-schools, schools, sixth
form and further education colleges.
Where the term building users is referenced this refers to staff, students and
visitors. For buildings whose access is restricted to staff only (including PhD
and Post-Doctoral academics), this issue does not need to be assessed.
The information point does not necessarily have to be situated internally. If
sited externally however, it must be covered, in an area that is readily
accessible to building users and within close proximity of the main entrance or
pedestrian routes to and from local public transport nodes, parking areas and
the main building entrance.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Existing travel
information
facilities
Tra 7 Travel information point
191
The credit can be awarded where there is an existing maintained real-time
information system within 250m of the assessed development’s main entrance
via a safe pedestrian route (not ‘as the crow flies’).
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
Design plan and/or a copy of the relevant
specification clause(s) confirming:
• Location and scope of the travel
information point/facility
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic
evidence
confirming
compliant installation of the travel
information point(s).
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Real time passenger information system: An electronic system that provides up-to-date, i.e. real
time, information on local public transport service(s). Primarily how close the service is running to time
and when it is due at a node/interchange and, potentially, incidents that affect service operations,
platform changes etc.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
192
Tra 8 Deliveries and Manoeuvring
Issue ID
Tra 8
Issue Title
Deliveries and Manoeuvring
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To ensure that safety is maintained and disruption due to delivery vehicles minimised through wellplanned layout and access to the site.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Parking and turning areas are designed for simple manoeuvring according to the type of delivery
vehicle likely to access the site, thus avoiding the need for repeated shunting.
2. There is a separate parking area for waiting goods vehicles, away from the manoeuvring area and
staff/visitor car parking.
3. Delivery areas are not accessed through parking areas and do not cross or share pedestrian and
cyclist routes and other outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public.
4. There is a dedicated space for the storage of refuse skips and pallets away from the delivery
vehicle manoeuvring area and staff/visitor car parking.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Small
buildings/units
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
For the purpose of assessing this issue, smaller buildings/units (i.e. <200m2)
and developments where heavy goods vehicles are unlikely to access the site,
the criteria for the manoeuvring area need be sized only to accommodate large
delivery vans (i.e. transit type or similar).
Also, requirement 3 ‘delivery areas are not be accessed through parking areas’
can be relaxed for smaller sites if it can be confirmed that all deliveries to the
building will be made by small vans and not heavy goods vehicles.
No vehicle
delivery and
manoeuvring
areas
This BREEAM issue is not assessed where the development does not have a
vehicle delivery and manoeuvring area. In such cases this issue will be filtered
from the list of relevant credits by the assessor’s spreadsheet tool.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Tra 8 Deliveries and Manoeuvring
193
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1-4
Design Stage
Proposed site plan clearly showing:
• Manoeuvring area
• Delivery vehicle waiting area
• Designated area for skips/pallets
Post Construction Stage
Assessor’s building/site inspection
photographic evidence confirming
existence of a compliant delivery area.
and
the
Appropriate
documentation
or
correspondence from the design team
confirming:
• Likely vehicle delivery type that will
access the development.
• Predicted frequency of deliveries
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
The Metric Handbook75 contains details of typical delivery/freight vehicle sizes and turning circles.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
194
Wat 1 Water consumption
BREEAM Education 2008
8.0 Water
Issue ID
Issue Title
Wat 1
Water Consumption
No. of credits
available
3
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To minimise the consumption of potable water in sanitary applications by encouraging the use of low
water use fittings.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Pre-Schools, Schools & Sixth Form colleges
1. The credits are awarded as follows:
a. One credit where consumption is 4.5 - 5.5m3 per person per year
b. Two credits where consumption is 1.5 - 4.4 m3 per person per year
c. Three credits where consumption is <1.5 m3 per person per year
2. To determine the water consumption figure for the assessed building, determine the effective flush
volumes and flow rates for the following installed sanitary fittings and enter this data into the
BREEAM Water Calculator Tool:
a.
b.
c.
d.
WCs
Urinals
Taps
Showers
Exclude kitchen taps, cleaners’ sinks and external taps.
3. If any rainwater collection or greywater recycling systems are specified for the purpose of meeting
WC/urinal flushing demand, determine the following information (as appropriate to system type):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Annual rainfall for the site location (mm)
2
Rainwater catchment area (m )
Catchment type e.g. pitched roof, flat roof
Rainwater filter co-efficient
Rainwater collection tank capacity
Percentage of tap and shower water collected and used for WC/urinal flushing.
Percentage of building’s WC/urinals using greywater to meet flushing demand.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Wat 1 Water consumption
195
Further & Higher Education Colleges
First credit
1. All WCs have an effective flush volume of 4.5 litres or less.
2. Where dual flush toilets are specified they have guidance or symbols instructing the user on the
appropriate operation of the flushing device. This can be provided on the flush control buttons,
cistern, or nearby for a group of cisterns.
Second credit
3. The second credit can be awarded for EITHER of the following:
a. All WCs have an effective flush volume of 3 litres or less OR
b. All WCs are compliant with the criteria for the first credit and fitted with a delayed action
inlet valve.
4. Where dual flush toilets are specified they have guidance or symbols instructing the user on the
appropriate operation of the flushing device. This can be provided on the flush control buttons,
cistern, or nearby for a group of cisterns.
Third credit
5. Of the following, the two that offer the greatest possible reduction in annual water consumption
have been specified:
a. All taps (excluding those specifically listed as Excluded Fittings in the Compliance Notes)
have a maximum flow rate less than 6 litres/min for a water pressure of 0.3MPa and are
one of, or a combination of, the following types:
•
•
•
•
Timed automatic shut-off taps e.g. push taps
Electronic sensor taps
Low flow screw-down/lever taps
Spray taps
b. All showers, where specified, have a measured flow rate that does not exceed 9 litres per
minute for a water pressure of 0.3MPa, assuming a delivered water temperature of 37ºC.
c.
All urinals are either:
•
Fitted with individual presence detectors that operate the flushing control after
each use.
•
Ultra low flush or waterless urinals.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
Where a project under assessment consists solely of an extension, and no
existing
new sanitary facilities are to be provided, facilities provided in the existing
buildings
building should be assessed (this refers to the nearest accessible facilities for
each gender/function, where appropriate, i.e. those likely to be used by the
occupants and visitors in the extension building).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
196
Wat 1 Water consumption
BREEAM Education 2008
Fit Out only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
No Fittings
specified
Where no sanitary fittings are to be installed in the building being assessed
then the credit must be assessed on the basis of the nearest accessible
facilities likely to be used by the occupants of the assessed building.
Awarding the third credit is not dependent on the first or second credits having
been achieved.
Third credit
Other watersaving features
If the development is using alternative or innovative water-saving features
other than those listed in the criteria, and the client wishes to consider this as
one of the two fittings with the greatest water saving potential, then the
assessor must contact BRE for approval prior to awarding a credit.
Alternatively, consider applying for it to be recognised as an additional
innovation credit.
Showers with a
range of flow
rates
Excluded fittings
Where a shower head delivers a range of flow rates, the average or typical
flow rate should be used.
Swimming /
Hydrotherapy
Pools
The following fittings, where specified, can be excluded from the scope of this
issue (for operational purpose):
• Kitchen taps
• Cleaners’ sink taps
• External taps
• Process taps in laboratory areas but not bench taps (which should be
included)
• Scrub-up taps
• Decontamination showers
• Taps dedicated to H&S, e.g. eye washing
Where the assessment is of a building containing a swimming pool or
hydrotherapy pools, the criteria of this issue, with respect to showers, are also
applicable to all ‘pre-swim-showers, in addition to all ‘post-swim’ showers
within the wet change facilities.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
Pre-Schools, Schools & Sixth Form Colleges
1-3
A copy of the relevant section of the M&E
specification and/or manufacturer’s details
confirming:
• Technical specification of sanitary fittings
and controls to be installed
• Location, size and details of any
rainwater and greywater collection
system.
Design plan showing the location within the
building of the sanitary and grey/rainwater
collection facilities.
A copy of the output from the BREEAM
Water Calculator tool.
Further & Higher Education Colleges
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Assessor’s building/site inspection report and
photographs or purchase orders confirming:
• The type and amount of fittings and
controls installed.
Manufacturer’s/installer’s details for installed
fittings/controls confirming:
• Their technical specification
• The rainwater collection area and
capacity of rainwater or greywater
systems (where specified).
Where changes have occurred since design
stage assessment, a revised copy of the
output from the Water Consumption
Calculator tool.
BREEAM Education 2008
All
A copy of the relevant section of the M&E
specification and/or manufacturer’s details
confirming:
• Technical specification for sanitary
fittings (flow rate) and controls to be
installed.
Design plan showing the location within the
building of the sanitary facilities.
Wat 1 Water consumption
197
Assessor’s building/site inspection report and
photographs or purchase orders confirming:
• The type and amount of fittings and
controls installed.
Manufacturer’s
fittings/controls
specification.
details
for
confirming the
installed
technical
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Greywater recycling: The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of used shower, bath and tap
water for use instead of potable water in WC flushing.
Nett lettable area (NLA): This is the gross internal area less common areas and ancillary spaces
(corridors, plant room, toilet blocks etc). NLA is often quoted in square feet; 1 square metre is 10.76
square feet.
Potable water: Drinking quality water that is taken from a connection to the main water supply to the
building, which may be from the public water supply or from a private supply such as from groundwater
via a borehole.
Rainwater recycling: The appropriate collection and storage of rain from hard outdoor surfaces for use
instead of potable water in WC flushing.
Delayed action inlet valve: Devices that prevent water entering the WC cistern until it has completely
emptied, enabling a precise volume of water to be discharged independent of water pressure.
Effective flush volume: The volume of water needed to clear the toilet pan and transport any content
far enough to avoid blocking the drain.
Dual Flush Cisterns: Devices that have the facility to provide lower flush volume for liquids and higher
flush volume for solids and paper.
Calculating the effective flushing volume of dual flush toilets: For dual flush WCs the ratio full
flush:reduced flush is taken to be 1:3 for non-domestic buildings. The effective flush volume can
therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4 litre dual flush volume WC:
((6 Litre*1) + (4 Litre*3))/4
= 4.5 Litre effective flushing volume
Water Calculation Tool (Pre-Schools, Schools & Sixth Form Colleges only)
BREEAM’s Water Calculation Tool is used to estimate water consumption (m3 per person per year) for
the building based on the installed sanitary fittings. Where a type of appliance or fitting is not specified,
assume the following building regulations (Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations 199980) or default
fittings:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Regular taps for wash hand basins (12 litres/minute)
High flow shower (14 litres/minute)
WC (6 litre cistern)
Cistern serving single urinal = 10 litres per use (flush).
Cistern serving two or more urinals = 7.5 litres per use (flush).
Urinals with manual flush on each stall or automatic pressure flushing valves = 1.5 litres per use.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
198
Wat 1 Water consumption
BREEAM Education 2008
When entering flow rates for wash hand basin taps into the Water Calculation Tool, the flow rate should
be taken as 2/3 of the maximum flow rate quoted by the manufacturer. The maximum flow rate can be
the flow rate achieved with a flow restrictor i.e. where flow restrictors are specified, 2/3 of the flow rate
with the restrictor installed should be taken.
Where specified taps have a break point at the mid range of the flow (often referred to as 'click taps' or
two stage mixer taps), the flow rate should be taken as the maximum flow rate quoted by the
manufacturer of the lower range before the water break. This is typically 50 per cent of the flow rate,
however this should not be assumed and manufacturer’s information must always be used.
The water calculator determines water consumption for the assessed building using a default
occupancy figure of 1 person per 10m2 of nett lettable area. Even for instances where building
occupancy is known, the default occupancy figure must be used to ensure a consistent assessment.
The tool allows the assessor to account for any rainwater or greywater collection by offsetting the
contribution from these sources from the total estimated water consumption figure. Please note, the
calculator is a compliance tool and should not be used to size or specify rainwater and greywater
recycling systems.
Product Certification of Low Flush WCs
Product certification schemes provide specifiers and clients with greater assurance of manufacturers’
claim regarding the performance of the actual flush volume of their products and therefore
the potential water savings of different products. At present BREEAM does not require that the flushing
volume of WCs (or any other water-consuming device) meet an approved standard to gain BREEAM
credits.
BRE Global currently operates a certification and listing scheme for low flush WCs and products
certified to this standard will be listed on www.greenbooklive.com. Green Book Live is a free-to-view
online database designed to assist specifiers and end users in the identification of environmentally
beneficial products and services. If you would like to know more information about the Certification and
Listing of Low Flush WCs Scheme please contact BRE Global at enquiries@breglobal.com
.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Wat 2
Issue Title
Water Meter
Wat 2 Water Meter
No. of credits
available
1
199
Minimum
standards
Yes
Aim
To ensure water consumption can be monitored and managed and therefore encourage reductions in
water consumption.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The specification of a water meter on the mains water supply to each building; this includes
instances where water is supplied via a borehole or other private source.
2. The water meter has a pulsed output to enable connection to a Building Management System
(BMS) for the monitoring of water consumption.
3. If there is a swimming pool on site within the scope of the assessment, the building housing it must
be covered by a separate meter in accordance with the above criteria. The changing facilities
(including showers, toilets etc) housed in this building should also be covered by this meter.
4. Where there is more than one building on the site within the scope of the assessment, each
building must be separately metered in accordance with the above criteria.
5. If there is ‘plumbed-in’ laboratory process equipment, a separate water meter must be specified on
any process or cooling loop.
Exemplary level criteria
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM
issue:
1. Where sub meters are fitted to allow the metering of individual water-consuming plant or building
areas, where demand in such areas will be equal to or greater than of 10% of the total
water demand of the building (see also compliance note).
2. Each sub meter has a pulsed output to enable connection to a Building Management System
(BMS) for the monitoring of water consumption.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
If no new water supply is being installed because occupants of the extended
existing
building will use the facilities in, and therefore water supply to the existing
buildings
building, then the issue should be assessed on the basis of whether a
compliant water meter is installed on the existing supply.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
200
Wat 2 Water Meter
BREEAM Education 2008
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
Fit Out-only assessments.
No water supply
to the
building/unit
If there is no water supply to the building during operation because there will
be no installed water-consuming fittings in the building, then the issue must be
assessed on the basis of the water supply to the nearest accessible building
with such facilities, likely to be used by the future occupants of the assessed
building.
Exemplary
criteria
It is widely accepted that water usage can be decreased by how water is
consumed by building users. If there are only small water consuming units
used within the building such as singular toilets, small kitchen etc. It is unlikely
there will be an opportunity to reduce water consumption by increased water
management. And therefore there will be no benefit to installing a sub-meter;
in such instances the exemplary credit is not available. Compliance with the
criteria can also be demonstrated where the water metering/monitoring
equipment is integral to the water consuming plant, as oppose to a sub meter
on the water supply to the plant.
level
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
All
A copy of the specification clause
confirming:
• The specification and type of water
meter(s).
Assessor’s building/site inspection report
and photographs or ‘as built’ drawings
confirming:
• The location of the water meter(s).
Design plan(s) showing:
• Location of the water meter(s) in each
assessed building/unit.
Manufacturer’s details confirming:
• The specification of a pulsed output on
the installed meter(s).
If connected to a BMS, the assessor’s site
inspection confirming live meter readings
can be used in lieu of manufacturer’s
details confirming specification of a pulsed
output.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
The requirement for a pulsed output has been included to encourage the use of meters capable of
transmitting (by wire or wirelessly) a continuous or pulsed signal with water management information
such as total water consumed or flow rate to a Building Management System. This allows demand
patterns on water systems to be monitored and evaluated over time. A significant increase in demand
may indicate the presence of a leak or inappropriate or unexpected water consumption.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Wat 3
Wat 3 Major leak detection
Issue Title
Major Leak Detection
No. of credits
available
1
201
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce the impact of major water leaks that may otherwise go undetected.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. A leak detection system capable of detecting major leaks on the water supply has been installed.
The system must cover all mains water supply between and within the building and the site
boundary.
2. The leak detection system is:
a. Audible when activated
b. Activated when the flow of water passes through the water meter/data logger at a flow rate
above a pre-set maximum for a pre-set period of time
c. Able to identify different flow and therefore leakage rates, e.g. continuous, high and/or low
level, over set time periods
d. Programmable to suit the owner/occupiers’ water consumption criteria
e. Where applicable, designed to avoid false alarms caused by normal operation of large
water-consuming plant such as chillers.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
If the water supply to the new extension is via the existing building then the
existing
water supply to the existing building must be assessed against the criteria of
buildings
this issue.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
Fit Out-only assessments.
Ancillary or
multiple
buildings
The criteria apply to the water supply to all buildings falling within the scope of
the assessment.
Mains supply
shut-off
It is not a requirement of this issue that the leak detection system shut off the
water supply when the alarm is triggered.
No water supply
to the
building/unit
If there is no water supply to the building because there will be no installed
water-consuming fittings in the building, then the issue must be assessed on
the basis of the water supply to the nearest accessible building with such
facilities, likely to be used by the future occupants of the assessed building.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
202
Wat 3 Major leak detection
Leakage Rates
Pre-set flow rates
BREEAM Education 2008
This issue does not specify what the high and low level leakage rates should
be; however, the equipment installed must have the flexibility to distinguish
between different flow rates to enable it to be programmed to suit the
owner/occupier’s usage patterns.
Pre-set flow rates and time periods will vary depending on the building type
and usage.
System criteria
It is anticipated that this credit will usually be achieved by installing a system
which detects higher than normal flow rates at meters and/or sub-meters. It
does not require a system that would directly detect water leakage along part
or the whole length of the water supply system.
Water authority
meters
Where there is a water authority meter at the site/building boundary, it may be
necessary to install a separate flow meter to detect leaks; however, if the water
authority agrees to some form of leak detection being installed on their meter,
this would also be acceptable.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
A copy of the specification clause
confirming:
• Scope and performance criteria of leak
detection system.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The installation and operation of the leak
detection system.
• The pre-set variables of the system for
triggering the alarm and the flexibility of
the building occupier to vary these*.
AND/OR
Manufacturer’s details confirming:
• The technical specification the specified
systems.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
* This can be confirmed in a letter from the
contractor/installer to the assessor.
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Wat 4
Wat 4 Sanitary supply shut off
Issue Title
Sanitary Supply Shut Off
No. of credits
available
1
203
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce the risk of minor leaks in toilet facilities.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Solenoid valves are installed on the water supply to each toilet area in the building and the flow of
water through that supply is controlled by a link to either:
•
•
Infra-red movement detectors within each toilet facility OR
Sensors or switches placed at or on entry doors to each facility.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
If the facilities are within the existing building then it is those existing facilities
existing
that must be assessed against the criteria of this issue.
buildings
Fit Out Only
No toilet
facilities in the
assessed
building
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
If no toilet areas exist in the building then the assessment criteria must be
assessed on the basis of the nearest accessible building with such facilities
likely to be used by the occupants of the assessed building.
Shut-off
systems
Shut-off systems may control combined toilet areas, such as male and female
toilets within a core.
Proximity
detection
criteria
Single WCs
Proximity detection shut-off is not required for each individual sanitary
appliance to achieve the credit. The requirement is for the water supply to be
isolated for each toilet block on a floor when not being used by the occupants.
The criteria for this issue apply to facilities with a single WC (potentially within
smaller or low occupancy buildings). In these instances shut-off can be
provided via the same switch that controls the lighting (whether proximity
detection or a manual switch).
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
204
Wat 4 Sanitary Supply Shut Off
1
BREEAM Education 2008
A copy of the specification clause confirming:
• The specification of shut-off valves
• The controls for the shut-off valves.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The location and installation of proximity
detection controls.
A design plan showing:
• The location of the toilet facilities.
AND
‘As built’ drawings showing:
• The specification of shut-off valves
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Solenoid valve: An electrically operated shut-off device that controls the flow of water in pipes.
Volume controller: An automatic control device to turn off the water supply once a maximum preset
volume is reached.
Programmed time controller: An automatic time switch device to switch the water supply on and/or off
at predetermined times.
Light fittings in toilets are often controlled by proximity detection by IR movement detectors or sensors
placed at entry doors (the latter can be less accurate as more than one person can enter or depart in
the opening of one door). The sensors used to control the lighting can also be linked to a solenoid valve
in the cold water supply. This will then act as a proximity detection system.
Small water leaks can result in significant losses over time, increasing costs as well as causing
damage. There is a significant risk of leaks going undetected, particularly as toilet accommodation is
often unoccupied for long periods. A proximity detection shut-off system prevents waste water from
minor leaks by shutting off the water supply when toilet accommodation is not occupied.
Valves in cisterns supplying urinals and WCs are especially prone to failure, leading to wastage of
water via the overflow. Whilst leakage from any valve is variable, a typical value for a leaking valve
toilet might be 4 litres/day.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Wat 5
Issue Title
Water Recycling
Wat 5 Water recycling
No. of credits
available
1
205
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To encourage the collection and re-use of waste water or rainwater to meet toilet flushing needs and
reduce the demand for potable fresh water.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Where one of the following water recycling strategies has been implemented:
1. Where a rainwater collection tank has been installed and the tank is sized to collect at least 50% of
EITHER:
a. The total predicted rainwater run-off from the roof catchment area for the defined period of
collection. OR
b. The rainwater run-off required to meet the total predicted flushing demand for the defined
period of collection.
2. Waste water from wash hand basins and showers is collected from ≥80% of fittings and recycled to
meet part (minimum of 10%) or the total of WC/urinal flushing demand within the building(s).
3. For higher education buildings with laboratories, at least 80% of waste water from processes or
water treatment (e.g. from water treatment serving labs where permitted by regulation) is collected
and recycled to meet part (minimum of 10%) or the total of WC/urinal flushing demand within the
building(s).
4. A combination of rainwater collection, greywater and waste water from processes (higher education
only) or water treatment that meets at least 50% of EITHER:
a. The total predicted toilet and urinal flushing demand for the defined period of collection OR
b. The total predicted toilet and urinal flushing demand for the defined period of collection and
(where specified) irrigation of planting and landscaping.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
If the assessment is of the new extension only, then the roof catchment area
existing
can be taken as the roof area of the extended building. If feasible however, the
buildings
total roof area of the new extension and existing building can be used. If the
assessment is of the new build extension and existing building i.e. whole
building, then the roof catchment area is taken as the whole roof area of the
building.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
206
Wat 5 Water recycling
BREEAM Education 2008
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
Fit Out-only assessments.
Rainwater
collection tank
size
Of the two options available for demonstrating compliance, it is the option with
the lesser of the two figures (litres) that should be specified and therefore used
to demonstrate compliance. For example it would not be expected to size a
system that collected significantly more rainwater over the defined period than
was required to meet flushing demand in the building over the same period,
unless the collection system is being used to meet landscape irrigation
demand or forms part of a storm water management strategy.
Greywater
system
No BREEAM criteria have been set in terms of the period of collection that the
tank should be sized to meet. Where a greywater collection system is
specified, the size of the tank should be appropriate to the building occupancy
and frequency of the facilities usage, bearing in mind that greywater tanks
have a typical maximum retention period of 24 hours.
See additional guidance for an example of calculating compliance with the
assessment criteria.
Calculation
criteria
Run-off from
paved areas
Run-off from paved areas can also be collected and included in the calculation.
Where the run-off is collected from part roof, part paved areas, the total
catchment area must be at least equivalent to the plan area of the roof.
Using rainwater
to meet irrigation
and other
process
demands
Waste Water
from processes
Using rainwater collection for WC/urinal flushing is the first priority. Where this
demand is met, additional rainwater resources can be used to meet water
demand for irrigation or building/operational processes.
Calculating total
predicted
flushing demand
Total predicted flushing demand can be estimated by the design team on the
basis of the following variables:
• Number of building users (staff and visitors/students/users as applicable)
• Effective flush volume of WCs/urinals
• Estimated number* of WC/urinal uses per person per day (multiplied by
the defined period of collection)
Process related waste water in higher education buildings can be counted
towards the achievement of the credit only where the process that produces
the waste water is an integral part of the building and its use/operation.
* For staff use, unless other data is available, assume 1.3 WC uses per person
per day and 2 urinal uses per person per day (assume that only 50% of the
building occupants will use urinals).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Wat 5 Water recycling
207
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
All
A copy of the specification clause confirming:
• Type of collection system specified.
• WC, urinal, taps and shower specification
(where appropriate).
• The type of system that generates and
recycles process related waste water
(where appropriate).
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The installation of the collection system.
Where changes have occurred since design
stage assessment, a revised copy of the
technical specification and sizing calculations
for the installed system.
Design team calculations for the defined
period of collection demonstrating (where
appropriate):
• Rainwater yield for the catchment area
(mm)
• Predicted WC/urinal flushing demand
• Estimated potential for waste water
collection from taps/showers/other
process (where applicable).
• Size (litres) of the rainwater/greywater
collection tank specified.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Defined period of collection: For the purpose of assessing this Issue the defined period of collection
is 18 days. This is equivalent to approximately 5% of annual rainfall yield.
Potable water: Defined as drinkable and/or mains supplied water. This definition includes water
obtained by borehole abstraction and water sourced from rivers, mountain streams, lakes etc.
Catchment area: An area that catches rainfall and delivers it to a collection tank for re-use.
Greywater: Waste water from taps, showers and laundries.
Calculating compliance
The following formula can be used to calculate the volume of collectable rainwater for the assessed
building’s catchment area for the defined period of collection:
∑ (ARF x C x Rco-ef x Fco-ef x Dcol)
Where:
ARF = Annual rainfall for the site location (mm)
C = Rainwater catchment area (m2)
Rco-ef = Run-off co-efficient
Fco-ef = Filter co-efficient.
Dcol = Defined period of collection: 18 days/365 days = 0.05
Annual rainfall: The local EA, SEPA, EHS office or the Met Office should be able to supply rainfall
data.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
208
Wat 5 Water recycling
BREEAM Education 2008
Run-off co-efficient: A coefficient is used to adjust the tank size calculation to allow for the fact that
not every drop of rain that falls within the catchment area will be collected by the tank. Drainage coefficient is dependent on the type of roof specified for the building, flat roofs having a lower co-efficient.
Below are some typical co-efficient factors:
Roof type
Run-off co-efficient
Pitched roof tiles
0.75 - 0.9
Flat roof smooth tiles
Flat roof with gravel layer
0.5
0.4 – 0.5
Filter co-efficient: Not all the water that drains from the roof down the gutters will reach the holding
tank; the filter co-efficient accounts for this. Most manufacturers/installers of systems will recommend a
filter co-efficient of 90% i.e. 0.9.
Drainage and filter co-efficiencies can be found in CIRIA guidance81, though these should be in the
design team’s sizing calculations.
Example calculation:
Average annual rainfall for the site location (mm)
757mm
Roof catchment area (m2)
3,500m2
Drainage co-efficient (tiled pitched roof)
0.8
Filter co-efficient.
0.9
Defined period of collection
0.05
Volume of rainwater for the defined period of collection
95,382 Litres
An installed rainwater collection tank with a capacity of 50,000 litres would therefore collect 52.4% of
the total predicted rainwater run-off from the roof catchment area for the defined period of collection.
Design issues
BS4800:1989 Schedule of paint colours for building purposes. This BS covers the need to have
pipework in standardised colours to avoid cross contamination and sets colours for rainwater and
greywater system pipes’ flow and return.
BS1710:1984 Specification for identification of pipelines and services. This BS covers the identifying
marks that should be placed on pipes containing different substances, including greywater pipes, and
references the colours in the above BS.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Wat 6
Wat 6 Irrigation Systems
Issue Title
Irrigation Systems
No. of credits
available
1
209
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce the consumption of potable water for ornamental planting and landscape irrigation.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Where the irrigation method specified for internal or external planting and/or landscaping complies
with ANY ONE of the following:
a. Drip feed subsurface irrigation that incorporates soil moisture sensors. The irrigation control
should be zoned to permit variable irrigation to different planting assemblages.
b. Reclaimed water from a rainwater or greywater system.
c. External landscaping and planting that relies solely on precipitation, during all seasons of
the year.
d. The only planting specified is restricted to species that thrive in hot and dry conditions.
e. Where no dedicated, mains-supplied irrigation systems (including pop-up sprinklers and
hoses) are specified, and planting will rely solely on manual watering by building occupier
or landlord.
2. Where a sub surface drip feed irrigation system is installed for external areas, a rainstat must also
be installed to prevent automatic irrigation of the planting and the landscape during periods of
rainfall.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Fit Out Only
No landscaped
areas
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
This issue does not apply where there are no landscaped areas within the
construction zone of the assessed building. In such instances the BREEAM
assessor’s spreadsheet tool will filter the issue from the list of applicable
issues.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
210
Wat 6 Irrigation Systems
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
Design team confirmation via assessment
meeting minutes, letter or email confirming
the irrigation strategy for the site AND
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The implementation of the proposed
strategy.
• If relevant, the installation of the
specified system.
Proposed site plan, marked up to illustrate
the scope of the irrigation specified AND
One of the following:
A copy of the specification clause confirming:
• Type of irrigation system and controls.
OR
Manufacturer’s information detailing:
• The technical details of the specified
system.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Construction zone: For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is
being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building and its external site areas i.e. the scope of the
new works.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements)
211
9.0 Materials
Issue ID
Mat 1
No. of credits
available
Issue Title
Materials Specification (Major Building
Elements)
6
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of construction materials with a low environmental impact over the
full life cycle of the building.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The Green Guide rating for the specifications for the following building elements must be
determined and entered in to the BREEAM assessor’s Mat 1 Calculator. Green Guide ratings for
the specification(s) making-up each element can be found at: www.thegreenguide.org.uk
Applicable elements to assessment stage
Building Element
New build & Major
Refurbishment
Fit Out
External Walls
P
N/A
Windows
P
N/A
Roof
P
N/A
Upper Floor Slabs
P
N/A
Internal Walls
P
P
Floor Finishes /
Coverings
P
P
The calculator awards points for each applicable element according to its Green Guide rating as
follows:
Green Guide
Rating
Points/element
A+
3
A
2
B
1
C
0.5
D
0.25
E
0
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
212
Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements)
BREEAM Education 2008
The calculator translates the total number of points in to BREEAM credits as follows:
New build & Refurbishments
Fit Out assessments
Total Points
Credits
Total Points
Credits
2
1
5
2
2
1
8
3
4
2
10
4
12
5
14
6
Floor finishes and Internal walls
Note: Also refer to the guidance concerning the Mat 1 calculator tool in the Additional Information
section of this issue for further explanation of how the tool awards the available credits.
Exemplary level criteria
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM
issue.
1. One exemplary BREEAM credit can be awarded as follows:
a. Where assessing four or more applicable building elements, the building achieves at least
two points additional to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the
standard BREEAM criteria.
b. Where assessing fewer than four applicable building elements, the building achieves at
least one point additional to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the
standard BREEAM criteria.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
For each element that is reused in situ, BREEAM allocates an ‘A+’ rating and
these elements should also be included in the ‘A+’ rated area in the MW1
calculator. New elements specified as part of a refurbishment project, e.g.
windows, must be assessed as outlined above.
Extensions to
Any applicable new-build elements, forming part of the new extension, must be
existing
assessed as outlined above. If the existing building forms part of the scope of
buildings
the assessment, then any existing applicable element that is reused in situ
achieves an ‘A+’ rating, as outlined above for refurbishments.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
Fit-Out assessments.
Green Guide
Online
Refer to the Additional Information section below for guidance on using the
online Green Guide to Specification and accessing the appropriate ratings for
the assessed elements.
Element
consisting of
more than one
specification
Where more than one specification is present for a given element, the rating
and area for each specification should be entered into the tool and an average
points score is calculated (by area).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Finding exact
Green Guide
Ratings
No Green Guide
rating match
New elements
containing
reused materials
Mixed use
developments
Single storey
buildings and
upper floors
Exemplary level
criteria
requirements
where building
contains no
upper floor
Where integral
insulated cold
storage units
form a part of the
building fabric
Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements)
213
Whilst exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be
possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of
assessment (also see note below ‘No Green Guide rating match’).
Where a Green Guide rating cannot be found for a specification BREEAM
Assessors can use the online Green Guide calculator to determine a bespoke
Green Guide rating for the specification. Licensed BREEAM Assessors can
access the calculator via www.thegreenguide.org.uk. If a required component
is not present via the online calculator, The BREEAM Assessor will need to
submit a standard Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma, from which BRE
Global will calculate the rating and confirm the result to the Assessor.
If a new element is specified e.g. external wall, and part of that element
includes a reused material e.g. reclaimed bricks, assessors should seek
guidance from BRE on the appropriate rating.
Where the assessment covers only some of the floors in the building, the roof
must still be assessed as it is protecting the assessed building below. If the
roof is directly above domestic accommodation (e.g. flats), the equivalent
domestic Green Guide rating for the roof must be used as opposed to the
ratings for non-domestic roofs. Roof areas not protecting parts of the assessed
building/space can be omitted from the assessment.
Where the assessed building is a single storey building and therefore has no
upper floors, the upper floor element does not need to be assessed. In such
instances the BREEAM assessor’s Mat 1 Calculator will re-calculate the
requirement and award the available credits in accordance with the Green
Guide ratings for the remaining applicable elements.
Where there is no upper floor slab in the building the Mat 1 calculator tool
adjusts the points to credit benchmark scale. As such, to achieve six credits
11.67 points must be achieved. In accordance with requirement 1b of the
Exemplary level criteria 13.67 points must be achieved to award the additional
credit for compliance with the Exemplary Level Criteria. The maximum number
of points that can be achieved where there is no upper floor slab, i.e. where all
remaining elements achieve an A+ Green Guide rating, is 15 points.
Please refer to the Additional Information section for guidance on accessing
this issue for buildings with integral cold storage units, where the walls, floor
and ceiling of that unit form a part of the buildings fabric.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1&
Exemp.
level req.
Design Stage
Specification confirming:
• A detailed description of each
applicable element and its constituent
materials.
Post Construction Stage
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Element in-situ (where possible)
AND
Design drawings or specification detailing:
2
• Location and area (m ) of each
applicable element.
As built drawings and, where relevant,
written design team confirmation of any
changes to materials specification.
A copy of the output from the Mat 1
Calculator, including Green Guide rating
and element number* for each specification
assessed.
* Element numbers may change from timeto-time due to updates in the green guide
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
214
Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements)
BREEAM Education 2008
data. As a result assessors should keep a
note of the element numbers they use to
give Green Guide rating advice on
BREEAM
assessments
for
auditing
purposes.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Ecopoint: The Ecopoint used in the Green Guide online is single score that measures the total
environmental impact of a product or process as a proportion of overall impact occurring in Europe 100 Ecopoints is equivalent to the impact of a European Citizen. Green Guide ratings are derived by
sub-dividing the range of Ecopoints/m2 achieved by all specifications considered within a building
element.
Green Guide to Specification: The Green Guide to Specification is an easy-to-use comprehensive
reference website and electronic tool, providing guidance for specifiers, designers and their clients on
the relative environmental impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications. The ratings
within the Guide are based on Life Cycle Assessment, using the Environmental Profile Methodology.
www.thegreenguide.org.uk
Green Guide element number: A unique BRE Global reference number given to a Green Guide rating
for any particular building element type specification. Both standard Green Guide ratings and those
calculated using the Online Green Guide calculator will have an element number.
Reused materials: are materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without
further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g.
cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials).
The Mat 1 Calculator: A spreadsheet-based calculator required to determine the number of credits
achieved for this BREEAM issue based on each applicable element’s Green Guide rating. The Mat 1
Calculator makes four adjustments to the points achieved for each specification/element assessed, as
follows:
1. The first is the scoring based on the Green Guide rating; A+ =3, A=2, B=1, C=0.5, D=0.25 and E=0.
2. The second, where an element consists of several different specifications, is to weight the points
achieved according to the relative area and Green Guide rating of each of the individual
specifications. So if 50% of an element was A+ and 50% was C, the score would be (50%*3) +
(50%*0.5) = 1.75.
3. The third is to weight based on the overall area of different elements - this is done by multiplying the
area of each element by the weighted Green Guide score, adding the total for all elements and then
dividing by the total area of the assessed elements. As a 20 storey office block will have a smaller
roof area than floor area, so the area weighting will take this into account by giving a smaller
weighting to the score for the roof than the external walls.
4. The final adjustment relates to the Ecopoints range for each assessed element. This adjustment
ensures the environmental impact of the element in relation to the impacts of other assessed
elements within the building is considered. For example; the external walls have a larger Ecopoints
range than the internal walls, therefore, if both elements achieve the same Green Guide rating the
rating of the external walls achieves a higher proportion of the overall points than the rating for the
internal walls, thus recognising the relatively higher reduction possible in the environmental impact
of the external walls, due to the larger Ecopoints range for that element.
Online Green Guide calculator: BRE Global have created the Green Guide Calculator to enable
BREEAM and CSH assessors to quickly and efficiently generate Green Guide ratings for a significant
proportion of specifications not listed in the Green Guide Online. The Green Guide Calculator database
is based on the components currently used to create specifications within the Green Guide Online.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements)
215
These components can be selected and combined to generate instant Green Guide ratings for a
multitude of different specifications.
To access the Green Guide Calculator, you must be a licensed BREEAM/EcoHomes/Code for
Sustainable Homes Assessor. Please note that, at the time of writing, the Green Guide Calculator is
not yet available for public use.
Using the Green Guide to Specification
The Green Guide categorises ratings by building type and element. When using the Green Guide
online, (www.thegreenguide.org.uk), the main page asks the user to select a building type. To obtain
the appropriate ratings for the assessed building elements, select the corresponding building type for
this BREEAM scheme.
When carrying out a BREEAM assessment of a Further or Higher Education building, in most cases the
Green Guide ratings listed under the ‘Education’ category can be used. Alternatively, if the elemental
specification of the building/space is more akin to a commercial, retail, industrial or health specification
in terms of its Green Guide functional unit, then select and use the Green Guide ratings from the
relevant the building type.
The following elements, for the purpose of non domestic buildings, have common Green Guide ratings
irrespective of the building type:
•
•
•
External walls
Landscaping
Windows - commercial
The user can therefore search for ratings for the above elements under any building category.
Floor finishes
On the Green Guide online, under each building type, are categories of flooring specifications
commonly used for the key floor areas for that building type. For example, the Retail category contains
ratings for hard and soft floor finish specifications for public access areas, based on the functional unit
for that type of space.
However, any given building will normally contain several different floor areas with different wear
requirements. Therefore, the BREEAM Assessor will need to refer to floor finishes under other building
type categories to find the relevant specification and Green Guide rating for the building under
assessment. For example, for ‘back of house’ office and corridor areas in a retail development, it will be
necessary to search the floor finishes specifications and ratings under the Commercial category of the
Green Guide online. To aid users of the Green Guide online, there is a diagram that will direct you to
the appropriate ratings to be used for other floor areas. The diagram is found in the guidance under the
Floor Finishes category.
Guidance for the assessment of buildings where insulated cold storage units form an integral
part of the building fabric
Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to the external wall element:
As an external wall type the insulated units will be assessed in the Green Guide on the basis that it is
a normal temperature building without the extra insulation, so a standard thickness of insulation will be
considered. As such, the walls of the insulated unit should be treated as part of the external wall
element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue.
Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to a ceiling element:
As a roof element of the insulated unit, suspended ceilings are not included within the Green Guide.
Therefore, the roof of the insulated unit will be assessed as a standard construction from the deck
upwards, assuming a standard thickness of insulation. As such, the roof of the insulated unit should be
treated as part of the ceiling element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
216
Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements)
BREEAM Education 2008
Where the cold storage unit forms part of an internal wall element:
The insulated unit will be treated as meeting a very specific Functional Unit outside the scope of the
internal wall elements listed in the Green Guide. The wall to the insulated unit should therefore be
excluded from the assessment of the internal wall element.
Indoor Air Quality and the Green Guide flooring category ratings
The Green Guide Online does not cover the potential health and comfort issues associated with flooring
materials and indoor air quality, which is covered in BREEAM by issue Hea 9 Volatile Organic
Compounds.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Mat 2
Mat 2 Hard landscaping and boundary protection
No. of credits
available
Issue Title
Hard Landscaping and Boundary Protection
1
217
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of materials for boundary protection and external hard
surfaces that have a low environmental impact, taking account of the full life cycle of materials used.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Where at least 80% of all external hard landscaping and boundary protection (by area) achieves an
A or A+ rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification.
Green Guide ratings for the specification(s) of each element can be found at:
www.thegreenguide.org.uk
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
For each element that is reused in situ, BREEAM allocates an ‘A+’ rating. New
& existing
elements specified as part of a refurbishment must be assessed as outlined
elements
above.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the
assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Green Guide
Online
When using the Green Guide for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue,
ratings for landscaping elements are common across all building types. The
rating will therefore be the same irrespective of the building type selected via the
Green Guide online.
Finding exact
Green Guide
Ratings
Minor alteration
of existing
elements
No hard
landscaping or
boundary
protection
Whilst exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be
possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of
assessment. Where no similar specification can be found, seek guidance from
BRE for the appropriate rating.
Where less than 20% of the total area of existing hard landscaping and boundary
protection elements are subject to minor alterations or maintenance, these
elements are awarded an A+ rating for the purposes of this analysis.
If one of the elements is not present, e.g. boundary protection, then the credit
must be assessed on the basis of the specification of the single element e.g.
hard landscaping. Where the development has neither element, the credit can be
awarded.
Building façade
forming
boundary
Any part of an external building façade (of either the assessed building or any
other neighbouring building) that forms a part of the site boundary should be
excluded from the assessment of this credit.
Issue not applicable for Fit Out-only assessments.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
218
Mat 2 Hard landscaping and boundary protection
BREEAM Education 2008
Existing natural
features
Any existing or specified natural boundary protection (such as hedging or other
living barrier) should be awarded with an A+ rating for the purposes of this
analysis.
Scope of hard
landscaping
For the purpose of assessment, hard landscaping includes parking areas, but
excludes access/approach roads and designated vehicle manoeuvring areas.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1
Design Stage
Specification confirming:
• A detailed description of each
applicable element and its constituent
materials.
PCR Stage
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Element in-situ (where possible)
As built drawings/calculations.
Design drawings or specification detailing:
• Location and area (m2) of each
applicable element.
The Green Guide rating and element
number for the assessed specifications.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Green Guide: See Mat 1.
Green Guide Element Number: See Mat 1
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Written confirmation from the design team or
contractor of any changes to the specification.
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Mat 3
Mat 3 Re-use of facade
Issue Title
No. of credits
available
Re-Use of Facade
219
Minimum
standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the in-situ reuse of existing building façades.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. At least 50% of the total final building façade (by area) is reused.
2. At least 80% of the reused façade (by mass) comprises in-situ reused material.
3. Where an existing building is being reused and/or extended and the function/purpose of the new
building will be the same as that which the existing building was used for, i.e. there is no change of
use, the credit can be awarded where:
a. At least 25% of the façade by area of the total building is to be reused;
b. At least 80% of the façade by mass of the existing building is made up from in-situ reused
material.
The criteria in this instance are reduced as the existing building is likely to require less remedial
work as it is not subject to a change of use.
Compliance Notes
New Build
New-build schemes with retained façades provide a means of achieving the
credit.
Refurbishment
Refurbishment projects are likely to achieve this credit without difficulty.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Fit Out only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Curtain walling &
windows
Where existing windows are being replaced they may be excluded from the
calculation of façade area; however, curtain walling counts as façade.
Issue not applicable for Fit Out-only assessments
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
220
Mat 3 Re-use of facade
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1&2
3
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
Drawings detailing:
• The elevations of the existing and
the new-build façades.
Assessor’s
building/site
inspection
photographic evidence confirming:
• The existence of the reused façade.
Calculations demonstrating:
• The % of façade comprising in situ
material.
As built drawings/calculations.
and
Written confirmation from the design team or
contractor of any changes to the specification
These calculations should be simply for the façade.
based on the volume of each material
and its density, with totals compared for
the new and retained parts of the
structure.
As above.
As above.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Façade: Any exposed building face, not just the front elevation. The definition excludes party walls.
In practice, reusing façades will often require extensive renovation and/or reinforcement, hence the
BREEAM requirement for at least 80% by mass of the reused façade to be in situ reused material.
Façades with new external cladding or internal lining therefore can gain this credit provided that this
criterion is met.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Mat 4 Re-use of structure
Issue Title
Mat 4
Re-Use of Structure
No. of credits
available
1
221
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the reuse of existing structures that previously occupied the site.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Where at least 80% by volume of an existing primary structure is reused without significant
strengthening or alteration works.
2. Where a project is part refurbishment and part new build, the reused structure comprises at least
50% by volume of the final building, i.e. any new-build extension to a building being refurbished
should not be larger than the original building to qualify for this credit.
3. Where an existing building is being reused and/or extended and the function/purpose of the new
building will be the same as that which the existing building was used for, i.e. there is no change of
use, the credit can be awarded where;
a. 80% of the existing building structure, by gross building volume, is reused without
significant strengthening or alteration works.
b. The reused structure comprises at least 25%, by gross building volume, of the final total
building structure.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of new-build projects.
Refurbishment
Refurbishment projects are likely to be the only buildings to achieve this credit.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit out-only assessments
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
222
Mat 4 Re-use of structure
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
1&2
Drawings or design team calculations
detailing:
• The sections of the existing structure to
be reused.
• Any parts of the structure to be
demolished and the total new structure.
• Where appropriate, calculations
confirming any strengthening/alteration
are not deemed ‘significant’ in terms of
the assessment criteria for the mass of
materials used.
As above.
3
Post Construction Stage
As built drawings/calculations.
Written confirmation from the design team
or contractor of any changes to the
structural specification.
As above.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Significant strengthening or alteration: Defined as where the mass of new material is equal to or
greater than 50% of the total mass of the reused structure.
Primary structure: Defined as structural floors, columns, beams, load bearing walls and foundations
i.e. where required for structural use by the new building.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Mat 5
Issue Title
Responsible Sourcing of Materials
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
No. of credits
available
3 (new build/refurbs)
2 (Fit Out)
223
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of responsibly sourced materials for key building
elements.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
New Build and Major Refurbishment assessments
1. Up to 3 credits are available where evidence provided demonstrates that 80% of the applicable
materials (listed below) comprising each of the following building elements are responsibly sourced:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Structural Frame
Ground floor
Upper floors (including separating floors)
Roof
External walls
Internal walls
Foundation/substructure
Staircase
Applicable materials
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brick (including clay tiles and other ceramics)
Resin-based composites and materials, including GRP and polymeric render
Concrete (including in-situ and pre-cast concrete, blocks, tiles, mortars, cementious renders
etc.)
Glass
Plastics and rubbers (including EPDM, TPO, PVC and VET roofing membranes including
polymeric renders)
Metals (steel, aluminium etc.)
Dressed or building stone including slate
Timber, timber composite and wood panels (including glulam, plywood, OSB, MDF, chipboard
and cement bonded particleboard)
Plasterboard and plaster
Bituminous materials, such as roofing membranes and asphalt
Other mineral-based materials, including fibre cement and calcium silicate
Products with recycled content
Note: Insulation materials, fixings, adhesives and additives are excluded from the assessment. For
any other materials that form a part of an applicable building element, but do not fit into the
applicable materials list or the exclusions list, please refer to BRE who will identify the relevant Key
Process and Supply Chain Process or Processes.
2. Each applicable material is assigned to a responsible sourcing tier level based on the level and
scope of certification achieved by the material supplier(s)/manufacturer(s) (see
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
224
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
BREEAM Education 2008
Table 15 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria in the additional guidance section).
3. Follow the Calculation Procedure outlined in the additional guidance section, and use the Mat 5
Responsible Sourcing Calculator to determine the number of credits to be awarded.
4. Any non-certified timber used in the development comes from a legal source and is not included on
the CITES list (see definition for legally sourced timber).
Fit Out-only assessments
1. Up to 2 credits are available where evidence provided demonstrates that 80% of the applicable
materials (listed below) comprising the following fit out elements are responsibly sourced:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Stairs
Windows
External and internal doors
Skirting
Panelling
Furniture
Fascias
Any other significant use
Applicable materials
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brick (including clay tiles and other ceramics)
Resin-based composites and materials, including GRP and polymeric render
Concrete (including in-situ and pre-cast concrete, blocks, tiles, mortars, cementious renders
etc.)
Glass
Plastics and rubbers (including EPDM, TPO, PVC and VET roofing membranes including
polymeric renders)
Metals (steel, aluminium etc.)
Dressed or building stone including slate
Timber, timber composite and wood panels (including glulam, plywood, OSB, MDF, chipboard
and cement bonded particleboard)
Plasterboard and plaster
Bituminous materials, such as roofing membranes and asphalt
Other mineral-based materials, including fibre cement and calcium silicate
Products with recycled content
2. Each applicable material is assigned to a responsible sourcing tier level based on the level and
scope of certification achieved by the material supplier(s)/manufacturer(s) (see Table 15
Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria and Table 16 EMS Criteria in the additional guidance
section).
3. Follow the Calculation Procedure outlined in the additional guidance section, and use the Mat 5
Responsible Sourcing Calculator to determine the number of credits to be awarded.
4. Any non-certified timber used in the development comes from a legal source and is not included on
the CITES list (see definition for legally sourced timber).
Exemplary level criteria
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM
issue:
1. Where, in addition to the above criteria, 95% of the applicable materials, comprised within the
applicable building elements, have been responsibly sourced.
Compliance Notes
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Fit Out-Only
Building element
not present
Reused in-situ
materials
Specified reused
Materials
Insulating
materials
CITES list
A Government
licence
Pre or post
consumer waste
Checklist A5
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
225
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
In the case of a refurbishment assess the newly specified applicable and
reused materials (reused as defined below).
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
Fit Out-only assessments.
Where an element is not present in a project (e.g. an assessment of a ground
floor of a building only and therefore no roof in the scope of the assessment),
the points for this/these element(s) will be redistributed by the BREEAM
Assessor’s responsible sourcing calculator to reward only the elements being
assessed.
Materials reused in-situ can be excluded from the assessment. The aim of this
issue is to focus on the responsible sourcing of new specified materials.
Reused materials specified for the development e.g. recycled aggregates are
considered equivalent to materials covered by certification schemes that fall
within tier 1 of Table 15 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and CriteriaTable 15
Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria.
The responsible souring of materials used for insulating the building fabric and
services is assessed as part of BREEAM Materials section issue Mat 6
Insulation (see below). Therefore insulating materials are not assessed as part
of this assessment issue, but they are still subject to BREEAM’s responsible
sourcing requirements.
CITES (Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species)
Appendices I and II of the CITES list82 illustrate species of timber that are
protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list illustrates species that are
protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development
is on Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the
timber is not obtained from the country(ies) seeking to protect this species (see
Additional Information for further details).
A Government licence e.g. UK Forestry Commission felling licence certificate,
does not comply as a third party timber certification scheme for this credit, but
can be used as evidence of legally sourced timber.
Where materials being assessed (including timber) are part of a pre- or postconsumer waste stream, the EMS sections of the credit can be applied for;
however, using an EMS scheme (ISO, EMAS etc.) for new timber does not
demonstrate timber certification and therefore does not qualify for any of these
BREEAM credits.
Checklist A5 contains information for the BREEAM assessor, including an
explanation of what is required for each of the responsible sourcing tiers.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
226
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
Design plan and/or specification confirming:
• the location of elements and materials
specified
• Details of the materials specified.
As built drawings or as built specifications
confirming that the building has been
constructed in accordance with the design
stage drawings/specifications.
2&3
A copy of the output from the Responsible
Sourcing of Materials Calculator Tool.
Copies of purchase orders or receipts or
certificate/letter of conformity for all
applicable materials, including those recycled
or reused
A copy of the output from the Responsible
Sourcing of Materials Calculator Tool (if
different from Design Stage calculation).
AND EITHER
A letter of intent from the design team
confirming:
• The product shall be sourced from
suppliers
capable
of
providing
certification to the level required for the
particular tier claimed.
OR
A copy of the CoC and/or BES6001 and/or
EMS (EMAS/ISO14001) certificate.
OR
For Small companies, (see Relevant
Definitions) confirmation that the company
EMS is structured in compliance with either:
•
BS8555 2003 (or equivalent) and the
EMS has completed phase audits one to
four as outlined in BS8555. This
evidence can be found from company
documentation
demonstrating
the
process and typical outputs from phase
four audits such as an EMS
manual/paperwork and guidance to staff.
Where independent certification exists to
demonstrate these phases, it can be
used as evidence.
•
Green Dragon Environmental Standard
® 2006 (Safon Amgylcheddol Y Ddraig
Werdd ®) completed up to and including
Level 4. Confirmation is taken from a
Green Dragon Standard certificate
stating the company’s achievement of
Level 4. As company’s achieving Level 4
will normally be required to undertake
annual audits, this certification should be
dated within 1 year at the point of the last
purchase made from the company. For
smaller
companies
with
low
environmental impacts, a renewal date of
within 2 years is acceptable. For
clarification on whether a company is
certified against the Green Dragon
Environmental Standard please see the
Register of companies available at the
Green Dragon website.
If the material has been ordered, supplied or
the supplier is known:
•
Purchase order from the supplier
including (as appropriate) Chain of
Custody (CoC) number and/or
BES6001:2008 Certificate number
and/or EMS Certificate number
OR
•
A copy of the CoC and/or BES6001
and/or EMS certificate.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
4
Written confirmation from the developer
confirming that:
• All timber will come from a ‘legal source’
and one not on the CITES list*.
* Or in the case of Appendix III of the
CITES list, it has not been sourced from the
country seeking to protect this species as
listed in Appendix III.
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
227
Where any non-certified timber is used,
written confirmation from the supplier(s)
confirming that:
• All timber comes from a legal source.
• All timber species and sources used in
the development are not listed on any of
the CITES appendices for endangered or
threatened species (Appendix I, II, or
III*).
* Or in the case of Appendix III of the
CITES list, it has not been sourced from the
country seeking to protect this species as
listed in Appendix III.
Additional Information
Calculation Procedure: BREEAM Assessor’s Mat 5 & Mat 8 Responsible Sourcing calculator tool
(note: issue Mat 8 applicable only to buildings using the Multi-residential BREEAM scheme)
1. Choose from the list of options in the drop down menu of the calculator the appropriate assessment
and scheme type and press the select button.
2. For each element, select from the drop down menu the number of different types/specifications of
that element you wish to enter and press the select button. If the element is not present select ‘0’.
Note: selecting zero will adjust the points required benchmarks accordingly (see below).
3. For each element, select the ‘data type’ from the relevant drop down menu. There are two options
depending on the element type, ‘Volume’ or ‘Percentage’.
Volume
a. For all present elements and element type/specifications, enter the names of the material types
comprising each individual type/specification in the relevant cell of the column material types.
b. Enter the volume of each individual material type in the relevant cell of the column titled
percentage/volume of relevant materials present.
c.
Enter the total combined volume of the material types in the cell total volume of element
present.
d. Enter the volume of each material that complies with either tier 1, 2a or b, 3 or 4, as
appropriate. At least 80% of the total volume of each type must comply with one or more of the
tiers to achieve any points for that element type.
Percentage
a. For all present elements and element type/specifications, enter the names of the material types
comprising each individual type/specification in the relevant cell of the column material types.
b. Enter the percentage of each individual material type (as a percentage of the whole element
type) in the relevant cell of the column titled percentage/volume of relevant materials present.
c.
Enter the percentage of each material (as a percentage of the whole element type) that
complies with either tier 1, 2a or b, 3 or 4, as appropriate. At least 80% of the materials that
make up an element type must comply with one or more of the tiers to achieve any points for
that element type.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
228
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
BREEAM Education 2008
Combination
a. For each type/specification of an element data must be entered by volume or percentage.
However, it is not necessary to enter all the data using only one of either volume or percentage,
for example one type of an element can be entered using volume and another type using
percentage (according to how the relevant building information is sourced/provided).
Percentage material breakdown for Green Guide specifications available via the online
responsible sourcing calculator
BRE Global can, via the online Responsible Sourcing Calculator, provide Licensed BREEAM
Assessors with a percentage breakdown of materials for any elemental specification with a Green
Guide rating.
Assessors can use the online tool to determine the percentage breakdown in two ways; either by
entering an individual Green Guide element number for the required specification (if known) or
doing a search by building and element type using the relevant drop down menus and elemental
specification details provided by the design team.
The Assessor must then take the returned data and enter it in to the Mat 5 & 8 calculator tool in
accordance with the procedure described above for percentage data entry.
The BREEAM Assessor must reference in their Certification report the Green Guide element
number for any data sourced from the online Responsible Sourcing Calculator.
The online Responsible Sourcing Calculator can be accessed by Licensed BREEAM Assessors via
the BREEAM Assessor’s Extranet (there is also a link to the online calculator in the Assessor’s Mat
5&8 calculator tool).
4. Once all data has been entered correctly and in compliance with the criteria, the tool will calculate
the total number of points achieved and translate this into the number of credits awarded, as
follows:
The following scale is used to award credits for new builds and major refurbishment projects:
a. ≥15 points 3 credits awarded
b. ≥10 points 2 credits awarded
c. ≥5 points 1 credit awarded
The following scale is used to award credits for fit-out projects:
a. ≥15 points 2 credits awarded
b. ≥10 points 1 credits awarded
Assessors Calculation procedure: Post Construction/Post Fit Out stage
The procedure for calculating the number of credits achieved at the interim and final stages of
assessment is the same; however at the final stage of assessment Assessors will need to:
1. Check that the As Built construction matches that proposed at design stage (see Schedule of
Evidence). Where there are any differences in the specification, obtain the relevant volumes and/ or
percentages of materials for each element that differs.
2. Obtain the relevant confirmation of tier level achieved (see Schedule of Evidence) for all materials,
from all sources/suppliers.
3. Confirm and/or re-assign tier levels to each material based on the level of certification provided (see
Table 15 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria and Information Required to Demonstrate
Compliance).
4. Adjust the Mat 5 & 8 Responsible Sourcing Calculator accordingly to include any revised
information/data, following the calculation procedures described above.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
229
Note:
Where one or more elements are not applicable i.e. they are not contained within the building e.g.
upper floors, the number of points required to credits available are re-allocated based on the number of
elements that are specified (the Mat 5 & 8 calculator tool will confirm the adjusted benchmark scale).
Although only 80% of the materials in an element have to be assessed, it may be beneficial to include
even small percentages of materials that are in tiers higher than those for the 80% compliant materials,
as this will contribute to the total amount of points achieved.
A maximum of three points is achievable for each element; therefore for example, where there are two
types/specifications for an individual element, each individual type can contribute up to a maximum of
1.5 points. Likewise, if there are four types, each can contribute up to a maximum of 0.75 points (the
maximum points achievable is based on 80% of the applicable materials achieving tier 1 certification
status).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
230
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
BREEAM Education 2008
Table 15 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria
Tier level Issue assessed
Points
Evidence /
available per measure
element
assessed
1
Legality &
3
Certification
responsible
scheme
sourcing
2a
Legality and
responsible
sourcing
2.5
Certification
scheme
2b
Legality and
responsible
sourcing
2
Certification
scheme
3
Legality &
responsible
sourcing
1.5
Certification
scheme/ EMS
Examples of compliant
schemes
FSC, CSA, SFI with CoC,
PEFC, Reused Materials,
Schemes compliant with
BES6001:200883 (or similar)
Excellent* and Very Good*
Performance Ratings (Note; the
EMS required to achieve these
ratings must be independently
certified**)
Schemes compliant with
BES6001:2008 (or similar)
‘Good’ Performance Rating
(Note: the EMS required to
achieve this rating must be
independently certified**).
Schemes compliant with
BES6001:2008 (or similar)
‘Pass’ Performance Rating
(Note: the EMS required to
achieve this rating must be
independently certified).
Timber: MTCC***, Verified****,
SGS, TFT
Other materials: Certified EMS
for the Key Process and Supply
Chain.
Recycled Materials with certified
EMS for the Key Process
Certified EMS for key process
stage.
1
Certification
Legality &
scheme/EMS
responsible
sourcing
Where any timber is used, it must be legally sourced. Where evidence cannot be provided to
demonstrate legal sourcing for any element, no points can be awarded for the Responsible Sourcing
Issue.
4
Where cement and aggregate, or dry mix concrete are mixed on site, (i.e. not concrete previously
certified as pre–cast concrete products or wet ready mix concrete), certification must cover the
manufacture of the cement as the primary process, and the extraction of the aggregate and limestone
used to make the cement as the supply chain process.
* Performance ratings for schemes compliant with BES6001:2008 (or similar) can only be used to
demonstrate compliance with the assessment criteria for this issue where certification covers the key
process and supply chain processes for the material being assessed.
** In BES6001:2008 to achieve a ‘Pass’, level ‘a’ must, as a minimum, be achieved for clauses 3.3.1,
3.3.2 and 3.3.3. Under clause 3.3.2 level ‘a’ requires a documented EMS system following the
principles of ISO14001, but not formal certification. To achieve higher ratings such as ‘Good’, ‘Very
Good’ and Excellent a minimum number of points from a combination of clauses 3.3.1, 3.3.2 and 3.3.3
must be achieved. It is possible therefore to get a ‘Good’ or ‘Very good’ rating by only complying with
level ‘a’ for clause 3.3.2 and levels ‘c’ and ‘d’ for the other two clauses without necessarily having in
place a formal independently certified EMS (as required above). In conducting BES6001 assessment, if
the assessor confirms full compliance with clause 3.3.2 level ‘a’ the requirement for an independently
certified EMS has been met.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
231
*** PEFC International has recently endorsed the Malaysian MTCS scheme, as a result any MTCC
timber certified against the new PEFC endorsed scheme documents can be classified as tier 1 for the
purposes of the BREEAM assessment. The PEFC endorsement only covers certificates issued against
the latest MTCC scheme documents, it must be stressed therefore that any holders of certifications
against the previous MTCC scheme documents, including the forest management standard MC&I 2001
or any parts thereof, are NOT PEFC endorsed and this timber must still be classified as Tier 3.
When seeking the higher tier level for MTCC certified timber the assessor will need to verify the above
via the scope of the supplier’s certificate.
For further information and guidance please visit the PEFC website:
http://www.pefc.org/internet/html/members_schemes/4_1120_59/5_1246_320/5_1123_1887.htm
*** “Verified” is the name of a scheme produced by SmartWood.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
232
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
BREEAM Education 2008
Table 16 EMS Criteria
Material
Brick (including clay tiles and other
ceramics)
Resin-based
composites
and
materials (including GRP and
polymeric render but excluding
timber based composites)
In situ Concrete (including ready
mix and cemetitious mortars and
renders)
Precast
concrete
and
other
concrete products (including blocks,
cladding, precast flooring, concrete
or cementitious roof tiles)
Glass
Key Process
Product Manufacture
Supply chain processes
Clay Extraction
Composite product manufacture
Glass fibre production (or other
principle matrix material)
Polymer production
Ready mixed concrete plant
Cement production
Aggregate
extraction
production
Cement production
Aggregate
extraction
production
Plastics and rubbers (including
polymeric renders, EPDM, TPO,
PVC and VET roofing membranes)
Plastic/rubber product manufacture
Metals (steel, aluminium etc)
Metal Product manufacture - e.g.
cladding production, steel section
production
Dressed or building stone (including
slate)
Plasterboard and plaster
Stone product manufacture
Virgin timber
Timber from certified sources
Cement Bonded Particle Board
Due to the significant cement
content, in addition to requiring
timber certification, the key supply
chain process must also be
considered to obtain the relevant
tier: Timber from certified sources
Wood panel and wood based
composite products such as
Oriented Strand Board, plywood,
HPL, chipboard/particle, glulam,
LVL,etc.)
Bituminous materials, such as
roofing membranes and asphalt
Wood products, including those
with recycled content, can only use
the Timber Certification route
Other mineral-based materials,
including fibre cement and calcium
silicate
Product manufacture
Products with 100% recycled
content
Products with lower % of recycled
content
Product manufacture
Any other product
Key processes is likely to be
product manufacture
Excluded products:
insulation
materials,
adhesives, additives
Concrete product manufacture
Glass production
Plasterboard
manufacture
or
plaster
Product manufacture
Product manufacture
N/A
fixings,
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
and
and
Sand extraction
Soda Ash production or extraction
Main polymer production
Metal production:
Steel: Electric arc furnace or Basic
oxygen furnace process,
Aluminium, ingot production,
Copper:
ingot
or
cathode
production.
Stone extraction
Gypsum extraction
Synthetic gypsum (from flue gas
desulphurisation)
by
default
(recycled content)
Timber from certified sources
Cement production
Timber from certified sources
Bitumen production
Aggregate
extraction
production
Cement production
lime production
other mineral extraction
production
Recycled input by default
and
and
Supply chain process/processes for
any virgin material in the relevant
product type above.
Recycled input by default
1 or 2 main inputs with significant
production or extraction impacts
should be identified
N/A
BREEAM Education 2008
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
233
Timber and Environmental Management Schemes (EMS)
Where an Environmental management scheme is used to assess products made from recycled timber,
100% of the timber content must be recycled or sourced from one of the recognised timber certification
schemes in Table 15 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria. A timber product with 50%
recycled timber and 50% legally sourced timber will not comply with the criteria and will not be awarded
any points.
Using an EMS for new timber does not demonstrate timber certification and therefore does not qualify
for points.
Chain of Custody
This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence/path for
products from forests to consumers. Wood must be tracked from the certified forest to the finished
product. All the steps, from transporting wood from the forest to a sawmill, until it reaches the customer,
must maintain adequate inventory control systems that allow for separation and identification of the
certified product. Chain-of-custody certification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track
wood from certified forests and avoid confusing it with non-certified wood. Chain-of-custody is
established and audited according to relevant forest certification systems rules.
Third party certification process
Auditable third party
Certificate
issuing body
(e.g. Soil
Association, BM
Trada, CTB,
IMO, KPMG,
SGS…)
Certification
Accreditation
process
standards setting
body
(CSA, FSC,
MTCC, PEFC,
SFI)
A certificate
issued with
CoC number
Timber certification process
CITES - Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (extract
taken from the CITES website)
‘’CITES works by subjecting international trade in specimens of selected species to certain controls. All
import, export, re-export and introduction from the sea of species covered by the Convention has to be
authorized through a licensing system. Each Party to the Convention must designate one or more
Management Authorities in charge of administering that licensing system and one or more Scientific
Authorities to advise them on the effects of trade on the status of the species.
The species covered by CITES are listed in three Appendices, according to the degree of protection
they need.
1. Appendix I includes species threatened with extinction. Trade in specimens of these species is
permitted only in exceptional circumstances.
2. Appendix II includes species not necessarily threatened with extinction, but in which trade must be
controlled in order to avoid utilization incompatible with their survival.
3. Appendix III contains species that are protected in at least one country, which has asked other
CITES Parties for assistance in controlling the trade.’’
Calculation of Timber Volumes
a. Most of the information on areas, lengths and volumes of timber will be available from the
component manufacturers or estimator, who should provide a detailed breakdown of quantities of
materials.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
234
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
BREEAM Education 2008
b. In order to calculate the volume of wood in timber frame windows, the total length of frame must be
obtained. This can then be converted to a volume by multiplying the length of frame on fixed
windows by 0.00653 and the length of frame on opening windows by 0.01089.
c.
In order to calculate the volume of timber in composite timber doors such as a flush door, calculate
the total area of all doors summed over the whole building and multiply this by 0.02187 (this factor
gives the total volume of timber in the doors and frames).
BES 6001:2008 Framework Standard for Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products
BES 6001:2008 is a BRE Global standard that provides a framework for the assessment of responsible
sourcing schemes and provides a route to certification of construction products.
The framework comprises a number of criteria setting out the criteria of an organisation in managing the
supply of construction products in accordance with a set of agreed principles of sustainability. To
comply with the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria, where a product
demonstrates compliance beyond the mandatory levels, higher levels of performance can be
achieved. The standard's performance ratings range from Pass to Good, Very Good and Excellent.
The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemes will, it is envisaged, provide
construction products, not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for
demonstrating their responsibly sourced credentials. In turn this will allow clients, developers and
design teams to specify responsibly sourced construction products with greater assurance and provide
a means of demonstrating compliance with the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.
To view a list of products approved to BES6001:2008 visit: www.greenbooklive.com/page.jsp?id=169
For further information about BES6001:2008, including a copy of the standard itself visit:
www.greenbooklive.com/page.jsp?id=153
Relevant Definitions
Composite material: can be defined as an engineered material made from two or more constituent
materials with significantly different physical or chemical properties and which remain separate and
distinct on a macroscopic level within the finished structure. Resin based composites such as GRP and
polymeric render and timber composites such as Chipboard/Particleboard, MDF, OSB, plywood,
hardboard, laminated veneered lumber, glulam and cement bonded particleboard are all required to be
assessed for responsible sourcing.
Frame: The frame is any of the main structural elements that are not included in the roof, external walls
and floors. For example, timber or metal studwork within a plasterboard partition would be included
within the internal walls, and timber joists would be included within the floor construction.
Where a concrete or steel frame is used, this would be treated as the Frame as it would not be integral
to the internal walls for example.
Green Dragon Environmental Standard ® (Safon Amgylcheddol Y Ddraig Werdd ®):
A stepped standard used to accredit compliance with the Green Dragon Environmental Management
Scheme. Dependant on the content of the EMS being assessed, a Level of 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 may be
achieved. At level 4 and above, the Green Dragon Environmental Standard ® can be used as evidence
of a compliant EMS for small companies being considered under the assessment of this BREEAM
issue. www.greendragonems.com
Green Guide Element Number: See Mat 1.
Key Processes: the final major aspects of processing that are carried out. There may be a single
process or multiple processes requiring assessment, depending on the end product. The criteria for
each of the assessed materials are detailed in Table 16 EMS Criteria.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
235
Legally Sourced Timber: BREEAM follows the UK Government's definition of legally sourced timber,
as outlined in the CPET 2nd Edition report on UK Government Timber Procurement Policy84, which
states that legal timber and wood derived products are those which originate from a forest where the
following criteria are met:
1. The forest owner/manager holds legal use rights to the forest.
2. There is compliance by both the forest management organisation and any contractors with local
and national legal criteria including those relevant to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Forest management
Environment
Labour and welfare
Health & safety
Other parties’ tenure and use rights
3. All relevant royalties and taxes are paid.
4. There is compliance with the criteria of CITES.
Relevant documentation demonstrating the above must be provided or made available on
request subject to the availability of such materials in the country concerned. Certification from any of
the timber certification schemes identified in tiers 1, 2 and 4 for this credit demonstrate legally sourced
timber.
Mat 5 & 8 Responsible Sourcing Calculator: The spreadsheet based calculator tool used by the
BREEAM Assessor to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for the Mat 5 assessment
issue (and in the case of the BREEAM Multi-Residential scheme, the Mat 8 assessment issue).
Online Responsible Sourcing Calculator: A web based calculator tool for determining the percentage
breakdown of materials that comprise a specific building elemental specification e.g. an external wall.
Data is available for all elemental specifications that have a Green Guide rating. The calculator is
available to Licensed BREEAM Assessors via the Assessor’s online Extranet.
Pre-consumer waste stream: Waste material generated during manufacturing processes. Excluded is
reutilisation of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being
reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
Post-consumer waste stream: Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial
and institutional facilities in their role as end-users of the product, which can no longer be used for its
intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the distribution chain.
Responsible Sourcing: Demonstrated through auditable third party certification schemes.
Reused materials: Materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without
further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g.
cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials).
Recycled Material: Materials diverted from the pre-consumer and/or post-consumer waste streams
that require significant processing before they can be used again. For further information please see
Calculating and declaring recycled content in construction products, “Rules of Thumb” Guide (WRAP,
2008) www.wrap.org.uk/wrap_corporate/news/wraps_rules_of.html.
Supply Chain EMS: covers all of the major aspects of processing and extraction involved in the supply
chain for the end product. Note that recycled materials are not required to demonstrate a Supply Chain
EMS. If EMS certification is provided for the Key Processes for recycled materials, this is assumed by
default.
Small Company: A company is defined as ‘small’ if it satisfies at least two of the following criteria:
a. A turnover of not more than £5.6 million;
b. 50 employees or fewer.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
236
Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials
BREEAM Education 2008
This is based on the definition stated in the Companies Act of 1985.
Tier levels – a graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate
responsible sourcing, forming the basis for awarding points (all as detailed in Table 15 Responsible
Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Mat 6
Mat 6 Insulation
No. of credits
available
Issue Title
Insulation
2
237
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of thermal insulation which has a low embodied environmental
impact relative to its thermal properties and has been responsibly sourced.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Any new insulation specified for use within the following building elements must be assessed:
•
•
•
•
External walls
Ground floor
Roof
Building services
First credit - Embodied Impact
2. The Green Guide rating for the thermal insulation materials must be determined. Green Guide
ratings for thermal insulation can be found at: www.thegreenguide.org.uk (please refer to the
Compliance Notes for guidance where specific insulation has been assessed within an element for
the Mat 1 BREEAM issues).
3. Where the Insulation Index for the building insulation is the same as or greater than 2.
4. The Insulation Index is calculated using the Mat 6 Insulation Index Calculator Tool in the BREEAM
assessor’s spreadsheet tool. For each type of thermal insulation used in the relevant building
elements, the volume weighted thermal resistance provided by each type of insulation is calculated
as follows:
a. (Area of insulation (m2) * thickness(m)) / Thermal Conductivity (W/ m.K) OR
b. Total volume of insulation used (m3) / Thermal conductivity (W/m.K)
The volume weighted thermal resistance for each insulation material is then multiplied by the
relevant Green Guide point(s) from the following table:
Table 17 Green Guide rating points/element
Green Guide Rating
Points/element
A+
3
A
2
B
1
C
0.5
D
0.25
E
0
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
238
Mat 6 Insulation
BREEAM Education 2008
To calculate the Insulation Index, the sum of these values is divided by the sum of the volume
weighted thermal resistance values (an example calculation is provided in the Additional
Information section).
Second credit - Responsible Sourcing
5. At least 80% of the thermal insulation used in the building elements identified in Item 1 must be
responsibly sourced, i.e. each insulation product must be certified in accordance with Levels 1, 2 or
3 described in Table 15 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria, as outlined in Mat 5. The
table below shows the key processes and supply chain processes required for common insulation
products.
Table 18 EMS criteria for insulation products
Material
Key Process
Foam Insulation
Insulation manufacture
Supply chain processes
Principal Polymer production,
e.g. Polystyrene, MDI ,
Phenolic resin or equivalent
Any quarried or mined mineral
over 20% of input
Stone wool, glass & cellular
glass made using < 50%
recycled input
Wool
Product manufacture
Product manufacture
Wool Scouring
Products using > 50%
recycled content except those
using timber
Product manufacture
Recycled content by default
Timber-based insulation
materials including those using
recycled timber
Product manufacture
Other renewable-based
insulation materials using
agricultural by-products (e.g.
straw)
Any other product
Product manufacture
Recycled timber by default, all
other timber from one of the
recognised timber certification
schemes in Table 15
Responsible Sourcing Tier
Levels and Criteria.
By-product manufacture by
default
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
and materials
reused in-situ
Extensions to
existing buildings
Fit Out only
Product manufacture
1 or 2 main inputs with
significant production or
extraction impacts should be
identified
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
For each element that is reused in-situ, BREEAM allocates an ‘A+’ rating.
For the purpose of responsible sourcing, existing in-situ insulating materials
are not assessed. If no new insulating products are being specified as part of
the refurbishment both credits can be awarded.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
For a Fit Out-only assessment the criteria apply to all types of new insulation
specified, typically this may only require the insulation for the building
services to comply. Where no new insulation is specified as part of the fit-out
works, the compliance note for refurbishment projects (above) applies.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Mat 6 Insulation
Insulation
incorporated as
part of an off-site
manufactured
element
If the insulation is incorporated as a component of an element that has been
manufactured offsite e.g. a wall or roof, and that element has been assessed
as part of Mat 1, then for the purpose of assessing the insulation for this
BREEAM issue, a Green Guide rating of A+ should be used. The same rule
applies to insulation that has a significant additional function, such as
providing supporting structure e.g. structural insulated panels (SIPS). In the
Green Guide the actual insulation will be listed within the element title, rather
than under the generic insulation category.
Awarding credits
Both credits can be awarded independently of each other - i.e. it is not a
requirement of the second credit that the first is achieved, and vice-versa.
Element
consisting of
more than one
insulation
Finding exact
Green Guide
Ratings
Where more than one insulation type is present for a given element, the
rating, area and conductivity for each insulation should be entered into the
tool and an average is calculated (by area).
239
Where no similar insulation can be found assessors should seek guidance
from BRE on the appropriate rating.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-4
Marked-up design plan/elevations and/or a
copy of the specification confirming:
• The location of insulating materials.
• The area (m2) and thickness (m) or
volume (m3) of insulation specified.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Element in-situ (where possible)
Manufacturer’s technical details confirming:
• Thickness and thermal conductivity of
the insulating materials specified.
As built drawings and, where relevant,
written design team confirmation of any
changes to the materials specification.
AND
A copy of the output from the Insulation
Index Calculator Tool.
The Green Guide rating and element
number for the assessed insulation
specifications.
5
Evidence (as outlined in Mat 5) confirming
compliance for the insulating materials.
Evidence (as outlined Mat 5) confirming
compliance.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Green Guide: Refer to definitions in Mat 1.
Green Guide Element Number: Refer to definitions in Mat 1.
Insulation Index: A measure of performance used in BREEAM that seeks to assess the thermal
properties of insulation products used in the building relevant to the embodied impact of that insulating
material.
Insulation Index Calculator Tool: A spreadsheet tool used by the BREEAM assessor to determine the
Insulation Index and therefore, whether the BREEAM credit is achieved.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
240
Mat 6 Insulation
BREEAM Education 2008
Example calculation
The Insulation Index is calculated for a building using the following types of insulation as follows:
Type 1 Walls
Area = 450m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 100mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.023 W/mK Green
Guide rating = A (2 points)
Area weighted thermal resistance: ((450*0.100)/0.023) = 1956
Green Guide rating correction: 1956* 2.0 = 3912
Type 2 Building Services
Volume of insulation used = 21m3. Thermal conductivity = 0.022 W/mK
Green Guide rating = C (0.5 points)
Area weighted thermal resistance: (21/0.022) = 955
Green Guide rating correction: 955 * 0.5 = 477
Type 3 Roof
Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green
Guide rating = A+ (3 points)
Area weighted thermal resistance: ((210*0.120)/0.027) = 933
Green Guide rating correction: 933 * 3.0 = 2799
Type 4 Ground Floor
Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green
Guide rating = B (1 point)
Area weighted thermal resistance: ((210*0.120)/0.027) = 933
Green Guide rating correction: 933 * 1.0 = 933
Total area weighted thermal resistance = 1956+955+933+933 = 4777
Green Guide rating correction = 3912 + 477 + 2799 +933 = 8121
Insulation Index: Green Guide Rating Correction / Total Area weighted thermal resistance =
8121/4777 = 1.7 (credit not achieved).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Mat 7
Mat 7 Designing for Robustness
Issue Title
Designing for Robustness
No. of credits
available
1
241
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage adequate protection of exposed parts of the building and landscape,
therefore minimising the frequency of use of replacement materials.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Internal and external areas of the building where vehicular, trolley and pedestrian movement occur
have been identified.
2. Suitable durability and protection measures or design features have been specified to prevent
damage to the vulnerable parts of these building areas from such traffic. This must include, but is
not necessarily limited to:
a. Protection from the effects of high pedestrian traffic in main entrances, public areas and
thoroughfares (corridors, lifts, stairs, doors etc).
b. Protection against any internal vehicular/trolley movement within 1m of the internal building
fabric in storage, delivery, corridor and kitchen areas.
c. Protection against, or prevention from, any potential vehicular collision where vehicular
parking and manoeuvring occurs within 1m of the external building façade for all car
parking areas and within 2m for all delivery areas.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of new-build projects.
Refurbishment
Where the assessment is of a refurbished building on an existing site then the
criteria apply to the areas that form a part of the works or hard landscape for
that building.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Suitable
durability
measures
Suitable durability and protection measures to vulnerable parts of the building
can include:
• Bollards/barriers/raised kerbs to delivery and vehicle drop-off areas
• Robust external wall construction, up to 2m high
• Corridor walls specified to Severe Duty (SD) as per BS 5234-285.
• Protection rails to walls of corridors
• Kick plates/impact protection (from trolleys etc) on doors
• Hard-wearing and easily washable floor finishes in heavily used circulation
areas (i.e. main entrance, corridors, public areas etc)
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
242
Mat 7 Designing for Robustness
Vehicle Impact
Protection
Public / Common
Areas
BREEAM Education 2008
Any vehicle impact protection measures specified must be positioned at an
adequate distance from the building to protect the fabric from impact from any
vehicle with a measurable overhang of the body from the wheel track, in
particular for any goods delivery areas.
In vehicle movement areas only; where the specification of external robust wall
construction is specified to comply with the credit, additional protection must
be provided to ensure against potential damage to the robust façade from
vehicle movement, i.e. specifying bollards or protection rails.
Consideration should be given to materials specification in public/common
areas (especially public waiting areas and toilet areas) to provide protection
against potential malicious or physical abuse in as far as it is possible.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
1
Design drawings marked up to illustrate:
• Vulnerable areas/parts of the building.
2
Design drawings and/or specification
confirming:
• The durability measures specified.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Post Construction Stage
Assessor’s building/site inspection
photographic evidence confirming:
• Vulnerable areas of the building
• The durability measures in-situ.
and
BREEAM Education 2008
Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management
243
10.0 Waste
Issue ID
Wst 1
No. of credits
available
Issue Title
Construction Site Waste Management
4 (new build/refurb)
2 (Fit Out)
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To promote resource efficiency via the effective and appropriate management of construction site
waste.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
New Build and Major Refurbishments - Up to three credits are available
1. Where non-hazardous construction waste generated by the building’s construction phase
(excluding demolition and excavation waste) meets or exceeds the following resource efficiency
benchmarks:
Amount of waste generated per 100m2
(gross internal floor area)
m3
tonnes
One credit
13.0 - 16.6
6.6 - 8.5
Two credits
9.2 – 12.9
4.7 - 6.5
<9.2
<4.7
BREEAM credits
Three credits
3
* Volume (m ) is actual volume of waste (not bulk volume)
2. Where there is a Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP) that contains:
a. The target benchmark for resource efficiency i.e. m3 of waste per 100m2 or tonnes of waste
per 100m2
b. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous waste in line with the
benchmark
c. Procedures for minimising hazardous waste
d. Procedures for monitoring, measuring and reporting hazardous and non-hazardous site
waste
e. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling construction waste into defined waste groups
(see additional guidance section), either on site or through a licensed external contractor
f. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
244
Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management
BREEAM Education 2008
Demolition & refurbishment projects
3. In addition to the above, sites with existing buildings that will be refurbished or demolished, where
demolition forms a part of the principal contractor’s works contract, must comply with the following:
a. Completed a pre-demolition/pre-refurbishment audit of the existing building to determine if,
in the case of demolition, refurbishment is feasible and, if not, to maximise the recovery of
material from demolition or refurbishment for subsequent high-grade/value applications.
The audit must be referenced in the SWMP and cover:
i. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials.
ii. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the
key refurbishment and demolition materials.
Fit Out only assessments - one credit is available
1. Where there is a SWMP that contains:
a. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous and hazardous waste
b. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling construction waste into defined waste groups
(see additional guidance section), either on site or through a licensed external contractor
c. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above
2. Construction waste generated from the fit-out works is monitored and measured.
3. Waste materials will be sorted into separate key waste groups (according to the waste streams
generated by the fit-out works) either onsite or offsite through a licensed contractor for recovery.
New build, Refurbishment and Fit Out only projects - one additional credit is available
1. Where at least 75% by weight or 65% by volume of non-hazardous construction waste generated
by the project has been diverted from landfill and either:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Reused on site (in-situ or for new applications)
Reused on other sites
Salvaged/reclaimed for reuse
Returned to the supplier via a ‘take-back’ scheme
Recovered from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled.
2. For demolition projects, in addition to the above requirement for construction-related waste, 90% by
weight or 80% by volume of non-hazardous demolition waste has been diverted from landfill.
3. Where there is a Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP) complying with the above criteria.
4. Waste materials will be sorted into separate key waste groups (according to the waste streams
generated by the scope of the works) either onsite or offsite through a licensed contractor for
recovery.
Exemplary level criteria
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM
issue.
1. Where non-hazardous construction waste generated by the building’s development meets or
exceeds the resource efficiency benchmark required to achieve three credits (as outlined above).
2. Where at least 90% by weight (80% by volume) of non-hazardous construction waste and 95% of
demolition waste by weight (85% by volume) (if applicable) generated by the build has been
diverted from landfill and either:
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management
245
Reused on site (in-situ or for new applications)
Reused on other sites
Salvaged/reclaimed for reuse
Returned to the supplier via a ‘take-back’ scheme
Recovered from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled.
3. All key waste groups are identified for diversion from landfill at pre-construction stage SWMP.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
If the building is part refurbishment part new-build extension then the whole
building must be used to determine compliance with this issue. For
assessments of extensions to existing buildings, where only the extension is
being assessed, it is the extension only that must comply.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit-out-only assessments.
A pre-demolition/pre-refurbishment audit should be carried out using an
appropriate methodology. At the time of writing BRE are currently developing a
tool as part of the SMARTWaste system for carrying out such audits, and the
ICE has produced guidance on pre-demolition audits, including ‘A report on the
Demolition Protocol’86.
Since April 2008 any construction project in England costing over £300k
requires a Site Waste Management Plan. To achieve any of the construction
site waste management credits the assessed development, regardless of
value or locality, must have a SWMP compliant with best practice (see relevant
definitions in additional guidance section).
Where space on site is too limited to allow waste materials to be segregated, a
waste contractor may be used to separate and process recyclable materials off
site. Similarly, manufacturers’ take-back schemes could also be used. Where
this is the case, sufficient documentary evidence must be produced which
demonstrates that segregation of materials is carried out to the agreed levels
and that materials are reused/recycled as appropriate.
Predemolition/prerefurbishment
audit
SWMP
Limited site
space for
segregation and
storage
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
246
Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
All Credits and Exemplary level
All
A copy of the compliant Site Waste
Management
Plan
containing
the
appropriate benchmarks, commitments
and procedures.
Where relevant, a copy of the predemolition/pre-refurbishment audit.
OR
A copy of the specification clause that:
• Requires the principal contractor to
produce a SWMP in line with the
criteria
• Contains the detailed criteria with
respect
to
resource
efficiency
benchmarks and target(s) and
procedures to be included in the
SWMP
• Where relevant, requires the principal
contractor to carry out a predemolition/pre-refurbishment audit.
A copy of the SWMP summary datasheets or
equivalent
monitoring
records/report
confirming:
• The total waste arising for the
development.
• Comparison of the total waste arising
against the benchmark
• Quantities of waste by groupings
• Where required, the amount and
proportion of waste arising that was
reused, recycled and landfilled.
• Custody/application/destination
of
reused/recycled materials.
OR
A letter from the client or their
representative containing:
• Confirmation that the specification will
contain a clause on site waste
management criteria.
• An outline of the detailed criteria that
will be included in that specification
clause.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Significant Majority: Defined as meeting at least the percentages required within the assessment
criteria section of this manual.
Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP): SWMP aims to promote resource efficiency and to prevent
illegal waste activities. Resource efficiency includes minimising waste at source and ensuring that
clients, designers and principal contractors assess the use, reuse and recycling of materials and
products on and off the site.
Best Practice SWMP: Best practice (site waste management) is a combination of commitments to:
a. design out waste
b. reduce waste generated on site
c. develop and implement procedures to sort and reuse/recycle construction waste on and off site
(as applicable).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management
247
d. follow guidance from:
• DEFRA (Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs)
• BRE (Building Research Establishment)
• Envirowise
• WRAP (Waste & Resources Action Programme)
Table 19 Construction waste groups
European Waste
Key Group
Catalogue)
170102
Bricks
Examples
Bricks
170101
Concrete
Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete
rubble, precast and in situ
Glass fibre, mineral wool, foamed plastic
170604
Insulation
1501
Packaging
170201
Timber
1602
200301
Electrical and electronic
equipment
Canteen/office
Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums,
wrapping bands, polythene sheets
Softwood, hardwood, boards products such as
plywood, chipboard, medium density fibreboard
(MDF)
Electrical & electronic TVs, fridges, airconditioning units, lamps equipment
Office waste, canteen waste, vegetation
1301
1703
Oils
Asphalt and tar
Hydraulic oil, engine oil, lubricating oil
Bitumen, coal tars, asphalt
170103
Tiles and ceramics
1701
Inert
Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic,
sanitaryware
Mixed rubble/excavation material, glass
1704
Metals
Radiators, cables, wires, bars, sheet
170802
Gypsum
170203
Plastics
Plasterboard, render, plaster, cement, fibre
cement sheets, mortar
Pipes, cladding, frames, non-packaging sheet
200307
Furniture
Tables, chairs, desks, sofas
1705
Most relevant EWC
Soils
Liquids
Most relevant EWC
Hazardous
Most relevant EWC
Floor coverings (soft)
Soils, clays, sand; gravel, natural stone
Non-hazardous
paints,
thinners,
timber
treatments
Defined in the Hazardous Waste List (HWL) of
the European Waste Catalogue (EWC)
Carpets, vinyl flooring
Most relevant EWC
170904 (Mixed)
Architectural Features
Mixed/ other
Roof tiles, reclaimed bricks, fireplaces
Efforts should be made to categorise waste into
the above categories wherever possible
BREEAM construction waste benchmarks
The benchmarks used have been derived from BRE's SMARTWaste system and through a DEFRAfunded project for predicting construction waste and will be updated annually for the purposes of
BREEAM. The benchmarks are based on real-life data and have been subject to a number of statistical
and logical tests. The benchmarks used apply to actual volume, and standard conversion factors have
been used for tonnages from the Environment Agency. Compliance with the benchmarks can be
demonstrated using either volume of weight of construction waste.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
248
Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management
BREEAM Education 2008
For more information on these benchmarks and to break them down by waste type, please go to
www.smartwaste.co.uk
Tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a SWMP
SMARTWaste Plan is a free web-based tool for preparing, implementing and reviewing a SWMP. This
tool includes an integrated waste measurement tool (a revised SMARTStart) which is aligned to defined
waste groups. SMARTWaste Plan will manage all aspects of creating SWMPs and measuring waste
generated on projects. Templates are available to meet the BREEAM credits and can also be
downloaded. The tool includes online waste measurement, industry waste benchmarks and links to
BREMAP. A carbon calculator and economic assessment of waste will also be added.
BREMAP is a geographical information system of waste management facilities. See www.bremap.co.uk
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Wst 2
Wst 2 Recycled aggregates
Issue Title
Recycled Aggregates
No. of credits
available
1
249
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of recycled and secondary aggregates in construction, thereby
reducing the demand for virgin material.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Where the amount of recycled and secondary aggregate specified is over 25% (by weight or
volume) of the total high-grade aggregate uses for the building. Such aggregates can be EITHER:
a. Obtained on site OR
b. Obtained from waste processing site(s) within a 30km radius of the site; the source will be
principally from construction, demolition and excavation waste (CD&E) – this includes road
plannings OR
c. Secondary aggregates obtained from a non-construction post-consumer or post-industrial
by-product source (see Compliance Notes).
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
The credit available for this issue can be awarded automatically where no new
aggregate is being used. Potentially the case in most refurbishments.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit-Out-only assessments
Secondary
aggregates
Recognised non-construction post-consumer or post-industrial by-products
include:
• China clay waste
• Slate overburden
• Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA)
• Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS)
• Air-cooled blast furnace slag
• Steel slag
• Furnace bottom ash (FBA)
• Incinerator bottom ash
• Foundry sands
• Recycled glass
• Recycled plastic
• Tyres
• Spent oil shale
• Colliery spoil
• Municipal Solid Waste Treatment Residues
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
250
Wst 2 Recycled aggregates
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
A copy of the relevant specification or
contract clause confirming:
• Recycled and secondary aggregate use
criteria for the project.
Structural
engineers
calculations
demonstrating the weight/volume of:
• Total high grade aggregate used.
• Total
recycled
and
secondary
aggregates used.
A letter from the design team or main
contractor confirming:
• The source of recycled/secondary
aggregates
• The amount and quality required can be
obtained from this source.
Third party documentation as follows:
Delivery notes for all recycled and secondary
aggregates confirming:
• Source
of
recycled/secondary
aggregate.
AND/OR
A letter or email from the aggregate/
concrete supplier confirming that:
• The aggregate supplied and used was
from a recycled/secondary source
• Source
of
recycled/secondary
aggregate.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
High Grade aggregate uses are considered to be:
Bound
• Structural frame;
• Floor slabs including ground floor slabs;
• Bitumen or hydraulically bound base, binder, and surface courses for paved areas and roads.
Unbound
• Asphalt-based or similar road surfaces
• Granular fill and capping
• Pipe bedding
• Sub bases/building foundations
• Gravel landscaping.
Crushed masonry used as fill material for general landscaping is not considered to be high grade. This
practice is now common place on construction sites due to landfill costs.
Pre-consumer waste stream: Waste material generated during manufacturing processes. Excluded is
reutilisation of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being
reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
Post-consumer waste stream: Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial
and institutional facilities in their role as end-users of the product, which can no longer be used for its
intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the distribution chain.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Wst 2 Recycled aggregates
251
Recycled aggregates: are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction,
e.g. crushed concrete or masonry from construction and demolition waste material.
Secondary aggregates: By-products of industrial processes that can be processed to produce
secondary aggregates. Secondary Aggregates are sub-divided into manufactured and natural,
depending on their source.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
252
Wst 3 Recyclable waste storage
Issue ID
Wst 3
Issue Title
Recyclable Waste Storage
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Minimum
standards
Up to 2
Yes
Aim
To recognise the provision of dedicated storage facilities for a building’s operational-related recyclable
waste streams, so that such waste is diverted from landfill or incineration.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit (All educational building types)
1. A dedicated storage space to cater for recyclable materials generated by the building during
occupation, compliant with the following:
a. Clearly labelled for recycling
b. Placed within accessible reach of the building (see Compliance Notes)
c. In a location with good vehicular access to facilitate collections.
2. The size of the space allocated must be adequate to store the likely volume of recyclable materials
generated by the building’s occupants/operation. Whilst a fixed area cannot always be given, the
following must be complied with as a minimum:
a. At least 2m2 per 1000m2 of net floor area for buildings <5000m2
b. A minimum of 10m2 for buildings ≥5000 m2
c. An additional 2m2 per 1000m2 of net floor area where catering is provided (with an
additional minimum of 10m2 for buildings ≥5000m2).
Second credit - Pre-Schools, Schools & Sixth Form Colleges only
3. There is a school recycling policy and an outline of the procedures that are in operation or that will
be in place when the building is complete. As a minimum, the policy should cover:
a. Paper and magazines, cardboard, plastics, metals, printer & toner cartridges.
b. Where composting facilities are provided, the policy must also cover the collection of the
compost unless the compost can be used on site.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
Where there are facilities within the existing building, these can be used to
existing
assess compliance. The scope of these facilities must be adequate to cater for
buildings
the total volume of predicted waste from the new and existing buildings.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Wst 3 Recyclable waste storage
253
Multiple building
assessments and
buildings part of
a wider estate
Where the assessment applies to one or a number of buildings, possibly as
part of a wider estate, then a dedicated centralised storage space sized to
accommodate the likely amount of recyclable materials for all buildings will
comply with the requirements. Building areas that do not generate any
operational waste, e.g. swimming pool or sports hall, can be excluded.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria specific to fit-out only assessments,
except where the assessment stakeholder is a site-based tenant, who
occupies a unit/floor within a larger development and uses central or common
storage facilities (provided for by a landlord), then such facilities can be used
to assess compliance.
Typically ‘accessible reach’ is defined in BREEAM as within 20m of a building
entrance. In some circumstances, depending on the size of the building, site
restrictions or tenancy arrangements, it may not be possible to meet a 20m
requirement. If it is the opinion of the assessor that it is not feasible to meet
this 20m requirement then they can use their judgement to determine if the
facility is in an easily accessible location for building occupants and vehicle
collection and to state their reasons in the assessment report.
Individual recycling bins located at convenient locations throughout the
building are necessary to maximise recycling rates. On their own, however,
these are not sufficient to obtain this credit.
Where the facilities are situated internally, vehicular gate heights/widths and
manoeuvring and loading space must be sized correctly to ensure ease of
access for vehicles collecting recyclable materials.
The area for recyclable materials storage must be provided in addition to areas
and facilities provided for dealing with general waste and other waste
management facilities, e.g. compactors and balers.
The person(s) providing this information may vary; it could typically be the
headteacher/principal, school governors, premises manager, waste
contractors or other relevant authorised body/individual.
Accessible reach
of the building
Individual
Recycling Bins
Internal storage
areas
General waste
Recycling policy
& procedures
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
All
Marked-up building/site plan and/or copy of
the specification confirming:
• The location of the dedicated recyclable
storage area
• Storage area for general waste
• The area (m2) of the storage space(s)
• Description of the labelling.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The location, size and capacity of the
storage provision
• Labelling of the dedicated facilities.
Pre-Schools, schools & sixth form only
A copy of the school’s recycling policy and
documentation outlining the recycling
procedures.
Pre-Schools, schools & sixth form only
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Recycling procedures are operational in
accordance with the policy.
OR
OR
A written commitment from the school, or
relevant authorising body, to develop and
implement
a
recycling
policy
and
appropriate operational procedures.
A written commitment from the school to
develop and implement a recycling policy
and appropriate operational procedures.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
254
Wst 3 Recyclable waste storage
BREEAM Education 2008
Additional Information
Relevant Definitions
None.
The following footprint dimensions can act as a guide when determining size and accessibility criteria
for the recyclable storage space:
•
•
•
•
•
Compactor dimensions: about the size of one car parking bay; 4.8 x 2.4m
Skip: The footprint of an 8 and 12 cubic yard skip measures 3.4m x 1.8m, therefore allow a
minimum of 2.0m width and 4.0m length or 8m2 area for the storage and access of such containers
Wheeled bins: 360 litre = 0.86m x 0.62 / 660L= 1.2m x 0.7m / 1100L = 1.28m x 0.98m
Roll-on-roll-off containers: allow a minimum of 6.1m x 2.4m.
Vehicle access: The following are dimensions for lorry types that are typically used to collect
waste. Therefore gate height/widths should not be smaller than these measurements:
o Dustcart: medium capacity; length = 7.4m Height = 4m width 3.1m
o Skip lorry: length = 7m Height = 3.35m width 3.1m
Consideration must also be given to any other types of vehicle requiring access to this area, e.g. lorries
for roll on/off containers.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Wst 4
Wst 4 Compactor / Baler
Issue Title
Compactor / Baler
No. of credits
available
255
Minimum
standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the provision of facilities which enable efficient and hygienic waste sorting
and storage.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Higher Education buildings only
1. A static waste compactor or baler is installed and situated in a service area or dedicated waste
management space.
2. At least one water outlet is provided for each waste sorting and/or storing facility.
3. The recyclable waste storage criteria of BREEAM issue WST 3 have been met.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Fit Out only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit-out-only assessments.
Shared Facilities
For a building consisting of a number of small units, each ≤200m floor area,
shared facilities that meet the above criteria for the building as a whole are
sufficient to achieve this credit.
Limited space or
vehicle access
For developments that have limited space for static installations, the credit can
be assessed on the basis of the provision of adequate space for a smaller
portable compactor or baler.
Where the higher education building assessed is located on a new or existing
campus, a compliant centralised waste compactor / baler common to all
buildings on campus can be used towards the achievement of this credit.
Buildings within a
campus
2
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
256
Wst 4 Compactor / Baler
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-2
Marked-up design plan and/or a copy of the
specification confirming:
• Provision of waste compactor/baler
• Location and size of space for waste
compactor/baler
• Water outlet
Manufacturer/supplier literature confirming
• The type of compactor/baler specified.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The installation of the compactor/baler
(or space for installation for speculative
developments)
• Installation of a water outlet
• The location, size and capacity of the
recyclable
storage
provision
(as
required for compliance with WST 3)
As defined in the schedule of evidence for
BREEAM issue WST 3.
As defined in the schedule of evidence for
BREEAM issue WST 3.
3
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Waste compactor or baler: A machine that is designed to compress waste streams in order to
improve storage and transport efficiency.
The requirement to achieve the credit for storage of recyclable materials is set in order to encourage
the minimisation of the assessed development’s waste streams by encouraging a more integrated
approach to the issue of waste management, recycling and disposal. The provision of adequate
recycling and waste management facilities helps to ensure that this objective can be achieved.
Compacting dry waste can significantly reduce the volume of waste sent to landfill. Furthermore,
whether for recycling or landfill, compacting waste at source will reduce the number of trips required for
the collection and delivery of the waste and therefore result in reduced fuel consumption and vehicle
emissions. Reduced vehicle movements will also provided social and health & wellbeing benefits to the
surrounding community and economic benefits to the building occupier.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Wst 5 Composting
Issue Title
Wst 5
Composting
No. of credits
available
1
257
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To encourage the provision of facilities that help facilitate the reduction in volume of compostable
organic waste going directly to landfill during the building’s operation.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Higher Education buildings only
1. A vessel is installed on site for composting suitable food waste resulting from the building’s daily
operation and use.
2. There is adequate space for storing segregated food waste and composted organic material.
3. At least one water outlet is provided for cleaning in and around the facility.
OR
4. Where there are space or access limitations on site, the following demonstrates compliance:
a. There is a dedicated segregated space for storing compostable food waste prior to
collection and delivery to an alternative composting facility.
b. At least one water outlet is provided for cleaning in and around the facility
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing
buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit-out-only assessments.
Building within a
campus
Where the higher education building assessed is located on a new or existing
campus, compliant centralised composting facilities common to all buildings on
campus can be used towards the achievement of this credit.
Storage Capacity
No criteria are defined for the type of vessel or storage capacity required as
this will be determined by the end user and predicted volumes of organic
compostable waste. The assessor should be satisfied that, within reason, the
installation is adequate for the size of development, bearing in mind the likely
quantity of organic waste that will be produced by the development.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
258
Wst 5 Composting
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-4
Marked-up design plan and/or a copy of the
specification confirming (as appropriate):
• Specification of composting vessel
• Location and size of space for vessel
and storage of waste/compost
• Water outlet.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The installation of the vessel
• The provision of adequate storage
space/facilities
• Installation of a water outlet
If appropriate, a letter from the occupier or
service provider confirming:
• Location of the off-site facility where
compostable material will be delivered.
• The procedure and frequency for
collecting the compostable material.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
LE1 Reuse of Land
259
11.0 Land Use and Ecology
Issue ID
LE 1
Issue Title
Reuse of Land
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To encourage the reuse of land that has been previously developed, and discourage the use of
previously undeveloped land for building.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. At least 75% of the proposed development’s footprint is on an area of land which has previously
been developed for use by industrial, commercial or domestic purposes in the last 50 years.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
In the case of refurbishment, the credit can be awarded by default where no
new building work or infrastructure is being constructed as part of the
refurbishment.
Extensions to
Where a refurbishment includes new buildings, hard landscaping, or
existing
infrastructure, 75% of the total proposed development footprint (refurbished
buildings
plus new build and/or hard landscaping and/or infrastructure) must comply with
the requirement.
Infill
New buildings developed within the boundary of existing sites do not
development
automatically comply with the criteria. The land on which at least 75% of the
new building will be sited must meet the definition of previously developed.
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit Out-only assessments.
Temporary works
Undeveloped areas of the site to be used for temporary works (e.g. temporary
offices/parking, material/machinery storage) must be considered as
development on undeveloped land and therefore included in the calculations
unless they have been defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ (Ecological
Value and Protection issue, LE3).
Developed more
than 50 years ago
Where a site has been previously developed (more than 50 years ago) but is
now considered undeveloped, the credit may only be awarded on this basis if
the site is deemed to be “contaminated” as defined in BREEAM issue LE2.
A playing field within the construction zone can be counted as previously
developed land only if an equivalent area of playing field is reinstated within
one year of the completed construction works; and where such reinstatement
will not encroach on land of high ecological value as defined in Ecological
Value of Land and Protection of Ecological Features issue (issue number
LE3).
Playing fields
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
260
LE1 Reuse of Land
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
Existing site plan, report or site photographs
confirming:
• Type and duration of previous land use.
• Area (m2) of previous land use.
Assessor’s building/site inspection or as built
drawings confirming:
• The footprint or orientation of the
developed area has not altered from that
confirmed in the design stage evidence.
• Where alteration has occurred the %
must be re-calculated using ‘as built’
plans.
Proposed site plan showing;
• Location and footprint (m2) of proposed
development and temporary works.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Construction zone: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as any
land on the site which is being developed (and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hard standing,
landscaping, site access, plus a 3m boundary in either direction around these areas. It also includes
any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings.
If it is not known exactly where buildings, hard standing, site access and temporary storage will be
located it must be assumed that the construction zone is the entire site.
Proposed Development: Is defined as the area of any building, hard landscaping, car park and access
roads that fall within the boundary of the proposed site.
Previously Developed Land: For the purposes of this issue, BREEAM uses the definition from
Planning Policy Statement 387 which defines previously developed land as that which is or was
occupied by a permanent structure, including the curtilage of the developed land and any associated
fixed surface infrastructure.
The definition includes:
a. Defence buildings
The definition excludes:
a. Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings.
b. Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes
where provision for restoration has been made through development control procedures.
c. Land in built-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments which, although may
feature paths, pavilions and other buildings, have not been previously developed.
d. Land that was previously developed but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed
surface structure have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it
can reasonably be considered as part of the natural surroundings).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
LE2 Contaminated land
Issue Title
LE2
Contaminated Land
No. of credits
available
1
261
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To encourage positive action to use contaminated land that otherwise would not have been remediated
and developed.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The site is deemed to be significantly contaminated as confirmed by a contaminated land
specialist’s site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal identifying:
a. the degree of contamination
b. the contaminant sources/types
c. the options for remediating sources of pollution which present an unacceptable risk to the
site.
2. The client or contractor confirms that remediation of the site will be carried out in accordance with
the remediation strategy and its implementation plan.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
existing buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit out-only assessments.
Prior
Decontamination
The credit can only be awarded where remediation has taken place to
enable current development of the site for the assessed building, or part of a
larger phased development that includes the assessed building (see below).
The credit is not achievable for instances where historical remediation and
development of the site has occurred outside the scope of the current
development proposals.
Where a large site has been decontaminated and is then packaged up into
smaller plots of land for individual buildings (possibly as part of a phased
development strategy), the credit can be awarded regardless of the plot
location of the assessed building. This is on the condition that the whole site
could not have been developed without remediation work taking place.
Contaminated land that has been decontaminated solely for health and
safety reasons (rather than for the specific purpose of re-development) does
not comply.
Large sites split
into smaller plots
Health and Safetyrelated
decontamination
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
262
LE2 Contaminated land
Asbestos
BREEAM Education 2008
Where the only decontamination required is for the removal of asbestos
within an existing building fabric, this cannot be classified as contaminated
land. However, where asbestos is found to be present in the ground this will
be classed as contamination for the purposes of assessing this issue.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
1
A copy of the specialist’s land contamination
report confirming:
• The degree, type and sources of site
contamination.
• The options for re-mediating the site.
Post Construction Stage
The evidence required at the post
construction stage is the same as for a
design stage assessment.
Existing site plan(s) showing:
• Location of areas contaminated and to
be remediated in relation to any
proposed development.
2
A letter from the main contractor or
remediation contractor confirming:
• The remediation strategy for the site.
• Summary details of the implementation
plan.
If a contractor has not yet been appointed, a
letter from the client, or their representative
confirming:
• That the appointed contractor will
undertake necessary remediation works
to mitigate the risks identified in the
specialist report.
A copy of the verification report (or relevant
sections of the report) confirming:
• Description
of
remedial
works
undertaken.
• Description of relevant pollution linkages
addressed*.
* This may not be applicable where the
contaminant is a non-native invasive plant
species.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Contaminant: Is defined as any solid, liquid or gaseous material in, or on the ground to be covered by
the building, which is classed as a hazard and therefore presents an unacceptable risk to human health
and the environment. The definition also includes land significantly infested by non-native invasive plant
species (see below).
Significant contamination: For the purposes of this issue, significant contamination is contamination
compliant with the above and that, without remediation, development of the site is not possible.
Remediation: Activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedy or mitigate the risk caused by
contaminated land to human health or the environment.
Non-native invasive plant species: Are non-indigenous species that adversely affect the habitats they
invade economically, environmentally or ecologically. For the purposes of BREEAM this currently
includes Japanese Knotweed and Giant Hogweed only. Further information on the control and disposal
and how this fits into the legislative framework relating to such species can be obtained from DEFRA.
Pollution Linkages: A relevant pollutant linkage is one that has been identified during the risk
assessment stage as representing unacceptable risks to human health or the environment.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
LE3
LE3 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
Issue Title
Ecological Value of Site and Protection of
Ecological Features
No. of credits
available
1
263
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To encourage development on land that already has limited value to wildlife and to protect existing
ecological features from substantial damage during site preparation and completion of construction
works.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Land within the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ using either:
a. BREEAM checklist A4 OR
b. A suitably qualified ecologist who has identified the land as being of ‘low ecological value’
within an ecological assessment report, based on a site survey.
2. All existing features of ecological value surrounding the construction zone and site boundary area
are adequately protected from damage during clearance, site preparation and construction activities
as listed below:
•
•
•
•
Trees of over 100 mm trunk diameter, and/or of significant ecological value, are protected
by barriers. Barriers must prohibit construction works in the area between itself and the tree
trunk. Minimum distance between tree trunk and barriers must be either the distance of
branch spread or half tree height, whichever is the greater.
In all cases trees must be protected from direct impact and from severance or asphyxiation
of the roots.
Hedges and natural areas requiring protection must either have barriers erected and be
protected, or, when remote from site works or storage areas, be protected with a prohibition
of construction activity in their vicinity.
Watercourses and wetland areas are to be protected by cut-off ditches and site drainage to
prevent run-off to natural watercourses (as this may cause pollution, silting or erosion).
3. In all cases, the contractor is required to construct ecological protection prior to any preliminary site
construction or preparation works (e.g. clearing of the site or erection of temporary site facilities).
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
A refurbishment of a building (with no new construction), must protect any
existing ecological features of value. Protection includes clear exclusion
procedures for construction traffic/personnel and material storage, as well as
physical barriers.
Extensions to
Where a refurbishment includes new building work or infrastructure, the land
existing
on which the new build area and its associated infrastructure (e.g. roads,
buildings
pavements, car parks etc) will be situated, must comply with the criteria.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
264
LE3 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
BREEAM Education 2008
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit out-only assessments.
No features of
ecological value
Where the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ and
where the surrounding site contains no features of ecological value, this credit
can be awarded.
Where a suitably qualified ecologist is employed and has, using their
professional judgement, defined the site as land of low ecological value, this
assessment/judgement overrides any assessment determined using checklist
A4.
Use of a suitably
qualified
ecologist
Features of little
or no ecological
value
Removal of
features of
ecological value
Site clearance
prior to purchase
of the site
The suitably qualified ecologist must base their findings on data collected from
a site visit conducted at appropriate time(s) of the year, when different plant
and animal species are evident. The content of the Ecology Report is to be
representative of the existing site’s ecology prior to the commencement of
initial site preparation works (i.e. before RIBA stage K, construction to practical
completion). Where the ecologist has made no on-site visit, the credit cannot
be awarded. See additional guidance for definition of a suitably qualified
ecologist.
If a suitably qualified ecologist has confirmed that a feature has little or no
ecological value, or where a tree is deemed to create a significant danger to
the public or occupants by a statutory body or qualified arboriculturalist, then
that feature may be exempt from the protection of ecological features
requirement of this issue.
If features of ecological value have been removed as part of site clearance
then the development cannot achieve this credit, even if they are to be
replaced as part of a new landscaping strategy.
For sites that have been cleared more than five years ago, the ecological value
of the site would be its present ecological value, on the basis that in the
intervening five years, ecological features would have started to re-establish
themselves and therefore act as an indicator of the site’s ecological value. For
sites that have been cleared less than five years before assessment, a suitably
qualified ecologist should make an estimation of the site’s ecological value
immediately prior to clearance on the basis of available desktop information
(including aerial photography) and the landscape type/area surrounding the
site. Where it is not possible for the ecologists to determine that the site was of
low ecological value prior to the site clearance then the credit must be
withheld.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
1&2
A completed copy of checklist A4 signed and
dated by the client, their representative or a
design team member e.g. architect.
AND
One of the following:
A plan and/or site photographs of the
existing site highlighting any ecological
features OR
A copy of the ecologist’s report containing:
• Confirmation that the land within the
construction zone is of low ecological
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Post Construction Stage
The evidence required at the post
construction stage is the same as for a
design stage assessment.
BREEAM Education 2008
•
•
LE3 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
265
value.
A description of any ecological features
within the site or on the site boundary.
Date(s) of site survey(s).
A completed, signed copy of sections A and
B of checklist A6 ‘Guidance for relating
ecology reports to BREEAM’ to confirm the
ecologist’s professional status
OR
2&3
A copy of the ecologist’s report containing
the information in sections A and B from the
above.
A copy of the relevant section of the contract
specification confirming:
• Requirement to protect all identified
features of ecological value.
• Scope of protection measures required.
• Protection measures implemented prior
to commencement of site activities.
Assessor site inspection report OR
ecologist’s report confirming:
• The boundary of the site and the
construction zone has not been
altered.
• Where
applicable,
all
existing
ecological features still remain.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Construction zone: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as any
land on the site which is being developed (and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hard standing,
landscaping, site access, plus a 3m boundary in either direction around these areas. It also includes
any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings.
If it is not known exactly where buildings, hard standing, site access and temporary storage will be
located it must be assumed that the construction zone is the entire site.
Suitably qualified ecologist (SQE): An individual achieving all the following items can be considered
to be “suitably qualified” for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment:
1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification (e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or a related subject.
2. Is a practising ecologist, with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five
years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting
ecology in relation to construction and the built environment; including, acting in an advisory
capacity to provide recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation
measures. Examples of relevant experience are: ecological impact assessments; Phase 1 and 2
habitat surveys and habitat restoration.
3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review.
Peer review: Is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential
or current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure
compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
266
LE3 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
BREEAM Education 2008
Full members of the following organisations, who meet the above criteria, are deemed suitably
qualified ecologists for the purposes of BREEAM:
•
•
•
•
•
Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies (AWTC)
Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM)
Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (IEEM)
Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA)
Landscape Institute (LI)
Where a suitably qualified ecologist is verifying an Ecology Report produced by another ecologist who
does not meet the SQE criteria, they must, as a minimum, have read and reviewed the report and
confirm in writing that they have found it to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
represent sound industry practice
report and recommend correctly, truthfully and objectively
be appropriate given the local site conditions and scope of works proposed
avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated statements.
Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with the definition of a
Suitably Qualified Ecologist is required.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
LE4
LE4 Mitigating ecological impact
Issue Title
Mitigating Ecological Impact
No. of credits
available
267
Minimum
standards
2
Yes
Aim
To minimise the impact of a building development on existing site ecology.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. One credit where the change in ecological value of the site is less than zero and equal to or
greater than minus nine plant species i.e. a minimal change.
2. Two credits where the change in ecological value of the site is equal to or greater than zero plant
species i.e. no negative change.
The change in ecological value of the site is calculated using EITHER of the following:
3. Determine the following information and input this data in to Ecology calculator 1 within the
spreadsheet tool:
a. Plot type(s) that define the landscape of the assessed site, in its existing pre-developed
state and proposed state (see additional guidance)
b. Areas (m2) of the defined existing and proposed plot types.
OR
4. Where a suitably qualified ecologist has been appointed and, based on a site survey, they confirm
the following and the assessor or ecologist inputs this data in to the Ecology calculator 2:
a. Actual plot/habitat types that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing predeveloped state and proposed state
b. Area (m2) of each plot/habitat type
c. Number of different plant species found within each plot type.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Refer also to the note
below on infill developments.
Issue not applicable for Fit out-only assessments.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
268
LE4 Mitigating ecological impact
Completing
Ecology
Calculator 1
BREEAM Education 2008
First, define the landscape type (based on the typology of the surrounding
sites, Table 20 General Landscape Types). This category is unlikely to change
through the development, although it may in some cases, e.g. when a disused
site is developed as part of a master plan for a large multi-use or multi-building
development/regeneration project.
Then, define and calculate the area (m2) of each vegetation-plot type (
Table 21 Vegetation Plot Types) and building or hard landscaped area, both
before and after development, for the site.
Once the data is entered, the Ecology Calculator 1 will indicate the indicative
change in ecological value. The result must be used to award the credits.
Number of plant
species
BREEAM measures ecological value using number of plant species. The plant
species figures for each land type are programmed into the Ecology Calculator
tool 1. These figures are based on national figures from the Countryside
Survey prepared for the Digest of Environmental Statistics88 (see Table 22
Number of plant species by plot for different landscape types). Where an
ecologist has been appointed actual number of plant species (before and after
construction), based on the ecologists site survey should be used to determine
the change in ecological value.
Wildlife garden
planting
In the ‘change of ecological value’ table, ‘garden planting (typical)’ and ‘wildlife
garden planting’ will always record a score of zero, unless a suitably qualified
ecologist has been appointed: whereby they will make the distinction between
‘typical’ and ‘wildlife’ garden planting species and record ‘actual’ species
numbers.
Derelict Sites
The ecological value of derelict sites is time dependent (Table 22 Number of
plant species by plot for different landscape types); a linear scale has been
used to determine intermediate values between zero ecological value at 1 year
from dereliction/demolition to a value at 30 years based on marginal upland
figures. This presents a worst case figure which can be amended on the
advice of a suitably qualified ecologist.
Assessment of a
single
development on a
larger site
Where the assessment is of a single building that forms part of a larger site
development and the landscaping and ecological features form a common part
of the whole site, for the purpose of assessing this issue the plot types and
areas for the entire site must be used.
Infill
developments on
existing occupied
site
Where a development is an infill (or new building) on an existing occupied site,
then the construction zone for the new building would be the area of site
assessed for the purposes of this issue.
Site clearance
prior to purchase
of the site
Refer to the compliance note in LE3 on this issue.
Green Roofs
The contribution of species from a Green roof can only be incorporated where
a suitably qualified ecologist has been appointed.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
LE4 Mitigating ecological impact
269
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
First & Second Credit
1,2 &
3
Existing and proposed site plans and, if
required, maps and aerial photographs
confirming:
• Landscape and vegetation plot types
• Area (m2) of vegetation plot types
AND
A completed copy of Ecology Calculator 1.
1,2 &
4
The evidence required at the post
construction stage is the same as for a design
stage assessment. Plus:
Assessor’s/ecologist’s building/site inspection
confirming:
• Post construction vegetation plot types
and areas are in accordance with design
stage evidence.
A copy of the suitably qualified ecologist’s
report confirming prior to and after the
development:
• Landscape and vegetation plot types
• Area (m2) of vegetation plot types
AND
A completed, signed copy of checklist A6 –
Relating ecology reports to BREEAM OR a
copy of the ecology report containing the
information outlined in checklist A6.
AND
A completed copy of Ecology Calculator 2.
Additional Information
Relevant Definitions
Construction zone: As defined for issue LE3 – Ecological Value of site AND Protection of ecological
features
Suitably qualified ecologist (SQE): As defined for issue LE3 – Ecological Value of site AND
Protection of ecological features
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
270
LE4 Mitigating ecological impact
BREEAM Education 2008
Table 20 General Landscape Types
Pastoral
Mainly grasslands.
Arable
Land dominated by cereals and other arable crops, as well as
intensively managed grasslands.
Marginal Upland
Areas which are on the periphery of the uplands, and which are
dominated by mixtures of low intensity agriculture, forestry and seminatural vegetation.
Upland
Land generally above a height suitable for mechanised farming and
frequently dominated by semi-natural vegetation.
Building & Derelict Land
Land currently or previously occupied by buildings.
Urban Mosaic
A complex mix of habitats located within cities, towns, or villages,
which will include; buildings, hard standing, pockets of disused land
and scrub, and areas of managed green spaces, such as gardens,
allotments, and parkland. Parklands can be characterised as being
accessible to the public and will usually be fairly intensively
managed spaces, consisting of a matrix of grassland (grazed or
mown) with scattered trees at various densities and areas of dense
planting.
This landscape type is to be used only when no other landscape
type in the table is more appropriate / predominates.
Table 21 Vegetation Plot Types
Crops/weeds
Mostly highly disturbed vegetation of arable fields and their
boundaries; includes cereal and vegetable crops.
Tall grassland/herb
Typical vegetation of overgrown lowland field boundaries, ditches
and roadside verges.
Fertile grass
The bulk of agriculturally improved grasslands, intensive pasture and
silage crops; but also includes mown areas of improved grasslands
for recreational and amenity purposes, as well as re-sown roadside
verges.
Infertile grass
A diverse group of semi-improved and semi-natural grasslands;
includes acidic to basic, wet to dry grasslands, and tall-herb
vegetation mainly present in the lowlands; often found on stream
sides and roadside verges.
Lowland wooded
Includes wooded vegetation of hedges and broadleaved woods in
the lowlands.
Upland wooded
A varied group of acidic vegetation types usually associated with
upland woods, including: semi-natural woodland; conifer plantations;
bracken and wooded streamsides.
Moorland grass/mosaic
Typically grazed moorland vegetation, including extensive upland
acidic and peaty grassland, and species-rich but very localised
flushes.
Heath/bog
Mostly heather moorland, blanket bog and montane heath, but also
lowland heath and raised bog.
Wildlife garden planting
Garden planting that uses native species and/or those that have a
known attraction or benefit to local fauna, based on the advice of a
suitably qualified ecologist.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
LE4 Mitigating ecological impact
271
Table 22 Number of plant species by plot for different landscape types
Landscape Types
Upland
Existing
Building/Har
d
Landscaped
Areas
Urban
Mosaic
Derelict
Land <1
Years
Derelict
Land < 10
Years
Derelict
Land < 20
Years
Derelict
Land <=
30 Years
Arable
Pastural
Marginal
Upland
Crop Weeds
5.4
8.3
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Tall Grassland/Herb
12.7
15.0
-
-
-
17.6
0
6.3
15.8
21.1
Fertile Grassland
11.6
12.7
15.3
-
-
11.6
0
4.6
11.5
15.3
Infertile Grassland
17.1
17.6
21.1
-
-
17.6
0
6.3
15.8
21.1
Lowland Wooded
12.9
12.5
-
-
0
13.8
-
-
-
-
Upland Wooded
-
12.7
13.8
20.4
0
13.8
-
-
-
-
Moorland Grass/Mosaic
-
2.0
20.4
21.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
Heath/Bog
-
-
14.3
20.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
Hard Landscaping
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Buildings
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Garden Planting (typical)
-
-
-
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
Wildlife Garden Planting*
-
-
-
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
Types of Plot
- Insufficient data to produce national averages, as not all vegetation plot types are found in all landscaped types.
* Only where the rule concerning wildlife garden planting in Table 21 Vegetation Plot Types has been met can actual species values be used.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
272
LE4 Mitigating ecological impact
BREEAM Education 2008
Calculating the change and increase in ecological value
BREEAM calculates the change in ecological value by comparing the diversity (number and area) of
plant species on the site pre and post construction. The ecological value of the site is expressed as an
area-weighted average of plant species for the site’s landscape type. This enables BREEAM to use this
as an indicator of the proposed development’s impact on the site’s existing ecological value.
A simple example of the calculation is outlined below.
1. Calculate the ecological value of a previously developed existing site:
A 2065m2 existing site consists of the following types of land:
a. 1865 m2 hard landscaping = 0 species
b. 200m2 urban mosaic - infertile grassland = 17.6 species (Table 22 Number of plant species by
plot for different landscape types).
The ecological value of the existing site is calculated as follows, for each plot type;
•
Number of species on plot type x plot type area as % of total area.
Therefore, for our example site:
a. Hard landscaping: {(0 species x (1865m2/2065m2)} = 0 species
b. urban mosaic-infertile grassland: {(17.6 species x (200m2/2065m2)} = 1.70 species
c. Ecological value of the existing site = 0 + 1.70 = 1.70 species
2. Calculate the ecological value of the proposed site:
The 2065m2 post-construction site consists of the following types of land:
a. 1375m2 of building = 0 species.
b. 550m2 of hard landscaping = 0 species
c. 140 m2 has remained as urban mosaic-infertile grassland = 17.6 species
The ecological value of the proposed site is as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Building: {(0 species x (1375m2/2065m2)} = 0 species
Hard landscaping: {(0 species x (550m2/2065m2)} = 0 species
Urban mosaic-infertile grassland: {(17.6 species x (140m2/2065m2)} = 1.19 species
Ecological value of the proposed site = 0 + 0 + 1.19 = 1.19 species
The ecological impact is the difference between the two ecological values:
Change in ecological value: 1.19 – 1.70 = - 0.51 species
Therefore, for this example 1 credit is achieved.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
LE5
Issue Title
Enhancing Site Ecology
LE5 Enhancing site ecology
No. of credits
available
3
273
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage actions taken to maintain and enhance the ecological value of the site as
a result of development.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
First credit
1. A suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) has been appointed to report on enhancing and protecting the
ecology of the site and:
a. The SQE provides an Ecology Report with appropriate recommendations for protection and
enhancement of the site’s ecology.
b. The report is based on a site visit/survey by the SQE prior to the commencement of initial
site preparation works.
2. The general recommendations of the Ecology Report for enhancement and protection of site
ecology have been, or will be, implemented.
Second credit
1. The first credit is achieved.
2. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for enhancement and protection of site ecology have
been implemented, and the suitably qualified ecologist confirms that this will result in an increase in
ecological value of the site up to (but not including) 6 plant species.
3. The increase in plant species has been calculated using Ecology calculator 2, using actual species
numbers.
Third credit
1. The first credit is achieved.
2. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for enhancement and protection of site ecology have
been implemented, and the suitably qualified ecologist confirms that this will result in an increase in
ecological value of the site of 6 plant species or greater.
3. The increase in plant species has been calculated using Ecology calculator 2, using actual species
numbers.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
274
LE5 Enhancing site ecology
Compliance Notes
New Build
BREEAM Education 2008
Extensions to
existing buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific
to new build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific
to refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific
to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit out-only assessments.
Timing of Ecologist
Report
It is recommended that the suitably qualified ecologist is appointed to carry
out site surveys of existing site ecology, on which their report is based, or
to provide verification where the report is prepared by others, at the design
brief stage (RIBA Stage B or equivalent) in order to facilitate and maximise
potential ecological enhancement.
‘General’ recommendations for enhancing and protecting the ecological
value of the site are to include, and go beyond, compliance criteria for all
current EU and UK legislation relating to protected species and habitats.
Refurbishment
General
recommendations
Guidance for
ecologists and
assessors
Plant species
These
‘general’
recommendations
may
include
ecological
recommendations as detailed in the definitions.
Please refer to Checklist A6 – Relating ecology reports to BREEAM,
section D for assistance in assessing and interpreting the assessment
criteria for this BREEAM issue.
Only native floral/plant species, and/or those contributing to a local or UK
Biodiversity Action Plan or those with a known attraction or benefit to local
fauna can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number of
species on site, as well as general enhancement.
The Natural History Museum has an online Postcode Plants Database
which generates lists of native plants and wildlife for any specified postal
district in the UK. http://www.nhm.ac.uk/nature-online/life/plantsfungi/postcode-plants/index.html
No ecological survey
completed or
construction works
have commenced
Where it is not possible to determine ‘actual’ number of species per
vegetation plot type, either because an on-site ecological survey has not
been conducted, or, because construction works have already
commenced, the second and third credits cannot be achieved.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
A copy of the ecologist’s report containing:
• Details and scope of the site survey.
• Information as outlined in checklist A6 –
Relating ecology reports to BREEAM.
The evidence required at the post
construction stage is the same as for a
design stage assessment.
First Credit
1
OR
A copy of the ecologist’s report containing a
completed, signed copy of checklist A6.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
2
LE5 Enhancing site ecology
Proposed
site
plan
highlighting
implementation of the ecologist enhancement
recommendations.
275
Assessor site inspection report and
photographic evidence confirming that the
ecologist’s recommendations have been
implemented.
AND
One of the following:
A copy of the relevant section of the
specification requiring the main contractor to
implement the SQE’s recommendations for
protection and enhancement
OR
A letter from the client or design team
member confirming:
• That the specification will require the main
contractor to implement the ecologist’s
recommendations.
Second & Third Credit
1-3
Evidence as outlined above,
compliance with the first credit.
confirming
For
large
mixed-use/multi-building
developments, where the whole site has not
been
completed
and
ecological
enhancements have not been added, or
where features are being added at a later
date in an appropriate planting season:
•
A copy of the contract/specification or a
letter from the main contractor
confirming when the planting will be
complete.
This must be within 18 months from
completion of the development.
Evidence (as outlined above) confirming
compliance with the first credit.
A copy of the SQE’s report containing the
information outlined in checklist A6 – Relating
ecology reports to BREEAM.
OR
A copy of the SQE’s report containing a
completed, signed copy of checklist A6.
AND
A completed copy of Ecology Calculator 2.
Additional Information
Relevant Definitions
Suitably qualified ecologist (SQE): As defined for BREEAM Issue LE3.
Ecological recommendations are defined as measures adopted to enhance the ecology of the site,
which may include:
•
•
•
•
•
The planting of native species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife
The adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no, or low, use of residual pesticides)
The installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site
Development of a full Biodiversity Management Plan including avoiding clearance/works at key
times of the year (e.g. breeding seasons)
The proper integration, design and maintenance of SUDs and Green Roofs, community orchards
etc.
Only native floral species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can be considered
for the purpose of enhancing the ecological value of the site.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
276
LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity
Issue ID
LE6
Issue Title
Long Term Impact on Biodiversity
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
2
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To minimise the long term impact of the development on the site’s, and surrounding area’s, biodiversity.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
One credit can be awarded where there is a commitment to achieve the mandatory criteria and at least
two of the additional criteria (listed below).
Two credits can be awarded where there is a commitment to achieve the mandatory criteria and at least
four of the additional criteria (listed below).
Mandatory Criteria
1. A suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) has been appointed prior to commencement of activities on
site.
2. The suitably qualified ecologist confirms that all relevant UK and EU legislation relating to protection
and enhancement of ecology has been complied with during the design and construction process.
3. A landscape and habitat management plan, appropriate to the site, is produced covering at least
the first five years after project completion. This is to be handed over to the building occupants and
includes:
• Management of any protected features on site
• Management of any new, existing or enhanced habitats
• A reference to the current or future site level or local Biodiversity Action Plan.
Additional Criteria
1. The contractor nominates a ‘Biodiversity Champion’ with the authority to influence site activities and
ensure that detrimental impacts on site biodiversity are minimised in line with the recommendations
of a suitably qualified ecologist.
2. The contractor trains the site workforce on how to protect site ecology during the project. Specific
training should be carried out for the entire site workforce to ensure they are aware of how to avoid
damaging site ecology. Training should be based on the findings and recommendations for
protection of ecological features highlighted within a report prepared by a suitably qualified
ecologist.
3. The contractor records actions taken to protect biodiversity and monitor their effectiveness
throughout key stages of construction. The requirement commits the contractor to make such
records available where publicly requested.
4. Where a new ecologically valuable habitat, appropriate to the local area, is created. This includes
habitat that supports nationally, regionally or locally important biodiversity, and/or which is
nationally, regionally or locally important itself; including any habitat listed in the UK Biodiversity
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity
277
Action Plan (UK BAP)89, Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP), those protected within statutory
sites (e.g. SSSIs), or those within non-statutory sites identified in local plans.
5. Where flora and/or fauna habitats exist on site, the contractor programmes site works to minimise
disturbance to wildlife. For example, site preparation, ground works, and landscaping have been, or
will be, scheduled at an appropriate time of year to minimise disturbance to wildlife. Timing of works
may have a significant impact on, for example, breeding birds, flowering plants, seed germination,
amphibians etc. Actions such as phased clearance of vegetation may help to mitigate ecological
impacts. This additional requirement will be achieved where a clear plan has been produced
detailing how activities will be timed to avoid any impact on site biodiversity in line with the
recommendations of a suitably qualified ecologist.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of refurbished buildings (unless the building is listed – see
below).
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit out-only assessments.
Refurbishment of
listed buildings
Biodiversity
Champion
Local
biodiversity
expertise
The site and
surrounding
areas
Sites of no
ecological value
The refurbishment of a listed building may be exempt from the assessment
criteria if they conflict with the need to maintain the building’s listed features, or
are counter to the conservation criteria. Confirmation is required from a
suitably qualified ecologist that all possible criteria/enhancements have been
achieved before the credit can be awarded (i.e. if no suitably qualified ecologist
has been appointed then this credit cannot be awarded).
A Biodiversity Champion does not have to be an ecologist or ecological expert
but must have sufficient authority and time on site to influence activities and
ensure that they have minimal detrimental impact on biodiversity.
Local biodiversity expertise should be sought at, or before, the design stage to
help identify species of local biodiversity importance on site. It is likely that
their recommendations will draw on the Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP)
where one exists.
The steps taken in the above criteria will depend on the nature of the site, e.g.
urban sites, and the surrounding areas. It is likely that either all, or none, of the
optional items will apply. Where the optional items and the mandatory item 3,
the management plan, are deemed, in writing, by the appointed suitably
qualified ecologist not to be applicable, all credits can be awarded. Mandatory
items 1 and 2 must be met in all instances.
This is likely to be the case in the majority of assessments in central town/city
areas which have a high proportion of surrounding and existing development
and no existing external landscaped areas within the boundary of the
assessed site.
Where a site is deemed to have no ecological value, it is still necessary to
employ a suitably qualified ecologist to achieve this credit. The ecologist must
confirm that all the mandatory items (1), (2) and (3) have been achieved and
provide guidance on how to achieve optional item (4). Note that in such cases,
mandatory item (1) and additional requirement (4) is likely to be applicable in
relation to any ecological enhancements (e.g. green roofs, bird boxes, etc.)
adopted in order to achieve the Enhancing Site Ecology issue (LE5).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
278
LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity
Not all additional
items are
applicable
BREEAM Education 2008
Where the SQE confirms that not all additional items are applicable to the
development, for example it is a city centre refurbishment on a confined site
with no external areas, then the credits can be awarded accordingly:
No.
applicabl
e items
1 item
2 items
3 items
No. of
BREEAM
credits
One credit
Two credits
One credit
Two credits
One credit
Two credits
4 items
One credit
Two credits
Ground
maintenance &
management
plan
Criteria
Meet mandatory reqs. plus applicable
item
Meet mandatory reqs. plus all applicable
items
Meet mandatory reqs. plus 2 applicable
items
Meet mandatory reqs. plus all applicable
items
Meet mandatory reqs. plus 2 applicable
items
Meet mandatory reqs. plus all applicable
items
In schools and pre-schools, the management plan should include guidelines
for ground maintenance. Without this there may be a tendency for grounds
maintenance staff to pursue a largely unchanging maintenance routine. This
may not be favourable to biodiversity on site, and may reduce scope for pupil
involvement and opportunities for change.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
The SQE report or letter confirming:
• That they were appointed prior to
commencement of activities on site.
• All relevant UK and EU legislations will
be complied with.
A letter from the SQE confirming:
• That all relevant UK and EU legislation
relating to protection and enhancement
of ecology has been complied with.
Mandatory Criteria
1&2
AND
A completed, signed copy of checklist A6 –
Relating ecology reports to BREEAM
OR
A copy of ecology report containing the
information outlined in checklist A6.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
3
A copy of the site management plan.
LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity
279
A copy of the site’s landscape and habitat
management plan.
OR
A copy of the specification requiring the
development of plan and outlining the scope
of its content.
OR
Where the timing of assessment does not
permit either of the above, a letter from the
client confirming:
• A
commitment
to
produce
a
management plan
• The scope of the management plan
Additional Criteria
1
A letter from the contractor confirming:
• The appointment of the biodiversity
champion and their job title.
• Their on site role and responsibilities.
OR
A copy of the relevant sections of the site log
book, highlighting:
• Details of any action/events taken by the
biodiversity champion.
If no actions required/taken, this should be
confirmed in the log book.
Where not yet appointed, a copy of the
specification
clause
requiring
the
appointment of a biodiversity champion.
2
Training schedule or letter of confirmation
from the contractor committing to provide
relevant training.
OR
A record of training undertaken by the site
workforce confirming:
• Who delivered & developed the training
• The scope of the training delivered.
Where not yet appointed, a copy of the
specification clause requiring the training of
the site’s workforce.
3
A letter from the contractor confirming:
• Monitoring and reporting criteria for the
development.
• The records will be publicly available if
and when requested.
A copy of the relevant sections of the site log
book, highlighting:
• Records of monitoring and actions taken
to protect biodiversity.
• Records and outcome of any requests to
view such information.
OR
Where not yet appointed, a copy of the
specification clause outlining the contractor’s
monitoring and reporting criteria.
4
A copy of the proposed site plan highlighting
the new ecologically valuable habitat.
Assessor’s (or SQE’s) site inspection report
and photographic evidence confirming the
existence of the proposed habitat.
A SQE’s report or letter confirming that the
habitat supports the relevant biodiversity
action plan(s)
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
280
LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity
5
The SQE’s report or letter confirming:
• Wildlife on site that needs to be
accounted for in programming works.
• Actions required with respect to
programming site works to minimise
disturbance.
BREEAM Education 2008
A letter from the SQE, or a copy of their
report confirming:
• Site works executed in a manner that
minimised disturbance to wildlife in
accordance with their recommendations.
A copy of the contractor’s main programme
of works.
OR
A copy of the relevant section of the main
contract confirming:
• The programme of site works will
minimise disturbance to wildlife in
accordance
with
SQE’s
recommendations.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Suitably qualified ecologist (SQE): As defined for Issue LE3 – Ecological Value of site AND
Protection of ecological features
Biodiversity: Is defined as the variety of life on earth. It includes all species, animal,
plants, fungi, algae, bacteria and the habitats that they depend upon.
Biodiversity Action Plan: A plan which sets specific, measurable, achievable, realistic and time bound
conservation targets for species and habitats. The UKBAP website www.ukbap.org supports the
implementation of the UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP) on behalf of the UK Biodiversity
Partnership and the UK Government.
Steps to produce a BAP are outlined in the UK Business and Biodiversity Resource Centre website,
hosted by Earthwatch Institute Europe http://www.businessandbiodiversity.org under ‘your sector’
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
LE7
LE7 Consultation with students and staff
Issue Title
Consultation with Students and Staff
No. of credits
available
281
Minimum
standards
1
No
Aim
To encourage the design team to include pupils and staff in the design of the school grounds.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Pre-Schools, Schools and Sixth Form Colleges only
1. The design team have identified staff and pupil criteria for the school grounds, and consulted and
gathered their ideas for the school ground’s design.
2. The consultation included holding a number of workshops for separate groups of pupils and staff (or
other comparable method) in order to determine:
a. How the grounds could best be designed to facilitate learning
b. How the grounds could best be designed to provide a range of social spaces appropriate to
pupils’ and other users’ needs.
3. At least four workshops were held: two workshops with staff (including both teaching staff and
ground maintenance supervisors), and two with pupils from different age groups. The findings of the
workshops must influence the design and therefore must have been held before key and final
design decisions were made.
4. The design team have kept pupils and staff informed of how their ideas are being taken into
account in the design of the school grounds.
Compliance Notes
New Build
For new schools where there are no identifiable staff or pupils, consultation
with relevant people/groups from the local catchment area and similar schools
in the area must be carried out in place of the above.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit out-only assessments.
Further & Higher
Education
Colleges
Pre-Schools
This BREEAM issue is not assessed for these building types.
Only the staff and not pupils/children need to be consulted and informed for
pre-school developments.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
282
LE7 Consultation with students and staff
Consultation
BREEAM Education 2008
Consultation should consider the range of needs for both social and
educational use of the outdoor space. A range of sizes and types of space
should be designed to facilitate different types of social interaction.
Consideration should be given to how the space can facilitate learning in the
range of subjects, including science, drama, maths, geography, art, physical
education, history, etc. Discussion at consultation workshops could be aided
by using 1:500 scale plans of the site. All views raised in the workshops should
be recorded.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-4.
A copy of the design team’s consultation
schedule with pupils and staff confirming:
• The workshop schedules & framework.
• Number and dates of workshops
held/proposed.
• A list of actual/proposed attendees for
each workshop.
• Format and reporting method for
keeping pupils and staff informed.
A copy of the minutes and actions from
consultation workshops.
Where, at the stage of interim assessment,
the workshops have been held:
• Minutes and actions
from
the
workshop(s).
• Proposed site plan highlighting any
design solutions based on consultation.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Any facilities designed and constructed
within the school grounds, based on the
results from the consultation process.
Records such as circulars, newsletters,
presentations confirming:
• That the staff and pupils were kept
informed of how their ideas were taken
into account in the design.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
None.
Small Working Groups
It is often appropriate for the design team to suggest that the school set up a small working group,
which includes both staff and pupils. Members of the group would not only take part in consultation, but
would play a key role in the ongoing use, management and development of the school grounds,
encouraging feelings of ownership.
Design Options
Design options may include allocating areas for pupils to design and plant themselves, perhaps taking a
long-term view so that pupils might gain from planning new initiatives and from the anticipation of
potential changes in successive years.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
LE8
LE8 Local Wildlife Partnership
No. of credits
available
Issue Title
Local Wildlife Partnership
283
Minimum
standards
1
No
Aim
To encourage the design team to form a partnership with a local group that has wildlife expertise, in
order to benefit from their local knowledge and ongoing support.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Pre-Schools, Schools and Sixth Form Colleges only
1. A partnership has been set up by the design team with a local group that has wildlife expertise (e.g.
local wildlife trust or similar local body) and the group has:
a. Provided advice early in the design process regarding protecting and/or providing habitat
for species of local importance on the site.
b. Provided advice to ensure the design is in keeping with the local environment. In particular
this should draw on their local knowledge of any features or species of ecological interest
on or near the site.
c. Provided or will continue to provide ongoing support and advice to the school to help them
manage, maintain and develop the outdoor space in the longer term.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
Issue not applicable for Fit out-only assessments.
Further & Higher
Education
Colleges
Ongoing support
and advice
This BREEAM issue is not assessed for these building types.
Local Wildlife
Trust
The local wildlife trust would be a suitable body to set up a partnership with.
Alternative groups may also be appropriate. The design team should find out
about wildlife projects that these groups have been involved locally in order to
make a decision on their suitability before entering into discussions about
setting up a partnership.
This could take the form of meetings several times a year with a staff/pupil
working party to help them plan conservation/ecological enhancement work, or
activities relating the ecology in or near the school grounds.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
284
LE8 Local Wildlife Partnership
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
A letter of confirmation from the design
team or wildlife group confirming:
• Scope of the partnership.
• Details and remit of the wildlife group.
• A description of the process for ongoing
support that the group commit to give to
the partnership.
• Details of meetings and actions to date.
A letter of confirmation from the design team
or wildlife group detailing:
• Meetings and actions carried out.
• A copy of correspondence highlighting
advice supplied by the wildlife group to
the design team.
• Scope and framework around which the
group has been or will be providing
ongoing support to the school. This must
include
a
timescale
for
future
meetings/events.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP): A suitable starting point for discussion with the local wildlife
group would be to ask for advice on how to take account of the Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) in
the school ground’s design.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 1 Refrigerant GWP – Building services
285
12.0 Pollution
Issue ID
Pol 1
Issue Title
Refrigerant GWP – Building Services
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce the contribution to climate change from refrigerants with a high global warming potential.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The building has no refrigerants OR
2. The refrigerants used within the building services have a GWP less than 5.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
If the extended and existing building share the same building services, then
existing
these services must be assessed against the criteria regardless of whether the
buildings
existing building forms a part of the assessment or not. If the extension is
served by independent services, only these need be assessed against the
Assessment Criteria.
Fit Out Only
The criteria apply to both new systems specified as part of a fit out and the
refrigerants used in any existing systems that will remain post fit out.
Any existing systems that use refrigerants with an ozone depleting potential or
a global warming potential of more than 5 must have been converted to use a
refrigerant with a zero ODP and GWP less than 5. Where this is not possible
such systems will need to be replaced to meet the assessment criteria.
Solid refrigerant
The credit can be awarded by default where a solid refrigerant is used.
Refrigerant
charge less than
5kg
The credit can be awarded where the total refrigerant charge used in the
building services is less than 5kg.
Multiple split
units
In the case of multiple split units, through-the-wall or other packaged units, the
credit can be awarded where the total collective refrigerant charge is less than
5kg. If the total collective refrigerant charge in such systems is greater than
5kg, then the refrigerant(s) must comply with the BREEAM criteria.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
286
Pol 1 Refrigerant GWP – Building services
Office server and
comms rooms
BREEAM Education 2008
Refrigerants used in services for typical office server and comms rooms
cannot be excluded from the assessment.
Where air conditioning equipment is provided, the equipment may not be able
to achieve this credit as smaller systems often require refrigerants with a GWP
> 5. In this instance the credit cannot be awarded by default as there are
alternatives for designers to consider. These alternatives include revisiting the
design and the room conditions specification to see if the cooling equipment is
necessary. In addition, whilst a manufacturer or supplier may specify a narrow
temperature band for server equipment, acceptable limits detailed in ASHRAE
guidance90 may allow a greater temperature range without adverse effect and
thus the cooling equipment may not be necessary.
GWP data not
available
Where GWP data for the specified refrigerant is not available, the credit cannot
be awarded on a default basis.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
A copy of the specification clause confirming
either:
• Absence
of
refrigerant
in
the
development OR
• Type(s) of refrigerant to be used.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and as
built drawings confirming:
• Presence or absence of any refrigeration
plant.
OR
AND
•
Manufacturer’s information confirming:
• GWP of each refrigerant.
A letter from the design team/developer
confirming:
- The refrigerant type specified
remained unchanged.
OR
Where a change has occurred, written
confirmation from the design team
confirming:
• Type of refrigerant(s) used.
AND
Manufacturer’s information confirming:
• GWP of each refrigerant.
Additional Information
Global Warming Potential: GWP is defined as the potential for global warming that a chemical has
relative to 1 unit of carbon dioxide, the primary greenhouse gas. In determining the GWP of the blowing
agent, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) methodology using a 100-year
Integrated Time Horizon (or ITH) should be applied.
Ozone Depleting Potential: ODP is the ratio of the relative amount of degradation to the ozone layer
caused by a particular substance relative to the calculated depletion for the reference gas CFC 11
(ODP = 1.0). The ODP of the refrigerants is not assessed under this issue and there is no link between
GWP and ODP.
Refrigerant: there are three main make-ups of refrigerants:
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
•
•
•
Pol 1 Refrigerant GWP – Building services
287
Hydrogenated Fluorocarbon Refrigerants (HFCs) are made up of hydrogen, fluorine, and carbon.
Because they do not use a chlorine atom (which is used in most refrigerants) they are known to be
one of the least damaging to our ozone.
Hydrogenated Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (HCFCs) are made up of hydrogen, chlorine,
fluorine, and carbon. These refrigerants contain minimal amounts of chlorine; they are not as
detrimental to the environment as some other refrigerants.
Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (CFCs) contain chlorine, fluorine and carbon. These refrigerants
carry high amounts of chlorine so they are known for being the most hazardous to the ozone layer.
Table of refrigerants and their Global Warming Potentials: the table below includes available
substances which are capable of acting as refrigerants. Many are not currently used as such and some
have been phased out and withdrawn from the market.
Table 23 Refrigerant GWP
Refrigerant type
GWP
Refrigerant type
GWP
R11 (CFC-11) *
4000 R32 (HCFC-32) *
580
R12 (CFC-12) *
8500 R407C (HFC-407)
1600
R113 (CFC-113) *
5000 R152a (HFC-152a)
140
R114 (CFC-114) *
9300 R404A (HFC blend)
3800
R115 (CFC-115)*
9300 R410A (HFC blend)
1900
R125 (HFC-125)
3200 R413A (HFC blend)
1770
Halon-1211
N/A R417A (HFC blend)
1950
Halon-1301
5600 R500 (CFC/HFC) *
6300
Halon-2402
N/A R502 (HCFC/CFC) *
5600
Ammonia
0
R507 (HFC azeotrope)
3800
R22 (HCFC-22) *
1700 R290 (HC290 propane)
3
R123 (HCFC-123) *
93
R600 (HC600 butane)
3
R134a(HFC-134a)
1300 R600a (HC600a isobutane)
3
R124 (HCFC-124) *
480
R290/R170(HC290/HC170)
3
R141b (HCFC-141b) *
630
R1270 (HC1270 propene)
3
R142b (HCFC-142b) *
2000 R143a (HFC-143a)
4400
N/A Indicates that there is insufficient data available to give a GWP value.
•
Global warming potential (GWP) values are based on best available data at the time of writing and
are based on a 100-year time horizon. Other published data may be based on different time
horizons.
•
All CFC/HCFC refrigerants (marked *) have an ODP > 0 and as such are illegal for new
installations. Existing equipment may continue to use them at present. The use of CFCs and
HCFCs as refrigerants has been addressed under the Montreal protocols. Phase out programmes
have been agreed resulting in these substances no longer being used as refrigerants in all new
build and most existing situations. The industry’s favoured replacements are currently HFCs which
are often potent global warming contributors.
•
Whilst it is currently still legal to have an existing system that uses refrigerants with an ozone
depleting potential, it is now illegal to top up with CFCs (either new or recycled refrigerant). It will be
illegal to top up with new HCFCs from 2010, and it will be illegal to top up with recycled/recovered
HCFCs from 2015.
•
Hydrocarbons and ammonia-based refrigerants have low or zero GWP and are therefore preferred
long-term options. These are now widely available and are valid alternatives to HFCs in all
buildings, provided health and safety issues are fully addressed.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
288
Pol 2 Preventing refrigerant leaks
Issue ID
Pol 2
Issue Title
Preventing Refrigerant Leaks
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce the emissions of refrigerants to the atmosphere arising from leakages in cooling plant.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Refrigerant leak detection
1. The building has no refrigerants OR
2. Systems using refrigerants are contained in a moderately air tight enclosure (or a mechanically
ventilated plant room), and a refrigerant leak detection system is installed covering high-risk parts of
the plant. OR
3. An automatic permanent refrigerant leak detection system is specified, which is NOT based on the
principle of detecting or measuring the concentration of refrigerant in air.
Refrigerant recovery system
4. The automatic shutdown and pump down of refrigerant occurs on the detection of high
concentrations of refrigerant in the plant room/enclosure. For the majority of cases only systems in
mechanically ventilated/moderately air tight plant rooms (or enclosures) comply.
5. Automatic pump-down to either a separate storage tank or into the heat exchanger is acceptable
but only where automatic isolation valves are fitted to contain the refrigerant once fully pumped
down.
6. The alarm threshold that triggers automatic pump down is set to a maximum of 2000ppm (0.2%),
but lower levels can be set. The credit cannot be awarded for manual systems.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building
existing
services plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and
buildings
existing building, the existing plant must be assessed against the criteria of this
issue. If the extension is served by independent services, only these need be
assessed against the Assessment Criteria.
Fit Out Only
The criteria apply to any existing cooling plant and new plant specified as part
of the fit out.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 2 Preventing refrigerant leaks
289
Type of
refrigerant
This issue is applied in instances where any type of refrigerant is present, i.e.
even if the ozone depleting potential (ODP) of the refrigerant is zero and the
global warming potential (GWP) is less than 5.
Solid refrigerant
The credit(s) can be awarded by default where a solid refrigerant is used.
CO2 as a
refrigerant
Where CO2 is used as a refrigerant, the refrigerant recovery system
credit/requirements can be awarded/met without the need for a recovery
system, provided that the design team confirm the system/installation
requirements of BS EN 378:200891 and the Institute of Refrigeration Carbon
Dioxide as a Refrigeration Code of Practice92 is complied with.
Where Ammonia is used as a refrigerant, the refrigerant recovery system
credit/requirements can be awarded/met without the need for a recovery
system, provided that the design team confirm the system/installation
requirements of BS EN 378:200891 and the Institute of Refrigeration Ammonia
Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice93 is complied with.
The credit(s) can be awarded by default where the total refrigerant charge
used in the building is less than 5kg.
Ammonia as a
refrigerant
Total refrigerant
charge less than
5 kg
Multiple split
systems
High-risk parts
Manual
refrigerant
recovery system
Cold food storage
– higher
education
buildings
For installations of small multiple hermetic systems only, where the refrigerant
charge in each unit is less than 5kg but the total refrigerant charge in the
building is greater than 5kg, the credit(s) can be awarded by default. This is on
the basis that the risk of a large refrigerant leak is minimised and individual
leaks from each system will be small i.e. <5kg.
High-risk parts of refrigeration plant typically include the pipe work and
compressor. Evaporator or condenser coils can be omitted from the coverage
of the system.
The provision of any manual system, including manual storage cylinders on
site, does not comply with the criteria of this issue.
The criteria of this issue apply to cold food storage refrigeration equipment
(where the charge is ≥ 5kg), i.e. cold rooms and/or centralised equipment
serving a group of cold storage cabinets. Cabinets and refrigerated bottle
shelves with integral refrigeration plant on average have a charge of 0.3kg;
therefore in most circumstances, individual or small-scale multiple installations
will not fall within the scope of this issue. However, the assessor should ask
the design team to confirm that the charge is ≤ 5kg.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
A copy of the specification clause or design
plan confirming:
• Absence
of
refrigerants
in
the
development.
Assessor’s building/site inspection
photographic evidence confirming:
• Absence of refrigeration plant.
2&3
A copy of the specification clause or letter from
the M&E engineer confirming:
• Type of leak detection system(s).
• Scope of the system(s)
• Where relevant, containment strategy for
such equipment.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Installation of leak detection system(s)
• Installation of automatic refrigerant
recovery equipment
• Pre-set threshold level for automatic
and
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
290
Pol 2 Preventing refrigerant leaks
4,5&6
A copy of the specification clause or letter from
the M&E engineer confirming:
• Type, scope and operation of automatic
refrigerant recovery equipment
• Details of the plant room enclosure where
the refrigeration plant is installed
• Alarm threshold for triggering automatic
pump down.
BREEAM Education 2008
pump down.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Moderately airtight enclosure: this can be defined as an enclosure that does not produce a draught or
significant fresh air ingress that would dilute any leaked refrigerant gas (dilution may prevent detection).
Refrigerant Leak Detection: a permanently installed multi-point sensing system; this may be aspirated
or have multiple sensor heads linked to a central alarm unit or BMS. Various sensor types are available
including infra-red, semi-conductor or electro-chemical. Please see below for further guidance on the
coverage of refrigerant leak detection systems.
Refrigerant Recovery: The process of removing refrigerant from a system and storing it in an airtight
container.
Leak detection systems/devices
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handheld detectors (which include semi-conductor and corona discharge types) do not comply with
BREEAM criteria.
Corona discharge detectors are not suitable where flammable refrigerants are used, or in potentially
explosive atmospheres.
Indicator dyes: these consist of fluorescent or coloured dyes added to the refrigerant to show
leakage sites. The use of the dye should be approved by the compressor manufacturer. Some
compressor manufacturers do not approve the use of indicator dyes, in which case either an
alternative type of equipment should be used, or an alternative type of leak detection specified.
Halide torch detectors: this type of detection is only appropriate for chlorine-based substances such
as CFCs and HCFCs, and should not be used in areas where naked flames are prohibited.
Compounds which do not contain chlorine, e.g. HFCs, cannot be detected by this method. When
awarding this credit in instances where these detectors are in use, the assessor should confirm that
the refrigerant is chlorine based.
Electronic leak detectors: these must be designed to detect a certain type of, or multiple types of,
refrigerant, i.e. CFC, HFC, HCFC, etc.
Standing hold test: systems based on monitoring pressure drops within the pipe work are not
necessarily compliant with the BREEAM criteria. There are natural fluctuations to the pressure of
the refrigerant due to changes in volume and temperature of the system, and to the ambient
temperature of the surroundings. Low pressure and high pressure switches, which are standard
equipment on refrigerant plant, are therefore not sufficient to award the credit. Other methods exist,
such as pressurising the system with a high pressure, dry nitrogen gas for a period of time and then
identify whether or not the pressure drops during this time. However, this requires systems to be
shut down for a period of time (usually overnight or longer).
Systems NOT based on the principle of detecting or measuring the concentration of refrigerant in
air: Such systems (for example based on sensing the presence of refrigerant vapour in liquidcarrying pipes) are now commercially available.
Refrigerant pump down
The specification of automatic refrigerant pump down can further limit potential losses and damage to
the environment and have subsequent economic benefits to the building owner. Under the United
Kingdom 1990 Environmental Protection Act unwanted refrigerant and refrigerating system oil are
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 2 Preventing refrigerant leaks
291
classified as either controlled or hazardous waste. Not only is it an offence to discharge them to the
environment, but there are procedures regarding transport, storage, transfer of ownership and ultimate
disposal. Article 16 of EC regulation 2037/2000 specifies that used CFCs and HCFCs must be
recovered for destruction or recycling/reclamation.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
292
Pol 3 Refrigerant GWP – Cold storage
Issue ID
Pol 3
Issue Title
Refrigerant GWP – Cold Storage
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce the contribution to climate change from refrigerants with a high global warming potential.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. All refrigerant types used in cold storage systems have a global warming potential (GWP) of less
than 5.
2. The requirement applies to refrigerants used in systems integral to the building, including where
specified:
a. Cold storage enclosures.
b. Cold store services including: Chilled water pipework, refrigerant pipework and ductwork
etc
c. Fixed cold or chilled storage cabinets
d. Fixed cold drink coolers.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
Fit Out Only
Domestic-scale
refrigeration
equipment &
small plug-in
chillers
GWP data not
available
No cold food
storage
The criteria apply to new and replaced storage systems specified as part of a
fit out and the refrigerants used in any existing systems that will remain post fit
out.
Any existing system that use refrigerants with an ozone depleting potential or a
global warming potential of more than 5 must have been converted to use a
refrigerant with a zero ODP and GWP less than 5. Where this is not possible,
such systems will need to be replaced to meet the assessment criteria.
The scope of this BREEAM issue excludes domestic-scale refrigeration
equipment and small ‘plug-in’ chillers and therefore plant not integral to the
building.
Where GWP data is not available, the credit cannot be awarded by default.
For developments where the tenant or end use function is known and cold
food storage is not required, then this issue does not need to be assessed.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 3 Refrigerant GWP – Cold storage
293
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1&2
A marked-up design plan highlighting the
cold food storage areas/plant in the
building.
A letter from the design team/developer
confirming:
• The refrigerant type specified remained
unchanged.
A copy of the specification clause
confirming either:
• Type(s) of refrigerant to be used.
AND
Manufacturer’s information confirming:
• GWP of each refrigerant.
OR
Where a change occurred, written
confirmation from the design team
confirming:
• Type of refrigerant(s) used.
AND
Manufacturer’s information confirming:
• GWP of each refrigerant.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Please refer to BREEAM issue Pol 1.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
294
Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source
Issue ID
Pol 4
Issue Title
NOx emissions from heating source
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
Minimum
standards
3
No
Aim
To encourage the supply of heat from a system that minimises NO x emissions, and therefore reduces
pollution of the local environment.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Where manufacturer’s details demonstrate that the plant installed to meet the building’s space
heating demand has dry NOx emission levels as follows:
a. One credit where the dry NOx emissions from delivered space heating energy are ≤100
mg/kWh (at 0% excess O2).
b. Two credits where the dry NOx emissions from delivered space heating energy are ≤70
mg/kWh (at 0% excess O2).
c. Three credits where the dry NOx emissions from delivered space heating energy are ≤40
mg/kWh (at 0% excess O2). And emissions from delivered water heating energy are 100
mg/kWh or less (at 0% excess O2).
The emissions should be estimated under normal operating conditions (not standby).
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
If the heating demand for the refurbished building is being met by an existing
system, then the NOx emission level for the existing system must be assessed
against the criteria of this issue.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
The rule above for refurbishment projects also applies to new build extensions
to existing buildings.
Fit Out Only
The criteria apply to any existing or new heating plant specified as part of the
fit out. For fit outs of tenant units/floors where heating is provided and
managed centrally by a third party, i.e. landlord; the central system must be
assessed against the criteria for this issue. If the NOx emission level for this
system cannot be confirmed the credits must be withheld.
Where the heating load for a highly insulated/exemplar environmental building
is less than or equal to 7% of the heat load for a Building Regulationscompliant building of the same size and type, 1 credit can be awarded
regardless of the primary fuel used. Figures used for calculations of the
percentage of total heat demand must be based on the output from an
approved energy modelling software.
Highly insulated
building
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
NOx data
provided in
different units
Grid electricity
Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source
295
Where data is provided in different units, or at a level of excess oxygen greater
than zero, the manufacturer/supplier should be asked to convert this to comply
with the BREEAM criteria. Alternatively, the assessor may correct these using
the correction factors provided in the Additional Information section.
Where some of the building’s space heating is fuelled by electricity from the
National Grid, however small the incidence is on the overall consumption, the
credits will not be achievable as power stations emit NOx at an average rate of
approximately 1200 mg/kWh.
This figure is a UK average and therefore also applies to areas/countries with
a higher proportion of renewable sources, such as Scotland.
Electricity from a
renewable source
Where electricity used by the heating system is sourced from a zero emission
renewable source such as PVs, wind etc, there are no resulting emissions.
This source of heating can therefore be counted as having zero NOx
emissions.
Heat pumps
Heat pumps powered by grid electricity are likely to indirectly produce emission
rates higher than those required by BREEAM and are therefore typically
unable to achieve any credits under issue Pol 4. However, there is a formula
for determining NOx emissions from heat pumps in the Additional Information
section below. Please note, the energy saved by using certain types of heat
pumps is recognised in BREEAM issue Ene 1 and the reduced emissions are
recognised under BREEAM issue Ene 5.
District heating systems that incinerate waste usually have NOx emission rates
higher than the levels set to achieve any BREEAM credits.
District heating
Heat recovery
Heat recovery can be considered as having zero NOx emissions for the
purpose of this issue.
Combined Heat &
Power
Refer to the additional guidance section for guidance on calculating NOx
emission levels from CHP.
Biomass
Whilst Biomass systems are recognised as low carbon systems, they can
produce a significant amount of NOX and so may not achieve this credit;
however they can score highly in the Energy section of BREEAM. Biomass
systems are also recognised as reducing the impact of fossil fuel depletion by
employing a renewable combustion fuel source.
More than one
heating system
Refer to the additional guidance section for guidance on calculating NOx
emission levels where heat is provided by more than one system.
Green Tariff
Commitments to use a Green tariff to supply electricity to heat the building or
power heat pumps are not recognised in this issue due to the uncertainty that
this electricity will be zero emission.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
296
Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
1
A copy of the specification clause confirming:
• Type of heating system(s) installed.
For each system specified, a letter, email or
literature
from
the
manufacturer(s)
confirming:
• Dry NOx emissions rate in mg/kWh.
If more than one system is providing heat,
design team calculations confirming:
• The average NOx emission rate.
Post Construction Stage
Assessor’s building/site inspection
photographic evidence confirming:
• Heating system(s) installed.
and
OR
A letter from the design team or main
contractor confirming:
• No changes to the specification.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Approved energy modelling software: Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 1 for a definition.
NOx emissions: are pollutant gases produced by the combustion of fossil fuels. NOx reacts with heat
and sunlight to produce ozone that can cause serious respiratory problems. It also reacts with water to
produce acid rain which has a detrimental effect on ecosystems.
Dry NOx Levels: the NOx emissions (mg/kWh) resulting from the combustion of a
fuel at 0% excess oxygen levels.
Calculating NOx emission levels from Combined Heat & Power (CHP) systems
Where CHP systems are present or specified, only the heat-related emissions are considered for the
assessment of this issue. The NOx emissions are allocated to heat and electricity in line with the
respective power outputs. This is done using a NOx emission rate for the electrical output equivalent to
the current rate for grid electricity, and allocating the remaining NOx to the heat output. Only the heatrelated component is then compared with the credit scale. The following formula should be used to
determine this:
X = (A - B) / C
Where:
X = NOx emissions per unit of heat supplied (mg/kWh heat)
elec
A = NOx emissions per unit of electricity generated (mg/kWh ) i.e. the NOx emitted by the
CHP system per unit of electricity generated. This figure should be obtained from the
installer/supplier of the system.
elec
B = NOx emissions per unit of electricity supplied from the grid (mg/kWh ) this should be
assumed to be 1200mg/kWh
C = Heat to Electricity Ratio of the CHP scheme.
The above methodology determines the net NOx emissions from CHP-generated electricity compared
with central generation of electricity and allocates this amount to the heat production. Where X is
calculated to be negative, it should be assumed to be zero.
Where heat is provided by more than one system, an average NOx emission rate should be used based
on the ratio of power outputs from each source, i.e. multiply the emissions of each boiler by the
percentage of heat demand it supplies and total these values. This is likely to be the case where a CHP
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source
297
system has been sized on the base power demand rather than the heat demand and therefore a
secondary heating system is required. The following formula can be used:
Average NOx Emission Rate = (N1 x (H1/HT)) + (N2 x (H2/HT)) …… + (Nn x (Hn/HT))
Where:
N1 = NOx emissions rate for source 1
N2 = NOx emissions rate for source 2
Nn = NOx emissions rate for source n
HT = Total heat output from all sources
H1 = Heat output from source 1
H2 = Heat output from source 2
Hn = Heat output from source n
Calculating NOx emission levels from heat pumps
For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, either of the formulas below can be used to
determine the contributing NOx emissions from a heat pump:
MElec x W Elec
MHeat =
MElec
OR
W Heat
MHeat
=
.
EER
Where:
MHeat = NOx emission per unit of heat generated in mg/kWhHeat
MElec = NOx emissions from UK grid electricity mg/kWh, this should be assumed to be
1200mg/kWhelec
W Elect = Total quantity of electricity consumed by heat pump kWhElec
W Heat = Total quantity of heat produced by heat pump kWhHeat
EER = Energy Efficiency Ratio (also referred to as Co-efficient of Performance)
Conversion factors
Manufacturers should be asked to supply dry NOx emissions data in mg/kWh. Where this is not
possible the assessor may use the following conversion factors to convert figures in ppm, mg/MJ,
mg/m3 or wet NOx. It should be noted that these conversion factors assume worst case efficiencies and
are likely to give conservative answers. This could have the effect of lowering the number of credits
achieved.
•
Figures in mg/m should be multiplied by 0.857 in order to gain emissions in mg/kWh. A conversion
may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below).
•
Figures in parts per million (ppm) should be multiplied by 1.76 in order to obtain mg/kWh. A
conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen. (see below)
•
Figures in mg/MJ should be multiplied by 3.6 in order to show emissions in mg/kWh (1 kWh = 3.6
MJ). A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (below).
•
This Issue’s criteria are based on dry NOx values – almost all manufacturers will quote emissions in
dry NOx. However if wet NOX figures are supplied, these should be converted to dry NOx. This can
be done by multiplying the wet NOX figure by 1.75.
3
Excess Oxygen Correction: If a NOx emission rate is quoted by the manufacturer in mg/m3 or ppm,
then it should be established at what % excess oxygen this emission was measured. The greater the
amount of excess oxygen in the flue gases at the time of measurement, the more “diluted” the NOx. It is
therefore important to convert any emission rate back to 0% excess oxygen. For the purpose of
BREEAM, the following conversion factors can be used for the most frequently used rates supplied by
manufacturers:
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
298
Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source
% Excess O2
3%
6%
15%
Conversion factor
BREEAM Education 2008
Conversion (c)
x 1.17
x 1.40
x 3.54
c = 20.9/(20.9 – x)
Where x = % excess O2 (NOT excess air) and 20.9 is the percentage of O2 in the air.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Issue Title
Pol 5
Flood Risk
Pol 5 Flood risk
No. of credits
available
3
299
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To encourage development in low flood risk areas or to take measures to reduce the impact of flooding
on buildings in areas with a medium or high risk of flooding.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
Two credits
1. Where the assessed development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a low annual
probability of flooding.
2. A site specific Flood Risk Assessment (FRA) confirms that there is a low risk of flooding from all
sources.
Or one credit
1. Where the assessed development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a medium or
high annual probability of flooding AND
2. A site specific Flood Risk Assessment (FRA) confirms to the satisfaction of the local authority and
statutory body that the development is appropriately flood resilient and resistant from all sources of
flooding AND
3. The ground level of the building, and access to it and the site, are designed (or zoned) so they are
at least 600mm above the design flood level of the flood zone in which the assessed development
is located (see compliance notes for further guidance).
One additional credit
1. Where attenuation measures are specified to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to
the watercourses (natural or municipal) is no greater for the developed site than it was for the predevelopment site. This should comply with the Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable Drainage94
systems published by CIRIA, or for at least a 1 year and 100 year return period event with a 6 hour
duration.
2. The capacity of the attenuation measures must include an allowance for climate change; this
should be made in accordance with current best practice95.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
300
Pol 5 Flood risk
BREEAM Education 2008
Refurbishment
Refurbishment projects, where no new building or hard landscaping areas are
developed, are likely to achieve the credit for attenuation of surface water runoff. In such instances, as a minimum, a Flood Risk Assessment must have
been carried out and any identified opportunities to reduce surface water runoff as a result of the refurbishment works must be implemented.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
Fit Out Only
This issue is not assessed in Fit Out-only assessments.
Definition of
flood zones
Please refer to the Additional Information section.
Sources of
flooding
If the development is in Zone 1, the FRA must demonstrate that there is low
risk of flooding from the following sources:
• Fluvial (rivers)
• Tidal
• Surface water: sheet run-off from adjacent land (urban or rural)
• Groundwater: most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable
rock (aquifers)
• Sewers: combined, foul or surface water sewers.
Functional flood
plain
The BREEAM credit for locating in a flood zone of ‘medium or high annual
probability’ cannot be awarded where the building is located in the functional
flood plain. PPS2596 defines the functional flood plain as a ‘zone [that]
comprises land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood’. If the
building assessed is or has been defined as ‘water-compatible development’,
please refer to the BREEAM office for guidance on assessing this BREEAM
issue.
The Environment Agency flood map and associated information is intended for
guidance, and cannot provide details for individual properties. In addition the
EA map only covers the likelihood of flooding from the rivers or sea and not all
sources of flooding (listed above). EA flood maps cannot therefore be used as
evidence to demonstrate compliance with the assessment criteria.
Environment
Agency flood
maps
Pre-existing flood
defences
In an area protected by existing flood defences (designed to withstand a
certain magnitude of flooding) the appropriate number of credits can be
awarded where the defences reduce the risk to ‘low’ or ‘medium’ and the
following conditions are met:
1. The development is not located in an area where new flood defences
have to be, or have been, constructed to minimise the risk of flooding to
the site and its locality purely for the purpose of the development and/or its
wider master plan
2. The development is located on a previously developed land (as defined
by the criteria in BREEAM issue LE1 Re-use of land) and the appropriate
statutory body confirm that, as a result of the existing defences, the risk of
a flood event occurring is reduced to low or medium (as appropriate to the
credit levels set in BREEAM). If firm confirmation is not provided then the
credit cannot be awarded
3. The relevant agency confirms that, as a result of such defences, the risk of
a flood event occurring is reduced to low or medium risk.
A statutory body’s local/regional office may be able to provide more
information on existing defences in the area in which the assessed
development is located.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
600mm threshold
Pol 5 Flood risk
301
It is accepted that, for buildings located in a medium flood zone, areas of the
car park and site access may be allowed to flood and therefore fall below the
600mm threshold. In such cases the credit is still achievable provided safe
access to the site and the ground floor of the building can be maintained (i.e.
they are 600mm above the design flood level) to ensure the building/site does
not become an ‘island’ in the event of a flood.
Where the development has been permitted and the ground levels of the
topography/infrastructure immediately adjacent to the site fall below the
600mm threshold, the credit can still be awarded, provided there are no other
practical solutions for access to the site above this level and the assessed
building, and access to it, meets the assessment criteria. As much of the
external site area as possible (or as required by an appropriate statutory body)
should be designed at or above the threshold.
In further & higher education buildings located in medium or high flood risk
zones, any areas used to store sensitive, historical, hazardous, valuable and
perishable materials, e.g. radioactive materials, microbiological facilities,
server rooms, libraries, etc., must be above the 600mm threshold.
Third-party
defences
There are many defences, owned by third parties, which due to their location
act as a flood defence by default e.g. motorway, railway embankments, walls
etc. It can be assumed that embankments will remain in place for the lifetime
of the development, unless the assessor or project team have reason to
believe otherwise. For walls, assurance must be sought that the wall is likely to
remain for the design life of the building.
Effectiveness of
the water run-off
attenuation
measures
To ensure effective operation of the water run-off attenuation measures, the
facilities must discharge half their volume within 24-48 hours (unless advised
otherwise by a statutory body) of the storm event in readiness for any
subsequent storm inflow.
Calculating peak
rate of run-off
There are British Standards97 & 98 that contain guidance on calculating the
peak flow rate and determining the design flooding frequency. The assessor is
not required to perform any calculation as this should be provided by the
design team to demonstrate that they have sized the attenuation facilities to
store the relevant volume of storm water necessary to achieve the credit.
Discharge to the
sea or estuaries
If all run-off is discharged directly from the site to either the sea, the foreshore,
estuaries covered by a shoreline management plan or designated wildlife/SSSI
areas (as part of habitat management) then the credit can be awarded without
the need to specify additional attenuation measures.
More stringent
criteria
Where the local authority (or other statutory body) requires a greater
attenuation than the percentages above, and/or a more onerous design
flooding frequency than that recommended in BS EN752-4, then the higher
criteria must be met in order to achieve the credit.
Recommendations from an
appropriate
statutory body
None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has
proceeded against the recommendation of the statutory body on the basis that
the flooding implications are too great.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
302
Pol 5 Flood risk
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
First & Second Credit
1
A copy of a flood map or flood risk
assessment confirming:
• Flood zone or annual probability of
flooding in the site location.
Post Construction Stage
As design stage, no further evidence is
needed.
Where appropriate, correspondence from the
appropriate statutory body confirming:
• Reduced annual probability of flooding
due to existing flood defences.
2
A copy of the Flood Risk Assessment.
Formal written correspondence from the
design team confirming:
• The FRA has not changed or required
updating in the intervening period.
3
Site plans/sections confirming:
• The design flood level for the site
• The design ground level(s) for all
developed areas of the site.
• Safe access and escape routes
‘As built’ site plans/sections.
Additional SUDS Credit
1&2 Site plans and a copy of the specification or
consultants report confirming:
• Type and storage volume (l) of the water
run-off attenuation measures
• Total area of hard surfaces (m2)
• Peak flow rate (l/s) for the design storm
event
• Additional allowance for climate change
designed in to the system.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Installation of water run-off attenuation
measures
• No changes to the evidence provided at
the interim ‘design’ assessment stage.
A letter from the design team or main
contractor confirming:
• No changes to the specification.
Where changes have occurred, copies of asbuilt designs and calculations must be
provided.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Appropriate Consultant: a consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to the calculation of
surface water run-off and design SUDS and flood prevention measures. Where complex flooding
calculations and prevention measures are required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.
Appropriate statutory body: this refers to either the Environment Agency in England and Wales, the
Rivers Agency in Northern Ireland, the Scottish Environment Protection Agency in Scotland or the local
authorities and internal drainage boards.
Catchment: the area contributing surface water flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It can be
divided into sub-catchments.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 5 Flood risk
303
Design flood level: the maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design
flood level for a site can be determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific
site.
Design flood event: an historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against
which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are
designed.
Design storm event: historic or notional weather conditions of a given annual probability, against
which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are
designed.
Flood event: A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow
hydrograph.
Flood probability: The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being
exceeded in any specified time period. For example, a 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in
any given year.
Flood risk: the combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of
the flood event.
Flood risk assessment: a study to assess the risk of a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any
changes or development on the site will have on flood risk on the site and elsewhere. A Flood Risk
Assessment should be prepared according to good practice guidance as outlined in Development and
Flood Risk: A practice guide companion to PPS 25, available from www.communities.gov.uk.
Flood storage: The temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow in ponds, basins, reservoirs or on
the flood plain during a flood event.
Flood zone: see table below for definition of flood zones.
Greenfield: a site which has either never been built on, or one which has remained undisturbed for five
years or more.
Greenfield run-off rate: the rate of run-off that would occur from the site in its undeveloped and
therefore undisturbed state.
Hard surfaces: these include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery/service yards and
external hard landscaping. Footpaths less than 1.5m wide which have free drainage to soft landscaped
areas on both sides may be excluded.
ICoP (SUDS): the Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDS) aims to facilitate
the implementation of sustainable drainage in developments in England and Wales by providing model
maintenance agreements and advice on their use. It provides a set of agreements between those public
organisations with statutory or regulatory responsibilities relating to SUDS. Available to download from
www.ciria.org.uk/suds/icop.htm
Infiltration: the passage of water into a permeable surface, such as soil, permeable paving, soakaways
and so on.
Natural watercourses: any natural channel that conveys surface water.
Peak run-off rate (referred to as Qp [m³/sec]): this is the highest rate of flow from a defined catchment
area assuming that rainfall is uniformly distributed over the drainage area, considering the entire
drainage area as a single unit and estimation of flow at the most downstream point only.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
304
Pol 5 Flood risk
BREEAM Education 2008
Pre-development: the state of the site under assessment immediately prior to purchase of the site by
the client/developer (or, where the client has owned/occupied the site for a number of years, its current
state).
Run-off: this is usually rainwater, but can also be groundwater or overspill from sewers and other
sources.
Run-off rate: the rate of discharge of water from a surface.
Run-off attenuation measures: this covers the range of construction and equipment which can be
employed to attenuate run-off from hard surfaces and roofs. Measures include: underground storage,
oversized pipes, holding ponds, swales, reed beds, permeable paving, green roofs, local or centralised
soakaways etc.
Peak flow rate: the peak rate of discharge of water from hard surfaces. For the purpose of calculating
the peak flow rate volume, a 60 min duration of the design storm event should be used (unless a
different duration is required by a statutory body).
Sewerage undertaker: this is a water company with statutory responsibility for sewerage and
sewerage disposal and also surface water from roofs and yards of premises.
Shoreline Management Plan: SMPs provide a large-scale assessment of the risks associated with
coastal processes and present a policy framework to reduce these risks to people and the developed,
historic and natural environment in a sustainable manner.
SUDS - sustainable drainage systems or sustainable (urban) drainage systems: a sequence of
management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more sustainable
fashion than some conventional techniques. SUDS devices include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Holding ponds
Swales
Reed beds
Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to
function, e.g. block paved surface on permeable sub-base over gravel bed to store the water and
allow it to seep into the soil. For less permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the
water taken to a soakaway although this is not an option in some areas.
Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas
where local geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function.
Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system.
Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds,
swales etc.
Green roofs.
Surface Water Run-off: water flow over the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the
ground is impermeable, is saturated or if the rainfall is particularly intense.
Flood zones
Flood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each
country in the UK: PPS25 (England), TAN15 (Wales), SPP7 (Scotland), PPS15 (N. Ireland). Please
note, PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood maps
covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in NI will therefore need to rely on site-specific flood risk
assessments, or other relevant date/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific
development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for England (table below). The Northern
Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or recommendations in
this respect www.doeni.gov.uk/ and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk/
Whilst the definitions of flood zones and probabilities of flooding are generally the same
throughout the UK, there are some differences. The definitions are outlined in the table below.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 5 Flood risk
Table 24 Definition of flood zones by country
Definition
England
Wales
Scotland
Low annual
probability of
flooding
Zone 1
Less than 1 in 1000
chance of river and sea
flooding (<0.1%)
Zone A
Considered to be at little
or no risk
Zone B
If site levels are greater
than the flood levels
used to define adjacent
extreme flood outline.
Little or no risk area
As defined for England
Medium annual
probability of
flooding
Zone 2
Between 1 in 100 and 1
in 1000 chance of river
flooding (1% – 0.1%)
and between a 1 in 200
and 1 in 1000 chance of
sea flooding (0.5% –
0.1%).
Zone B
If site levels are not
greater than the flood
levels used to define
adjacent extreme flood
outline.
Zone C
Equal to or greater* than
0.1% (river, tidal or
coastal flooding).
Low to medium risk
area
Watercourse, tidal or
coastal flooding in the
range 0.1% – 0.5%
(1:1000 – 1:200).
High annual
probability of
flooding
Zone 3a High
Probability
1 in 100 or greater
chance of river
flooding(>1%) and a 1 in
200 or greater chance of
flooding from the sea
(>0.5%).
* For the purposes of
BREEAM assume upper
probability of flooding no
greater than that
specified for England.
Zone C1 & C2
* For the purposes of
BREEAM assume the
same lower and upper
probability of flooding as
that specified for
England.
305
Medium to high risk
areas
Annual probability of
watercourse, tidal or
coastal flooding: greater
than 0.5% (1:200)
Zone 3b The
Functional Floodplain
Land where water has
to flow or be stored in
times of flood.
Flood defences
Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Building in areas
where flood defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of
flooding) is therefore preferable to those built in medium/high risk areas without defences. However, for
the purpose of this issue, it is still preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage development of
new flood defences in areas with a higher risk of flooding purely for the sake of new development.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
306
Pol 6 Minimising watercourse pollution
Issue ID
Pol 6
Issue Title
Minimising Watercourse Pollution
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce the potential for silt, heavy metals, chemicals or oil pollution to natural watercourses from
surface water run-off from buildings and hard surfaces.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. Specification of Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDs) or source control systems such as
permeable surfaces or infiltration trenches where run-off drains are in areas with a relatively low risk
source of watercourse pollution.
2. Specification of oil/petrol separators (or equivalent system) in surface water drainage systems,
where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil (see
Compliance Notes for a list of areas).
3. All water pollution prevention systems have been designed and detailed in accordance with the
recommendations of Pollution Prevention Guideline 399 and where applicable the SUDS manual100.
4. A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan of the site will be made available for the
building/site occupiers.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
Please refer to the compliance note below regarding ‘infill building on an
existing
existing site’.
buildings
Fit Out Only
The criteria apply to any existing or new facilities that fall within the scope of
the fit out works.
Areas that are a
source of
pollution
For the purpose of assessing this issue an area that presents a risk of
watercourse pollution includes vehicle manoeuvring areas, car parks, waste
disposal facilities, delivery and storage facilities or plant areas.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 6 Minimising watercourse pollution
307
Areas where oil
separators are
required
The following site areas (where present) require oil separators in surface water
drainage systems:
• Car parks larger than 800m2 or with 50 or more parking spaces
• Smaller car parks discharging to a sensitive environment
• Areas where goods vehicles are parked or manoeuvred
• Vehicle maintenance areas
• Roads
• Industrial sites where oil is stored or used
• Refuelling facilities
SUDS and oil
interception
In some instances, where the risk of contamination is infrequent and potential
spills will be small, oil interceptors may not be required if appropriately
designed Sustainable Urban Drainage systems are specified. Refer to PPG3
for additional guidance.
Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site, i.e. infill
development, the criteria apply to areas within the construction zone that
present a risk of pollution, as well as any areas external to the construction
zone that are affected by the new works i.e. drainage onto or from the
proposed development.
Infill building on
existing site
Suitable level of
treatment
In all cases the assessor should determine the operational use of the site in
order to determine if the proposed surface water run-off strategy is suitable.
Rainwater run-off
This issue is not intended to cover the treatment of rainwater run-off except
where there is a risk of significant pollution arising.
Where it can be demonstrated that there will be no drainage or wash down
facilities that may lead water from inside the underground or covered area
to natural watercourses, then such areas comply with the assessment criteria
by default.
Underground/
covered areas
Roof plant
Roof top plant space must be considered where there is a risk from
substances such as petrol or oil. Refrigerants are not assessed under this
issue, as the only risk of pollution is to air and not the watercourse.
No areas at risk
from pollution
Where it can be demonstrated that there are no external areas that present a
pollution risk, e.g. parking, delivery, manoeuvring or servicing facilities
(including individual parking spaces), external waste storage space or other
hard standing areas AND there is no plant supported on the roof, then this
credit can be awarded by default.
Permeable
paving system
Where it can be demonstrated that a permeable paving system designed to
retain silts and degrade oils has been used, then this will meet the assessment
criteria of this issue for car parks and access roads.
Drainage plan
A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan of the site, which accurately
identifies all drains, must be produced and handed over to the new occupier. If
there is no in-house expertise to do this, a reputable drainage company should
be used.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
308
Pol 6 Minimising watercourse pollution
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
1&2
Design Stage
Marked-up proposed site plan highlighting:
• Low and high risk areas of the site.
Post Construction Stage
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Installation of pollution control system(s).
A copy of the specification or design plan
confirming:
• Type of pollution control systems
specified.
3&4
A letter from the design team confirming:
• All water pollution prevention systems
designed in accordance with PPG3 and
the SUDS manual (where appropriate)
• Outlining indicative examples of
compliance with PPG3 and the SUDS
manual
• A copy of the drainage plan will be
produced and handed over to the
building occupier.
A letter from the design team or main
contractor confirming:
• Installation of systems in accordance
with compliant design.
• No changes to the evidence provided at
the interim ‘design’ stage assessment.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Existence of the drainage plan in the
building’s O&M manual/file.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Appropriate statutory body: This refers to either the Environment Agency in England & Wales, the
Environment and Heritage Service (EHS) in Northern Ireland or the Scottish Environment Protection
Agency in Scotland.
Low risk areas: Low risk areas can be defined as areas where the risk of contamination or spillage of
substances such as petrol and oil is reduced. For the purpose of this credit, roofs and small car parks
may be considered as low risk areas.
Soakaways: A sub-surface structure designed to promote the infiltration of surface water in to the
ground. As a general point, soakaways may be shallow and broad – as in a blanket under permeable
paving, or deeper structures. Deeper, point source soakaways should be avoided for road and car-park
drainage, but shallow structures providing infiltration in an extensive way (infiltration trenches and
permeable paving) do not need oil separators. See Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 3 “Use and
design of oil separators in surface water
drainage systems”, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment & Heritage Service, 2006 for further
guidance.
Types of Oil Separator
•
Class 1 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 5mg/l oil under
standard test conditions. They should be used when the separator is required to remove very small
oil droplets, such as those arising from car park run-off.
•
Class 2 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 100mg/l oil under
standard test conditions. They are suitable for dealing with discharges where a lower quality
requirement applies and/or for trapping large spillages.
Both classes can be produced as ‘full retention’ or ‘by pass’ separators:
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 6 Minimising watercourse pollution
309
•
Full retention separators treat the flow that can be delivered by the drainage system, which is
normally equivalent to the flow generated by a rainfall intensity of 50mm/hr.
•
Bypass separators fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5mm/hr. Flows above
this rate are allowed to bypass the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable
risk not to provide full treatment for high flows.
Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 contains more detailed guidance on the selection and sizing of an
appropriate type of separator.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
310
Pol 7 Reduction of Night Time Light Pollution
Issue ID
Pol 7
Issue Title
Reduction of Night Time Light Pollution
BREEAM Education 2008
No. of credits
available
1
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in the appropriate areas and that upward lighting is
minimised, reducing unnecessary light pollution, energy consumption and nuisance to neighbouring
properties.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. The external lighting strategy has been designed in compliance with Table 1 (and its accompanying
notes) of the ILE Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, 2005101, (see Additional
Information below - Buildings located in Scotland must also refer to the Compliance Notes below for
additional criteria).
2. All external lighting (except for safety and security lighting) can be automatically switched off
between 2300hrs and 0700hrs. This can be achieved by providing a timer for all external lighting
set to the appropriate hours.
3. If safety or security lighting is provided and will be used between 2300hrs and 0700hrs, this part of
the lighting system complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours in
Table 1 of the ILE’s Guidance notes, for example by using an automatic switch to reduce the
lighting levels at 2300 or earlier.
4. Illuminated advertisements, where specified, must be designed in compliance with ILE Technical
Report 5 – The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements102.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
For refurbishment projects, in addition to any new external lighting specified,
any existing lighting that will remain post development must be assessed
against the criteria of this issue.
Extensions to
existing
buildings
If the scope of the assessment covers the new extension only, then it is only
new lighting specified as part of that extended works that must be assessed
against the criteria for this issue. If the new and existing building is being
assessed as one, then the rule for refurbishments (above) applies to the
existing building.
Fit Out Only
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit out-only assessments.
Entire new
development
Where the assessment is of an entire new development, the criteria apply sitewide.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 7 Reduction of Night Time Light Pollution
311
Individual
building on
existing site
Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site then only
those areas affected by the works i.e. within the construction zone, must be
assessed.
No external
lighting
If there is no external lighting on or around the assessed development the
credit can be awarded by default.
Buildings located
in Scotland
In addition to the criteria above, buildings located in Scotland must comply with
the light pollution criteria in the guidance note ‘Controlling Light Pollution and
Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption’103. This can be demonstrated via
completion of the checklists in Annexes B and C of this document by a
relevant member of the design team.
Flush stud lights used for safety purposes in vehicle manoeuvring areas may
be excluded from the assessment.
Safety lights
Floodlighting,
signage lighting
Essential lighting
between 2300
and 0700
Specific security
criteria
The guidance notes recommend the setting of a curfew, during which all nonessential external lighting is switched off. This will normally include
floodlighting, signage and all lighting that is not required for safety or security.
Where essential lighting is provided between 2300 and 0700, i.e. for 24-hour
operating buildings, the system is able to automatically switch to the lower
levels of lighting recommended in the ILE Guidance notes for lighting during
these hours (or provide these lower levels at all times).
Any light fittings in the areas outlined above that are specified to comply with
specific security criteria/standards, and where those criteria and the BREEAM
assessment criteria are not complementary, can be excluded from the
assessment of this issue. In these circumstances the assessor must obtain
evidence confirming that such criteria are applicable to the assessed
development.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1-4
A marked-up copy of the site plan showing:
• Areas of the building and site that will
be externally lit
• Any nearby properties.
Assessor’s building/site inspection and
photographic evidence confirming:
• Cut-off luminaires, if provided, have
been angled to limit spill light to
potentially obtrusive directions.
• External lighting controls
A copy of the specification clause requiring,
or external lighting design confirming:
• The external lighting design in
compliance with Table 1 of the ILE
Guidance notes
• Controls for all external lighting.
• Illuminated advertisements designed in
compliance with ILE Technical Report 5
(if relevant).
A letter from the design team or main
contractor confirming:
• Installation of systems in accordance
with compliant design.
• No changes to the evidence provided at
the interim ‘design’ stage assessment.
In the case of the external lighting design,
the M&E engineer or lighting designer must
provided indicative examples of where and
how the strategy complies with the
assessment criteria.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
312
Pol 7 Reduction of Night Time Light Pollution
BREEAM Education 2008
Construction zone: For the purpose of this credit the construction zone is defined as the site which is
being developed for the BREEAM assessed building and its external site areas i.e. the scope of the
new works.
The ILE Guidance notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light, 2005 are available free of charge from
the ILE website www.ile.org.uk.
Table 1 of ILE guidance
Table 1 of the ILE guidance and its accompanying notes outlines four sets of recommendations:
1. Limits to the average upward light ratio of the luminaires, to restrict sky glow.
2. Limiting illuminance at the windows of nearby properties for which light trespass might be an issue.
3. Limiting the intensity of each light source in potentially obtrusive directions beyond the site
boundaries.
4. Limiting the average luminance of the building, if it is floodlit.
In each case the limiting values depend on the location of the site of the building (for example rural,
urban or city centre). A calculation of illuminance (b) or intensity (c) is not required if all luminaires are
cut-off types and angled so that light in potentially obtrusive directions is blocked.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID
Pol 8
Issue Title
Noise Attenuation
Pol 8 Noise attenuation
No. of credits
available
1
313
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To reduce the likelihood of noise from the new development affecting nearby noise-sensitive buildings.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
1. There are, or will be, existing noise-sensitive areas or buildings within 800m radius of the assessed
development.
Where there are or will be no noise-sensitive areas or buildings in the locality of the assessed
development, the credit can be awarded by default.
2. A noise impact assessment in compliance with BS 4142:1997104 has been carried out and the
following noise levels measured/determined:
a. Existing background noise levels at the nearest or most exposed noise-sensitive
development to the proposed development; or at a location where background conditions
can be argued to be similar.
b. The rating noise level resulting from the proposed noise-source. This can be based upon
reference to similar installations or sites, or determined by calculation.
The noise impact assessment must be carried out by a suitably qualified acoustic consultant
holding a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body
(see relevant definitions in the additional guidance section).
3. Where the rating level of the noise source(s) from the site/building is equivalent to or less than the
background noise level, the credit can be awarded.
4. Where the rating level of the noise source(s) from the site/building is greater than the background
noise level, measures have been installed to attenuate the noise at its source to a level where it will
comply with requirement 3.
Compliance Notes
New Build
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new build projects.
Refurbishment
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
Extensions to
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
existing
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
buildings
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
314
Pol 8 Noise attenuation
Fit Out Only
Part of a larger
mixed-use
development
Assessed
building is
defined as noise
sensitive
Scope of the
noise impact
assessment
Standard not
appropriate / not
applicable
BREEAM Education 2008
The criteria for fit out assessment are the same as those outlined above,
subject to the following:
1. If the fit out includes the replacement of building servicing plant or changes
to site layout/access that are likely to result in the creation of a specific
noise that will raise the ambient noise level, then an assessment must be
carried out.
2. The credit can be awarded where it can be demonstrated that the creation
of a specific noise is unlikely to raise the ambient noise above the existing
background level. This may be the case where the BREEAM-assessed
unit forms part of a larger development and as a result, specific
attenuation measures specified for the building/unit would have little or no
effect on the overall ambient noise level.
3. If the fit out results in no new specific noise source then the credit can be
awarded.
If the development forms part of a larger mixed-use development, where noise
sensitive buildings exist or will be developed, then the noise assessment must
be carried out to ensure noise from the assessed building will not create a
future problem.
If the assessed building is itself defined as a noise sensitive building then a
noise impact assessment must be carried out regardless of the assessed
buildings locality to other noise sensitive areas or buildings.
For the purposes of BREEAM the noise impact assessment relates only to
building services plant; additional process-related noise does not have to be
considered. Stand-by generating plant should also not be included.
Where a suitably qualified acoustician confirms that BS4142:1997 is not an
appropriate standard of assessment for the proposed building/site, their
assessment of the likelihood of complaint from noise impact can be accepted
for the purpose of assessing this issue.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
1
Site plan highlighting:
• All existing and proposed noise-sensitive
buildings local to, and within, the site
boundary
• Proposed sources of noise from the new
development
• Distance (m) from these buildings to the
assessed development.
Assessor’s building/site inspection report and
photographic evidence confirming:
• All noise-sensitive buildings local to, and
within, the site boundary
• Proposed noise sources within the
development
• Distances (m) from these buildings to the
assessed development.
A copy of the acoustician’s report.
A copy of the acoustician’s report with
measurements based on installed and
operating plant.
2&3
The
acoustician’s
professional status.
qualifications
and
OR
A copy of the specification clause requiring:
• A noise assessment in compliance with
BS 4142:1997 by a suitably qualified
acoustician.
OR
A formal letter from the client or design team
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
4
confirming that they will appoint an
acoustician to carry out a noise assessment
in compliance with BS 4142:1997
Acoustician’s report with recommendations
for noise attenuation measures.
AND
A marked-up design plan highlighting the
specification of the acoustician’s attenuation
measures
OR
Pol 8 Noise attenuation
315
Assessor’s building/site inspection report and
photographic evidence confirming:
• The existence of the specified noise
attenuation measures.
OR
A formal letter from the acoustician
confirming that all specified attenuation
measures have been installed to the required
standard.
A formal letter from the client or design team
confirming that:
• If relevant, attenuation measures
recommended by an appointed suitably
qualified acoustician will be installed.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Suitably qualified acoustician: an individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and
membership of an appropriate professional body. The primary professional body for acoustics in the UK
is the Institute of Acoustics. Acousticians that meet the definition of a suitably qualified acoustician in
Hea 13, will also meet the definition for the purposes of compliance with this issue.
Noise sensitive area: landscapes or buildings where the occupiers are likely to be sensitive to noise
created by the new plant installed in the assessed building, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Residential areas
Hospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor’s surgeries etc.
Schools, colleges and other teaching establishments.
Libraries
Places of worship
Wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardens.
Located in an area of Outstanding natural beauty or near a Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI).
Any other development that can be considered noise sensitive.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
316
Inn 1 Innovation
BREEAM Education 2008
13.0 Innovation
Issue ID
Issue Title
Inn 1
Innovation
No. of credits
available
10
Minimum
standards
No
Aim
To provide additional recognition for a procurement strategy, design feature, management process or
technological development that innovates in the field of sustainability, above and beyond the level that
is currently recognised and rewarded within standard BREEAM issues.
Assessment Criteria
The following demonstrates compliance:
A maximum of 10 credits are available in aggregate from any combination of the following:
Up to 10 credits are available by meeting Exemplary Performance for existing BREEAM issues
1. Exemplary performance is demonstrated by meeting Exemplary Performance criteria for existing
BREEAM Issues. Please refer to the table below for a list of BREEAM issues with defined
exemplary performance criteria (this is also found in section 3.0 of the manual, Scoring and
Weighting). For the specific Assessment Criteria please refer to the section of the technical
guidance containing the relevant BREEAM issue.
Table 25 BREEAM issues with exemplary level criteria
Man 2 - Considerate Constructors
Hea 1 - Daylighting
Hea 14 - Office Space (BREEAM Retail & Industrial Schemes only)
Ene 1 - Reduction of CO2 emissions
Ene 5 - Low or Zero Carbon Technologies
Wat 2 -Water Meter
Mat 1 - Materials Specification
Mat 5 - Responsible Sourcing of Materials
Wst 1 - Construction Site Waste Management
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Inn 1 Innovation
317
Up to two credits are available for the Comprehensive use of a BREEAM Accredited
Professional (AP) throughout project work stages
First credit
1. BREEAM performance objectives are agreed, (and must be achieved at final certification – see
Compliance Notes below) no later than the end of the design brief stage (e.g. RIBA Stage B or
equivalent procurement stage).
2. The appointed BREEAM Accredited Professional is given the opportunity to attend key design team
meetings (see Compliance Notes below) held from the start of RIBA Stage B (Design Brief) up to
and including Stage E (Technical Design) or equivalent, and is to be included on the circulation list
for minutes from all meetings.
3. A Design stage assessment report is submitted to BRE Global for interim certification.
Second credit
4. The first credit is achieved.
5. The project is reviewed against BREEAM performance objectives by the appointed BREEAM
Accredited Professional no later than the end of the Pre-Construction stage (e.g. RIBA Stage H
(Tender Action) or equivalent procurement stage).
6. The appointed BREEAM Accredited Professional is given the opportunity to attend key design team
meetings held from the start of RIBA Stage F (Production Information) up to and including Stage K
(Construction to Practical Completion) or equivalent, and is to be included on the circulation list for
minutes from all meetings.
7. A Post Construction stage assessment report is submitted to BRE Global for final certification.
Additional credits are available for Approved Innovations not currently recognised by an
existing BREEAM issue
1. An application is made to, and approved by the BREEAM office using the Innovation Application
Form (downloaded from the Assessor Extranet).
2. The Assessor confirms compliance with the criteria set out within the Innovation Application Form.
Compliance Notes
New Build
Refurbishment
Extensions to
existing buildings
Shell Only
Fit Out only
Credit limit for
Innovation
section
Key design team
meetings
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
new-build projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
refurbishment projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
the assessment of extensions to existing buildings.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
shell only projects.
There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to
fit-out only projects.
A maximum of ten credits may be sought in the Innovation section (e.g 3
credits for Exemplary performance / 2 credits for the use of a BREEAM
Accredited Professional / 5 credits for the use of an Approved Innovation )
Key design team meetings can be classed as all site and office meetings
between representatives from at least three of the following parties:
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
318
Inn 1 Innovation
BREEAM Education 2008
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BREEAM
performance
objectives
Representatives of the Client / Developer
The Main Contractor
The Architect
Structural Engineers
Building Services Engineers
Cost Consultants
Environmental Consultants
Project Management Consultants
Team meetings must be related to the building under assessment.
If, at Post Construction, the BREEAM performance objectives (the target
rating) set at the end of the Concept Stage have not been achieved, the
credits awarded, at the interim ‘design’ certification stage, for appointing the
BREEAM Accredited Professional must be withheld in the final certification
report.
Schedule of Evidence Required
Req.
Design Stage
Post Construction Stage
Exemplary Performance against existing BREEAM criteria
1
As defined within existing BREEAM Issues
As defined within existing BREEAM Issues
Use of a BREEAM Accredited Professional
1, 2,
4&6
A copy of a letter confirming the
appointment of a BREEAM AP no later than
completion of RIBA Stage B (Design Brief)
or equivalent. This must confirm that the
BREEAM AP will be invited to all key design
team meetings.
As Design stage, but with documentary
evidence confirming that the BREEAM AP
was given the opportunity to attend all key
design team meetings between the dates
corresponding to the start of RIBA Stage F
and finish of Stage K, or equivalent.
AND
A completed Pre-Assessment
Estimator/Report signed and dated by the
BREEAM AP to correspond with no later
than RIBA Stage B
AND
A copy of the project programme indicating
the dates by which the key work stages
(Preparation and Design) are to be
completed.
AND
5
Documentary evidence in the form of
meeting notes/minutes, recorded
correspondence or schedules that can
demonstrate BREEAM issues are a regular
agenda item.
An updated interim report (this does not
need to be formally submitted to BRE
Global but must be used as evidence).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
As Design stage.
BREEAM Education 2008
3&7
The Interim Design stage assessment
report.
Inn 1 Innovation
319
The Post Construction stage assessment
report.
In the case of req. 7, a commitment from the
client to complete (to final certification) the
BREEAM Assessment process. This can
take the form of confirmation from the
assessor that they have been appointed by
the client to complete the BREEAM
assessment to final certification.
Use of an Approved Innovation not covered by existing BREEAM criteria
1&2
A copy of the relevant Innovation
Application Form and BRE Global report
confirming approval of the innovation.
As Design stage
AND
Documentation confirming that the project
has achieved the Approved Innovation as
described and quantified within the
approved Innovation Application Form.
Relevant evidence demonstrating
compliance with the criteria defined in the
approved Innovation Application Form.
AND
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
BREEAM Accredited Professional: An individual qualified and accredited by BRE as a specialist in
built environment sustainability, environmental design and assessment. The role of the BREEAM AP is
to facilitate the project team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and negotiate the
trade-offs required to achieve a target BREEAM rating when the design is formally assessed. For a list
and contact details of BREEAM Accredited Professionals visit www.greenbooklive.com
Approved Innovation: Any technology, method or process that can be shown to improve the
sustainability performance of a building’s design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition,
and which is approved as innovative by BRE Global. See Innovation Application Form (available from
the Assessor Extranet) or scoring and weighting section (section 3) of this technical guide.
Procedure for reviewing applications for BREEAM Innovations and awarding BREEAM credits
for approved Innovations
Applications for approval of Innovations can only be made by Licensed BREEAM Assessors with
reference to a specific registered assessment. Applications will only be accepted when submitted on
the formal Innovation Application Form (downloaded from the Assessor Extranet).
A flat rate charge will be levied to cover the costs of administering and reviewing the application. Details
of this charge are set out in the BREEAM Certification and Licence Fee Sheet and are non refundable.
A separate application will be required for each proposed innovation credit.
The process for approving Innovations is as follows:
1. On receipt of an application form, the BREEAM office will carry out an administrative review to
ensure completeness. An acknowledgement will be sent by email giving a credit application
reference number which should be used in all correspondence. This acknowledgement will be
sent within 3 working days.
2. The application will be forwarded for peer review by one or more experts from the BRE Group
of companies and where/if appropriate individual(s) from a relevant external organisation. All
expert reviewers will be asked to declare any interest that they may have in the project
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
320
Inn 1 Innovation
BREEAM Education 2008
concerned and no confidential information concerning the applicant or application will be
communicated to an external organisation.
3. The expert will independently review the submission against the criteria outlined in the Eligibility
criteria in the Scoring and Weightings section. The review will result in a recommendation for or
against approval, together with a justification for that decision. The expert will review the
application based on the descriptions and commitments made in the Innovation Application
Form and their knowledge/expertise of the subject matter.
4. The BREEAM office will prepare a report setting out a clear recommendation based on the
expert review.
5. BREEAM’s Technical Director will review the report and make a final decision on whether to
approve or not approve the Innovation.
6. The final decision will typically be communicated to the Assessor by email within 20 working
days from receipt of the initial application.
7. Finally, to achieve the credit for the approved Innovation the design team must demonstrate to
the BREEAM Assessor that the building meets the criteria defined in the application form. If the
design/project team are unable to provide the BREEAM Assessor with auditable evidence of
compliance, then the additional credit for the approved Innovation must be withheld.
Appeals against any decision can be made in accordance with BRE Global’s published appeals
procedures which are available on request. The decision made on any appeal is final. Appeals will be
subject to a flat rate charge per application; in the instance of a successful appeal, the appeal fee will
be refunded.
At final certification of the project, BRE Global will publish basic information on all approved Innovations
included within the Post Construction stage assessment. This will be done in a way that is sensitive to
applicant’s intellectual property and commercial rights, who will be given a chance to comment on, and
if necessary amend, entries before they are made public. BREEAM Assessors and Accredited
Professionals will have access to a list of previously approved or not approved Innovations published on
the Assessor Extranet. This list will be updated regularly.
Innovations are considered to be so until information on the Approved Innovation is published. In the
instance of similar Innovation being submitted concurrently by independent projects BREEAM
Assessors and clients can expect BRE Global to make a reasonable assessment of whether the later
submission can still be held as Innovative as described in credit criterion. BRE Global will not review, or
charge a BREEAM Assessor for an identical application that has previously been applied for and not
approved.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A1
321
14.0 Technical Checklists
14.1 Technical Checklist A1: Man 2 Considerate Constructors
For each of the eight sections (below) the Considerate Constructors Scheme awards a score on a
scale of 0 to 5 (with half points). The score achieved or required must be entered into boxes 1-8 below
i.e. EITHER 0; 0.5; 1; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 3.5; 4.0; 4.5; OR 5.0.
•
When a firm commitment is made to achieve certification under the Considerate Constructors
Scheme without reference to particular scores, a score of 3 should be entered in each of the boxes
1-8 below. This gives a total score of 24 in box 9 below and subsequently one credit can be
awarded.
• When a firm commitment is made to require the constructor to achieve certification AND a
score greater than 3 is required in one or more sections, the scores required should be added
in boxes 1 to 8 below and totalled accordingly.
Considerate Section
Score achieved
1
Environmentally Aware Section
Score achieved
2
Site Cleanliness Section
Score achieved
3
Good Neighbour Section
Score achieved
4
Respectful Section
Score achieved
5
Safe Section
Score achieved
6
Responsible Section
Score achieved
7
Accountable Section
Score achieved
8
(sum of 1-8)
9
TOTAL Considerate Constructors Score
Total CC score achieved is less than 24
Total CC score is between 24 to 31.5 incl.
Total CC score is between 32 and 35.5 incl.
Total CC score is greater than ≥36
0 credits
1 credit
2 credits
2 + Innovation credit
Assessor to award credits based on committed CCS Score and above table
Signed:
….........................................................................................................................
Name [PRINT]:
…............................................................................................
Date:
10
……………………………………………………………
Organisation:
…………………………………………………
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
322
Technical Checklist A2
BREEAM Education 2008
14.2 Technical Checklist A2: Man 2 Considerate Constructors
Compliance with an alternative to the Considerate Constructors Scheme
•
1 credit can be awarded where the assessment stakeholder confirms in writing that the alternative
scheme is to be independently assessed and the assessor confirms that the alternative scheme
addresses all the mandatory items plus 50% of the optional items in Checklist A2 (complete box 1).
•
2 credits can be awarded where the assessment stakeholder confirms in writing that the alternative
scheme is to be independently assessed and the assessor confirms that the alternative scheme
addresses all the mandatory items plus 80% of the optional items in Checklist A2 (complete box 2).
•
An additional innovation credit can be awarded where post construction, the site has complied in
full with the alternative, independently assessed scheme, and the alternative scheme addresses all
the mandatory and optional items in Checklist A2 (complete box 3).
POST CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
When certification can be demonstrated the actual items achieved in each section should be quoted.
Where the mandatory criteria + 50% of optional criteria are complied with/committed to
1
Score achieved: 1 credit
OR
Where the mandatory criteria + 80% of optional criteria are complied with/committed to
2
Score achieved: 2 credits
OR
Where post-construction ALL the mandatory and optional items are complied with.
Score achieved: Innovation credit (in addition to the two credits achieved for complying
with the standard BREEAM assessment criteria).
The assessor must ensure that the commitment is specific to the BREEAM
assessment criteria and not a general commitment to satisfy the above statements.
Total Credits for Alternative Independently Assessed Scheme
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
3
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A2
323
1) Considerate
Mandatory
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
a
Where introductory letters have been sent / are to be
sent to all the neighbours.
See copies of letters to be sent or sent with a list of the
addresses
b
Where there is provision for parking on site OR Buses
are provided from local transport nodes OR
The nearest transport links are within 500m and run
every 30 minutes OR An area offsite has been
designated for site parking.
See copies of parking plan, check local vicinity for
transport links.
c
Where there are ramps and signs, indicating footpaths
AND Where pathways are wide enough for wheelchair
access AND Where pedestrians who are mobility
impaired or who have sight/hearing difficulties can still
gain access around the site boundary.
View on site.
d
Where there are barriers and signposts indicating
footpaths around the site.
Where footpaths are clean
Where the passageways are safe and protected.
View on site.
e
Where all the road signs / names can be seen OR
Where a road sign /name is obstructed a replacement
has been erected.
Is there a temporary works plan highlighting these
items.
View on site.
P
Optional
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
e
Does the site have a traffic plan?
Request a copy of the plan.
f
Where site entrances / exits clearly marked AND
These are clear for lorry/delivery drivers and other
visitors to see.
View on site.
g
Where there is a clearly signed site reception AND.
Where appropriate, visitors are inducted into the site
AND Where visitors are escorted to the member of
staff they are visiting.
Check on arrival for the signs.
See copy of the induction procedure.
h
Where there are areas of high minority communities
and English is not the first language, notices are
printed in the common local language.
i
Where the site is near a school, community centre / or
other building and delivery times are outside peak
times.
j
Where the site manager is authorised to reimburse
minor financial complaints.
Where the parish registry has been checked to
establish the names of neighbours to personalise your
letters.
Where a map has been sent to suppliers indicating
where they should access the site by a particular route.
Where the post box has been placed on the pavement
to avoid the postman from entering the site.
Check the area, local shops and members of the
public, community centres for a minority culture
community.
Where this is present check for signs in the
communities language.
School peak times considered to be 8-9.30am and 35pm
Residential peak times 7-9am and 4-6pm.
Other shops / industries may have regular deliveries,
this should also be considered by the Contractor.
Ask the site manager what authorisation he needs to
reimburse financial complaints.
List of names and addresses to be viewed on site.
k
l
m
P
Check a copy of the map sent to all suppliers with
accompanying letter.
View on site.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
324
Technical Checklist A2
BREEAM Education 2008
2) Environmentally Aware
Mandatory
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
a
Where site hours and noisy work restrictions are
appropriate to the area.
Consider particularly areas near;
-Houses
-Schools
- Hospitals
-Industrial Units
-Public Transport Nodes
-City centres
-Shopping facilities
Copy of statement of intent, policy, agreement etc to be
provided.
b
Where the Contractor has made provisions to reduce
the noise.
Are reasonable sound restrictions in force e.g.
whispering generators, straw bales, sound barriers etc
Has the Contractor demonstrated that noise/plant have
been considered and measures implemented to reduce
the disturbance?
c
Where there is a written commitment from the
Contractor to protect any sensitive ecological features
such as plants and trees. AND This is demonstrated
onsite.
NOTE: Plants cannot be removed and replanted as
part of this work.
Written commitment to be provided, along with a copy
of “before and after” drawings.
The commitment should include how the features will
be protected and how the protection measures were
determined.
Temporary works procedures to include the
appropriate protective measures.
View on site.
d
Where the site boundary is clearly and safely marked
and appropriate to the environment. AND
Where the colour of the hoarding has been considered
in terms of the surrounding environment.
Ask site manager if any thought was given to the
hoarding and the location of the site.
Is the hoarding clearly /safely marked, clean, neat and
well maintained?
e
Where protected wild life issues in the local area have
been addressed by the company.
Speak to the site manager about the local wildlife
issues and how the site are addressing them and how
they are monitored
See evidence of drawings or specification clauses that
back up the claims.
f
Where the site has an environmental policy AND
The site manager can relate the environmental policy
to the procedures on his site AND
The site staff are aware of the environmental policy
and how it relates to their work
Request a copy of the policy.
Ask the site manager what the policy includes and how
this relates to the site.
Ask members of staff at different levels how the policy
relates to work at their level.
g
Where there is a procedure and adequate equipment
for protecting watercourses from site pollution (i.e. oils,
paints and chemicals).
Bunds, absorbent material to soak up any spillages,
must be present at risk areas on site.
If there is a site specific environmental policy which
commits to preventing water pollution and describes
how this is to be on the site this point can be awarded.
h
Where fuel oil spillage equipment is available.
View on site.
Ensure the spillage equipment is located where
spillages may occur to ensure a rapid response time.
i
Have local suppliers and materials, and also recycled
materials been considered?
If a list of recycled/local suppliers and materials has
been produced the point can be awarded..
j
Where there are restrictions on the effects of light
pollution and all lights are directional and non-polluting
View on site. If there is a site specific environmental
policy which sets restrictions on lighting, this point can
be awarded.
k
Where the site is segregating, recycling or re-using
waste (including canteen and office waste).
This can be viewed on site.
A company wide policy promising to segregate, recycle
and re-use waste will NOT satisfy this credit.
If there is a site specific environmental policy which
commits to segregating, recycling and re-using waste
then the inspector can award this point.
l
Where the site has a system to monitor the amount of
material waste produced, and provides feedback as to
how much is recycled.
This can either be viewed on site.
If there is a site specific environmental policy which
commits to monitoring site waste and providing
feedback on recycling, indicating how this is to be
carried out, then this point can be awarded.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
P
BREEAM Education 2008
Ref
m
Technical Checklist A2
Compliance
Guidance
Where energy saving measures implemented on site.
325
P
Examples of this include:
•
•
•
•
•
low energy lighting
switching off equipment when not in use,
Installing thermostats
Installing timers,
choosing energy efficient equipment
n
Are the carbon emissions from the site activities
monitored?
Where a site specific environmental policy monitors the
carbon emissions of site activities the point can be
awarded.
o
Where areas with dust problems are enclosed, or
alternative methods of mitigating dust have been
provided.
Check how dust mitigation has been considered with
the Site Manager; check that this will be effective.
p
Where sumps are provided in cases of heavy water run
off.
View on site.
If there is a site specific environmental policy which
indicates how heavy water run off will be minimised
and dealt with on site, this point can be awarded.
q
Where a site with severe congestion has a delivery
point remote from a site.
Deliveries from the remote site can then be made in
smaller vehicles at times to cause the least
inconvenience.
View procedures on site.
Where a site specific environmental policy addresses
the problem of deliveries to a severely congested site,
then the point can be awarded.
r
Where permission has been obtained to use a fire
hydrant or fire brigade to damp down.
Written permission to be provided.
s
Where an impact minimisation strategy review is in
place for the site.
The review should consider the impact of the site in
environmental terms and how any adverse effects are
being minimised.
t
Where there is adequate space for new materials to be
stored in secured covered areas to avoid damage, theft
and to protect from weather.
View on site.
Ensure that where space has been provided, it is being
used correctly.
u
Where visible stacked materials are sheeted out.
View on site.
3) Clean
Mandatory
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
a
Where all accesses to the site are clean, mud free and
safe.
View on site.
Where a site specific policy indicates measure that will
be implemented to maintain clean, mud free, safe
accesses, then this point can be awarded.
b
Where the roads adjacent to the site that are used by
site vehicles are swept.
Evidence in the form of a contract with a road
sweeping company.
View on site.
c
Where there is an area specified within the site
boundary for the storage of materials and plant.
The area must be clean and dry where necessary, and
the space should be sufficient for the materials / plant
stored.
For the material storage part, this could be replaced on
congested sites by a ”just in time” delivery policy
View on site.
d
Where there are dust prevention measures present.
Where there is a regular damping down of the roads
during the hot weather AND
Where dust sheets are provided where areas are being
demolished.
OR
Where any other measures can be demonstrated to
meet this point.
e
Where materials and equipment are tidily stacked and
protected / covered where necessary.
View on site.
f
Where areas around the canteen, offices and skips are
tidy and clean AND
View on site.
Check all the areas ensure screening is in place where
P
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
326
Technical Checklist A2
Ref
BREEAM Education 2008
Compliance
Guidance
Areas are screened where necessary.
necessary.
g
Where covered rubbish bins are available.
View on site.
The inspector should ensure that where bins are
provided they are spaced at intervals which will
facilitate staff using them
h
Where a free car cleaning service is offered, where dirt
or dust is a problem.
View on site.
Check procedures, notice boards, with staff to see if
this is in operation.
i
Where the wind direction is checked and the work
pattern is varied to suit, if dust is a problem.
View whether dust is a problem on site, this should be
checked in the driest season.
If dust is a problem then ask the site manager how
work is varied depending on the wind direction.
j
Where a hard road is provided into the site to reduce
mud problems.
View on site.
k
Where site welfare facilities well maintained and clean?
View on site.
l
Where areas around the site cleaned, including the
collection of rubbish not related to site?
View on site.
m
Where measures in place to deal with graffiti?
View on site.
P
4) Good Neighbour
Mandatory
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
a
Where there is a single line entry complaints book.
Copy of the book to be provided or seen AND the
book should be kept in an easily accessible place.
b
Are complaints responded to immediately and dealt
with correctly.
Look through the complaints book and check the
responses.
Ensure all complaints were dealt with and responded to
in a polite, considerate and timely manner.
c
Where there is light shielded from the neighbours.
Copy of the temporary works including lighting to be
provided. These must either indicate light shielding or
the site manager must demonstrate how the light
shielding works or is not applicable.
P
Optional
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
d
Where there are viewing boards in the hoardings
AND
They give a good impression.
Ask the site manger to explain why the views in the
hoardings were chosen and how they best represent
the site.
Check that the areas that can be seen are tidy and
clean.
e
Where an arrangement is in place for a neighbour to
act as a representative for a group.
Request to see a letter of confirmation that one local
will act as a representative of the community or group.
f
Where reasonable steps have been taken to ensure a
minimum of false alarms.
For example
•
24 hour security. Speak to the security guard.
Ensure that the security guard know how to deal
with alarms procedures both real and false. Check
that this information is transferred to new staff.
•
Alarms are linked to a central office open 24hours
which responds immediately.
•
Other measures to minimise false alarms can be
considered on their merits and how appropriate
they are to site criteria.
g
Where the site and its surroundings are seen by the
public as tidy AND
Where the site and its surroundings are seen by the
public as clean.
Ensure that there are no complaints about the site
being untidy or dirty or that if there were this was
quickly rectified and not repeated.
Check on site that the views in the hoardings show a
clean and tidy site.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
P
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A2
h
Where there is a congested site, and there is a
compound away from the site used for plant/ material
storage.
Only applicable if the site is congested. Speak to the
site manager about this extra storage and visit extra
compound.
i
Where local people are informed of site progress by
the use of a notice board.
View on site.
j
Where there are rewards for a neighbour’s help.
View procedures or examples of what Is being done on
site
k
Where there is a model of the project to better show
neighbours the exact implications of the project.
Where a model has been built and had been shown at
local residents meetings OR
Where there is a commitment to build a model for this
purpose.
l
Where there is a procedure for a member of staff to
check the view in the viewing apertures at regular
intervals.
Where there is a written procedure or commitment to
regularly check the viewing apertures, or where the
viewing apertures are to be changed at different stages
of the project to ensure the best view is provided.
During site visits, check the viewing apertures and
ensure the view is safe, tidy, clean and inoffensive.
m
Where there is a commitment to write and thank
neighbours at the end of the contract for their
forbearance.
A copy of this commitment should be provided or a
copy of a standard letter that is always sent at the end
of a project.
n
Where, on completion of the project, the neighbours
who have been affected by the work are given a
feedback form, to indicate their concerns and mark the
Contractors performance These results should then be
used to improve your performance next time.
Where a copy of feedback form for neighbours can be
provided.
AND;
Where there is a commitment to send these forms to
affected neighbours.
AND;
Where there are procedures in place to monitor the
results and implement changes for future work.
o
Where extra sets of posters are prominently displayed
illustrating how the site is being a good neighbour.
View on site.
p
Where appropriate get involved with local community
charities and initiatives.
Where there is evidence of such events having already
occurred or where there are future arrangements or a
commitment to do so.
q
Where measures are in place to reduce negative
displacement (e.g. pigeons).
View on site.
327
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
328
Technical Checklist A2
BREEAM Education 2008
5) Respectful
Mandatory
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
a
Where there is a dress code specified in the
induction.
Check the induction content for items related to dress code.
N.B. This does not relate to PPE, this is to prevent “builders
bum” syndrome
b
Where there is an enforcement procedure i.e.
someone does check that operatives are dressed
considerately,
Check the induction content for these details.
Ask how operatives who are not dressed “appropriately” are
dealt with? Is the procedure rigorous
Check the complaints book for any items on this issue and
see how quickly they were dealt with.
c
Where inappropriate behaviour is dealt with in site
policy.
Where this is highlighted in the site induction.
Copy of the policy to be provided.
Check the induction content for these details.
Ask the site manager what the enforcement procedures are
and how they are carried out.
Check the complaints book for any items on this issue and
see how quickly they were dealt with.
Where there is a no offensive calendar policy.
Check how this policy is implemented.
AND;
d
P
Optional
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
d
Does the site have female toilets.
Does the site have disabled toilets.
View on site.
e
Where operatives are prevented from having their
breaks in view of the public.
Examples of how this might be achieved include:
•
A site canteen
•
A common room available for operatives to eat in.
View on site.
f
Where toilets are screened from public view.
View on site
g
Where lockers are provided in the drying room.
View on site
h
Are working usable showers available and
suitable changing areas are available.
View on site.
i
Where site personnel are discouraged from using
local facilities in their site clothes.
Examples of how this might be achieved include :
A canteen.
Staggered breaks for different gangs.
Provision of showers / wash rooms.
Provision of lockers.
A request to leave PPE on site.
View on site.
Check procedures with the Site Manager.
j
Where there is a volume restriction on radio use
or there is a radio ban.
Check if restrictions/ban is in place and how it is enforced.
k
Where operatives are provided with suitable
clothing with the companies logo.
Check company policy to do this and check with operatives
on site that they have clothing with the company’s logo.
l
Provide operatives with a clip on ID card with
photo.
Check company policy and procedures for issuing clip on ID
cards.
Check if there is a mandatory requirement for operatives to
wear these when on site.
Check operatives in site are wearing them.
m
Where the site encourages only 1 person to visit
the local shop at any one time.
Examples of how this can be achieved include :
•
Where there are facilities on site to buy newspapers,
confectionary and snacks
•
Where breaks are staggered to prevent large groups of
operatives visiting local shops together.
•
One person is nominated to go to the local shop for the
team.
n
Is there sufficient action taken regarding
operatives’ exposure to the sun?
Check company policy and procedure and if it is being
implemented on site.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
P
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A2
329
6) Safe
Mandatory
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
a
Where there are well lit warning signs for the
benefit of the pedestrian and road user.
Check if the signs are indicated on the temporary works /
other plans OR if they are being implemented on site.
b
Where the temporary works are safe and are
erected only after they have been checked by an
experienced engineer.
See copy of the temporary works checking procedure,
check the responsible engineer has the relevant
qualifications.
Check that the temporary works are checked by a visual or
physical inspection on a regular basis.
Carry out a site inspection.
c
Are the temporary works near adjacent buildings
likely to produce a security risk.
Ask if a risk assessment was carried out when designing
the works and check if this was identified.
View on site.
d
Pedestrians have a suitable, safe and protected
passage around the site boundary.
View on site.
P
Optional
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
e
Is safe access to the site office provided by;
good lighting AND Adequate barriers AND Uniform
surfaces i.e. no trip hazards AND Being a
minimum of 1m wide.
View on site.
f
Where work has interrupted the pavement ensure
ramps are provided.
View on site.
g
Where the scaffolding is boxed in or taped where
likely to obstruct pedestrians.
View on site.
h
Where the hoarding or scaffold is properly lit
externally at night?
View on site.
i
Where scaffold netting is in place and well
maintained.
View on site.
j
Where emergency escape routes are well
identified?
View on site.
k
Are even the most minor accidents recorded.
Check first aid book for minor accidents. Minor considered
to be e.g. small cuts (plaster only necessary), dust in eyes.
l
Where others use the site and there is a regular
fire drill.
Check times of drill and visit a day the drill should be
carried out.
m
Where there is a procedure to report serious
incidents and near misses.
Copy of procedure to be provided. Procedure to cover
internal QA reporting format, and notifying HSE.
n
Where there is satisfactory out of hour’s security.
Examples of satisfactory out of hours security include:
•
Locked gates.
•
Night lighting.
•
24 hour on site security.
•
An alarm linked directly to a police station or 24 hour
(local) off site security.
•
The security guard has an emergency number and
knows who to call in an emergency.
o
Where non English speaking operatives are
tested during their induction, to ensure that their
levels of reading, writing and speaking do not
pose a safety risk to those that they work with.
This needs to be robust enough to ensure that in a health
and safety risk environment, the operative would be
capable of warning others or contacting help.
p
Where temporary road crossings are in a suitable
safe place.
Check: Road crossings away from corners.
The design has been checked by a traffic expert.
There is a risk assessment for these areas, are the
remaining risks acceptable?
q
Where the site office is well sign posted and easily
accessible.
View on site.
r
Where safety helmets are positioned close to the
entrance to the site office.
View on site.
s
Where the visitors book is to be filled in on all
occasions.
View on site.
P
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
330
Technical Checklist A2
Ref
BREEAM Education 2008
Compliance
Guidance
y
Where safety and other criteria in connection with
deliveries are given to suppliers.
Check this information is given to suppliers;
AND
Check that this is enforced at every delivery, not just a one
off letter to the company at the beginning of the project.
u
Where there is a procedure for recording operative
concerns and near misses.
Check if this is in place and how it operates.
v
Where all site hazards are advertised at the site
entrance (s).
View on site.
Check that the list of site hazards is complete.
w
Where there is an initiative to provide incentives to
promote and improve safety on site.
Check this document and how it is disseminated.
x
There are clear fire points, an assembly station
and fire drills take place.
View on site and ask for written proof of a fire drill
procedure.
P
7 Responsible
Mandatory
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
a
Where the Environmental Officer has been
informed of your presence on site.
See a copy of the letter, informing the Environmental Officer
of the project, including start and finish construction dates.
b
Where there is well posted material indicating
nearest Police Station and Hospital (with A&E
facilities)
Are there posters indicating the nearest Police Office,
Hospital with A&E facilities in key areas e.g. site reception,
site canteen, main site office.
Spot check managers, operatives, reception staff to check
they know this information or at least where they would find
it. Check Induction talk.
P
Optional
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
c
Where a record of your immediate neighbours
names and telephone numbers are known.
A copy of this list should be provided.
d
Where all subcontractors first aiders are recorded
in a formal document and a copy of this record
provided.
Check for the formal document which has all subcontractors first aiders registered.
e
Where an in-house newsletter is distributed to the
neighbours.
Where a copy of this letter can be provided and evidence
that this has been distributed, e.g. accompanying letters,
recorded minutes etc.
f
Where a local person provides out of hours cover.
If there is 24 hour security this is automatically awarded.
Where there is no 24 hour security, but someone is
identified as living local to the site and can act quickly in the
event of an emergency on site.
g
Where the workforce hold CSCS (Construction
Skills Certification Scheme) cards.
Where the company has procedures in place to ensure that
the majority of their workers hold CSCS cards.
h
Where your company is recognised as having
either ISO 9001, 14001 or IIP status.
Evidence that this has been achieved must be provided.
i
Where operatives skills and medical conditions
are recorded.
Check records and /or procedures to demonstrate this.
j
Where there are the appropriate number of first
aiders and first aid equipment for the site.
The HSE produce guidance on the number of required first
aiders for a site.
A copy of the trained first aider list should be provided and
their qualifications, ensure that the qualifications are all still
valid (i.e. in the last 3 years).
Check that each first aider have a box with basic equipment
in.
Check that each first aider has access to more equipment is
necessary and that they know where this is.
k
Where local schools have been contacted and
asked to participate in visits, talks or competitions.
Evidence should be provided that this has or will be
occurring e.g. copies of press cuttings, letters etc.
If there are no schools within a 3km radius this is not
applicable.
l
Where the site has a static gate man, he is trained
in first aid.
Check with the static gate man that he is trained, see his
certificates and ensure they are current.
m
Where up to date information on site performance
View on site.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
P
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A2
is posted in public view.
Check this is up to date and ask how regularly this is
changed.
n
Where you have a web page link to demonstrate
your commitment to being a considerate
neighbour throughout the construction project.
The link must highlight what the scheme includes and it aim.
o
Where procedures are in place to enable the
employment of disabled operatives.
A copy of the procedure should be provided in order to
award the point.
331
8) Accountable
Mandatory
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
a
Where there are posters in a public space
displaying your local scheme for considerate
construction and the main bodies involved.
Posters must identify the client, consultant, architect, and
contractor.
Posters must be well distributed over the site, as well as in
the public eye.
b
The scheme is mentioned in the site induction.
Check documentation.
c
There has been a safety inspection and report,
and any points raised have been dealt with.
Check report and view on site.
P
Optional
Ref
Compliance
Guidance
d
Where an inspection has been carried out by
HSE.
Only applicable if HSE have carried out an inspection,
Where there are recommendations, there is a commitment
to implement them.
e
Where the company sign board is prominently
displayed with telephone number / Web Site /
Email address.
View on site.
f
Where the site personnel and sub-contractors are
familiarised with the local / national scheme at
induction or other.
Check if induction procedures cover this item and if not how
operatives are aware that they are involved in the scheme.
g
Where the Client is aware of the Scheme.
This can be demonstrated by a letter or endorsement etc.
h
Where frames and Perspex covers for posters
advertising this Scheme are provided.
View on site.
i
Where a suggestion box is provided for the
general public.
View on site.
This must be in a place accessible to the general public
AND well advertised.
i
Where all site signage and posters are illuminated
at night.
View on site.
j
Where a 24 hour hotline is provided and this is
displayed to the public.
View on site.
Check how this is manned and how phone calls, queries,
complaints are dealt with.
k
Where your operatives/subcontractors are given
points for infringement of your safety and
considerate standards. Record these on a card
held by the operative. X points and you’re out.
Check if this system is operating.
‘X’ must be decided by the company, however the aim is to
encourage operatives to work safely and considerately.
This point can also be awarded where there is an incentive
scheme for exemplar behaviour.
l
Training/toolbox talks are provided for site
operatives.
Ask for copies of a schedule of talks.
m
The site has a record of social/community
activities.
See documentation to check compliance.
P
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
332
Technical Checklist A3
BREEAM Education 2008
14.3 Technical Checklist A3: Man 3 Construction Site Impacts
1a. Monitor, report and set targets for CO2 production of energy use arising from site activities
Compliance requirement
Tick
Evidence/Reference
Monthly measurements of energy use will be/has been
recorded and displayed on site.
Appropriate target levels* of energy consumption will
be/were set and displayed (targets could be annual,
monthly, or project targets).
As a minimum, monitoring will/did include checking the
meters and displaying some form of graphical analysis
in the site office to show consumption over the project
duration and how actual consumption compares to the
targets set.
The design/site management team will/did nominate an
individual who will be responsible for the monitoring
and collection of data.
* Notes:
• Targets for energy consumption during the construction process should be set using Constructing
Excellence’ Environmental KPI benchmarks. These documents do not specify targets but facilitate
projects in setting appropriate targets.
www.constructingexcellence.org.uk/zones/kpizone/default.jsp.
• BREEAM does not require targets to be met but is encouraging the process of setting, monitoring
and reporting against targets.
1b. Monitor and report CO2 or energy arising from transport to and from the site
Compliance requirement
A site monitoring system will be/was in place to monitor
and record deliveries*. This system will/did record:
• The number of deliveries
• The mode of transport
• The km/miles travelled for all deliveries
If the design team or contractor confirms that the
project is aiming to achieve the ‘Construction Site
Transport, measures for traffic movements and
distances’10 then this aspect has been achieved
automatically. The information obtained for this item
can also be used to satisfy the Constructing
Excellence’ Environmental KPI on transport.
The design/site management team will/did nominate an
individual responsible for the monitoring and collection
of data.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Tick
Evidence/Reference
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A3
333
Notes:
• Where the delivery is specifically for the site, a figure of total distance travelled should be used, i.e.
a round trip (from the point of origin, to the site and back to the point of origin).
• Where the delivery to the site is part of a multiple delivery route, the recorded figure for distance
travelled should be the distance travelled to the site (from the previous delivery), plus the distance
to the next delivery or return.
• This information can then be used to estimate a total figure for kg of CO2 for the project. BREEAM
does not require this information to be converted to CO2 but the information must be made
available to the senior project and site management staff/suppliers to establish benchmarks and aid
future decision-making towards improving site and transport efficiency. If the project team wishes to
convert this information into CO2 emissions there are tables provided at the end of this checklist
which can be used to do this.
1c. Monitor, report and set targets for water consumption arising from site activities
Compliance requirement
Tick
Evidence/Reference
Monthly measurements of water consumption will
be/were recorded and displayed on site.
Appropriate target* levels of water consumption will
be/were set and displayed (targets could be annual,
monthly or project targets).
As a minimum, monitoring will/did include checking the
meters and displaying some form of graphical analysis
in the site office to show consumption over the project
duration and how actual consumption compares to
targets set.
The design/site management team will/did nominate an
individual responsible for the monitoring and collection
of data.
Notes:
• Targets for water consumption during the construction process should be set using Constructing
Excellence’ Environmental KPI benchmarks. These documents do not specify targets but facilitate
projects in setting appropriate targets.
www.constructingexcellence.org.uk/zones/kpizone/default.jsp.
• BREEAM does not require targets to be met but is encouraging the process of setting, monitoring
and reporting targets.
1d. Adopt best practice policies in respect of air (dust) pollution arising from site activities
Compliance requirement
Tick
Evidence/Reference
The site will/did adopt best practice procedures in
relation to minimising air/dust pollution. This should
include:
• ‘dust sheets’
• regular proposals to damp down the site in dry
weather
• covers to skips etc.
This information will be/was disseminated to site
operatives.
Notes:
• Further information can be obtained from BRE/EA publications ‘Control of Dust from Construction
10
11
and Demolition Activities’ and Pollution Control Guide Parts 1-5 provide good practice
guidelines on construction related pollution.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
334
Technical Checklist A3
BREEAM Education 2008
1e. Adopt best practice policies in respect of water (ground and surface) pollution occurring on
the site
Compliance requirement
Tick
Evidence/Reference
The site will/did adopt best practice procedures in
relation to minimising impact, as outlined in the
following documents.
PPG 1 - General guide to the prevention of pollution.
Environment Agency
PPG 5 - Works in, near or liable to affect watercourses.
Environment Agency
PPG 6 - Working at demolition and construction sites.
Environment Agency
This information will be/was disseminated to site
operatives.
1f. A main contractor with an environmental materials policy
Compliance requirement
Tick
Evidence/Reference
The main contractor operates an environmental
materials policy, used for sourcing of construction
materials to be utilised on site. The policy should
cover/promote the following:
• Use of local materials (where possible)
• Use of responsibly sourced materials
• Re use of materials
• Use of materials with a high recycled content
• Waste minimisation and recycling
• Use of non-toxic materials & refrigerants with a low
global warming potential
• Use of materials with a low embodied impact
• Use of durable materials
Post construction: indicative examples have been
provided to demonstrate the policy in action.
1g. A main contractor that operates an Environmental Management System*
Compliance requirement
The main contractor operates an Environmental
Management System covering their main operations.
The EMS must be either:
• Third party certified, to ISO14001/EMAS or
equivalent standard. OR
• The structure of the EMS is in compliance with
British Standard 8555 2003 and has reached phase
four of the implementation stage, ‘implementation
and operation of the environmental management
system’, and completed phase audits one to four,
as defined in BS8555.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Tick
Evidence/Reference
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A3
335
2. 80% of site timber is reclaimed, re-used or responsibly sourced
Compliance requirement
Tick
Evidence/Reference
80% of timber used during construction, including
formwork, site hoardings and other temporary site
timber used for the purpose of facilitating construction,
will be/was procured from sustainably managed
sources, independently certified by one of the top two
levels as set out in the Responsible Sourcing of
Materials Issues (BREEAM issue Mat 5) in the
Materials section of this document.
Additionally 100% of all site timber will be/was legally
sourced.
Notes:
• Re-used timber from off site can be counted as equivalent but re-usable formwork only complies if it
meets the above criteria.
• This credit can be awarded where all the timber used is reclaimed timber.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
336
Technical Checklist A3
BREEAM Education 2008
Existing
building
fit
out
assessment
(Offices/Education/Retail/Industrial/Healthcare/Bespoke schemes only)
only
items
1. Adopt best practice policies in respect of air (dust) pollution arising from site activities
Compliance requirement
The site will/did adopt best practice procedures in
relation to minimising air/dust pollution. This should
include:
• ‘dust sheets’
• regular proposals to damp down the site in dry
weather
• covers to skips etc.
Tick
Evidence/Reference
This information will be/was disseminated to site
operatives.
Notes:
• Further information can be obtained from BRE/EA publications ‘Control of Dust from Construction
and Demolition Activities’ and Pollution Control Guide Parts 1-5 provide good practice guidelines on
construction related pollution.
2. Appointment of a fit out contractor who has an environmental materials policy
Compliance requirement
The fit out contractor operates an environmental
materials policy, used for sourcing of construction
materials to be utilised on site. The policy should
cover/promote the following:
• Use of local materials (where possible)
• Use of responsibly sourced materials
• Re use of materials
• Use of materials with a high recycled content
• Waste minimisation and recycling
• Use of non-toxic materials & refrigerants with a
high global warming potential
• Use of materials with a low embodied impact
• Use of durable materials
Tick
Evidence/Reference
Post construction: indicative examples have been
provided to demonstrate the policy in action.
3. Appointment of a fit contractor who operates an Environmental Management System
Compliance requirement
The fit out contractor operates an Environmental
Management System covering their main operations.
The EMS must be either:
• Third party certified, to ISO14001/EMAS or
equivalent standard. OR
• The structure of the EMS is in compliance with
British Standard 8555 2003 and has reached phase
four of the implementation stage, ‘implementation
and operation of the environmental management
system’, and completed phase audits one to four,
as defined in BS8555.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Tick
Evidence/Reference
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A3
337
Assessor Information
Monitoring Site Transport CO2
The following tables are taken from the DEFRA ‘Guidelines for Company Reporting on Greenhouse
Gas Emissions’ and COPERT II emission factors, and can be used to convert the information gathered
from monitoring deliveries into total kg CO2.
Table 26 Standard road transport fuel conversion factors
Fuel used
Total units
used
Petrol
Diesel (inc. Low
Sulphur)
Compressed
Natural Gas
Liquid Petroleum
Gas
Units
x
kg CO2 per
unit
litres
x
2.30
litres
x
2.63
kg
x
2.65
litres
x
1.49
Total kg CO2
Source: National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory for 2003 developed by Netcen (2005). UK
Greenhouse Gas Inventory for 2003 developed by Netcen (2005), Digest of UK Energy Statistics DTI
2004 and carbon factors for fuels from UKPIA (2004)
Table 27 Standard road transport fuel conversion factors
Size of car and
distance units
Total units
travelled
Units
x
kg CO2 per
unit
Small petrol car
max. 1.4 litre
engine
Medium petrol
car max. 1.4-2.1
litre engine
miles
x
0.26
km
x
0.16
miles
x
0.30
km
x
0.19
Large petrol car
above 2.1 litres
miles
x
0.35
km
x
0.22
Average petrol
car
miles
x
0.29
km
x
0.18
Total kg CO2
Source: NAEI (Netcen, 2005) based on data from DfT combined with factors from TRL as functions of
average speed of vehicle derived from test data under real world testing cycles
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
338
Technical Checklist A3
BREEAM Education 2008
Table 28 Standard Road Transport Fuel Conversion Factors
Size of car and
distance units
Total units
travelled
Units
x
kg CO2 per
unit
Small Diesel car
2.0 litres engine
and under
miles
x
0.26
km
x
0.16
Large Diesel car
over 2.0 litres 2.1 litre engine
miles
x
0.31
km
x
0.19
miles
x
0.27
km
x
0.17
Average Diesel
car
Total kg CO2
Source: NAEI (Netcen, 2005) based on data from DfT combined with factors from TRL as functions of
average speed of vehicle derived from test data under real world testing cycles.
Table 29 Freight road mileage conversion factors
Fuel
Total kg
Conversion
CO2
Factor
Petrol
2.30
Articulated
x
0.35
x
Diesel
2.63
LPG
1.49
Petrol
2.30
Diesel
2.63
Rigid
x
0.40
x
LPG
1.49
Source: Guidelines for Company Reporting on Greenhouse Gas Emissions, DEFRA. Continuing Survey
of Road Goods Transport 2001.
Type of
lorry
Total km
travelled
x
Litre Fuel
per km
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
x
Fuel
Type
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A4
339
14.4 Technical Checklist A4: LE3 Land of Low Ecological Value
Section 1: Ecological features of the site
Instruction: criteria 1.1-1.5 can be used to determine the presence of existing ecological features
across the total site. However, if YES is recorded against any question in Section 1 for the construction
zone, then it cannot be defined as land of low ecological value and the credit cannot be awarded. If the
construction zone records a NO against all the questions in Section 1 then proceed to Section 2.
1.1
Does the site contain any trees or hedges above 1m high or with a
trunk diameter greater than 100mm?
YES
NO
1.2
Are there any ponds, streams or rivers on, or running through the
site?
YES
NO
1.3
Is there any marsh or other wetland present on the site?
YES
NO
1.4
Are there any meadows or species-rich grassland present on the
site?
YES
NO
1.5
Is there any heath land such as heather present on site?
YES
NO
Section 2: Type of land to be used for the new building
Instruction: in addition to answering NO to all the questions in Section 1, if YES is recorded against
one or more of the questions in Section 2 then the construction zone can be defined as land of low
ecological value. This credit can then be awarded, as long as all features of ecological value (as
defined in Section 1) in the surrounding site and boundary area are adequately protected from damage.
2.1
Does the construction zone consist of land which is entirely within
the footprint of existing building(s) or building(s) demolished within
the past 2 years?
YES
NO
2.2
Does the construction zone consist of land which is entirely covered
by other construction such as hard surfaces, car parking or such
constructions which have been demolished within the past two
years?
YES
NO
2.3
Does the construction zone consist of land which is contaminated by
industrial or other waste to the extent that it would need
decontamination to facilitate development?
YES
NO
2.4
Does the construction zone consist of land which is a mixture of
either existing building(s), hard surfaces and/or contaminated land?
YES
NO
2.5
Does 80% of the land within the construction zone comply with
statements 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 and the remaining 20% of the footprint of
the construction zone extend into land which has been either:
a. Used for single-crop arable farming for at least 5 years, OR
b. Consists of regularly cut lawns and sports fields
YES
NO
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
340
Technical Checklist A5
BREEAM Education 2008
14.5 Technical Checklist A5: Mat 5 Responsible Sourcing of Materials
Table 30 Checklist of criteria for Tiers 1-4
Tier
1
2a
2b
Criteria
Examples of compliant schemes
Checklist of documentation required
Third party certification scheme with
CoC and rigorous stakeholder
consultation (at both standard setting
and during implementation)
FSC
CSA
SFI with CoC
PEFC
Reused materials, Schemes
compliant with BES6001:2008
(or similar) Excellent* and Very
Good* Performance Ratings
(Note; the EMS required to
achieve these ratings must be
independently certified)
Design
Schemes compliant with
BES6001:2008 (or similar)
‘Good’ Performance Rating
(Note: the EMS required to
achieve this rating must be
independently certified**).
Schemes compliant with
BES6001:2008 (or similar)
‘Pass’ Performance Rating
(Note: the EMS required to
achieve this rating must be
independently certified).
As above.
Scheme must have developed
standards which meet the criteria
outlined in Table 32 Features of a top
tier (1) comparable certification
scheme: Standard setting (below).
Third party certification scheme with
CoC and stakeholder consultation.
Scheme must have developed
standards which meet the criteria
outlined in Table 32 Features of a top
tier (1) comparable certification
scheme: Standard setting (below).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the
relevant certification scheme.
o Letter of intent from supplier
OR
o Purchase order from the supplier including CoC number (if
the material has been ordered) or BES6001:2008 Certificate
number
OR
o Chain of Custody (CoC) or BES6001 certificate (if material
has already been supplied)
Post Construction
• A copy of the CoC certificate and/or BES6001:2008
certificate for all appropriate materials/elements.
AND
• Delivery notes for all appropriate materials/elements.
BREEAM Education 2008
Tier
Criteria
Examples of compliant schemes
Checklist of documentation required
Certification Scheme for timber
ISO 14001
EMAS
Evidence of BS8555 (for
SME’s)
MTCC
Verified**
SGS
TFT
Design
Environmental Management System at
extraction & process stages - see
Table 31 Diagram of how the required
EMS relates to the process and
extraction phases (below) for
description of stages.
3
Technical Checklist A5
341
Timber
One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the
relevant certification scheme.
o Letter of intent from supplier
OR
o Purchase order from the supplier including CoC number (if
the material has been ordered)
OR
o Chain of Custody (CoC) certificate (if timber has already
been supplied)
Non timber materials
One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the
relevant EMS standards (see issue for further information).
•
•
•
EMS (or equivalent) certificate from the manufacturers at the
process and extraction stages
OR
Signed letter from the manufacturers at the process and
extraction stages confirming EMS (or equivalent) certification
details
OR
Letter of intent from the developer to use a manufacturer at
the process and extraction stages, who has an EMS (or
equivalent), if supplier is not yet appointed.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
342
Technical Checklist A5
Tier
Criteria
BREEAM Education 2008
Examples of compliant schemes
Checklist of documentation required
Post Construction
•
Delivery notes for all appropriate elements
Timber
• CoC certificate for all appropriate elements
Non timber materials
One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the
relevant EMS standards (see issue for further information).
3
•
•
EMS certificate (or equivalent) from the manufacturers at the
process and extraction stages
OR
Signed letter from the manufacturers at the process and
extraction stages confirming EMS (or equivalent) certification
details
In addition:
•
Environmental Management System at
process stages for other materials see Table 31 Diagram of how the
required EMS relates to the process
and extraction phases (below) for
description of stages.
4
EMAS
ISO 14001
Design
One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the
relevant EMS standards (see issue for further information).
•
•
•
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Delivery notes for all appropriate elements
EMS (or equivalent) certificate from the manufacturers at the
process stage
OR
Signed letter from the manufacturers at the process stage
confirming EMS (or equivalent) certification details
OR
Letter of intent from the developer to use a manufacturer at
the process stage, who has an EMS (or equivalent), if
supplier is not yet appointed.
BREEAM Education 2008
Tier
Criteria
Technical Checklist A5
Examples of compliant schemes
343
Checklist of documentation required
Post Construction
One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the
relevant EMS standards (see issue for further information).
•
•
EMS certificate (or equivalent) from the manufacturers at the
process stage
OR
Signed letter from the manufacturers at the process stage
confirming EMS (or equivalent) certification details.
* Performance ratings for schemes compliant with BES6001:2008 (or similar) can only be used to demonstrate compliance with the criteria of this issue where
certification covers the key process and supply chain processes for the material being assessed.
** ‘Verified’ is the name of a scheme
To view a list of products approved to BES6001:2008 (including copies of their certificates) visit: www.greenbooklive.com/page.jsp?id=169
Where ANY non certified timber is used (even if only a small quantity) the following must also be provided in ALL cases:
•
Written confirmation from the timber supplier(s) (or at the design stage of assessment, the developer where a supplier is not yet appointed) confirming that
all timber species and sources used in the development are not listed on any of the CITES appendices for endangered and threatened species (see issue
for further information).
•
Written confirmation from the timber supplier(s) (or at the design stage of assessment the developer where a supplier is not yet appointed) confirming that
all timber is to be legally sourced (see issue for further information).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
344
Technical Checklist A5
BREEAM Education 2008
Table 31 Diagram of how the required EMS relates to the process and extraction phases
Stage of
production
Extraction
Process
Manufacture
process
Stone
Bricks
Materials
Aggregate (sand,
limestone etc.)
Hematite
Cement or alternative
Bauxite
Metals
Clay
Other materials (plastic etc)
Raw materials - other
Pre-cast concrete
Concrete / blocks
Glass
Composites
1 point
Points available
1.5 points
As this issue is looking at responsible sourcing, currently the manufacture stage is not considered.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A5
345
NOTE TO ASSESSORS
This list is included for information, you are not expected to evaluate whether a scheme complies with
this criteria. All new schemes claiming to meet the criteria listed below will be evaluated by BRE, and
will be included in the list of compliant schemes where appropriate.
Table 32 Features of a top tier (1) comparable certification scheme: Standard setting
When setting standards for a materials certification scheme the following should be addressed in order
to be considered comparable to Tier 1/2 of this issue.
•
The scheme must include a third party chain of custody certification scheme covering all stages
of the product throughout the supply chain
•
The scheme must verify that all local and national legislative criteria are met.
•
The process for policy and standards development is transparent, clear and accessible.
•
The scheme is independent and standards are developed in a way which balances the interests
of all stakeholders. This should be done through a rigorous consultation process which makes
best use of the stakeholder knowledge, methodically and comprehensively considering all
feedback and after such consideration, aims to implement all feasible stakeholder suggestions
•
The scheme is inclusive, striving to involve all interested people and groups in the development
of the scheme’s policies and standards.
•
Monitoring and assessment must be integral to the scheme and conducted appropriate to the
scale and intensity of the industry/ materials assessed by the scheme. This requirement is likely
to be fulfilled by the incorporation of an EMS such as ISO14001 or BS8555 for SME’s.
•
The scheme should contain principles by which the scheme should be governed. These should
be specific to industry/materials but should also be composed of the fundamental issues related
to the environment. These issues should focus on specific practices associated with sourcing
virgin and other materials.
•
The scheme should assess that initiatives are in place to ensure continuous performance and
environmental improvement.
•
The scheme should provide for small to medium sized business as well as larger businesses.
SME’s grouping together to achieve group certification should be an option. This could, for
example, take place on a regional or other relevant basis.
•
The scheme should include a mechanism to revise the standard within a defined, suitable time
frame to ensure that the current knowledge or upcoming robust scientific or other professional
evidence can be incorporated (in good time) into the standard as an update. It should ensure
that all updates are well adapted to the local/regional and/or global conditions.
•
The scheme should also aim to consider social and economic aspects widening the scope to
sustainability under the umbrella of a Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). This is in line with
the future aims of BREEAM and could be assessed within this issue in the future.
NOTE: The scheme may be generic for the materials industries or specific for individual materials
sectors.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
346
Technical Checklist A5
BREEAM Education 2008
Differences between Tier 1&2
Tiers 1 and 2 follow the standard setting process outline above, however there are differences in the
rigour of the two schemes which is why they fall into two different categories. These are outlined below:
1. The top tier category schemes comprehensively address a consultation process with local
community. This is done at source via a management company, as the focus is on sustainable
project management at source.
2. The top tier category must have no reservations/uncertainty/pending charge or indictment
identified by any professional bodies in the relevant materials sectors.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A6
347
14.6 Technical Checklist A6: Guidance for relating ecologist’s
report to BREEAM
Before completing this form please read the following:
1. This guidance document is to be used for BREEAM 2008 assessments, where an ecologist has
been appointed and produced an ecology report as part of a proposed development.
2. As an ecologist may have been appointed to carry out ecological site surveys and produced an
ecology report without being aware that a BREEAM assessment has been, or is to be conducted,
the purpose of this document is to help assist assessors relate the contents of such a report to the
land use and ecology criteria of BREEAM.
3. The assessor is to request that the appointed ecologist complete all sections of this guidance and
return it to the BREEAM assessor along with all relevant documentation required to demonstrate
compliance with the BREEAM criteria.
4. The assessor is to use this completed document in conjunction with the latest version of the
relevant BREEAM technical guidance manual and information provided by the developer / client to
carry out the assessment of the land use and ecology BREEAM issues.
•
There are 6 sections (sections A - F) in this document.
•
Section A requires contact details for the ecologist and developer / client.
•
Section B1 determines whether the appointed ecologist is ‘suitably qualified’ (under BREEAM); and
if not, section B2 determines whether the report has been verified by an ecologist who is ‘suitably
qualified’.
•
Section C determines whether the findings of the report have been based on data collected from
site surveys conducted at appropriate times of the year to determine whether different species are
evident.
•
If ‘no’ is recorded for either Section B or C then the contents of the ecology report cannot be
used to determine compliance with the BREEAM criteria.
•
Section D provides the BREEAM assessor with the necessary information to complete the
assessment of the ecology related BREEAM issues.
•
Section E provides details of the documentation / information required by BREEAM as evidence of
compliance.
•
Section F requires the signature of the appointed ecologist who has completed this document.
Please note: it is only the appointed qualified and licensed BREEAM assessor who can award or
withhold a credit for all BREEAM assessments.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
348
Technical Checklist A6
Section A: Contact Details
Ecologist’s Details
Company name:
Company address:
Contact name:
Contact telephone number:
Ecology report reference:
Developer / Client Details
Company name:
Company address:
Contact name:
Contact telephone number:
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A6
349
Section B1: Ecologist’s Qualifications
1. Do you hold a degree (or equivalent qualification, e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or related subject?
Yes 
No 
If yes, please provide details………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………….........................
………………………………………………………………………………………………….........................
2. Are you a practising ecologist with a minimum of 3 years relevant experience within the last 5
years? Relevant experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting
ecology in relation to construction and the built environment and will include acting in an advisory
capacity to provide recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation
measures, e.g. ecological impact assessments.
Yes 
No 
If yes, please provide details…………………………………………………………………….…
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
350
Technical Checklist A6
BREEAM Education 2008
3. Are you bound by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review*?
i.e. a full member of one of the following organisations will be deemed suitable: Chartered
Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM); Institute of Ecology and
Environmental Management (IEEM); Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment
(IEMA); Landscape Institute (LI).
Yes 
No 
If yes, please provide details………………………………………………………………………..
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
* Peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or
current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a
code of conduct and professional ethics.
If ‘no’ has been answered for any question in Section B1 then the BREEAM requirement for a
‘suitably qualified ecologist’ has not been met. The ecology report CANNOT be used to
assess the BREEAM Ecology issues unless it is verified by an individual who is ‘suitably
qualified’ (see section B2 below).
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A6
351
Section B2: Report Verification
Details on verifying an ecology report for a BREEAM assessment:
1. The individual verifying the report must provide written confirmation that they comply with the
definition of a ‘suitably qualified ecologist’ (as detailed in Section B1 above).
2. The verifier of the report must confirm in writing they have read and reviewed the report and found it
to:
•
represent sound industry practice
•
report and recommend correctly, truthfully, and objectively
•
be appropriate given the local site conditions and scope of works proposed
•
avoid invalid, biased, and exaggerated statements.
Written confirmation from the third party verifier on all the points detailed under 1 and 2 above (for
section B2) must be included in an appendix to this guidance (see section E).
If the appointed ecologist does not meet the criteria of a ‘suitably qualified ecologist’ and the
report has not been verified by an individual who does meet these criteria, then the report
CANNOT be used as evidence of compliance with the ecology related BREEAM.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
352
Technical Checklist A6
BREEAM Education 2008
Section C: Site Survey
1. Have the findings of the ecology report been based on data collected from a site survey(s)? The
site visit(s) and survey(s) must be conducted at appropriate times of the year when it is possible to
determine the presence, or evidence of the presence, of different plant and animal species.
Yes

No

If yes, please provide details to justify this (e.g. date(s) and scope of site survey(s))
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
If ‘no’ has been answered to question 1 of Section C then the ecology report CANNOT be
used to determine compliance with the criteria of the relevant BREEAM ecology issues.
Note to suitably qualified ecologist and BREEAM assessor: the contents of the ecology report must
be representative of the site’s existing ecology prior to the commencement of initial site preparation
works, i.e. before RIBA stage K, Construction to Practical Completion, and after RIBA stage B,
Design Brief.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A6
353
Section D: Site Survey Details
LE3 Ecological value of land and protection of ecological features
1. Is the land within the ‘construction zone' deemed by the suitably qualified ecologist to be of low
ecological value?
The construction zone is defined as any land on the site which is being developed (and therefore
disturbed) for buildings, hard standing, landscaping, site access, plus a 3m boundary in either
direction around these areas. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and
buildings.
Yes

No

If yes, please provide a brief statement explaining how it has been deemed to be of low ecological
value:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
2. Are there any features / areas of ecological value that fall within the site, but outside the
construction zone?
If you have deemed this area to be of low ecological value then there will be no features of
ecological value to protect. However, if there is a feature(s) or area(s) of low ecological value you
wish to advise be retained and enhanced, e.g. a species-poor hedgerow to a species-rich
hedgerow, then full details of the protection and enhancement advice should be entered under LE5
Enhancing site ecology.
Yes

No

p.t.o
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
354
Technical Checklist A6
BREEAM Education 2008
If yes, please provide a brief statement outlining the advice / recommendations given for protecting all
existing features and areas of ecological value:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
LE4 Mitigating ecological impact
3. Are you able to provide the following information for before and after construction:
•
habitat types
•
An estimate of the number of floral species present per habitat type (based on appropriate
census techniques and confirmed planting regimes)?
Yes

No

a. If yes a brief description of the landscapes and habitats surrounding the development site
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
2
b. The total site area (in m ). This will be the same before and after development.
…………………………….
p.t.o
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
c.
Technical Checklist A6
355
Please fill in the table below with site details before development1:
Habitat Type*
Area of type (m2)
No. of plant species
per habitat type
d. Please fill in the table below with site details after development1:
Habitat Type*
Area of type (m2)
No. of plant species
per habitat type
* Habitat types will include natural areas, e.g. various grasslands and woodlands; as well as areas of the
built environment, e.g. buildings, hard landscaping. The area of each habitat type when added together
must always equal the total area of the development site.
1
Note to assessor (and ecologist where requested to carry our calculations); the information contained in
tables c. and d. above can be used to calculate both LE4 Mitigating ecological impact and LE5 Enhancing
site ecology issues.
p.t.o
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
356
Technical Checklist A6
BREEAM Education 2008
4. Has the client / developer requested you to carry out the calculation for LE4 Mitigating ecological
impact and /or LE5 Enhancing site ecology (where relevant)?
The calculations must be carried out in line with the methodology provided in the current version of
the relevant BREEAM scheme’s technical guidance manual.
Yes

No

If yes, please provide all stages of calculations and state what the total change in ecological value
is:
a. Calculation of ecological value before development:
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
b. Calculation of ecological value after development:
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
c.
Technical Checklist A6
357
Change in ecological value (c = b – a):
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
LE5 Enhancing site ecology
5. Has the client / developer required you to provide advice and make recommendations for
enhancing site ecology?
Note: these are to include, and go beyond, compliance criteria for all current EU and UK legislation
relating to protected species and habitats.
Yes

No

If yes, please provide a brief statement outlining the advice / recommendations given on enhancing
and protecting the ecological value of the site:
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
358
Technical Checklist A6
BREEAM Education 2008
LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity
6. Were you appointed prior to commencement of development work activities on site?
Yes

No

Don’t know

7. Has the client / developer given you the responsibility to confirm whether all current EU and UK
legislation relating to protection and enhancement of ecology has been (or will be) complied with
during the design and construction process?
Yes

No

If yes, please provide details on all current EU and UK legislation that relates to the site:
……………………………………………………………………………………………................
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………................
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………................
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A6
359
8. Has the developer / client appointed you to produce an appropriate landscape/site ecology
management plan covering at least the first 5 years after project completion?

Yes
No

EITHER:
a. If yes, and the management plan has already been produced does it include the following:
•
management of any protected features on site
•
management of any new, existing, or enhanced habitats
•
a reference to the current or future site level Biodiversity Action Plan?
Yes

No

OR
b. If yes, but the management plan is still to be produced (due to it being too early in the
design/construction phase), have you provided the following information to the developer /
client:
•
scope of management plan
•
key responsibilities, and with whom these responsibilities lie, e.g. owner, landlord,
occupier?
Yes

No

If you have answered ‘yes’ to either question 8a or 8b please provide a brief explanation outlining
the details
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
360
Technical Checklist A6
BREEAM Education 2008
9. Has the client / developer required you, as part of your responsibilities, to provide recommendations
and advice to minimise detrimental impacts on site biodiversity?
Yes

No

N/A

If yes, or not applicable, please briefly explain your reasoning:
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
10. Do your responsibilities to the client / developer include providing advice and recommendations for
the protection of ecological features?
Yes

No

N/A

If yes, or not applicable, please briefly explain your reasoning:
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Technical Checklist A6
361
11. Do your responsibilities to the client / developer include providing advice on the creation of a new
ecologically valuable habitat, which is appropriate to the local area and is either nationally,
regionally, or locally important, or supports nationally, regionally, or locally important biodiversity?
Yes

No

N/A

If yes, or not applicable, please briefly explain your reasoning:
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
12. Do your responsibilities to the client / developer include providing advice and recommendations on
when site works are to be avoided so as to minimise the disturbance to wildlife?
Yes

No

N/A

If yes, or not applicable, please briefly explain your reasoning
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
362
Technical Checklist A6
BREEAM Education 2008
Section E: Schedule of Evidence
Copies of the following documentation are required to support the above statements and act as
evidence of compliance with the BREEAM ecology criteria:
•
The suitably qualified ecologists site/project specific report
•
Written confirmation from the verifier of the ecology report (where necessary)
•
Any supplementary documentation e.g. maps, plans, drawings, letters / emails of correspondence,
etc.
Please include these details along with the appropriate reference to each document in the table below:
Document
Reference
Section F: Statement of Verification
I confirm the information provided on this document is truthful and accurate at the time of completion.
Name of ecologist:
…………………………………………………………………………
Signature of ecologist:: …………………………………………………………………………
Date:
……………………….
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Schedule of Changes to the Standard
363
15.0 Schedule of Changes to the Scheme
Document
The table below details the changes/additions to each issue of this BREEAM 2008 Scheme Document,
the table also outlines the issue number (and therefore date) the change came into affect.
Where an Assessor/user has been using or referencing an issue of the Scheme Document that has
subsequently been superseded, they may continue to use and reference that issue of the Scheme
Document through to certification. Or alternatively, they may switch to the latest issue for the purposes
of completing and certifying the building. When submitting a certification report the BREEAM Assessor
is asked to stipulate in the report which issue of the Scheme Document they have used to complete the
assessment of the building. If two different issues were used throughout the course of the assessment,
reference the latest issue used.
Issue
number
1.0
Date of issue
24/6/2008
2.0
14/08/2008
3.0
31/07/2009
4.0
01/05/2010
4.1
25/05/2012
Key (Type of Change)
Administrative change e.g. typo, re-wording of text, minor addition to the
A
text.
An addition/insertion, deletion or alteration to the scope, assessment
C
criteria, Compliance Notes, evidence required or relevant definitions.
An addition/insertion, alteration or deletion to the additional guidance and
AG
supporting information/references.
Issue ID /
Section
Front
Cover
Type
A
Schedule
of changes
AG
Front cover
A
Scope
C
Change
The front cover and inside page has been updated with the updated
BREEAM logo and certification mark. The text on the inside page
about BRE Global Ltd has been updated.
An additional paragraph has been added to the introduction to the
schedule of changes section. This provides guidance to
assessor/user of the scheme document on the use of the new
issue where they have previously been using a superseded issue to
carryout the assessment.
The front cover and inside page has been updated. The Standard
number has been replaced with a Scheme Document number.
Section 2.2 Type of projects that can be assessed using BREEAM
has been updated, specifically: A definition of New Construction
has been added. The definition of major and minor refurbishment
has been amended to provide additional guidance on the
appropriate use of BREEAM for these types of project.
Issue
no.
4.1
4.0
4.0
4.0
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
364
Schedule of Changes to the standard
Issue ID /
Section
Scope
Type
C
Scope
C
Scope
AG
Scoring
and
weighting
C
Man 2
C
Man 12
C
Hea 8
C
Hea 8
AG
Hea 9
C
Hea 9
C
Hea 17
C
Ene 2
AG
Ene 3
AG
Ene 8
C
Ene 8
C
Ene 10
C
BREEAM Education 2008
Change
The scope of the Education scheme has been extended to enable
Fit out assessments; as such fit out criteria has been added to the
scheme document.
Pre-school buildings (nurseries and children centres) have been
added to the scope of BREEAM Education and can be assessed
regardless of whether they form part of a wider school site or stand
alone facility/building. As such the text in the scope section
addressing 'stand alone nursery buildings' has been removed and
descriptions in the assessment criteria updated accordingly.
Additional guidance has been added to the scope section on which
guidance/criteria to use for assessing 'all age range schools' and
'academies'.
Guidance has been added to section 3.3 (minimum standards)
concerning the application and exemption of the minimum
standards to refurbishment and fit out projects. This is in
accordance with the communication in the March 2010 BREEAM
Assessors process note.
A compliance note has been added on the issue of which CCS
monitors report to use for the purpose of determining the number of
BREEAM credits, where there have been multiple CCS monitor
visits and reports.
The term "non discounted" has been removed from requirement 3
of the first credit. Essentially there is no difference between the term
real and non discounted cash flow. A definition from ISO15686 for
real and discounted cash flow has been added to the additional
information section.
Evidence required table amended to include a description of the
required evidence for criterion 3.
The reference to the definition of occupied space in the relevant
definitions section has been removed as ‘occupied space’ is not
referred to in the criteria.
The following paragraph has been removed from the Additional
Information section: "Wood products that contain phenolformaldehyde (PF) generally emit formaldehyde at considerably
lower rates than those containing urea-formaldehyde (UF). Although
formaldehyde is present in both types of resins, pressed woods that
contain PF would be preferable to those containing UF resin."
A compliance note has been added concerning floor finishes and
compliance with BS EN 14041 in relation to Formaldehyde
emissions and the reference to BS EN 13986 has been updated.
The criteria has been amended to clarify that for schools,
compliance with BB88 is satisfactory for BREEAM compliance and
the use/compliance with British Standards is only required if relevant
to the installation. A compliance note has also been added to this
affect.
Reference added to CIBSE TM39 Building Energy Metering.
A definition of Energy Supply, and therefore what should be
metered, has been added to the Additional Information section
A compliance note has been added outlining exemptions to this
issue i.e. simple platform/wheelchair lifts and ramps.
A compliance note has been added concerning compliance with
the requirement for optimising the counterbalance ratio.
A compliance note has been added concerning the applicability of
ICT suites to the requirements of this BREEAM issue.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Issue
no.
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID /
Section
Ene 11
Type
C
Ene 11
C
Ene 11
C
Ene 19
C
Tra 1
C
Tra 3
C
Tra 3
C
Tra 3
C
Tra 3
C
Tra 6
C
Wat 3
C
Mat 1
C
Mat 1
C
Mat 1
AG
Mat 1
AG
Schedule of Changes to the Standard
Change
The reference to the use of GPG320 has been removed from the
assessment criteria and replaced by criteria requiring the
specification of recirculatory filtered fume cupboards (for schools). A
compliance note has also been added clarifying the approach to
be used where ducted fume cupboards are required. As a result of
changes to requirement 1 of this issue, requirement 2 has been
amended and the evidence required updated.
The compliance note entitled "Requirements 1 & 2" has been
removed due to the changes to the criteria (as outlined above). A
separate compliance note "Requirement 2 for schools and sixth
form" has been added.
The compliance note Fume cupboard face velocity made reference
to a face velocity of 5 m/s, this should read 0.5 m/s. It has been
amended accordingly.
The text in requirement 2 for buildings with laboratory function
areas where the laboratory area accounts for at least 25% of the
total building floor area, has for clarity in accordance with the
intention of the credit, been changed from "where the first credit is
achieved". to "Where fume cupboards and/or other containment
devices are specified, the first credit is achieved".
Additional text added to the compliance note concerning
"Compliant public transport node" to clarify that national public
transport services should not be included in the calculation of AI.
A compliance note has been added concerning the provision of
compliant showers in primary schools where the requirement for
provision of cycle storage spaces is reduced by 50% in city centre
and rural locations.
The compliance note "Compliant showers" has been amended for
higher education buildings to confirm that one shower is required
for every 10 (staff) cycle storage racks), not every 10 staff.
The compliance note "Nursery building on an existing site" has
been deleted as pre-schools/nurseries now form a formal part of the
Education schemes scope (and therefore criteria).
A compliance note has been added giving guidance for projects
where a proprietary (manufactured) cycle system has been
specified. This note is in accordance with the guidance published in
the June 2009 Assessors Process note
In issue 3.0 of the guidance this BREEAM credit was labelled as
applicable to Further Education buildings; this was an error and in
accordance with issue's 1.0 and 2.0, this has been amended in
issue 4.0.
Criteria requirement 2b stated "….a flow rate above a pre-set
minimum for a pre-set period of time", the word "minimum" has
been changed to "maximum" in accordance with the objective of
the requirement.
Compliance note added explaining how the Exemplary level
criteria requirements should be assessed where the building
contains no upper floor.
Definition and Compliance note added concerning the new Online
Green Guide Calculator.
Information added to the Additional Information section concerning
floor finishes, specifically guidance on selecting the appropriate
floor finishes category on the Green Guide online.
A definition of element number has been added to the Additional
Information section.
365
Issue
no.
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
366
Schedule of Changes to the standard
Issue ID /
Section
Mat 5
BREEAM Education 2008
Type
C
Change
Tier 2 in the responsible sourcing table has been split in to tier 2a
and 2b. This is in accordance with the guidance in December 2009
BREEAM Assessor’s process note, to differentiate certification
schemes that achieve a Good rating from those that achieve a Pass
rating under BES:6001 Responsible Sourcing Standard.
Mat 5
AG
Mat 5
C
Mat 5
C
Mat 5
C
LE6
C
Pol 2
C
Pol 2
C
Pol 4
C
Pol 4
C
Pol 5
C
Pol 8
C
The calculation procedure for the Mat 5 calculator tool in the
additional guidance section of issue Mat 5 has been updated in
accordance with the communication in the December 2009
BREEAM Assessor's process note and the introduction of an online
responsible sourcing tool. A definition added for the online
Responsible Sourcing Calculator
A note has been added alongside the Responsible Sourcing
Criteria and Tier Levels table regarding PEFC International's
endorsement of the MTCC scheme and therefore the
circumstances in which MTCC certified timber can be considered as
a tier 1 compliant scheme. This change is in accordance with the
guidance communicated to assessors in the July 2009 edition of the
Assessors Process note.
The note concerning in-situ concrete in the table of responsible
sourcing tier levels and criteria has been updated to clarify the
requirement for concrete mixed on site. Also, a note has been
added at the bottom of the responsible sourcing table containing
guidance on the need for a certified EMS for
products/manufacturers certified against BES6001:2008. This is in
accordance with the communication to BREEAM Assessors in the
September 2009 process note.
A compliance note has been added concerning the responsible
sourcing of insulation materials, specifically making the reader
aware that this is covered in BREEAM issue Mat 6 Insulation.
In the compliance note: "Not all additional items are applicable"
where there are only four items applicable, the requirements to
achieve one credit has been amended from "three additional items"
to "two additional items" to bring in line with the standard
requirement for achieving the first credit available for this issue.
A compliance note has been added concerning appropriate action
for refrigeration systems that use ammonia as a refrigerant.
The compliance note concerning awarding the credit by default
where Carbon Dioxide has been used as the refrigeration has been
updated to include a requirement that the system must comply with
the BS EN 378 and Institute of Refrigeration code of practice for
Carbon Dioxide.
The factor given for converting figures in mg/MJ to mg/kWh is
subject to a formatting error. Previous issue stated that figures in
mg/MJ should be divided by 3.6, when in fact they should be
multiplied. This has been amended.
A formula has been added to the additional information section for
determining NOx emissions from heat pumps.
Requirement 3 referred to notes 6 & 7, this should refer to the
compliance notes. The reference to notes 6 & 7 is a legacy from the
BREEAM 2006 version. The guidance has been amended
accordingly.
Following a review, due to the less onerous requirements of Pol 8
compared to Hea 13, the definition of a suitably qualified
acoustician from issue 2.0 has been reinstated.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Issue
no.
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID /
Section
Inn 1
Type
AG
Inn 1
AG
Inn 1
C
Inn 1
C
Scope
C
Scope
A
Technical
sections
C
Schedule of Changes to the Standard
Change
The definition of an Accredited Professional has been updated.
The text "Procedure for reviewing applications for BREEAM
Innovations" in the additional guidance section has been updated.
The Suitably Qualified Assessor route as a means of achieving
the relevant two BREEAM Innovation credits has been removed.
The credits can now only be achieved through the use of a BREEAM
AP. In accordance with the communication in the November 2009
BREEAM Assessors process note.
Text added to the schedule of evidence required table to confirm
the type of information required for demonstrating compliance with
requirement 7 at the interim design stage for the appointment and
use of a BREEAM AP
Higher Education Institutes have been added to the list of building
types that can be assessed using the Education scheme. As a result
of this extension in scope there are new additions to the assessment
criteria (detailed below). The scope has also been updated to
account for the various types of schools e.g. academies, all agerange schools etc.
The text in the ‘stages of assessment’ section relating to the timing
of the post construction assessment has been changed from: “A
PCS assessment is carried out after practical completion of the
building works, before handover and occupation of the building.” To:
“A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical
completion of the building works.”
The following presentational changes have been made to the
technical sections:
367
Issue
no.
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
The credit criteria boxes and compliance requirements have been
merged to create one section for each issue called “Assessment
Criteria”.
The header and footers in the technical sections have been
amended. The issue ID information, numbers of credits available
and minimum standards requirements now appear only at the top of
each BREEAM issue requirement (as opposed to the header on
every page under issues 1.0 and 2.0).
References
AG
Innovation
C
Scoring &
weighting
C
Man 1
C
Man 1
C
The references section for each issue has been moved to a
compiled references section at the back of the Scheme Document.
References used in the assessment criteria text are numbered and
correspond to a number in the new references section. In addition,
other publications are referenced by BREEAM issue for further
reading/guidance in a new section Additional Sources of Information.
A new section titled Innovation has been added (section 13). This
section summarises the three methods of achieving innovation
credits in BREEAM.
The text in the Innovation part of the scoring and weighting sections
has been modified to reflect the insertion of Section 13 Innovation.
3.0
Second credit - seasonal commissioning: Requirement b) has been
added to list of criteria for simple systems. This brings the criteria for
simple systems in line with those for complex systems with respect
to actions following on from the initial seasonal commissioning
review.
The compliance note concerning ‘commissioning manager (simple
systems)’ has been modified to remove the ambiguity over the
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
368
Schedule of Changes to the standard
Issue ID /
Section
Type
Man 2
C
Man 1
C
Man 4
C
Man 6
C
Man 7
C
Man 9
C
Man 10
C
Man 12
C
Hea 1
C
Hea 1
C
Hea 1
C
Hea 2 & 3
C
Hea 7
C
Hea 13
C
BREEAM Education 2008
Change
monitor / manager role.
The exemplary level criteria for this issue have been re-worded for
clarity and consistency with the main BREEAM criteria. The
requirement itself i.e. CCS benchmark to achieve the innovation
credit, remains unchanged.
Additional requirements added for laboratory spaces for higher
education buildings (requirement 8a and 8c). These changes form
part of the extension of scope of the Education scheme to include
Higher Education establishments.
Additional credit and requirements added covering the development
of a specific user guide for laboratory spaces for higher education
buildings. These changes form part of the extension of scope of the
Education scheme to include Higher Education establishments.
Requirements 4, 5 & 6 and a compliance note defining appropriate
stakeholders has been added. These additions form part of the
extension of scope of the Education scheme to include Higher
Education establishments.
Compliance note re. existing shared facilities expanded to confirm
that shared facilities within an existing building on the site/campus
comply, provided the facility is accessible to all relevant
stakeholders.
Compliance note added concerning publication of information where
the building is of a secure or sensitive nature. This addition forms
part of the extension of scope of the Education scheme to include
Higher Education establishments.
Compliance note added concerning types of building for which this
credit is not applicable. This addition forms part of the extension of
scope of the Education scheme to include Higher Education
establishments.
The RIBA stages terminology has been updated. The reference to
figure 6 in ISO 15686-part 1 in requirement 4 was incorrect and has
been changed to ISO 15686-part 5.
The compliance note ‘percentage of assessed area’ has been
modified and text added concerning the view out requirement.
A compliance note has been added confirming the percentage of a
room (compliant with the average daylight factor requirement) that
must meet the view out requirement.
An additional requirement of the first credit and a second credit has
been added for higher educational buildings. A compliance note has
also been added concerning laboratory spaces and daylight. These
additions form part of the extension of scope of the Education
scheme to include Higher Education establishments.
Additional text has been added to the requirements of Hea 2
concerning areas of the building that are over 7m from a windowed
wall. The compliance note in Hea 2 & 3 concerning ‘excluded areas’
has also been updated to account for higher educational building
spaces/functions.
The compliance note concerning ‘excluded areas’ has been
updated to account for higher educational building spaces/functions.
For clarity, the measurement procedures referred to in the
compliance note and in the additional guidance have been labelled
as specific to “Further Education only” to avoid confusion over which
measurement/testing requirements should be followed for the
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Issue
no.
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID /
Section
Type
Schedule of Changes to the Standard
369
Issue
no.
Change
purpose of schools assessments.
A compliance note has been added concerning the application of
the requirement for rain noise in schools and heavyweight roof
constructions.
The text for the first requirement has been changed from “All
spaces in the building achieve the performance standards required
by Building Bulletin 93” to “The building meets the acoustic
performance standards required by Building Bulletin 93.”
The text in bold has been added to requirement 5 under the third
credit for schools: ‘Calculation or measurements demonstrate that
the increase in the indoor ambient noise level during ‘heavy’ rainfall
does not exceed the levels defined in Table 1.1 of Building Bulletin
93 by more than 20dB for all occupied spaces (including school
and sports halls)’.
The word ‘relevant’ has been included in the following design stage
schedule of evidence requirement: ‘The specific performances
standards achieved for each relevant room/area’.
Hea 13
C
Hea 13
C
Hea 16
C
Hea 3
C
Hea 6
C
The word ‘tested has been included in the following post
construction stage schedule of evidence requirement: ‘The required
performance levels have been achieved for each tested room/area
of the completed building’.
The requirements of the third credit for schools have been
amended to account for lightweight and heavyweight roofs. A
compliance note has also been added concerning the type of data
to use when carrying out calculations of rain noise for the purpose of
assessing compliance with this credit.
The compliance note and additional guidance concerning
measurement procedures has been amended. The first requirement
of the first credit for Further and Higher Education building types has
been amended to confirm that this requirement applies to non
teaching areas i.e. spaces/rooms not covered in BB93. The second
requirement concerns teaching areas (including labs).
A compliance note has been added concerning the non applicability
of this issue to higher education building types.
A compliance note has been added concerning the application of
this issue for workshops.
A definition of ‘separate occupant control’ has been added.
Hea 11
C
A definition of ‘separate occupant control’ has been added.
3.0
Hea 17
C
Requirement 1 has been modified from: ‘Specified fume cupboards
are manufactured and installed in accordance with BS EN 14175-2.’
To: ‘Specified fume cupboards are manufactured and installed in
accordance with the following:
a. General purpose fume cupboards: BS EN 14175-2
a. Recirculatory filtration fume cupboards: BS 7989’
b. Schools and sixth form colleges: Building Bulletin 88 (in addition
to the above British Standards where applicable).
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Text has been added to requirement 2 to highlight that this
requirement applies only to ducted fume cupboards.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
370
Schedule of Changes to the standard
Issue ID /
Section
Ene 1
Type
C
BREEAM Education 2008
Change
The compliance note ‘Extensions to existing buildings’ has been
modified to avoid confusion over the scope of the energy modelling
and therefore CO2 Index for the purposes of BREEAM.
Issue
no.
3.0
Ene 5
C
A compliance note and relevant definition has been added
concerning the types of biofuels that BREEAM will and will not
recognise with respect to this BREEAM issue.
3.0
Ene 5
C
3.0
Ene 3
C
The compliance note ‘Calculation of the CO2 emissions saved’ has
been amended to provide more clarity on the assumptions that
should be used when modelling the building without the specified
renewable technologies to determine the percentage reduction in
CO2 emissions.
The compliance note concerning relevant function areas /
departments as been amended to account for higher education
function areas.
Ene 6
C
3.0
Ene 7
C
Ene 10
C
Ene 11
C
Ene 11
C
The BREEAM issue Ene 6 has been added to the Education
scheme. This issue is applicable to higher education buildings types
only.
The BREEAM issue Ene 7 has been added to the Education
scheme. This issue is applicable to higher education building types
only.
In the Schedule of Evidence table requirement 1 has changed from
“Evidence as required for BREEAM issue Hea 11” to “Evidence as
required for BREEAM issue Hea 10”.
A compliance note has been added concerning the non applicability
of this BREEAM issue to higher education buildings.
The following compliance note has been added:
‘Requirements 1&2: When following the guidance in GPG 320 and
choosing the most energy efficient fume cupboard strategy, all
relevant guidelines and recommendations contained in Building
Bulletin 88, BS EN 14175-2 and BS7989 (as applicable) should also
be followed.’
This is a new BREEAM issue, relevant to Higher Education
assessments only.
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Ene 19
C
Ene 20
C
This is a new BREEAM issue, relevant to Higher Education
assessments only.
3.0
Tra 1 & 2
C
3.0
Tra3
C
Tra 3
C
Tra 6
C
Tra 7
C
Additional requirements have been added for the purpose of
assessing higher education building types.
An addition has been made to the requirement for the second credit
confirming that, for primary schools only, building users are
defined as staff only, not staff and pupils.
Requirement 1 and 2 and the compliance note concerning building
users and compliant shower facilities have been amended to
account for the inclusion of higher education building types. The
compliance note concerning compliant cycle facilities as also been
amended with respect to distance to facilities on further education
campus’.
An assessment criterion has been added for Higher Education
building types.
Tra 7 Travel Information Space has been included and is specific to
higher education building types only.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID /
Section
Tra 8
Schedule of Changes to the Standard
Type
C
Change
The following has been added to the ‘small buildings’ compliance
note for this BREEAM issue: ‘Also, requirement 3 ‘delivery areas are
not be accessed through parking areas’ can be relaxed for smaller
sites if it can be confirmed that all deliveries to the building will be
made by small vans and not heavy goods vehicles.’
Wat 1
C
Wat 2
C
Wat 2
C
Wat 5
C
Wst 3
C
‘Purchase orders‘ added to the list of evidence types that can be
provided for demonstrating compliance with the criteria at the post
construction stage of assessment.
The first exemplary level requirement has been amended to confirm
the minimum percentage water demand that must be met by an
individual item of water consuming plant or building area to achieve
the innovation credit. A compliance note has also been added in
support of this requirement.
A new requirement has been added concerning the metering of
laboratory equipment. These additions form part of the extension of
scope of the Education scheme to include Higher Education
establishments.
A new requirement has been added concerning the use of recycled
water from building processes in laboratory areas in higher
education building types.
The word “up to” has been replaced by the words “with an” in
requirement 2c to read: “An additional 2m2 per 1000m2 of net floor
area where catering is provided (with an additional minimum of
10m2 for buildings ≥5000m2)”.
Mat 1
AG
Mat 1
AG
Mat 1
A
Mat 5
C
Additional guidance added for further and higher education building
types concerning which Green Guide building type to select for the
purpose of determining Green Guide ratings for the elemental
specifications.
A note in the Additional Information section has been added
concerning the Green Guide flooring category and Indoor Air
Quality.
A note has been added to the schedule of evidence table
concerning Green Guide element numbers.
BRE Global’s responsible sourcing framework standard
BES6001:2008 has been added to tiers 1 and 2 of Table 15
Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria. The Green Dragon
Environmental Standard® added as an EMS compliant scheme
(tiers 3 and 4 of responsible sourcing table) for small companies.
The schedule of evidence table for this issue has also been updated
accordingly.
The text ‘Future RSM certification schemes & standards’ in the
additional guidance section has been replaced with text concerning
the BRE Global responsible sourcing standard BES6001:2008.
371
Issue
no.
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Mat 5
C
3.0
Wst 3
C
The compliance note concerning multiple building assessments has
been revised to clarify the assessment of this issue where a building
forms part of a wider estate.
3.0
LE1
C
The text in the schedule of evidence table for requirement 1 of this
issue has been changed from “previous land use” to “Type and
duration of previous land use”.
3.0
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
372
Schedule of Changes to the standard
Issue ID /
Section
LE4
LE3
LE5
BREEAM Education 2008
Type
C
Change
The following text has been added to the compliance note ‘Number
of plant species’: ‘Where an ecologist has been appointed actual
number of plant species (before and after construction), based on
the ecologists site survey should be used to determine the change in
ecological value.’
C
The following text has been added to the compliance note ‘Use of a
suitably qualified ecologist’ as a clarification: ‘Where a suitably
qualified ecologist is employed and has, using their professional
judgement, defined the site as land of low ecological value, this
assessment/judgement overrides any assessment determined using
checklist A4.’
C
The following has been added to the compliance note ‘Site
clearance prior to purchase of the site’ as a clarification: ‘Where it
is not possible for the ecologists to determine that the site was of low
ecological value prior to the site clearance then the credit must be
withheld.’
The compliance note ‘Native Species’ has been re-named ‘Plant
Species’. The text in the compliance note has been modified from:
‘Only native floral/plant species and those with a known attraction or
benefit to local fauna can be considered for the purpose of
increasing the number of species on site, as well as general
enhancement.’
Issue
no.
3.0
3.0
3.0
To: ‘Only native floral/plant species, and/or those contributing to a
local or UK Biodiversity Action Plan or those with a known attraction
or benefit to local fauna can be considered for the purpose of
increasing the number of species on site, as well as general
enhancement.
Pol 8
C
Checklist
A5
Checklist
A3
C
Man11
A
Man12
C
C
The Natural History Museum has an online Postcode Plants
Database which generates lists of native plants and wildlife for any
specified postal district in the UK. http://www.nhm.ac.uk/natureonline/life/plants-fungi/postcode-plants/index.html’
Text has been added to the requirement concerning the relevant
definition of a suitably qualified acoustician. This text refers to the
definition provided in BREEAM issue Hea 13, for consistency.
The checklist has been updated to reflect the inclusion of
BES6001:2008 in to the responsible sourcing tiers.
The wording in requirement f) of checklist A3 referred to the use of
materials and refrigerants with a “high” global warming potential.
This has been changed to read materials & refrigerants with a “low”
global warming potential.
Reference 1: ‘Guide to Ownership, Operation and Maintenance,
CIBSE 2000’ deleted. Reference 1: ‘Guide M: Maintenance
Engineering and Management, CIBSE, 2008.’ inserted.
The wording of requirement 1 of the first credit has been changed
from ‘A Life Cycle Cost (LCC) analysis has been carried out based
on the feasibility study proposals during RIBA Work Stages B
(feasibility) and C (outline proposals), or equivalent’ to ‘A Life Cycle
Cost (LCC) analysis has been carried out based on the proposals
developed during RIBA Work Stages B/C (feasibility study/outline
proposals), or equivalent’.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID /
Section
Man12
Type
C
Ene3
C
Ene5
A
Ene5
C
Ene5
C
Ene5
C
Ene5
C
Ene10
C
Tra1
C
Tra3
C
Tra3
C
Schedule of Changes to the Standard
Change
The wording for requirement 6 of the first credit has been changed
from ‘The model was updated during Stages D (detailed proposals)
and E (final proposals), or equivalent.’ to ‘The model was updated
during RIBA Work Stages D/E (detailed/final proposals) or
equivalent.’
The following text ‘Further Education Colleges only’ in the credit
criteria section has been deleted. The text “Further Education
colleges and secondary schools only” has been inserted in its
place. This change is in line with the Assessment Criteria for this
issue.
The word ‘production’ deleted and the word ‘reduction’ inserted in
requirement 3 of the second and third credit and exemplary level
criteria.
Air Source Heat Pumps have been added to the list of heat pumps
that can be considered as low or zero carbon technologies.
In the compliance note ‘List of recognised LZC technologies’ the
following text has been deleted ‘The following technologies are
recognised by the Department for Business, Enterprise and
Regulatory Reform (BERR) as low or zero carbon (LZC)
technologies under the Low Carbon Buildings Programme and
would be deemed acceptable for BREEAM provided that the
relevant percentage outputs are achieved:’ The following text has
been inserted in its place: ‘Technologies recognised by the
Department for Business Enterprise and Regulatory Reform (BERR)
Low Carbon Buildings Programme (LCBP) may be considered as
part of a low or zero carbon emissions solution. The following list
details the technologies recognised by the BERR, LCBP at the time
of going to print’.
The following text has been inserted to the compliance note ‘List of
recognised LZC technologies’: ‘The list above is not a definitive list
of technologies compliant with BREEAM, but a list of those
technologies that may be considered to comply. If the assessor has
a justified reason to doubt the low or zero carbon
credentials/feasibility of the above technologies, when
applied/installed on the development they are assessing, they can
justifiably withhold the available BREEAM credits.’
The following text has been deleted from the ‘Biomass community
heating schemes’ listing in the compliance note ‘List of recognised
LZC technologies’: ‘where the majority of the heat comes from
biomass’.
Requirement 2 changed from ‘The BREEAM issue Hea11 Thermal
Comfort has been achieved’ to ‘The BREEAM issue Hea10 Thermal
Comfort has been achieved’. This change is necessary as the
previous requirement referenced the wrong BREEAM issue.
The title of the following definition has been changed from ‘Public
Transport Accessibility Calculator’ to ‘Tra1 Provision of Public
Transport calculator’.
The compliant locker size has been changed from ‘400mm x
200mm x 400mm’ to ‘900mm X 300mm X 450mm or a locker with
dimensions that provide an equivalent volume of storage space’.
The previous defined locker size is deemed to small to adequately
store a cyclists equipment e.g. clothes, helmet, towel, bag etc.
Two tier cycle stands deleted from the list of ‘Non compliant cycle
racks’ in the Compliance Notes. This type of stand can comply with
BREEAM’s definition of ‘Compliant cycle storage space’.
373
Issue
no.
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
374
Schedule of Changes to the standard
Issue ID /
Section
Tra8
Type
C
Wat1
AG
Wat4
A
Mat1
AG
Mat 1
AG
Mat5
C
Mat 1, 2 &
6
C
Wst1
AG
Wst2
C
Wst3
C
LE1
C
LE1
C
Pol4
C
Pol5
C
BREEAM Education 2008
Change
The following compliance note as been inserted ‘No vehicle delivery
and manoeuvring areas: This BREEAM issue is not assessed where
the development does not have a vehicle delivery and manoeuvring
area. In such cases this issue will be filtered from the list of relevant
credits by the assessor’s spreadsheet tool.’
Guidance on the use of the Wat1 Calculator (applicable to schools
only) has been added to the additional guidance section.
Issue
no.
2.0
2.0
The word ‘teach’ has been deleted from requirement 1, second
bullet point. The word ‘each’ has been inserted in its place.
2.0
Guidance has been inserted in to the additional guidance section
describing how the Mat 1 calculator determines the number of
credits achieved using the Green Guide ratings achieved for each of
the specifications/elements assessed.
The following ‘relevant definition’ has been inserted: ‘Ecopoint: The
Ecopoint used in the Green Guide online is single score that
measures the total environmental impact of a product or process as
a proportion of overall impact occurring in Europe - 100 Ecopoints is
equivalent to the impact of a European Citizen. Green Guide ratings
are derived by sub-dividing the range of Ecopoints/m2 achieved by
all specifications considered within a building element.’
The instructions, in the additional guidance section, on using the
responsible sourcing calculator have been updated.
The requirement to provide a Green Guide element reference
number, in addition to the Green Guide rating, for each elemental
specification inserted in to the ‘Schedule of Evidence Required’.
The element reference number is provided along with each Green
Guide rating on the online version of the Green Guide to
Specification.
The table of Construction Waste Groups has been updated.
2.0
The following has been added to the list of secondary aggregate
types: “Municipal Solid Waste Treatment Residues”.
The header has been amended to clarify the minimum standard
criteria for the ‘Excellent’ and ‘Outstanding’ rating levels for this
BREEAM issue.
In the compliance note ‘School playing field’ the word ‘school’ has
been deleted from the compliance note title and text. In the
compliance note text the words “within the construction zone” have
been inserted in to the first line of the compliance note.
A definition of ‘Construction zone’ has been added to the relevant
definitions section.
The word ‘maximum’ has been deleted from the criteria and criteria
of this BREEAM issue. This change has been made to avoid doubt
over the validity of a manufacturer’s statement on the tested NOx
emissions of their products, which are often stated in ‘average’ dry
NOx emission levels.
The following compliance note has been inserted: ‘Functional flood
plain: The BREEAM credit for locating in a flood zone of ‘medium or
high annual probability’ cannot be awarded where the building is
located in the functional flood plain. PPS25[9] defines the functional
flood plain as a ‘zone [that] comprises land where water has to flow
or be stored in times of flood’. If the building assessed is or has been
defined as ‘water-compatible development’, please refer to the
BREEAM office for guidance on assessing this BREEAM issue.’
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
BREEAM Education 2008
Issue ID /
Section
Pol5
Type
AG
Schedule of Changes to the Standard
Change
Updated Reference: BS EN 752:1998 ‘Drain and sewer systems
outside buildings’ has been superseded by BS EN 752:2008.
375
Issue
no.
2.0
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
376
Additional Sources of Information
BREEAM Education 2008
16.0 Additional Sources of Information
Information listed by BREEAM issue.
Man 1
•
AG16/2002 - Variable flow water systems: design, installation and commissioning guidance
•
Photovoltaics in buildings - Testing, commissioning and monitoring guide, S/P2/00290/REP.
Man 3
•
Sustainability Action Plan (or Achieving Sustainability in Construction Procurement); Government Construction
Client’s Panel (GCCP), Office of Government Commerce (OGC).
•
Guidelines for Company Reporting on Greenhouse Gas Emissions, Annex 6 Transport conversion tables,
DEFRA 2002.
•
COPERT II Computer programme to Calculate Emissions from Road Transport - Methodology and Emissions
Factors, Technical report No 6. http://reports.eea.eu.int/TEC06/en
•
Good Practice Guide (GPG) 273, Computerised Routing and Scheduling for Efficient Logistics, Freight
Transport Association, 2000.
•
BS8555 2003 Environmental Management Systems – Guide to the phased implementation of an
environmental management system including the use of environmental performance evaluation, BSI 2003.
•
http://www.smartwaste.co.uk
Man 4
•
Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 1994.
•
BRE Digest 474 HOBO protocol - Handover of Office Building Operations, 2003.
•
CIBSE Building Log Book Toolkit (CD-ROM) 2003.
•
Carbon Trust : www.thecarbontrust.co.uk/carbontrust/
•
www.teachernet.gov.uk
•
www.dfes.gov.uk
Man 6
•
Design Note 14 School & Community – 2, DES, 1976.
•
www.bcse.uk.net
•
www.ltl.org.uk
Man 7
•
Designed with care: design and neighbourhood healthcare buildings, CABE, 2006. www.cabe.org,uk
Man 8
•
Building Bulletin 100, Design for Fire Safety in Schools, 2007.
•
Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 - Improving Security in Schools, DFEE, 2006.
Man 9
•
http://www.constructingexcellence.org.uk/
•
http://www.wellbuilt.org.uk/lascn/login.jsp
Man 10
•
Building Bulletin 95 Schools for the Future – Designs for learning communities, DfES 2002.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
Additional Sources of Information
377
Man 11
•
Building Bulletin 70, Maintenance and renewal in educational buildings, maintenance of mechanical services,
DfES.
Man 12
•
BS/ISO 15686-5 Service Life Planning – Life Cycle Costing, BSI.
•
OGC guidance Achieving Excellence in Construction 7 – Whole Life Costing and Cost Management.
•
OGC guidance Achieving Excellence in Construction 11 – Sustainability.
•
Green Book – Treasury guidance Appraisal and Evaluation in central government. Crown Copyright 1997 and
2000.
•
HM Treasury, How to construct a public sector comparator - Technical Note No. 5, Treasury Taskforce,
London 1999.
•
CCF Whole Life Costing - A Clients' Guide, BRE report funded by DETR. Clients Construction Forum London:
1999.
•
BS/ISO 15686 Buildings Service Life Planning - Part 1 - General Principles, BSI 2000.
•
Applying facilities expertise in building design, Jaunzens D, Warriner D, Garner U and Waterman A London:
CRC Ltd.2001
•
BRE Digest 452 Whole life costing and life cycle assessment for sustainable building design, Bartlett E,
Edwards S, CRC, 2000.
•
OGC Common Minimum Standards for the procurement of built environments in the public sector,
downloadable from: http://www.ogc.gov.uk/documents/Common_Minimum_Standards_PDF.pdf
•
Treasury’s Value for Money (VfM) Initiative for PFI projects. Treasury website: http://www.hmtreasury.gov.uk./documents/public_private_partnerships/additional_guidance/ppp_vfm_index.cfm
Hea 1
•
Lighting Guide 10 Daylighting and window design, CIBSE, 1999.
•
Site layout planning for daylight and sunlight, A guide to good practice, P. J. Littlefair, BRE Press, 1998.
•
Building Bulletin 90, Lighting design for schools, DfES, 1999.
Hea 2
•
Computers and Eyestrain, E. Lawrence Bickford, O.D, The EyeCare Reports, 1996.
Hea 3
•
Lighting Guide 10 Daylighting and window design, CIBSE, 1999.
•
Lighting Guide 3 The visual environment for display screen use, CIBSE, 1996.
Hea 5
•
Building Bulletin 87 Guidelines for Environmental Design in Schools, 2nd Edition Version 1, DFEE, 2003.
Hea 7
•
The Building Regulations 2000 Approved Document F Means of Ventilation, ODPM, 2005.
•
Good Practice Guide 290 Ventilation and cooling option appraisal, a clients’ guide, The Carbon Trust.
•
Building Bulletin 87 Guidelines for Environmental Design in Schools (Ventilation Section), DfES 2003.
Hea 8
•
CIBSE TM 21 Minimising pollution at air intakes, 1999.
•
Guide B Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration, CIBSE, 2005.
•
Guide A Environmental Design, CIBSE, 1999.
•
ClassVent DfES 2006: www.teachernet.gov.uk
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
378
Additional Sources of Information
BREEAM Education 2008
Hea 9
•
Statutory Instrument 2005 No. 2773. The Volatile Organic Compounds in Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle
Refinishing Products Regulations 2005, ISBN 0 11 073431 9.
Hea 10
•
Report 345 BRE’s Environmental Design Guide for Naturally Ventilated and Daylit Offices.
•
CIBSE Guide J Weather, solar and illuminance data, CIBSE, 2002.
•
ClassCool, DfES; 2006: www.teachernet.gov.uk/iaq
Hea 11
•
Building Bulletin 87 Guidelines for Environmental Design in Schools, DfES, 2nd Edition Version 1, 2003.
Hea 12
•
AG 10/94.1 Efficient humidification in buildings, KM Bennett, BSRIA.
•
Health and Safety Executive, Legionnaires disease: http://www.hse.gov.uk/legionnaires/
Hea 13
•
BS EN ISO 717-1 Acoustics – Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements. Part 1. Airborne
sound insulation, BSI, 1997.
•
BS EN ISO 717-2 Acoustics - Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements. Part 2. Impact
sound insulation, BSI, 1997.
•
BS EN ISO 140-7 Acoustics – Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements. Part 7.
Field measurements of impact sound insulation of floors, BSI, 1998.
Hea 16
•
Water Cooler ‘Point of Use’ Guidance for Schools, J Harvey, Health Education Trust, 2007.
(http://www.wateriscoolinschool.org.uk) Includes a water provision checklist for schools and guidance for siting
and selecting water dispensers and suppliers.
•
www.foodinschools.org.uk DfES/DH website which contains the Water Provision Toolkit that contains guidance
for selecting water dispensers.
Ene 1
•
Improving the energy efficiency of our buildings: A guide to energy performance certificates for the
construction, sale and let of non-dwellings, Communities and Local Government, 2008.
http://www.communities.gov.uk/archived/publications/planningandbuilding/guidancenondwellingss
•
Scottish Technical Handbooks: Non-Domestic – Section 6: Energy, Scottish Building Standards, 2007.
Ene 2
•
CIBSE TM39 Building energy metering - A guide to energy sub-metering in non-domestic buildings, CIBSE,
2006.
Ene 4
•
Lighting Guide 007 Installers’ Guide to the Assessment of Energy Efficient Lighting Installations, Carbon Trust,
2004.
Ene 5
•
Planning Policy Statement 22: Renewable Energy, ODPM, 2004
•
Planning for Renewable Energy: A Companion Guide to PPS22, ODPM, 2004
•
London Renewables Toolkit, available to download from
http://www.london.gov.uk/mayor/environment/energy/renew_resources.jsp
Ene 7
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
•
Additional Sources of Information
379
Food and Drink Industry Refrigeration Efficiency Initiative, Guide 2 Purchase of Efficient Refrigeration Plant,
Food and Drink Federation, 2007.
•
GPG 347 Installing and Commissioning of Refrigeration Systems, Carbon Trust, 2003.
Ene 8
•
Energy consumption and efficiency potentials of lifts, Jürg Nipkow, Max Schalcher, Swiss agency for efficient
energy use S.A.F.E.
•
Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Lift & Escalator Installations, Electrical and Mechanical Services
Department, HKSAR, 2007.
•
Guide D Transportation systems in buildings, 2nd Ed, CIBSE, 2000.
•
Towards low carbon lifts, G Barney (http://www.cibse.org/pdfs/2a%20Gina%20Barney.pdf)
Ene 10
•
General Information Report 85 New Ways of Cooling – information for building designers, Carbon Trust, 2001
Ene 11
•
Building Bulletin 88 Fume Cupboards in Schools (Revision of Design Note 29), DEE, 1998
Ene 12
•
CTV006 Sports and leisure Introducing energy saving opportunities for business, Carbon Trust, 2006
Ene 20
•
ICT and sustainable development website: http://www.susteit.org.uk
•
2008 ASHRAE Environmental Guidelines for Datacom Equipment:
http://tc99.ashraetcs.org/documents/ASHRAE_Extended_Environmental_Envelope_Final_Aug_1_2008.pdf
Tra 1
•
Transport Assessment Best Practice; Guidance Document, Transport for London, 2006.
Tra 2
•
Planning Policy Guidance Note 13 – Transport, Department for Transport, 2002.
Tra 3
•
Providing for cyclists - A code of practice, Sustrans/cyclists' Public affairs group/CTC, 1997.
•
Transport for London Street Management, Cycle Parking Standards TfL Proposed Guidelines, TFL.
•
London Cycling Design Standards, Transport for London, 2005.
•
BS 5489-1:2003 Code of practice for the design of road lighting, Lighting of roads and public amenity areas,
BSI.
•
Information Sheet FS19 Cycle parking for schools, Sustrans, 1999.
Tra 4
•
Information Sheet FF04 Shared Use Routes, Sustrans, 1998.
•
http://www.saferoutestoschools.org.uk/
Tra 5 & 6
•
A travel plan resource pack for employers, DfT, 2000.
•
A good practice guide to green travel plans BCO, 2004.
•
The Essential Guide to Travel Planning, DfT, 2008.
•
Transport Energy Best Practice, A Guide on Travel Plans for Developers, DfT, 2005.
•
Traffic Advisory Leaflet 2/00, Framework for a local walking strategy, DETR, 2000.
•
BS 8300:2001 Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of disabled people – code of
practice, BSI, 2001.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
380
Additional Sources of Information
BREEAM Education 2008
•
Approved Document Part M Access to and Use of Buildings, ODPM, 2006.
•
Guidance on the use of Tactile Paving Surfaces, DETR & the Scottish Office, 1998.
•
Building Sight, RNIB, 1995.
•
Safe Routes to Schools Information Sheet FS16 Developing a School Travel Plan, Sustrans, 2004.
Wat 5
•
Reclaimed water systems – information about installing, modifying or maintaining reclaimed water systems, 902-04, WRAS 1999.
•
BS EN 12056-3:2000: Gravity drainage systems inside buildings. Roof drainage, layout and calculation, 2000.
Mat 1 & Mat 2
•
The Green Guide to Specification: www.thegreenguide.org.uk
Mat 5
•
FERN - European NGO campaigning for forests (www.fern.org)
•
ProForest (www.ProForest.net)
•
WWF (www.panda.org)
•
UK Tropical Forest forum (www.forestforum.org.uk)
•
Greenpeace Ancient Forest Campaign (www.greenpeace.org.uk)
•
Forests Forever Campaign (www.forestsforever.org.uk)
•
UK Woodland Assurance Scheme (www.forestry.gov.uk/ukwas)
•
Wood for Good (www.woodforgood.com)
•
TFT - Tropical Forest Trust publication, Good Wood, Good Business (www.tropicalforesttrust.com)
•
Good Wood Guide, Friends of the Earth/ Flora and Fauna International, 2002 (www.goodwoodguide.com)
•
The Environment in Your Pocket, DEFRA, 2001.
•
Certification of Forest Products, BRE, 1999.
•
Briefing Sheet – The UK’s Footprint: The UK Timber Industry and its Impact on the World’s Forest, Friends of
the Earth, 2000.
•
Saving the Wood, Building for a Future (Autumn 2001)
•
EU Eco-Management and Audit Scheme (EMAS) (www.emas.org.uk/aboutemas/mainframe.htm)
(http://europa.eu.int/comm/environment/emas/index_en.htm)
•
International Standards for Organisation (ISO) www.iso.org/iso/en/ISOOnline.frontpage
•
EU Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade (FLEGT) Action Plan (http://europa.eu.int/)
•
SGS timber tracking programme (http://www.sgs.com/forest_services_?serviceId=8535&lobId=5548)
•
Tropical Forest Trust (http://www.tropicalforesttrust.com/)
•
Scottish Procurement Policy Note (SPPN (09)), Procurement of Timber and Timber Products, Scottish
Procurement Directorate, 2005.
Wst 1
•
For information and further advice on Site Waste Management Plans and to freely download BRE’s new
SMARTWaste Plan tool visit: www.smartwaste.co.uk
•
Environment Agency guidance on waste: www.environment-agency.gov.uk/subjects/waste/ and
www.netregs.gov.uk
•
DEFRA provides information and associated guidance on the Site Waste Management Plan Regulations 2008:
www.defra.gov.uk/constructionwaste
•
For help in finding local waste management companies and opportunities to reuse and recycle materials try
BREMAP free of charge at: www.bremap.co.uk
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
•
Additional Sources of Information
381
Both WRAP and Envirowise can provide advice and guidance on SWMPs: www.wrap.org.uk/construction and
www.envirowise.gov.uk
•
www.remade.org.uk
•
Waste Management Regulations Scotland
www.aggregain.org.uk/waste_management_regulations/waste_management_regulations_scotland/index.html
Wst 2
•
AggRegain website (managed by WRAP) has many case studies, guidance and specifications for using
recycled and secondary aggregates: www.aggregain.org.uk
•
BREMAP and Salvo Materials Information Exchange can help identify sources of recycled and secondary
aggregates: www.bremap.org.uk and www.salvomie.co.uk
•
MINRES website has technical information and case studies relating to the use of recycled and secondary
aggregates in a number of high value applications e.g. bricks, concrete etc., and can also help users to locate
sources of secondary aggregates: www.minres.co.uk
Wst 3
•
Metric handbook – Planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press, 2nd Ed., 1999.
LE1
•
Designing for Sport on School Sites http://www.sportengland.org/designing_for_sport_on_school_sites.pdf
LE2
•
CLEA Overview Documents (These and other documents relating to CLEA are available from the Environment
Agency’s website: www.environment-agency.gov.uk):
§
CLR 7: Assessment of risks to human health from land contamination; an overview of the development of
Soil Guideline Values and related research.
•
§
CLR 8: Potential contaminants for the assessment of land.
§
CLR 9: Contaminants in soil: collation of toxicological data and intake values for humans.
§
CLR 10: The Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment (CLEA) model: technical basis and algorithms.
Further advice and technical publications are available for download from the Environment Agency’s website:
www.environment-agency.gov.uk, including;
•
§
Remedial methods for contaminated groundwater.
§
Verification of treatment performance – How sure can you be?
§
Issues for the selection of remedial strategies, good practice guidance.
§
Process-based remediation of land contamination.
Approved Document C Site Preparation and Resistance to contaminants and moisture, 2004 edition, ODPM.
http://www.communities.gov.uk
•
Environment Agency Guidance on Criteria for Land Contamination Reports, Environment Agency, 2005.
•
Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) www.sepa.org.uk
LE3
•
Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management's Guidelines for Ecological Impact Assessment in the
United Kingdom www.ieem.net/ecia/index.html
•
British Standard BS5837 Trees in relation to construction, BSI, 2005.
•
The Hedgerows Regulations 1997, Office of Public Sector.
•
Environmental good practice on site (CIRIA C502): Guidance on how to avoid causing environmental damage
and the financial penalties that can follow, CIRIA, 1999.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
382
•
Additional Sources of Information
BREEAM Education 2008
Environmental good practice on site (CIRIA C503): Practical advice on how to carry out construction works
without harming the environment, CIRIA, 1999.
•
Working with wildlife site guide (CIRIA C567): Guidance to understand and implement good practice in relation
to wildlife on development and construction projects, CIRIA, 2005.
•
RSPB Good Practice Guide for Prospective Developments – General Principles, RSPB, 1997:
www.rspb.org.uk.
•
Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 5 Works in, near, or liable to affect watercourses, Environment Agency.
•
Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 6 Working at construction and demolition sites, Environment Agency.
LE5
•
The Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies www.awtc.co.uk
•
Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management www.ciwem.org
•
The Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management www.ieem.org.uk
•
The Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment www.iema.net.
•
Landscape Institute www.landscapeinstitute.org
LE6
•
Earthwatch Europe: www.businessandbiodiversity.org
•
Construction Industry Key Performance Indicators: www.kpizone.com
•
Natural Environmental and Rural Communities Act, 2006: www.opsi.gov.uk
•
A Handbook of Good Practice for Public Bodies Dealing with Best Value and Biodiversity in Scotland, The
Scottish Government, 2004.
•
Delivering the Scottish Biodiversity Duty: www.biodiversityscotland.gov.uk/duty/index.htm
•
Action for Scotland Biodiversity, Scottish Biodiversity Group.
LE7
•
Building Bulletin 71 The outdoor classroom: educational use, landscape design and management of school
grounds, DfEE, 2nd edition, 1999.
LE8
•
Wildlife Trusts: www.wildlifetrusts.org
•
Earthwatch Institute (Europe): www.businessandbiodiversity.org
•
UK Biodiversity Action Plan: www.ukbap.org.uk
Pol 1
•
Guidance note 1 New CFC’s, HCFCs, HFC’s and halons, Professional and practical guidance on substances
that deplete the ozone layer, CIBSE, 2000.
•
Code of practice for the minimisation of refrigerant emissions from refrigerating systems, Institute of
Refrigeration, Institute of Refrigeration, 1995.
•
BS EN378-1:2000 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps – Safety and environmental criteria – Part 1: Basic
criteria, definitions, classification and selection criteria, BSI, 2000.
•
Institute of Refrigeration: www.ior.org.uk
•
F-gas regulations: http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/climatechange/uk/fgas/pdf/fluorgasreg-guidance.pdf
Pol 2
•
Code of practice for the minimisation of refrigerant emissions from refrigerating systems, Institute of
Refrigeration, 1995.
•
Guidance Note 01 – New CFC’s, HCFC’s, HFC’s and halons, Professional and practical guidance on
substances that deplete the ozone layer, CIBSE, 2000.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
•
•
Additional Sources of Information
383
GPG 178 Cutting the Cost of Refrigerant Leakage, Carbon Trust, 1997.
BSEN 378 1-4 Refrigerating Systems and Heat Pumps – Safety and Environmental Requirement, British
Standards Institution, British Standards Institute, 2000.
Pol 4
•
British Standards EN 297:1994. A1:1995, A2:1996, A3:1996, A5:1998 and A6:2003 Gas-fired central heating
boilers, page 42, table 14, section 3.6.2
•
The United Kingdom’s Programme and National Plan for Reducing Emissions of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) and
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) from Existing Large Combustion Plants, Department of the Environment, Scottish
Development Department, Welsh Office, Department of the Environment for Northern Ireland, (1990).
•
Nitrogen Dioxide in the United Kingdom, Defra, 2004..
•
Summary report also available on the National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory website at www.naei.org.uk
Pol 5
•
C623 Standards for the repair of buildings following flooding, CIRIA, 2005.
•
C523 Sustainable urban drainage systems – best practice manual for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern
Ireland, CIRIA, 2001.
•
C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA, 2007.
•
Flood estimation handbook, Centre for ecology and hydrology, National Environmental Research Council,
1999.
•
Flood estimation for small catchments, Marshall DCW and Bayliss AC. IOH Report No.124. Institute of
hydrology, Wallingford, 1994.
•
BRE Good Repair Guide 11 Repairing Flood Damage, Part 1-4, BRE Press, 1997.
•
Development and Flood Risk A Practice Guide Companion to PPS25 - A Consultation Paper, CLG, 2007.
•
Planning Policy Wales Technical Advice Note 15: Development and flood risk, Welsh Assembly Government,
2004.
•
Scottish Planning Policy 7 Planning and flooding, Scottish Executive, 2004.
•
Planning Policy Statement 15 Planning and flood risk, DOE, 2006.
•
BRE Digest 365 Soakaway design, BRE, 1991.
•
BRESOAK Soakaway design software (2007) http://www.brebookshop.com/details.jsp?id=376
•
The Environment Agency Flood Information: http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/subjects/flood/
•
Scottish Environment Protection Agency: www.sepa.org.uk/flooding/mapping
•
The Met Office (incl. figures for UK rainfall): www.met-office.gov.uk
Pol 6
•
Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 1 General guide to the prevention of pollution, Environment
Agency/SEPA/Environment & Heritage Service.
•
Groundwater Protection Policy, Environment Agency, 2007.
•
BS EN 752-4 Drain and sewer systems outside buildings – Hydraulic design and environmental
considerations, British Standards Institute,1998.
•
BS EN 12056-3 Gravity drainage inside buildings – Roof drainage, layout and calculation, British Standards
Institute, 2000.
•
Figures for UK rainfall are available from the Met Office www.met-office.gov.uk
•
BRE Digest 365 Soakaway design, BRE 2003.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
384
Additional Sources of Information
BREEAM Education 2008
Pol 7
•
Guide on the Limitation of the effects of obtrusive light from outdoor lighting installation, International
Commission on Illumination (CIE), 2003.
•
Night blight! Campaign to Protect Rural England (CPRE) www.cpre.org.uk/campaigns/landscape/light-pollution
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
References
385
17.0 References
1
2
3
BSRIA Commissioning Guides:
•
Application Guide 1/91 - Commissioning of VAV systems in Buildings
•
Application Guide 20/95 - Commissioning of Pipework Systems
•
Technical Memoranda 1/88.1 - Commissioning HVAC Systems
•
Application Guide 3/89.3 - Commissioning of Air Systems in Buildings
•
Application Guide 1/2001.1 - Pre-commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems
•
Application Guide 2/89.3 - Commissioning of Water Systems in Buildings
•
Application Guide 2/89.3 – Commissioning water systems application principles
•
Application Guide 5/2002 - Commissioning Management
CIBSE Commissioning Codes: Set of Seven Codes (2003)
•
CIBSE Commissioning Code A: Air Distribution Systems
•
CIBSE Commissioning Code B: Boilers
•
CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls
•
CIBSE Commissioning Code L: Lighting
•
CIBSE Commissioning Code M: Management
•
CIBSE Commissioning Code R: Refrigeration
•
CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems
Good Practice Guide 347: Installation and commissioning of refrigeration systems, Carbon Trust, 2003.
4
Cold Store Code of Practice Part 1 Enclosure Construction, The Institute of Refrigeration, 1996.
5
BS EN 14175-2:2003 Fume cupboards - Part 2: Safety and performance criteria, BSI, 2003.
6
DD CEN/TS 14175-5:2006. Fume cupboards. Recommendations for installation and maintenance, BSI, 2007.
7
BS EN 12469 – Biotechnology – Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets. BSI, 2000.
8
Labs21 Commissioning section: http://www.labs21.org.uk/commissioning.htm
9
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Flora and Fauna (CITES) http://www.cites.org/
10
Construction site impacts - BRE Publications:
•
Control of Dust from Construction and Demolition Activities”. V Kukadia, S Upton, D Hall BRE Press,
2003.
•
Controlling particles, vapour and noise pollution from construction sites” - set of five Pollution Control
Guides. V Kukadia, S Upton, C Grimwood, BRE Press, 2003.
•
Construction Site Transport: The Next Big Thing, 2003, BRE and DTI. Available from:
www.bre.co.uk/pdf/constructiontraffic.pdf
11
12
Construction site impacts - Environment Agency publications:
•
PPG 1 – General guide to the prevention of pollution. Environment Agency
•
PPG 5 – Works in, near or liable to affect watercourses. Environment Agency
•
PPG 6 – Working at demolition and construction sites. Environment Agency
•
http://www.netregs.gov.uk/netregs/resources/278006/277807/?version=1&lang=_e
DTI Construction Industry KPI Pack includes Methods of Measurement, Handbook, KPI Wall Chart, 2005.
www.constructingexcellence.org.uk
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
386
References
BREEAM Education 2008
13
BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations. BSI, 1999.
14
BS 1377:1990 - Parts 1-9. Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes, BSI, 1990.
15
BS 10175:2001 – Investigation of potentially contaminated sites, Code of practice, BSI, 2001.
16
Design Quality of PFI Schools, BRE, 2002.
http://www.audit-commission.gov.uk/Products/NATIONAL-REPORT/D7701D4F-C130-4BA6-B10D6D0644BDAA98/PFITechnicalqualityreportBRE.pdf)
17
Secured by Design:
•
http://www.securedbydesign.com/professionals/guides.aspx
•
Car parks: http://www.securedcarparks.com and http://www.britishparking.co.uk
18
Secured By Design – Schools, ACPO Crime Prevention Initiatives Limited, 2004.
19
Building Bulletin 71 The Outdoor Classroom, 2nd Ed, DfES, 1999.
20
Guide M: Maintenance Engineering and Management, CIBSE, 2008.
21
ISO 15686 Buildings and constructed assets - Service life planning:
•
Part 1 - General principles, 2000
•
Part 2 - Service life prediction procedures, 2001
•
Part 3 - Performance audits and reviews, 2002
•
Part 6 - Procedures for considering environmental impacts, 2004
22
Building Bulletin 98, Briefing Framework for Secondary School Projects, DfES
23
Building Bulletin 99, Briefing Framework for Primary School Projects, DfES
24
Information Paper IP 23/93 Measuring daylight, BRE, 1993.
25
26
BS 8206 Lighting for buildings - Code of practice for daylighting, Part 2, 1992.
Code for Lighting, CIBSE, 2006.
•
Lighting Guide 1 The Industrial Environment.
•
Lighting Guide 2 Hospitals and Health Care Buildings (including 2006 addendum)
•
Lighting Guide 3 The visual environment for dispaly screen use (including 2006 addendum)
•
Lighting Guide 4 Sports (including 2006 addendum)
•
Lighting Guide 8 Lighting for Museums and Art Galleries
•
Lighting Guide 9 Lighting for Communal Residential Buildings
27
Building Bulletin 90 Lighting Design for Schools, DFEE, 1999.
28
Lighting Guide 7 Office Lighting, CIBSE 2005.
29
Lighting Guide 6 The Outdoor Environment, CIBSE 1992.
30
CIBSE Lighting Guide 5 The Visual Environment in Lecture, Teaching and Conference Rooms, CIBSE, 1991
(and 2006 addendum).
31
AM10 Natural Ventilation in Non Domestic Buildings, CIBSE, 2005.
32
Building Bulletin 101 Ventilation of School Buildings, DfES 2006. www.teachernet.gov.uk
33
BS EN 13986:2004 Wood-based panels for use in construction – Characteristics, evaluation of conformity and
marking.
34
BS EN 14080:2005 Timber structures – Glued laminated timber – Criteria.
35
BS EN 14342:2005 Wood flooring – Characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking.
36
BS EN 14041:2004 Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings. Essential characteristics.
37
BS EN 13964:2004 Suspended ceilings. Criteria and test methods.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
38
References
387
BS EN 13999-1:2007 Adhesives – Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or
solvent-free adhesives after application – Part 1: General procedures.
39
BS EN 233:1999. Wallcoverings in roll form – Specification for finished wallpapers, wall vinyls and plastics
wallcoverings.
40
BS EN 234: Specification for wallcoverings for subsequent decoration.
41
BS EN 259-1:2001 Wallcoverings in roll form – Heavy duty wallcoverings – Part 1: Specifications.
42
BS EN 266:1992 Specification for Textile wallcoverings.
43
BS 3046:1981 Specification for Adhesives for hanging flexible wallcoverings.
44
BS EN 13300:2001 Paints and varnishes – water-borne coating materials and coating systems for interior walls
and ceilings – Classification.
45
Directive 2004/42/CE of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 April 2004 on the limitation of
emission of volatile organic compounds due to the use of organic solvents in certain paints and varnishes and
vehicle refinishing products and amending Directive 1999/13/EC. Official Journal of the European Union L.143/87,
30.4.2004.
46
BS EN 717-1:2004 Wood-based panels Determination of formaldehyde release. Formaldehyde emission by the
chamber method.
47
BS EN 13999-2:2007. Part 2: Determination of volatile organic compounds.
48
BS EN 13999-2:2007. Part 3: Determination of volatile aldehydes.
49
BS EN 13999-2:2007. Part 4: Determination of volatile diisocyanates.
50
BS EN 12149:1997 Wallcoverings in roll form – Determination of migration of heavy metals and certain other
elements, of vinyl chloride monomer and of formaldehyde release.
51
BS EN ISO 11890-2:2006 Paints and varnishes. Determination of volatile organic compound (VOC) content.
Gas-chromatographic method.
52
BRE Digest 464 VOC Emissions from Building Products - Part 1: "Sources, testing and emission data", Chuck
Yu, Derrick Crump, CRC Ltd, 2002
53
CIBSE Applications Manual AM11 Building energy and environmental modelling, CIBSE, 1998.
54
CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design, 7 Edition, Issue 2, CIBSE, 2007.
55
Legionnaires' disease - The control of legionella bacteria in water systems. Approved Code of Practice and
th
rd
guidance, 3 ed. HSE, 2000.
56
TM13 ‘Minimising the risk of Legionnaires disease’, CIBSE, 2002.
57
Building Bulletin 93 Acoustic design of schools – A design guide’, DCFS.
58
Health Technical Memorandum 08-01: Acoustics, Department of Health Gateway Review, Estates & Facilities
Division, 2008.
59
BS8233 Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings - code of practice, BSI, 1999
60
BS EN ISO 140-18:2006 Acoustics. Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements.
Laboratory measurement of sound generated by rainfall on building elements, 2006.
61
BS 7989 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume upboards, BSI, 2003.
62
Balancing the needs for energy conservation with those of building conservation: an Interim Guidance Note on
the application of Part L, English Heritage, 2004.
63
Thermal insulation: avoiding risks, C Stirling, BRE Press, 2002.
64
TM39 Building Energy Metering, CIBSE, 2009.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
388
65
References
BREEAM Education 2008
GIL065 Metering and Energy Use in New Non-Domestic Buildings - A Guide to help designers meet Part L2 of
the Building Regulations, Carbon Trust, 2002.
66
General Information Leaflet 65, Metering energy use in new non-domestic buildings, BRECSU, 2002.
67
BS 5489 Part 1 Code of practice for the design of road lighting: lighting of roads and public amenity areas, BSI,
2003.
68
Quality Assurance for Combined Heat and Power: http://www.chpqa.com/
69
Sustainable Bioenergy: a framework for decision makers, United Nations – Energy, 2007.
70
BS EN 13187 Thermal performance of buildings, Qualitative detection of thermal irregularities in building
envelopes. Infrared method, BSI, 1999.
71
TM23:2000 Testing Buildings for Air Leakage, CIBSE, 2000.
72
Guide B2 Ventilation and air conditioning, CIBSE, 2001.
73
TM46 Energy Benchmarks. CIBSE, 2008.
74
EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres:
http://re.jrc.ec.europa.eu/energyefficiency/html/standby_initiative_data%20centers.htm
75
Metric handbook – planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press 3rd Ed. 2007.
76
BS5489-1:2003 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas, BSI.
77
The National Cycle Network, Guidelines and Practical Details issue 2, Sustrans, 1997.
www.sustrans.org.uk/default.asp?sID=1149001882109
78
http://www.sustrans.org.uk/webfiles/guidelines/appendix.pdf
79
LTN 2/04 Adjacent and Shared Use Facilities for Pedestrians and Cyclists, DfT, 2005.
www.dft.gov.uk/consultations/archive/2004/ltnwc/ltn204adjacentandsharedusefa1692?page=1
80
Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations, DEFRA, 1999.
81
Rainwater and Greywater Use in Building, Best Practice Guidance, CIRIA, 2001.
82
www.cites.org/
83
BES6001:2008 Issue 1 Framework Standard for the Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products, BRE
Global, 2008.
84
UK Government Timber Procurement Policy, Definition of ‘legal’ and ‘sustainable’ for timber procurement,
Second Edition, CPET, 2006.
85
BS 5234-2: Partitions (including matching linings) – Specification for performance criteria for strength and
robustness including methods of test, BSI1992.
86
A Report on the Demolition Protocol, commissioned by London Remade prepared by EnviroCentre Ltd.
www.ice.org.uk
87
Planning Policy Guidance (PPG) 3: Housing. www.planningportal.gov.uk.
Scottish Planning Policy Guidance (SPPG) 3: Housing. www.scotland.gov.uk/
88
Data from the Countryside Survey can be accessed through the Digest of Environmental Statistics:
http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/statistics/wildlife/wdcs.htm
http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk/archiveCS2000/
89
UK BAP: www.ukbap.org.uk
90
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments, ASHRAE, 2004.
91
BS EN 378:2008 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements, BSI.
92
Carbon Dioxide as a Refrigeration Code of Practice, Institute of Refrigeration, 2009.
93
Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice, Institute of Refrigeration, 2009.
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
BREEAM Education 2008
References
389
The following downloads are uncontrolled copies used with permission of BRE Global.
All rights reserved. Please visit www.breeam.org for more information
94
Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDS), CIRIA, 2004.
95
C624 Development and flood risk, guidance for the construction industry, Lancaster et. al, CIRIA, 2004.
96
Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk, CLG , 2006.
97
BS EN 752-4: 2008, Drain and sewer systems outside buildings, British Standard Institute, 2008.
98
BS EN 12056-3: 2000, Gravity drainage inside buildings – Part 3: Roof drainage, layout and calculation, British
Standard Institute, 2000.
99
Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 3 Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems,
Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment & Heritage Service, 2006.
www.environment-agency.gov.uk/business/topics/pollution/39083.aspx
100
C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007.
101
GN01 Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE), 2005.
www.ile.org.uk
102
Technical Report No. 5: The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements, Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE),
Third Ed, 2001.
103
Guidance Note Controlling Light Pollution and Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption, Scottish Executive,
2007.
104
BS4142 Method for Rating industrial noise affecting mixed residential and industrial areas, British Standards
Institute, 1997.
Tel: +44 (0)191 490 1547
Fax: +44 (0)191 477 5371
Email: northernsales@thorneandderrick.co.uk
Website: www.heattracing.co.uk
www.thorneanderrick.co.uk
SD5051 issue 4.1
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2012
Download PDF